VOL. 68 PART 1 28 JULY 1944 BERNARD GC. COTTON, 166 WELLINGTON RO] ADELAIDE, SGUTH AUSTRALIA: TRANSACTIONS OF THE ROYAL SOCIETY OF SOUTH AUSTRALIA INCORPORATED ADELAIDE PUBLISHED AND SOLD AT THE SOCIETY'S ROOMS KINTORE AVENUE, ADELAIDE Price ee Twelve Shillings and Sixpence . ‘Registered at the General Post Office, Adelaide, for transmission by post as a periodical VOL. 68—1944 TRANSACTIONS OF THE ROYAL SOCIETY OF SOUTH AUSTRALIA INCORPORATED ADELAIDE PUBLISHED AND SOLD AT THE SOCIETY’S ROOMS KINTORE AVENUE, ADELAIDE Price - - Twelve Shillings and Sixpence Registered at the General Post Office, Adelaide, for transmission by post as a periodical CONTENTS Turner, A. J.: Studies in Australian Lepidoptera Hickman, V. V.: The Simpson Desert Expedition, 1939, Scientific Reports. No. 1, Biology—Scorpions and Spiders ; 3 ae a af Carrot, D.: The Simpson Desert Expedition, 1939, Scientific Reports. No.2, Geology— Desert Sands es ae ae Pe ae AR is = os - Jounston, T. H., and Mawson, P. M.: Remarks on some Parasitic Nematodes from Australia and New Zealand Sanpars, D. F.: A Contribution to the Knowledge of the Microcotylidae of Western Australia Womers_Ley, H.: Notes on and Additions to the Trombiculinae and Leeuwenhoekiinae (Acarina) of Australia and New Guinea Jounsron, T. H., and Simpson, E. R.: Life History of the Trematode—Echinochasmus pelecani n. sp. Crespin, I.: The Occurrence of Cycloclypeus in the Tertiary Deposits of South Australia Kerman, A. W.: On the Analysis of Beryl from Boolcoomatta, South Australia Jounston, T. H., and Stmeson, E. R.: Larval Trematodes from Australian Fresh- water Molluscs, Pt. IX .. Womerstey, H.: Australian Acarina, Families Alycidae and Nanorchestidae Crocker, R. L.: Soil and Vegetation Relationships in the Lower South-East of South Australia — A Study in Ecology OerrteL, A. C., and Prescott, J. A.: A Spectrochemical Examination of some Ironstone Gravels from Australian Soils Stacu, L. W.: Ecology of the Sand Flats at Moreton Bay, Reevesby Island, South Australia... ne 2 HF a Be a iG <6 ZIMMER, W. J.: Notes on the Regeneration of Murray Pine (Callitris spp.) Mawson, D., and Dattwitz, W. B.: Palaeozoic Igneous Rocks of Lower South-eastern South Australia Fintayson, H. H.: A Further Account of the Murid, Pseudomys (Gyomys) apodemoides Finlayson EA oo ops ap: a et: Hate, H. M.: Australian Cumacea, No. 8, The Family Bodotriidae Corton, B. C.: Recent Australian Species of the Family Rissoidae (Moilusca) .. ANpbREWARTHA, H. G.: The Distribution of Plagues of Austroicetes cruciata Sauss. (Acrididae) in Australia in Relation to Climate, Vegetation and Soil Mawson, P. M.: Some Species of the Chactognath Genus Spadella from New South Wales Mawson, D.: The Nature and Occurrence of Uraniferous Mineral Deposits in South Australia Ostruartes: Mr. Fred. Chapman and Rey. N. H. Louwyck .. Verco MEDAL BALANCE-SHEET List or FELLOWS INDEX Page 60 67 144 173 177 183 191 210 225 286 315 327 334 358 358 359 360 363 STUDIES IN AUSTRALIAN LEPIDOPTERA By A. JEFFERIS TURNER, M.D., F.R.E:S. Summary I am indebted to Mr. T. Bainbridge Fletcher for pointing out that we have been using some generic names which have been preoccupied, and for which new names must be substituted. For instance, Macraeola Meyr. (Tineidae 1893) must give place to Tenaga Clem. (1862). He has also substituted Thalamarchella for Thalamarchis. TRANSACTIONS OF THE ROYAL SOCIETY OF SOUTH AUSTRALIA INCORPORATED STUDIES IN AUSTRALIAN LEPIDOPTERA By A. Jerreris Turner, M.D., F.R.E.S. [Read 13 April 1944] I am indebted to Mr. T. Bainbridge Fletcher for pointing out that we have been using some generic names which have been preoccupied, and for which new names must be substituted. For instance, Macraeola Meyr. (Tineidae 1893) must give place to Tenaga Clem. (1862). He has also substituted Thalamarchella tor Thalamarchis. I propose the following changes :— for Palaeoneura Turn. 1923 (Tineidae). Archaeoneura. Lophozancla Turn. 1933 (Gelechiidae). Phaeotypa. ( hatoruTos, with dark markings.) Idiozancla Turn. 1936. (Occophoridae). Phobetica, ( PoBytixos, timid. ) Stenophara Turn. 1940. (Occophoridae.) Jschnophara, Fam. NOTODONTIDAE Gallaba diplosticha n. sp. durAoortexos, with double lines. 8, 40-44 mm.; 9, 35-40 mm. Head and thorax grey-whitish sprinkled with fuscous; face whitish. Palpi whitish, outer surface of second joint except apex dark fuscous. Antennae grey-whitish; pectinations in male 6, in female 13. Abdomen whitish-grey. Legs whitish sprinkled with fuscous; inner surface and tarsal rings of anterior and middle pairs dark fuscous. Forewings sub-oblong, narrow, costa in male slightly sinuate, in female slightly arched, apex sub- rectangular, termen rounded, slightly oblique; grey mixed with whitish and sparsely sprinkled with fuscous; markings fuscous; a double line from base to one-sixth costa; another from one-third costa to one-fourth dorsum, slightly waved, indented above dorsum; a single sinuate median transverse line; a double wavy line from two-thirds costa to two-thirds dorsum ; an interrupted subterminal line; orbicular and reniform represented by white spots partly outlined with fus- cous, the former round, the latter elongate, almost linear, on the posterior edge of median line; cilia grey, apices whitish. Hindwings of male very broad, rounded, with a tuft of long hairs from near base of costa, in female moderate with apex pointed and termen sinuate; 6 and 7 coincident in male, stalked in female; pale fuscous with whitish suffusion towards base; cilia whitish, bases pale fuscous. In one female there is an irregular blackish subdorsal streak from base. Western Australia: Margaret River in October; Albany in March; Denmark in November and April; Perth; seven specimens, of which three are in the Queensland Museum. Fam. OENOCHROMIDAE Taxeotis homoeopa n. sp. épowwros, similar. 3, 19-22 mm. Head grey; face blackish, Palpi 14; blackish, sharply white towards base beneath. Antennae grey; ciliations one-half. Thorax, Trans. Roy. Soc, S. Aust., 68, (1), 28 July 1944 4 abdomen, and legs grey. Forewings triangular, costa nearly straight, apex pointed. termen straight, oblique; grey with a few scattered fuscous scales; markings fuscous; dark costal spots at one-third and two-thirds; a dorsal dot at one-fourth. and another in disc midway between this and first costal ; a small medium discal dot: a subterminal series ot spots more or less connected and obscured by fuscous irroration and preceded by a parallel line not reaching costa of ferruginous dots with fuscous centres; terminal edge pale with a series of dark fuscous dots; cilia grey with fuscous points. Hindwings with termen rounded; colour, termina! dots, and cilia as forewings; a short transverse fuscous line from three-fifths dorsum. ?, 19-24 mm. Palpi 1}. Forewings with apex acute; markings much more obscure and often partly obsolete. Most nearly resembling 7. blechra Turn. from Western Australia, but the male differs in the darkly suffused subterminal line preceded by ferruginous dots on forewings, The female of T. blechra often has minute transverse strigulae over both wings. ' Queensland: Cunnamulla in October; six specimens. PHRATARIA WIk. Walker 1862, 35, 1700. Westwood (1841) made the genus Eptdesmia for tricolor Westw. Walker (1862) made Phrataria for replicataria Wlk., 35, 1700. Meyrick (1890) sank Walker’s genus to Epidesmia, and at the same time described Satraparchis for bijugata, overlooking the fact that these species agreed in neuration. The genus Phrataria must be restored. It differs from Epidesmia essentially in the stalking of 3 and 4 of the forewings, and contains replicataria WIk.? transcissata W1k., bijugata Wlk., and the following species. Phrataria V-album n. sp. V-album, marked with a white V. 8, 24 mm. Head, palpi and thorax fuscous. Antennae fuscous; pectina- tions in male, four. Abdomen grey. Legs fuscous. Forewings triangular, costa moderately arched, apex pointed, termen sinuate; fuscous; veins streaked with whitish-ochreous ; a broad straight white line from just beneath midcosta to tornus, edged with dark fuscous, its dorsal portion preceded and followed by very fine whitish parallel lines; a white line from apex to termen just above tornus, obtusely bent inwards above middle; a slender white terminal line; cilia fuscous. Hindwings with termen rounded; grey; a slightly darker straight postmedian line; a faint whitish subterminal line from apex to tornus; a slender white termina! line; cilia grey. Queensland: Milmerran in October; one specimen received from Mr. J. Macqueen. Fam. SYNTOMIDAE SYNTOMIS APERTA WIk. 1864 Walker 1864, Cat. 31, 72. Hydrusa nesothetis Meyr. 1886, Proc. Linn. Soc. N.S.W., 783. Syntomis melitospila Turn, 1905, ibid., 853; Hmps. 1914, Suppl. 1, 20, pl. ii, fig. 2. Queensland: Gladstone, Eidsvold, Gayndah, Toowoomba, Dalby, Injune, Milmerran, Inglewood, Cunnamulla. New South Wales: Murrurundi, Hay. 2 ERESSA STREPSIMERIS Meyr. 1886 Meyr. 1886, sbid., 786. Eressa xanthostacta Hmps. 1903, Ann. Mag. Nat. Hist., (7), 11, 339. Eressa stenothyris Turn, 1933, Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust., 57, 160. North Queensland: Cape York, Cairns, Mount Mulligan, Townsville, Bowen, Queensland: Yeppoon. EressA MEGALOSPILA Turn 1922 Turn, 1922, Proc. Roy. Soc. Vict., 28. Eressa strepsimeris Hmps. 1914, Suppl. i, 47, nec Meyr. 1886, ibid., 786, North Australia: Darwin, Daly River. Fam. ARCTITDAE Heliosia perichares n. sp. Tepryapys, cheerful. $ 9,18 mm. Head and palpi orange-yellow. Antennae pale grey, towards base yellowish; ciliations in male 1. Thorax, anterior half orange-yellow, posterior half blackish. Forewings suboblong, costa moderately arched, apex rounded, termen oblique; orange-yellow with three blackish fasciae ; first small, basal; second moderate, from one-third costa to mid-dorsum, margins wavy or straight, anterior edge with a slight prominence above middle, posterior leaving a narrow orange- yellow terminal strip, which may or may not extend to tornus; cilia blackish, towards apex of wing yellowish. Hindwings with termen rounded; 3 and 4 coincident; orange-yellow; a broad blackish terminal band; cilia blackish. Very similar to H. charopa, which has different neuration of hindwings, no basal fascia in forewings, and subterminal fascia differently shaped. Queensland: Milmerran in October, November and December; three speci- mens received from Mr. J. Macqueen. Halone nephobola n. sp. vepoBoXros, overcast with clouds. $, 27-30 mm, Head and thorax fuscous sprinkled with whitish-ochreous. Palpi dark fuscous. Antennae fuscous; in male with tufts of moderate ciliations (1). Abdomen grey mixed with whitish-ochreous; tuft and underside ochreous. Legs ochreous with fuscous tarsal rings; posterior tibiae ochreous. Forewings triangular, costa strongly arched, apex round-pointed, termen nearly straight, obligue; whitish-ochreous sprinkled and suffused with fuscous, darker in central area; markings dark fuscous; a basal costal spot, from which proceeds a curved line ending on fold and enclosing a pale spot; shortly followed by a suffused line also from costa to fold; antemedian irregularly dentate from one-third costa to three-fifths dorsum; a pale-centred discal spot outlined with fuscous; postmedian from two-thirds costa, dentate, with a broad quadrangular projection from beneath costa to below middle; a broadly suffused interrupted subterminal line; cilia fuscous mixed with pale ochreous. Hindwings with termen gently rounded; orange-yellow ; a fuscous apical spot; cilia yellow, on apex partly fuscous. Allied to H. sinuata and H. coryphaea, but larger, differing in details of fore- wing markings, and without fuscous terminal line on hindwings. Tasmania: Hobart in October (Dr. V. V. Hickman); two specimens taken at rest on the wall of the University. The larvae feed on lichens and pupate in crevices between the stones. 6 Philenora malthaca n. sp. poAgaxos, gentle, 9, 20 mm. Head whitish. Palpi and antennae fuscous. Thorax fuscous with anterior and posterior whitish spots. Abdomen grey. Legs fuscous; posterior pair whitish-ochreous. Forewings elongate-triangular, costa nearly straight, apex pointed, termen oblique; whitish suffused with fuscous, appearing grey; a transverse elongate whitish basal spot, separated by a fuscous line from a whitish fuscous-edged dorsal blotch, which extends nearly to middle; upper edge of blotch nearly straight, subcostal, posterior edge deeply indented, forming median and dorsal obtuse projections; an oblique fuscous line from midcosta to upper angle of hlotch; a second oblique line from three-fourths costa to three-fourths dorsum, the costal portion of area between these lines whitish; an irregular sub- terminal fuscous fascia, indented posteriorly above middle, containing a whitish dorsal triangle, its apex produced to middle of disc; cilia fuscous with whitish bars. Hindwings broad, termen rounded; pale ochreous; a pale fuscous apical blotch tolerably well defined; cilia pale ochreous, on blotch fuscous. New South Wales: Newport, near Sydney, in September; one specimen received from Mr. J. Macqueen. Fam. NOCTUIDAE Subfam. MELANCHRINAE MELIANA scottr Butl. 1886 Butl. 1886, Trans. Ent. Soc., 391; Hmps. 1905, 5, 95, pl. xev, fig. 22. Leucania melanopasta Turn. 1902, Proc. Linn. Soc. N.S.W., 81. Borolia microsticta Turn. 1909, ibid., 341. Male with mid-tibiae densely clothed throughout with long hairs on ventral surface. Lateral hair-tufts on penultimate abdominal segment. Antennae with short ciliations (one-half) and longer bristles (1). Both sexes with posterior tibiae smooth. North Australia: Darwin, Queensland: Cape York to Brisbane. North- west Australia: Wyndham. MELIANA LEWINII Butl, 1886 Butl. 1886, Trans. Ent. Soc., 390; Hmps. 1905, 5, 556. M. similis Butl. 1886, ibid., 392. M. xylogramma Meyr. 1897, Trans. Ent. Soc., 367. Peak Downs to Sydney. Subfam. ACRONYCTINAE Acronycta anceps n. sp. anceps, two-headed. é, 32-40 mm. Head and thorax fuscous-brown mixed with whitish; thorax with a slender fuscous transverse antemedian line. Palpi reaching vertex, terminal joint short, obtuse; fuscous-brown. Antennae fuscous; in male shortly ciliated (one-half). Abdomen grey. Legs fuscous-brown with whitish tarsal rings. Forewings elongate-triangular, costa nearly straight, apex rounded, termen rounded, oblique; fuscous-brown with some whitish suffusion; markings fuscous; an ill-defined sub-basal line; a slender blackish sub-dorsal line from near base to one-fourth; orbicular obsolete; reniform outlined with whitish, narrow, oblique, its lower extremity connected by an inwardly curved line with two-thirds dorsum; a suffused oblique line from midcosta to lower extremity of reniform, thence out- wards, blackish, and soon dividing into two heads, running respectively to dorsum 7 above tornus and termen below middle; three whitish costal dots beyond middlc ; some whitish subapical suffusion; subterminal line obsolete or indicated by some blackish dots; cilia fuscous with slender whitish bars. Hindwings with termen rounded, slightly wavy; 5 obsolescent from below middle of cell (one-third) ; fuscous with a large suffused whitish basal blotch; cilia fuscous, becoming whitish towards tornus. North Queensland: Kuranda in March; two specimens received from Mr. F. P. Dodd. Namangana eugraphica n. sp. cbypadixos, well inscribed. 4, 35 mm. Head, palpi, thorax, and abdomen pale grey. Antennae grey- whitish; in male bipectinate almost to apex, pectinations 2. Leg, grey- whitish; anterior tarsi dark fuscous with whitish rings. Forewings elongate- triangular, costa almost straight, apex rounded-rectangular, termen rounded slightly oblique; grey-whitish; markings fuscous, very clear and distinct; four strigules on basal fifth of costa; a sub-basal median dot; a double wavy transverse line at one-fifth; claviform long, U-shaped; orbicular outlined, broadly oval; reniform outlined, large, connected with dorsum by a dentate line; a dot on mid- costa; postmedian line double, finely dentate, from two-thirds costa outwards, curved beneath costa to become transverse, ending on dorsum near tornus; a finely dentate subterminal line; a terminal series of blackish dots; cilia grey-whitish with two faintly darker lines. Hindwings with termen gently rounded; white; a slender fuscous terminal line; cilia white. Queensland: Cunnamulla in April; one specimen received from Mr. N. Geary. NAMAGANA HOROLOGA (Meyr. 1897) Meyr. 1897, Trans. Ent. Soc., 367 (Orthosia). Prometopus horologa Hmps. 1909, 8, 369, pl. cxxxi, fig. 7. I think this species is best placed here. Eidsvold to Melbourne, Clermont, Scone, Charleville. Barybela n. gen. BapuBedos, with heavy palpi. Tongue strong. Face not projecting. Palpi ascending, rather long, clothed with appressed scales; second joint much thickened, reaching middle of face; terminal joint moderate, obtuse. Thorax with a moderate posterior bifid crest. Abdomen with dorsal crest on basal segment. Posterior tibiae mostly smooth but with short hairs on dorsum. Hindwings with 5 obsolescent from well below middle. Apparently allied to Namangana, but with different palpi. Barybela chionostigma n. sp. Xeovootrypos, with white spots. ?, 30mm. Head and thorax dark fuscous with a few whitish scales. Palpi 2; dark fuscous, bases of second and terminal joints and a few scales whitish. Antennae dark fuscous. Abdomen whitish heavily sprinkled with fuscous. Legs dark fuscous; apices of tibiae and tarsal joints white. Forewings elongate- triangular, costa straight, apex rectangular, termen slightly rounded, scarcely oblique ; dark fuscous with a few whitish scales towards costa, markings white, a mid-basal spot; three or four minute costal dots beyond middle, orbicular a snow- white dot at one-third; reniform a snow-white ring incomplete on costal edge; cilia dark fuscous with obscure grey bars. Hindwings with termen rounded; grey ; cilia grey, bases whitish. Western Australia: Yanchep, in November; one specimen. 8 Macroprora Turn, 1941 Turn. 1941 (June), Mem. Qld. Mus., 12, 48. Conocrana Turn. 1941 (August), Proc. Roy. Soc. Qld., 72 (type C. ochthera Turn., tbid.), A characteristic feature of this genus, not mentioned in my description, is the large erect dorsal crest on the fourth abdominal segment. Type, M. chienobola Turn., ibid. To this genus should be referred M. oostigma Turn. 1929, Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust., 53, 302, and M. symprepes, both of which were described as of the genus Crypsiprora, Trans. Ent. Soc., 1902, 29, The genus Conocrana becomes a synonym, MAcROPRORA CHIONOBOLA Turn. 1941 Turn, 1941 (June), Mem. Old. Mus., 12, 48. Conocrana ochthera Turn. 1941 (August), Proc. Roy. Soc. Qld. Evrrora Hmps. 1926 New Gen. and Sp. Noct. 1926, 88. Tongue strong. Face with moderate smooth rounded prominence. Palpi porrect, slender; second joint reaching to facial prominence, shortly rough-scaled ; terminal joint short. Thorax and abdomen not crested. Tibiae hairy. Forewings elongate, narrow at base, posteriorly dilated; 2 from three-fourths, 7, 8, 9 stalked from areole, which is short and broad. Hindwings with 5 from middle of cell, weakly developed except towards termen, 12 anastomosing with cell near base. Type, £. lichenophora. This genus should be referred to the Acronyctinae. It agrees in wing-shape and is probably akin to the following genus, which differs in palpi, neuration of forewings, and smooth legs. EUPRORA LICIKENOPHORA Low. 1902 Low. 1902, Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust., 26, 224. Victoria: Gisborne. Litoscelis n. gen. AttooxeAcs, smooth-legged. Tongue strong. Face with moderate smooth rounded prominence. Palpi smooth, porrect; second joint very much thickened; terminal joint minute. Thorax and abdomen not crested. Tibiae smooth. Forewings elongate, strongly dilated; 2 from two-thirds, areole short and broad, 7 arising from it separately. Hindwings with 5 obsolescent from middle of cell, 12 closely approximated to cell to beyond middle. LITOSCELIS TANYPHYLLA Turn. 1929 Turn. 1929, Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust., 53, 304. North Queensland: Cairns, Atherton. FEREMAULA Turn, 194] Proc. Roy. Soc. Old., 74. My definition needs amendment, In the type specimen the thorax was abraded, but in another I find a moderate smooth rounded posterior crest. There is also a small crest on the first abdominal segment. The origin of 5 of the hind- wings from below the middle is correct for the type, but in two other examples it is median. EREMAULA MINOR (Butl. 1886) Butl. 1886, Trans. Ent. Soc., 397; Hmps. 1909, 8, 547, pl. cxxxvi, fig. 31 (Cram- bodes). 9 This species cannot be referred to Namangana (Staud. 1888, Ent. Zeit., 49, 28; Hmp., 8, 541). £E. ptilopleura Turn. 1941 is a synonym. Queensland: Peak Downs; Injune; Cunnamulla. Bathytricha aethalion n. sp. aifadior, dusky. é,38mm. Head, palpi, thorax, abdomen, and legs fuscous. Antennae grey; pectinations in male 1. Forewings elongate-triangular, costa nearly straight, apex rounded, termen rounded, oblique; dark grey with dark fuscous dots; three dots in a transverse line at one-third; a series of dots in a sinuate line at three-fourths; a supramedian dot displaced inwards; a terminal series of dots; cilia dark grey. Hindwings with termen sinuate; cilia grey-whitish with a darker median line. Closely similar with B. truncata Wlk., except that in the hindwings vein 5, which is weakly developed, is not approximated at base to 4, but straight and arising from middle of cell. Victoria: Orbost; the larvae feeding on maize stems (W. V. Ludbrook) ; one specimen. ARIATIUISA Wilk. 1865 33, 747; Hmps., Cat. Lep. Phal., 1909, 8, 383. Tongue strong. IJ'ace not projecting. Palpi ascending, second joint thickened with appressed scales, somewhat rough anteriorly; terminal joint short, obtuse. Thorax with a small bifid posterior crest; tegulae rather large. Abdomen with- out crests but with lateral tufts of hair directed towards middle, Posterior tibiae hairy. Neuration normal. To this genus I refer all the species formerly included by me in Caradrina, Trans, Roy. Soc. 5. Aust., 1920, 44, 154, except C. obtusa Hmps., Ill. Het. B.M., 8, 29, pl. exlv, fig. 6, and C. maculatra Low. 1891, Proc. Linn. Soc. N.S.W., 1902, 657. Two species, including the type, are known from Africa, one from New Zealand and one from Fiji, but there are many in Australia. Their discrimination is often difficult. In addition to a certain amount of variability some show sexual differences. Much work remains to be done before the species are accurately known. Thoracolopha Turn., Proc. Roy. Soc. Qid., 1939, 13, is a synonym. Ariathisa loxonephra n. sp. Aoforeppos, with oblique reniform. é,30mm. Head whitish; face grey. Palpi whitish, sparsely sprinkled with fuscous. Antennae fuscous; in male serrate with fascicles of short cilia (1). Thorax whitish sprinkled with fuscous and pale ochreous, Abdomen whitish, on dorsum faintly ochreous-tinged. Legs whitish sprinkled with fuscous; tarsi except posterior pair with dark fuscous rings. Forewings elongate-triangular, costa almost straight, apex rounded-rectangular, termen rounded, slightly oblique, whitish partly ochreous-tinged, with fuscous markings; costa barred throughout ; subcostal, median, and plical streaks from base to antemedian line; antemedian sharply angled inwards on fold, obsolete towards costa; postmedian from two- thirds costa to three-fifths dorsum, sharply dentate, costal half nearly transverse, dorsal half inwardly oblique; median area between lines mostly suffused with fuscous ; orbicular a longitudinal oval whitish ring with fuscous centre; reniform large, oblique, two-lobed, edged with whitish except on costal aspect, closely fol- lowed by postmedian line; beyond this fine streaks on veins; a terminal series of dark fuscous lunules, cilia fuscous with slender whitish bars. Hindwings with termen rounded, crenulate; white with grey terminal suffusion; an interrupted fuscous terminal line; cilia white. Western Australia: Tammin in October; one specimen. 10 Ariathisa desertorum n. sp desertorum, living in the wilderness. @, 28 mm. Head, thorax, and palpi grey or pale ochreous sprinkled with fuscous. Antennae fuscous; in male shortly and evenly ciliated (one-half). Abdomen whitish-ochreous with some fuscous scales. Legs fuscous with whitish- ochreous rings; posterior pair mostly whitish-ochreous, Forewings rather narrow, posteriorly dilated, costa straight, apex rounded-rectangular, termen slightly rounded, slightly oblique; whitish-ochreous or grey more or less suffused with fuscous; markings dark fuscous; a sub-basal line from costa to fold; a slightly dentate line from one-fourth costa to one-third dorsum; an ochreous or pinkish line or suffusion on fold; orbicular a small pale circular spot; reniform dark fus- cous, irregularly oblong, its angles sometimes produced, anterior and posterior edges pale and sometimes pinkish-tinged; median line dentate, incomplete or blurred; postmedian slender finely dentate from two-thirds costa, first outwardly curved, bent inwards below middle and indented above dorsum; an apical fuscous suffusion sometimes extended towards dorsum, a submarginal series of pale spots sometimes pinkish-tinged; a terminal line; cilia grey mixed sometimes with fus- cous and whitish. Hindwings with termen rounded; whitish sometimes with grey suffusion on apex and termen; cilia whitish. South Australia: Ooldea in October (W. H. Matthews); three specimens. Subfam, ERASTRIINAE NaRANGODES GLYCYcITROA (Turn, 1904) Micrapatetis glycychroa Turn. 1904, Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust., 28, 218; Himps., 9. 453, pl. exlvi, fig. 20. Darwin; Thursday Island; Cape York; Cairns; Yeppoon; Duaringa. Eublemma hapalochroa n. sp. dmadoxpoos, softly coloured. @¢9, 15-18 mm. Head and thorax ochreous-brown. Palpi fuscous. Antennae fuscous; ciliations in male minute. Abdomen ochreous. Legs fuscous with ochreous rings. Forewings elongate-triangular, costa gently arched, apex pointed, termen slightly rounded, oblique; ochreous; a fuscous spot on base of costa prolonged on costal edge; a broad postmedian purple-fuscous band, edged with fuscous, and containing a small ochreous discal spot, anterior edge at two- fifths, slightly outwardly curved, posterior edge from two-thirds costa to dorsum before tornus, with subcostal and median obtuse projections; a purple-fuscous apical suffusion, broadest on costa; cilia purple-fuscous. Hindwings with termen rounded ; grey; cilia pale grey. Queensland: Thargomindah in April; two specimens received from Mr, N. Geary. EustTroTia MACROSEMA (Lower 1903) Xanthoptera macrosema Low. 1903, Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust., 27, 48. Nanaguna albirena Amps. 1909, 8, 557, pl. exxxvii, fig. 9. Eustrotia macrosema limps. 1910, 10, 605, pl. clxvii, fig. 1. Euprora crypsichlora Turn. 1931, Proc. Linn. Soc. N.S.W., 341. Queensland: Brisbane; Toowoomba; Bunya Mountains; Carnarvon Ranges. E. cyclospila Turn, 1932, Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust., 56, 178, and FE, eremo- tropha Turn., ibid., 177, are allied species, ll Subfam. EUTELITINAE Phlegetonia bathroleuca n. sp. Badporevxos, white at the base. @, 32 mm. Head grey. Palpi with second joint nearly reaching vertex, terminal joint one-half; ochreous-whitish, outer surface sprinkled with fuscous, towards base wholly dark fuscous. Antennae fuscous. Thorax greenish-grey mixed with fuscous. Abdomen fuscous; tuft fuscous-whitish. Legs fuscous; tarsi with ochreous-whitish rings. Forewings elongate-triangular, costa straight, apex rounded-rectangular, termen crenulate, slightly curved to vein 3, there bowed, and thence oblique to tornus; basal area to one-third fuscous with waved pale transverse lines each edged with dark fuscous; thence grey; reniform narrow, constricted in middle, greenish, preceded by a dark fuscous spot, and followed by a pale suffusion, which is traversed by an S-shaped fuscous line ending in dorsum beyond middle; postmedian double, fuscous, strongly sinuate, interrupted above middle by a thick blackish streak, which curves to below midtermen; a dentate sinuate subterminal line; an apical fuscous suffusion; a fuscous tornal spot; cilia fuscous, on middle of termen barred with greenish-grey. Hindwings with termen rounded; fuscous, a basal white blotch deeply incised in middle; cilia fuscous. North Queensland: Tully, near Innisfail, in June; one specimen, Subfam. SARRHOTHRIPINAE Neocleta n. gen, reoxAytos, newly chosen. Tongue well developed. Face not projecting. Palpi rather long, porrect; second joint much thickened especially at apex, where there is a broad rounded dorsal tuft; terminal joint minute, depressed. Thorax not crested. Abdomen with a minute crest on basal segment. Posterior tibiae smooth. Forewings with- out areole, 7, 8, 9, 10 stalked, 11 anastomosing with 12. Hindwings with 3 and 4 coincident, 2 and 5 equidistant from 3, 12 anastomosing to middle of cell. Near Microthripa Hmps., 11, 226, but with 11 and 12 anastomosing, an unusual feature in this group, and with different palpi. Neocleta empyra n. sp. €umupos, scorched, carbonised., ¢. Head and thorax blackish. Palpi one and a half; blackish. Antennae dark fuscous; ciliations in male one-half. Legs dark fuscous; posterior tibiae mostly grey-whitish. Forewings suboval, costa strongly arched, apex round- pointed, termen oblique; fuscous with blackish markings; a costal streak from base almost to middle; a dorsal streak from base to two-thirds, a suffused fascia interrupted in middle connecting apices of these streaks; a fine line from apex of costal streak beneath costa to two-thirds, there bent in a right angle to below middle, where it is again angled and inwardly curved to dorsal streak; a whitish dot in dise at three-fifths; cilia fuscous. Hindwings and cilia whitish. Adapted for concealment on blackened tree trunks. Western Australia: Merredin in September; one specimen. Calathusa anisocentra n. sp. dvicoxevrpos, with unequal spurs. 2,32 mm. Head grey mixed with white on crown; face with strong anterior tuft. Palpi 3, obliquely ascending; second joint strongly expanded towards apex, especially on dorsum; terminal joint one-fourth; grey mixed with whitish. 12 Antennae grey. Thorax grey. Abdomen ochreous-grey-whitish. Legs fuscous sprinkled with white; posterior pair white; posterior tibiae with outer spurs very short. Forewings elongate, narrow, posteriorly dilated, costa slightly arched, apex rounded, termen obliquely rounded; grey unevenly suffused with white except in median area; a slender fuscous antemedian line from one-fourth costa obliquely outwards to fold, there acutely angled inwards to end on dorsum near base; outer edge of median area sharply defined, indented in middle, above dorsum, and on dorsum ; dark fuscous discal dots with raised scales at two-fifths and three-fifths ; a third dot at four-fifths almost connected with a wavy streak from dorsum before tornus; all veins partly streaked with fuscous; a terminal series of longitudinal elongate fuscous dots; cilia grey with some fuscous bars. Hindwings with termen slightly sinuate ; whitish with grey terminal suffusion broadest at apex; cilia white. This species presents some structural peculiarities of minor importance. Queensland: Milmerran in August; one specimen received from Mr. J. Macqueen. Calathusa englypta n. sp. éyyAvrros, indented. 4, 9, 28-30 mm. Head and thorax fuscous, Palpi 2; fuscous. Antennac fuscous; ciliations in male 2, Abdomen fuscous; basal segment whitish; tuft ochreous-whitish. Legs fuscous; posterior pair whitish. Forewings elongate- oval, costa slightly arched, apex rectangular, termen rounded, slightly oblique ; fuscous unevenly sprinkled with whitish; markings dark fuscous; an incomplete dentate sub-basal line; antemedian line from one-third costa to one-third dorsum, indented in middle with a posterior tooth above and beneath; postmedian from before two-thirds costa to two-thirds dorsum with a posterior rectangular projec- tion indented in middle, thence incurved, preceded by a short line from costa; fine streaks on veins in terminal area; sometimes a short whitish submedian suffusion; an irregular dentate whitish subterminal line; cilia grey with fuscous bars. Hind- wings with termen slightly bisinuate; grey, towards base suffused with whitish; cilia whitish. Queensland: Milmerran in March; two specimens received from Mr. J. Macqueen. Subfam. ACONTIINAE Verz., 164; Hmps., 11, 326. The genus Eligma Hb. should be placed in this subfamily next to Cacyparis Wik., 26, 1.572; Hmps., 11, 461. Subiam. OPHIDERINAE Eremnophanes n. gen. épenvoborns dark. Tongue present. Face with strong rounded prominence. Palpi long, porrect, shortly rough-scaled; terminal joint long, stout, obtuse. Thorax with a strong posterior crest. Abdomen with crests on first two segments. Forewings with areole present, 10 arising from it separately. Hindwings with 5 approximated to 4, 6, and 7 connate, 12 anastomosing to beyond middle of cell, Eremnophanes apicinota n. sp. apicinotus, with apical mark. 9, 20 mm. Head, antennae, and thorax dark fuscous. Palpi 3; fuscous. Abdomen whitish; crests dark fuscous. Legs fuscous. Forewings narrowly triangular, costa nearly straight, apex pointed, termen obliquely rounded, crenu- late; dark fuscous; markings blackish, obscure, partly edged with whitish; a short 13 white streak from base of costa edged blackish posteriorly ; antemedian line from one-third costa to dorsum near middle, angled on fold; orbicular a small whitish ring; a median transverse line projecting obtusely in middle and above dorsum; reniform large, outlined with blackish, whitish towards costa; a broad white streak from costa near apex to median line, traversing reniform; cilia fuscous, extreme bases whitish. Hindwings with termen rounded; whitish with some fuscous terminal suffusion; cilia white. Queensland: Cunnamulla in February; two specimens recieved from Mr, N. Geary. Stenoprora triplax n. sp. tpurAag, threefold. 8, 21 mm. Head and thorax grey sprinkled with dark fuscous. Palpi 3, second joint much exceeding face, terminal joint short, truncate; grey sprinkled with dark fuscous, lower edge white towards base. Antennae grey; ciliations in male one-half. Abdomen whitish-grey ; basal crest dark fuscous. Legs fuscous sprinkled with white; anterior coxac and posterior tibiae and femora white. Fore- wings narrow, posteriorly dilated, costa almost straight, apex round-pointed, termen slightly rounded, slightly oblique; grey; markings and some irroration dark fuscous; a sub-basal line from costa to fold; sharply angled inwards beneath costa and outwards above fold; antemedian from one-third costa to one-third dorsum, double, slightly waved; orbicular and reniform outlined with dark fus- cous, large, closely applied; orbicular semilunar with convexity anterior; reniform about twice as large, transversely oval with median constriction; a line from inner edge of orbicular below middle almost enclosing a large circle, then angled to two- thirds dorsum; a slight whitish suffusion from upper end of reniform to apex; four whitish dots on posterior half of costa; an irregular subterminal line incised in middle; a crenulate terminal line; cilia grey with fuscous bars. Hindwings with termen gently rounded; whitish; a fuscous terminal suffusion; cilia white. Queensland: Cunnamulla in October; one specimen. Capelica n. gen, kamyAtxos, misleading. Tongue developed. Face with strong anterior tuft of scales. Antennae in male minutely ciliated. Palpi obliquely ascending, reaching vertex; second joint moderately thickened with appressed scales; terminal joint short, obtuse. Thorax with erect expansile anterior tuft. Abdomen without crests but with first segment clothed dorsally with long hairs. Posterior tibiae hairy on dorsum. Forewing neuration normal. THindwings with 5 well developed from near angle; 12 anastomosing with cell near base, Capelica oxylopha n. sp. égvAodos, sharp--crested. #, 36mm, Head, palpi, and thorax pale ochreous-grey. Abdomen fuscous. Legs fuscous with narrow whitish tarsal rings; posterior pair grey. Forewings elongate-triangular, costa nearly straight, apex rounded, termen nearly straight, slightly oblique ; glossy ochreous-grey ; a blackish dot on lower posterior angle of cell, closely followed by a whitish dot; three blackish dots on fold, and several between veins representing a subterminal line; cilia grey. Hindwings with termen rounded, grey; cilia pale grey. On casual inspection this would be taken for one of the Melanchrinae or Acronyctinae. Western Australia: Yanchep in September; one specimen. 14 Oglasa prionosticha n. sp. mptovorttxos, with serrate lines. @, 38mm. Head, thorax, and abdomen whitish-ochreous. Palpi ascending, reaching vertex; second joint thickened with smoothly appressed scales; terminal joint short, stout, pointed; whitish-ochreous, lower two-thirds of external surface of second joint blackish. Antennae fuscous, towards base whitish-ochreous. Legs fuscous (posterior pair missing). Forewings elongate-triangular, costa slightly arched, apex round-pointed, termen slightly rounded, slightly oblique ; whitish-ochreous slightly brownish-tinged; a blackish triangle on mid-costa, its apex acute and reaching lower edge of cell; a blackish dot midway between this and dorsum; a sub-quadrate blackish blotch on costa before apex; a blackish dot on one-sixth costa giving origin to a slender sharply dentate fuscous line to one- third dorsum; a slender fuscous line from median triangle beneath costa almost to subapical blotch, then curved, strongly sinuate, and minutely dentate to two- thirds dorsum; a fuscous costal dot just before apex; cilia pale brownish. Hind- wings with termen rounded; grey: a faint dentate fuscous postmedian line; cilia whitish-ochreous. North-west Australia: Wyndham; one specimen received from Mr. L. J. Newman. Artigisa anomozancla n. sp. dvopolay«Aos, with unusual sickles, a, 30 mm. Head and thorax fuscous sprinkled with whitish-ochreous. Palpi in male very long (6) ; terminal joint as long as second, with a dense mass of long expansile scent-hairs on inner surface; fuscous, scent-hairs and irrora- tion whitish-ochreous. Antennae fuscous; in male bipectinate to near apex, each pectination (one and a half) terminating in a longer bristle. Abdomen fuscous; tuft ochreous-grey. Legs dark fuscous with ochreous-whitish rings ; posterior pair paler. Forewings triangular, costa nearly straight, apex pointed, termen bowed on vein 3, slightly oblique; ochreous-whitish suffused with grey, veins mostly whitish; markings dark fuscous, an irregular sub-basal line from costa to fold, edged ,with whitish posteriorly; a small triangular spot on one-fourth costa emitting a fine waved line to one-third dorsum; orbicular a whitish dot beneath one-third costa, margined with fuscous; a broad median costal triangle; reniform immediately following this, a whitish oval ring indented posteriorly, partly edged with whitish; closely beneath and following are several irregular dots; a grey postmedian shade at one-third, angled outwards, its inner margin crenulate; a terminal series of triangular interneural dots; cilia whitish-ochreous, bases sprinkled with fuscous. Hindwings with termen rounded; fuscous, suffused darker antemedian and double dentate postmedian lines; terminal dots and cilia as forewings. Queensland: Macpherson Range (3,000 ft.) in January; one specimen re- ceived from Mr. E. J. Dumigan. Rhapsa occidentalis. n. sp. occidentalis, western. 4, %, 34-38 mm, Head and thorax grey, sometimes brownish-tinged. Palpi extremely long (8), porrect or ascending; laterally compressed, second joint very long, thickened with loosely appressed scales; posterior two-thirds of dorsal edge rough-scaled; terminal joint moderate, similarly thickened, its apex hidden in a terminal quadrangular tuft; grey sprinkled with fuscous. Antennae grey-whitish ; ciliations in male one and a half. Abdomen grey-whitish. Legs ochreous-whitish, more or less sprinkled with fuscous; anterior pair darker. Forewings triangular, costa slightly arched, apex acute, termen sinuate beneath apex, bowed in middle, scarcely oblique; in male with a broad costal fold beneath extending to middle oa 15 and enclosing a tuft of scent-hairs; grey, sometimes brownish-tinged except in terminal area; markings and some sparsely scattered scales fuscous; a dot in disc at one-fourth, rarely obsolete; two discal dots in middle, placed transversely, rarely white-centred; sometimes an obscure line from four-fifths costa to two- thirds dorsum; a terminal series of dots; cilia ochreous-whitish with a grey basal line, apices sometimes fuscous. Hindwings with termen rounded; grey, towards base whitish-grey ; a whitish subterminal line edged on both sides with grey; cilia as forewings but without fuscous apices. Western Australia: Margaret River in October and November ; two male and five female examples. Zethes hemicyclophora n. sp. jpixedopopos, carrying a half-circle. 9, 63 mm. Head grey, mixed on crown with fuscous. Palpi long (5), porrect; second joint greatly expanded with rough scales towards apex; terminal joint short, stout, truncate; grey-whitish sprinkled with fuscous. Antennae grey- whitish; in female with minute cilia and long bristles (one and a half). Thorax grey; anteriorly fuscous. Abdomen pale grey sprinkled with fuscous. Forewings triangular, costa slightly arched, apex rounded, termen excavated beneath apex, with rounded median prominence; grey; markings and a few scattered scales fuscous; a basal costal spot; an antemedian band, towards costa grey except in margins, containing a small white semi-circular crescent; anterior edge of band curved, dentate, from one-fourth costa to one-third dorsum, posterior edge from two-fifths costa to mid-dorsum, strongly sinuate; two median blackish discal dots placed transversely; postmedian line slender, sinuate, dentate, from three-fifths costa to four-fifths dorsum; a waved line of submarginal dots, the second from costa larger; cilia grey, apices dark fuscous. Hindwings with termen dentate, rounded; colour as forewings; slender median and postmedian lines not reaching costa; an interrupted dentate subterminal line ochreous with dark fuscous edge thickened near tornus; submarginal dots and cilia as forewings. Queensland: Macpherson Range (3,000 feet) in January; one specimen received from Mr. E. J. Dumigan. Subfam. HYPENINAE Gn. Delt. & Pyr., 41; Hmps. 1895, Fauna Brit. Ind., Moths, 3, 98; Meyr. 1927, Rev. Hbk. Brit. Lep., 164. HYPENODES Gn, Delt. & Pyr., 41. I think 7. demonias Meyr., Tr. Ent. Soc., 1902, 39, and T. asthenopa Meyr., ibid., 40, ascribed to Tipasa Wk. should be referred here, and with them the species ascribed by Hampson, ibid., 95, 97, to Chusaris Wk. 1858, Cat. 16. Hypenodes has normally 8, 9, 10 of forewings stalked, but 9 may be absent. HYPENODES COSTISTRIGALIS Stph. Meyr. 1927, ibid., 165. Western Australia: Yanchep in September. A European species, which occurs also in Australia; no doubt artificially introduced. HYPENODES PORPHYRITICA Meyr, 1902 Meyr. 1902, Trans. Ent. Soc., 40. South Australia: Wirrabara. HyPENopEs MIcropa Meyr. 1902 Meyr. 1902, ibid., 41. Queensland: Brisbane. New South Wales: Sydney. 16 Hypenodes ptocas n. sp. TTWKASy shy. é, 16mm. Head and thorax grey. Palpi 3; grey. Antennae grey; in male shortly ciliated (1). Abdomen pale grey. Legs fuscous with whitish tarsal rings. Forewings elongate-triangular, costa nearly straight, apex pointed, termen slightly rounded, oblique; grey; markings fuscous, obscure; a series of minute costal dots, towards apex of wing separated by ochreous-whitish dots; twin discal dots at three-fifths ; a terminal series of dots; cilia grey. Hindwings with termen rounded ; pale grey; cilia pale grey. New South Wales: Ebor in December; two specimens. Camptocrossa n. gen. Kaprroxpoooos, with bent margin, Tongue developed. Palpi long, straight, obliquely ascending, second joint very long, thickened with scales, smooth beneath, but forming a rough ridge above, terminal joint short, stout, acute. Legs smooth, Forewings without areole, 2 from two-thirds, 3, 4, 5 separate, 4 from angle, 7, 8, 9, 10 stalked, 11 connate. Hind- wings with 2 from middle, 3 and 4 connate, 5 from well above angle (one-third), 6 and 7 stalked. Type, N. selenotypa. Near Philogethes Turn, 1930, Proc. Roy. Soc. Qld.. 149, from which it differs in the absence of the areole; also near Camptochetlus Hmps. from India, but lacks the tuft on terminal joint of palpi, and 5 of the hindwings does not arise from angle. Camptocrossa selenotypa n. sp. oedyvotvros, moonstruck. $, 20 mm. Head, thorax, and abdomen fuscous. Palpi 5, second joint strongly expanded towards apex; fuscous. Antennae fuscous; in male with minute ciliations and short bristles (one-half). Legs fuscous with whitish tarsal rings; posterior pair mostly whitish. Forewings triangular, costa straight, apex rounded, termen angled on vein 4, concave above and straight beneath angle; fuscous partly mixed with ochreous-whitish; a semilunar patch on costa from middle to near apex, mostly ochreous-whitish, strongly margined with dark fuscous; a suffused transverse dark fuscous line at one-third; an oblique suffused dark fuscous line from middle of semilunar patch to mid-dorsum; on its outer edge a whitish dot above dorsum, and a whitish line beneath costa; a series of whitish costal dots from middle to apex ; a subterminal line of whitish dots edged with dark fuscous posteriorly; cilia fuscous. Hindwings with termen crenulate and with a short tooth on vein 4; colour and markings as forewings but with costal and median areas largely suffused with white, a subterminal dark line edged posteriorly with whitish dots; subterminal dots and cilia as forewings. North Queensland: Atherton Plateau (Lake Barrine) in June; one specimen. Camptocrossa acrocausta n, sp. axpoxavetos, scorched at the apex. 6,18mm. Head and thorax pale grey. Palpi 4; pale grey with some fus- cous sprinkling, and a penultimate ring on terminal joint; fuscous. (Antennae missing.) Abdomen fuscous-brown; apices of segments and tuft pale grey. Legs whitish-ochreous. Torewings triangular, costa straight, apex rectangular, termen angled on vein 4, concave above, straight beneath ; ochreous-whitish sprinkled with grey ; an oblong apical blotch from apex to mid-termen, fuscous-brown edged with whitish ; three or four fuscous dots on costa; some brown irroration above tornus ; a crenulate dark fuscous terminal line; cilia ochreous-whitish, on blotch mostly fuscous. Hindwings with termen rounded; ochreous-whitish, suffused with 17 purple-brown towards costa and termen; a faint postmedian line; a crenulate fuscous terminal line; cilia ochreous-whitish, North Queensland: Tully, near Innisfail, in June; one specimen. Esthlodora acosmopa n. sp. déxoogperos, tinadorned. ¢, 18mm. Head, antennae, thorax, and abdomen grey. (Palpi missing.) Legs fuscous with whitish tarsal rings. Forewings elongate-triangular, costa straight to near apex, apex pointed, termen strongly bowed in middle, above con- cave, beneath straight; grey with fuscous markings; a slender, outwardly curved line at one-fourth, slightly dentate; an outwardly oblique blackish mark on mid- costa, joined at an angle by a slender line to mid-dorsum; before this angle a small circle representing orbicular, and beyond it another representing reniform; a triangular mark on costa before apex, its lower part blackish, edged by a whitish line; from this mark proceeds a slender sinuate slightly dentate line to three- fourths dorsum, and another to tornus; a terminal line; cilia fuscous, bases whitish-ochreous. Hindwings with termen rounded, broadly excavated at tornus; grey ; a blackish discal dot; three obscure wavy transverse lines ; cilia grey. Queensland: Brisbane; one specimen. Fam. LASIOCAMPIDAE Aproscepta n. gen. drpockertos, unforseen. Eyes smooth. Palpi short, not exceeding frontal tuft, densely hairy. Fore- wings with 2 from near middle, 3 from three-fourths, 4 and 5 approximated from angle, 6 from upper angle connate with 7, 8, which are long-stalked, 9 and 10 long- stalked, 11 from two-thirds. Hindwings with 4 and 5 approximated from angle, 6 and 7 connate from upper angle, 11 well developed, running not far from base into 12, which is widely separated from cell; no pseudoneuria, The neuration differs from that of any genus known to me, but comes nearest to that of Perna Wik., 5, 1,127, which has a much larger accessory cell in the hindwing, while that of Endromis, which I refer to the Lasiocampidae, is still smaller. Aproscepta amblopis n. sp. épBroms, dull. 2,40 mm. Head ochreous. Palpi pale fuscous. Antennae fuscous; pectina- tions in female one and a half. Thorax pale fuscous. Abdomen dark fuscous ; bases of segments whitish. Legs pale fuscous. Forewings elongate-triangular, costa nearly straight, apex rounded, termen long, rounded, oblique; pale fuscous ; markings slightly darker, obscure: a subcostal spot at one-third and another before two-thirds; a sinuate suffused line from three-fourths costa to three-fourths dorsum ; a roughly parallel similar subterminal line ; cilia pale fuscous. Hindwings short, termen rounded; colour as forewings, but without markings. Queensland: Milmerran in January; one specimen received from Mr. J. Macqueen, THE SIMPSON DESERT EXPEDITION, 1939 - SCIENTIFIC REPORTS NO. 1, BIOLOGY - SCORPIONS AND SPIDERS By V. V. HICKMAN, Ralston Professor of Biology, University of Tasmania Summary Dr. C. T. Madigan has kindly sent me for examination the scorpion and spiders collected during his recent expedition across the Simpson Desert. I am indebted to him for the opportunity of studying the collection. My thanks are also due to the Trustees of the John Ralston Bequest under whose auspices the work was carried out, and to Mr. A. Musgrave of the Australian Museum for literature not available in Tasmania. 18 THE SIMPSON DESERT EXPEDITION, 1939 — SCIENTIFIC REPORTS No. 1, BIOLOGY — SCORPIONS AND SPIDERS By V. V. Hicxman, Ralston Professor of Biology, University of Tasmania [Read 13 April 1944] Priates I ro III Dr. C. T. Madigan has kindly sent me for examination the scorpion and spiders collected during his recent expedition across the Simpson Desert. I am indebted to him for the opportunity of studying the collection. My thanks are also due to the Trustees of the John Ralston Bequest under whose auspices the work was carried out, and to Mr. A. Musgrave of the Australian Museum for literature not available in Tasmania. Our knowledge of the spiders of Central Australia is based mainly on four collections. The first of these was made by the Horn Expedition in 1894 and was described by H. R. Hogg (1896, 309). The specimens forming the second collec- tion were found by Herr von Leonhardi in 1910 and forwarded to the Sencken- berg Museum. They were described by E. Strand (1913, 599). The third collec- tion was made by Capt. S. A. White during an “expedition into the Interior of Australia” in 1913, and a list of the species found has been published by R. H. Pulleine (1914, 447). The fourth collection was made in 1914, also by Capt. S. A. White, from the north-western regions of South Australia. This collection was described by W. J. Rainbow (1915, 772). In the list of 18 spiders published by R. H. Pulleine (1914, 447) the name Hemicloea longipes Koch is attributed to the wrong author and should be Hemucloea longipes R. H. Hogg. Storena graeffei Keys. should be Storena graeffet L. Koch. Carepalxts monticulo is probably meant for Carepalxis montifera L. Koch. Mtturga lineata Koch should be Miturga lineata Thorell and Lycosa arenosa Koch may be intended for Lycosa arenaris Hogg. The present collection contains 1 scorpion and 105 spiders. The spiders are distributed over 14 families and comprise 28 species, 14 of which are new. All the specimens were collected by Mr. H. O. Fletcher and members of the Simpson Desert Expedition. The following are the species recorded in the present publication, The number of specimens of each species is shown in brackets. SCORPIONES ARANEAE Urodacus yaschenkoi (A. Birula) (1) -Lycesa sp. (immature) - (3) Oxvyopes elegans L. Koch - (1) ARANEAE Storena toddi n. sp. - - (1) Aganippe simpsonin.sp. - (1) Latrodecius hasseltti Thorell - (1) Aname sp. (immature) - - (1) Argiope protensa L. Koch - (8) Dinopis wnicolor L. Koch - (1) Araneus transmarinus (Key- Ixeuticus senilis (L. Koch) - (31) serling) - - - - (6) Pardosa eyrein.sp. - - (2) Nephila imperatrix L. Koch - (11) Pardosa pexa n. sp - - (1) Odo australiensis n. sp. - (2) Lycosa abmingani n. sp. - (3) Isopeda pessleri (Thorell) - (8) Lycosa burti n. sp. - - (1) Pediana horni (Hogg) - - (1) Lycosa finkei n. sp. - - (1) Pediana regina (L. Koch) - (1) Lycosa fletcherin. sp. - - (1) Oltos inframaculatus (Hogg)- (1) Lycosa goyderin.sp. - - (1) Tharpyna simpsonin.sp. - (1) Lycosa halei n. sp. - - (1) Miturga lineata Thorell - - (6) Lycosa madigani n. sp. - (5) Saitis lacustris n.sp. —- - (1) Lycosa halei n. sp. - - (1) Ocristona sp. (immature) - (1) Trans. Roy. Soc. 8. Aust., 68, (1), 28 July 1944 19 The collection is too small for one to draw any definite conclusions in regard to the relative abundance of the different species. Nephila imperatrix L. Koch, Argiope protensa L. Koch, Araneus transmarinus (Keys.), Isopeda pessleri (Thorell) and Miturga lineata Thorell were collected at many different localities and appear to be well distributed throughout Central Australia. Two species, Odo australiensis n. sp. and Lycosa madigani n. sp. were found at the centre of the Simpson Desert, while Pardosa eyrei n.sp. and Saitis lacustris n. sp. were taken on the salt-crust surface of Lake Eyre two and a half miles from shore. The widely distributed poisonous spider, Latrodectus hasseltii Thorell, has been recorded from Central Australia on three previous occasions. Order SCORPIONES Family SCORPIONIDAE Sub-Family URODACINAE Genus Uropacus Peters, 1861 Uropacus YASCHENKo! (A. Birula) (PL. I, fig. 1-6) Hemthoplopus yaschenkoi A. Birula 1903, Ann. Mus. Zool. Acad. Sci., St. Peters- bourg, 8, xxxili-xxxiv. Urodacus yaschenkoi K. Kraepelin 1908, Fauna Siidwest-Australiens, Jena, 2, 89-95. Urodacus yaschenkoi K. Kraepelin 1916, Arkiv for Zoologi, Stockholm, 10, 1-43. Urodacus yaschenkoi 1.. Glauert 1925, Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust., Adelaide, 49, 85-87 Birula’s type specimen of this scorpion is from Killalpaninna on Cooper Creek, which flows into Lake Eyre. Two other specimens from Cooper Creek and Miller’s Creek are recorded and briefly described by Glauert (1925, 87). Birula does not mention the sex of the type specimen but Kraepelin considers that it is probably a female. The two specimens recorded by Glauert are stated to be females. The single specimen in the present collection comes from 17 miles north of Andado Station in the Northern Territory. From its smaller size, longer tail and bisected genital operculum it appears to be a male. Its description is as follows: Total length, 63°0 mm. ; length of carapace, 8-9 mm.; length of tail, 35-0 mm. Colour is a fairly uniform clay-yellow. The fingers, however, together with the fifth caudal segment and vesicle are dark brown. A longitudinal stripe on each side of the vesicle and a pair of similar stripes on its ventral surface are yellowish. Anterior margin of carapace with a median notch furnished with a pair of setae. Distance from the notch to the median eyes is 3°60 mm, Diameter of a median eye, 0°58 mm. The interocular groove is continued behind to the posterior triangular depression, and in front to the marginal notch. Anteocular area fur- nished with a few coarse granulations, the rest of the carapace being smooth except for a few minute scattered granules. The two lateral eyes of each side are mounted on a common tubercle. The diameter of the anterior eye is 0-46 mm., that of the posterior eye 0°29 mm. The two eyes are separated by a space equal to the diameter of the posterior eye. There is a conspicuous seta below and slightly behind the lateral eyes and another seta in front of them and somewhat towards the middle. 20 The first six tergites of the preabdomen are smooth except for minute granu- lation on their posterior half. The seventh tergite has, on each side, a pair of short longitudinal granular keels. The sternum has the form shown in pl. I, fig. 1, and possesses a median longi- tudinal depression. On each side of the depression are six small hairs, and in front of it about eight. The genital operculum is oval and bisected longitudinally but, owing to the hardness of the specimen, I am not certain whether the two halves are entirely free from each other. Behind the operculum is a pair of small median apophyses (pl. 1, fig. 1). The marginal area of the pectines is coniposed of three sclerites. The middle area is indistinctly divided into three or four sclerites, the left side differing from the right (pl. I, fig. 1). The number of teeth is 15 on both sides. The sternites are smooth and shining. The segments of the postabdomen or tail have the following measurements in millimetres : Segment : I II III IV Vv Length... ee 3°77 4-06 4-52 4-99 7 +25 Width Sad 1's 3°77 3°65 3-48 3+19 3-25 The superior keels of the first four caudal segments are subdenticulate and end behind in a moderately large tooth. ‘The supero-lateral keels are granular and the three ventral keels smooth. The fifth caudal segment is without a dorsal sulcus, except towards the base. Its keels are denticulate and the supero-lateral keels about two-thirds the length of the segment. The ventral surface of the segment is coarsely granular between the keels, the sides and dorsal surface smooth. Apical margin is toothed laterally and ventrally. The vesicle is large and oval, 3:25 mm. wide. The aculeus sharp and well curved. Ventral surface and sides of vesicle granulate. Dorsal surface smooth. Chelicerae about 56 mm. long, Fingers with teeth on upper margin only, the lower margin being smooth. The fixed finger has a large conical tooth near the middle and a large bicuspid tooth nearer the base. The movable finger has two large teeth separated by a small tooth, and there is another small tooth near the base (pl. I, fig. 2}. The dorsal surface of the movable finger is furnished with about six setae and there is a transverse row of about four setae near the base of the fixed finger. The ventral surface of the chelicerae densely clothed with fine hairs. Pedipalpi moderately strong. Humerus measures 6°5 mm. long. Its keels are coarsely granular and there are a few smaller granules on upper and lower surfaces. The brachium is 8:0 mm. long and is smooth except for the upper and lower keels bordering its anterior surface. The ventral surface lacks a keel but is furnished with a longitudinal row of 17 trichobothria (pl I, fig. 3). The hand is 16-1 mm. long and 5-9 mm. wide. The movable finger is 9-2 mm. long. The dorsal surface of the hand is very slightly granular and furnished with two very weak and smooth finger keels. The keel of the under-hand is also smooth and on its inner side, in the case of the left padipalp, there are 25 trichobothria arranged as shown in pl. I, fig. 4. Ina similar position on the right pedipalp there are about 29 trichobothria. The legs are smooth. Tarsal claws very unequal. Jn the first and second tarsi the outer claw is about twice the length of the inner claw. In the third and fourth tarsi the inner claw is minute and appears like a small papilla in the fourth tarsi (pl. I, fig. 5). First and. second metatarsi with a dorsal row of seven strong spines (pl. I, fig. 6). On the outer side of the tarsal claws there are three or four black spines, and on the inner side about seven. Localitty—Seventeen miles north of Andado Station, Northern Territory. Coll. 519 (14 ? with second and fourth legs of right side slightly damaged). 21 Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust., 1944 Vol. 68, Plate 1 22 Order ARANEAE Sub-Order MYGALOMORPHAE Family CTENIZIDAE Sub-Family CTENIZINAE Genus AGANIPPE Cambridge 1877 Aganippe simpsoni n. sp. (PL. I, fig. 7-10) ‘ ?—Total length, 23-0 mm. Length of carapace, 9°O mm. Width of cara- pace, 7-0 mm. Length of abdomen, 11-0 mm. Width of abdomen, 7-0 mm. The colour of specimen (in alcohol) is light brown, and there is no distinct pattern on the abdomen. Carapace convex. Thoracic region lightly clothed with dark brown woolly hair and the head region with fine setae. Thoracic groove distinctly procurved. A median row of coarse black bristles extends from the eyes half-way to the thoracic groove. There is a group of five black bristles, which curve towards the front, immediately behind the AME. In a median position in front of the AME is a single large bristle. Between the ALE there is a group of four setae which curve backwards, The eight eyes are arranged in three rows, as shown in pl. I, fig. 7. Ratio of eyes, AME: ALE: PME: PLE=8: 10:9: 12. The quadrangle formed by the four anterior eyes is wider in front than behind in ratio 31 : 24, and wider in front than long in ratio 31 : 26. The posterior row of eyes is wider than the front row in ratio 51 : 31. The ALE are separated from each other by 15/10 of their diameter, and from AME by 12/10 of their diameter. The AME are separated from each other by 11/8 of their diameter and from PLE by 13/8 of their diameter. The hind margins of the eyes of the posterior row are in an almost straight line. The PME are separated from each other by 19/9 of their diameter and from PLE by 6/9 of their diameter. The ALE are separated from the margin of the clypeus by about 6/10 of their diameter. Chelicerae clothed in front with coarse black bristles and provided with a rastellum. Promargin of furrow with six teeth and retromargin also with six teeth. A median row of five very small teeth in the furrow. Fang strong and provided with coarse serrations. Labium wider than long in ratio 22 : 9, devoid of spinules, submerged and almost hidden by the maxillae. The maxillae with a reddish scopula and numerous spinules in a group at the base near the inner angle, The sternum is convex, longer than wide in ratio 8: 5, Three pairs of sigilla are arranged as shown in pl. J, fig. 8. In front of the sternum and behind the labium is a pair of sclerites resembling sigilla. Legs: 4.1.2.3. Clothed with black bristles. The first and second tarsi scopulate. Third and fourth tarsi without scopula, ‘Trichobothria in two rows on each tibia, in an irregular group near the distal end of each metatarsus and on the distal half of each tarsus. On the dorsal side of the first and second tarsi and metatarsi, but not on the third and fourth, are brushes of stiff, erect, black setae. These setae have small barbs near the tip. Three tarsal claws. are present. The upper claws of the first and second tarsi with two teeth near base (pl. I, fig. 9), those of third and fourth tarsi with one tooth near base (pl. I, fig. 10). The third claw small and without teeth. The palpus is scopulate on the end segment and its 23 claw has two teeth near the base. The segments of the legs and palpi have the following measurements in millimetres: Leg Femur Patella Tibia Metatarsus Tarsus Total I sibs 5°91 3-42 2°90 2:90 1-80 16-93 Il w= 516 3-20 2°61 2-72 1-86 15+55 If wee 435 3-19 2°61 2°96 215 15-26 Iv ae O91 4-35 4-41 4-60 2°61 21°88 Palpi ... 4°70 2-67 290 _— 3°48 13-75 The spines on the legs and palpi are arranged as follows: First leg—Femur 0. Patella 0. Tibia with numerous coarse black bristles on prolateral and retro- lateral sides. Metatarsus: ventral 1-2-1-—4, elsewhere 0. Tarsus with an irregular group of about 14 small spines on ventral side near claws. Second leg— Femur 0. Patella 0. Tibia with prolateral and retrolateral bristles. Metatarsus: ventral 2—2—1-—4, elsewhere 0. Tarstis with a ventral group of about 23 small spines near claws. Third leg—Femur 0. Patella with eleven spines in an irregular group on prolateral side, elsewhere 0. Tibia: dorsal 0, prolateral 1—1, retro- lateral 1-1, ventral 3 at apex. Metatarsus: dorsal 0, prolateral 1-1—1-—1—- 1, retrolateral 1-1—1-—1 -1, ventral 2 with 4 at apex. Tarsus with a ventral group of about 16 small spines near claws, elsewhere 0. Fourth leg—Femur 0. Patella 0. Tibia with 1 spine on ventral side at apex, elsewhere 0, Metatarsus: ventral 1-2-—2-1-4, elsewhere 0. Tarsus with a ventral group of about 17 small spines on distal half of segment. Palpws—Femur 0. Patclla 0. Tibia: dorsal 0, prolateral 3 near apex, retrolateral numerous black bristles, elsewhere 0. Tarsus: dorsal 0, prolateral 1-1 on basal half, retrolateral 1-1-1 on basal half, ventral a group of 2-2-2 close to claw. Abdomen oval, clothed with fine hairs and long slender bristles. Spinnerets four. Inner pair small, being only 0-81 mm. long. Outer pair 2°61 mm. long, stout and three-segmented. The basal segment is nearly four times the length of the second segment. The third segment is dome-shaped and sunken in the end of the second segment. meg ee miles east of Hale River, Simpson Desert. Coll. 549 1¢@). In some respects this species resembles Aganippe pelochroa Rainbow and Pulleine (100, 1918). The latter, however, is said to have the front eyes “just touching edge of clypeus.” There is also a difference in the dentition of the chelicerae. Family DIPLURIDAE Sub-Family DIPLURINAE Genus ANAmE L, Koch 1873 ANAME sp. The specimen is too immature for the species to be determined. Lecality—Camp, 23. Thirty miles north-west of Birdsville, Queensland. (1 pullus.) Sub-Order DIPNEUMONOMORPHAE Family DINOPIDAE Genus Drnopis Macleay 1839 Dinoris uNiIcoLor L. Koch 1879 Locality—Hale River, 20 miles up stream from junction with Todd River, Coll. 548 (1 adult ¢ ). This species has also been recorded from Western Australia. 24 Family AMAUROBIIDAE Sub-Family [XEUTICINAE Genus Ixeuticus Dalmas 1917 IxXEUTICUS SENILIS (L. Koch) Locality—Indinda Well, near Andado Station, Northern Territory (2 adult é é,8adult 9 9, and 21 pullus). This spider was originally described by L. Koch under the name Amaurobius semilts. Comte de Dalmas (p. 329, 1917) has shown, however, that most of the Australian species placed in the genus Amaurobius possess a calamistrum com- posed of a single line of curved hairs, whereas the European species have a calamistrum composed of two parallel lines of curved hairs. He has therefore established the genus Jreuticus for the Australian forms. Jxeuticus senilis has been recorded from Queensland, Victoria and Tasmania. Family LYCOSIDAE Sub-Family PARDOSINAE Genus Parposa C. Koch 1848 Pardosa eyrei n. sp. (Pl. I, fig. 11-13) é-—Total length, 17-0 mm. Length of carapace, 8-0 mm. Width of cara- pace, 6°0 mm. Length of abdomen, 9°0 mm. Width of abdomen, 6:0 mm. Caput of specimen in alcohol black with white hairs and brown setae. Thoracic region dark brown, densely clothed with recumbent brown hairs in the middle region and white hairs round the margin. Chelicerae, maxillae, labium, sternum and coxae dark brown. Basal two-thirds of ventral surface of femora dark brown. First and second metatarsi and distal half of first and second tibiae also dark brown. Other parts of legs yellowish-brown. Palpi yellowish-brown except tarsal segment, which is dark brown. Dorsal surface of abdomen yellow with a median dark brown patch, having the form shown in pl. I, fig. 11. Ventral surface of abdomen very dark brown, almost black, nearly to spinnerets. Spin- nerets yellow. Head with straight sides. Thoracic groove longitudinal. Front row of eyes shorter than second row (pl. I, fig. 12). Ratio of eyes AME: ALE: PME: PLE=8:6: 17: 15. AME separated from each other by 5/8 of their diamcter, from ALE by 4/8 of their diameter, and from PME by 3/8 of their diameter. PME separated from each other by 16/17 of their diameter, and from PLE by 18/17 of their diameter. PLE separated from each other by 52/15 of their diameter. The quadrangle of the posterior eyes wider than long in ratio 70: 46. Face densely clothed with white hairs. Six long slender bristles on clypeus below AME. Clypeus in front of AME equal to 6/8 of their diameter. Near the dorsal margin of each PLE there is a group of long slender bristles projecting outwards over the eye. The space between the PME is furnished with a number of bristles which project forward. There are no bristles near the thoracic groove. Chelicerae clothed in front with white hairs and black bristles. Condyles well developed. Promargin of furrow with three teeth, of which the median is the largest and the distal the smallest. Retromargin with three equal teeth. A brown scopula on promargin. Labium wider than long in ratio 22: 19. Maxillae wider in front than at the base. Front margin rounded. Scopula brown. Serrula well developed. Ventral surface of maxillae clothed with long slender erect black 25 setae. Sternum oval, pointed behind, longer than wide in ratio 60 : 50, clothed with fine erect black setae. Legs: 4.2.1.3. Clothed with white hairs and long erect brown bristles. First and second tarsi and metatarsi scopulate to base. Third and fourth tarsi also scoptlate to base but their scopulae divided by a longitudinal band of setae. All scopulae very light. Trichobothria in two rows on tibiae and tarsi, in one row on metatarsi, Three tarsal claws. Upper claws with ten teeth, lower claw without teeth. The form of the palpus is shown in pl. I, fig. 13. The segments of the legs and palpi have the following measurements in millimetres: Leg Femur Pateva Tibia Metatarsus Tarsus Total I... 82 2-9 6-0 7°0 2-9 27-0 I 8-0 3-0 6-0 8-0 3-0 28-0 i... = 783 2-9 5-1 8-1 2:9 263 IV. 98 3-0 6-0 10-0 3:8 31:8 Palpi 3°8 1+7 2-3 —_ 2-6 10-4 The spines on the legs and palpi are arranged as follows: First leg—Femur: dorsal 1-1-1, prolateral 2 near end, retrolateral 1-1-1 -1, ventral 0. Patella: dorsal 1-1 fine bristles, prolateral 1, retrolateral 1, ventral QO. Tibia: dorsal 1-1, prolateral 1-1, retrolateral 1-1, ventral 2-2-2. Metatarsus: dorsal 0, pro- lateral 1-1-1, retrolateral 1-1-1, ventral 2-2-3. Second leg—Femur: dorsal 1-1-1, prolateral 1-1-1, retrolateral 1—1-1-1, ventral 0. Patella, tibia, and metatarsus armed as in first leg. Third leg—Femur: dorsal 1-1-1, prolateral 1-1-1, retrolateral 1-1-1 -1, ventral 0. Patella, tibia and metatarsus armed as in first leg. Fourth leg—Femur: dorsal 1-1-1, prolateral 1-1-1-1, retrolateral 1-1—1-—1, ventral 0. Patella and tibia armed as in first leg. Meta- tarsus: dorsal 0, prolateral 1-1-1, retrolateral 1-1-1, ventral 1-2-2 -3. Palpus—Femur: dorsal 1-1-1 -1, prolateral 1 near end, retrolateral 1 near end, ventral 0. Patella: dorsal 1 —1 fine bristles, prolateral 1 bristle, elsewhere 0. Abdomen clothed on dorsal surface and sides with short white hairs. A few setae at front of brown patch on dorsal surface but elsewhere none. The dark brown colouration of the ventral surface includes the lung-covers and extends from the petiolus almost to the spinnerets, there being a thin yellowish line imme- diately in front of the spinnerets. Hairs on ventral surface short and black. Spinnerets yellow, the anterior pair with black hairs towards the apex. Locality—Surface of North Lake Eyre two and a half miles from the shore. Coll. 669 (1 adult & and 1 pullus). Pardosa pexa n. sp. (PL. II, fig. 14) : ¢—-Total length, 10-7 mm. Length of carapace, 5°39 mm. Width of cara- pace, 4°23 mm. Length of abdomen, 5:51 mm, Width of abdomen, 3°82 mm. Carapace very dark brown (in alcohol) and densely clothed with grey hairs. Chelicerae also very dark brown and clothed in front with white hairs. Labium brown with white hairs on its basal half. Sternum brown, densely clothed with grey hairs. Mazxillae, legs and palpi yellowish, the legs being marked with in- distinct transverse bands of brown on dorsal side. Abdomen yellow above with a median longitudinal patch of brown on front half and several transverse brown markings on posterior half. Sides of abdomen pale yellow with brown spots. Ventral surface pale yellow and without pattern. Lung-covers brown. Spin- nerets yellow. Carapace is pyriform in outline. Sides of head slightly inclined, the dorsal surface being rather flat. Thoracic groove longitudinal. Front row of eyes pro- 26 curved and shorter than the second row in ratio 31: 44. Ratio of eyes AME: ALE: PME: PLE = 8:6: 19: 14. AME separated from each other by about 2/8 of their diameter, from ALE by 1/8 of their diameter and from PME by 2/8 of their diameter, PME poised obliquely and separated from each other by 11/19 of their diameter and from PLE by 17/19 of their diameter. PLE separated from each other by 36/14 of their diameter. The quadrangle of the posterior eyes is wider behind than in front in ratio 52: 44 and its length is shorter than its width in front in ratio 39: 44, The clypeus in front of AME is equal to 5/8 of their diameter. Front and sides of head clothed with grey silky hairs. Dorsal surface of head clothed with grey hairs and brown setae which point forward. Condyles of chelicerae brown and well developed. The promargin of furrow armed with three teeth, of which the median is the largest. Retromargin with three subequal teeth. Fang dark brown and moderately long. Scopula brown and on promargin only, Labium truncate in front, excavated on each side near the base and slightly longer than wide in ratio 13: 12. Front edge fringed with a row of black setae. Maxillae parallel and clothed with grey hairs on outer side. Scopula brown. Sternum oval, longer than wide in ratio 42 : 32. Legs: 4.1.2.3. Clothed with grey hairs and setae. First and second tarsi and metatarsi scopulate to base, the scopula being composed of rather long hairs. Third and fourth metatarsi without scopula. Third tarsus missing on both sides. Fourth tarsi with a light scopula bisected by a longitudinal band of setae. Tricho- bothria in two rows on tibiae and tarsi, in one row on metatarsi. Upper claws of first leg with about four tecth, those of fourth leg with seven teeth. Third claw small and bare. The dorsal surface of the tarsal segment of the palpi is densely clothed with white hairs, The form of the palpus is shown in pl. IT, fig. 14. The segments of the legs and palpi have the following measurements in milli- metres: Leg Femur Patella Tibia Metatarsud Tarsus Total 4-64 2:32 4-46 5-04 2-61 19-07 Il... = 452 2°20 3:94 4-46 2:49 17-61 WI. )~=— 4-06 2-03 3-13 4-46 lost ? IV...) = 516 2-15 4-58 7-02 3-07 21-98 Palpi ... 2-03 0-98 1-16 — 1-91 6-08 The spines on the legs and palpi are arranged as follows: First leg—Femur: dorsal 1-1-1, prolateral 1-2, retrolateral 1-1-1, ventral 0. Patella: dorsal 1-1 fine bristles, prolateral 1, retrolateral 1, ventral 0. Tibia: dorsal 1-1, pro- lateral 1-1, retrolateral 1-1, ventral 2-2-2. Metatarsus: dorsal 0, prolateral 1—1-1, retrolateral 1-1-1, ventral 2-2-3. Second leg—Femur: dorsal 1-1-1, prolateral 1-1, retrolateral 1-1-1, ventral 0. Patella, tibia and meta- tarsus are armed as in the first leg. Third leg—Femur: dorsal 1-1-1, pro- lateral 1-1, retrolateral 1—1—1, ventral 0, Patella, tibia and metatarsus are armed as in first lege. Fourth leg—Femur: dorsal 1-1-1, prolateral 1-1, retrolateral 1—1—1, ventral 0. Patella and tibia armed as in first leg. Meta- tarsus: dorsal 0, prolateral 1-1-1, retrolateral 1-1-1, ventral 1-2-2 ~3. Palpus—Femur: dorsal 1-1-2, prolateral 1 mear end, retrolateral 1 near end, ventral 0. Patella: dorsal 1-1 bristles, prolateral 1 bristle, retrolateral 0, ventral 0. Tibia: dorsal 1 bristle, prolateral 1-1 bristles, elsewhere 0, Tarsus: 4 spines on ventral side near apex. : Abdomen densely clothed with grey hairs. Anterior spinnerets cylindrical, the second segment being sunk in the apex of the first. The posterior spinnerets distinctly two-segmented and projecting beyond the anterior pair. Locality—Burt’s Waterhole, South Australia, 55 miles south of Birdsville. Coll. 645 (1 adult ¢ lacking portions of the third pair of legs). 27 Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust., 1944 Vol. 68, Plate IT 28 Sub-Family LYCOSINAE Genus Lycosa Latreille 1804 The collection contains eighteen specimens belonging to the genus Lycosa. ’ Five of these are too young to be identified with certainty. The others represent seven new species. It is unfortunate that in most cases only one sex is available for description, The seven new species may be distinguished by the following key: 1 Retromargin of chelicerae with two teeth. 2 Retromargin of chelicerae with three teeth. 3 2 First femur with three retrolateral spines. L, madigant n. sp First femur with no retrolateral spines. L. goyderi n. sp. 3 First and second patellae with no lateral spines. 4 First and second patellae with a prolateral spine. 6 4 Third tibiae with two dorsal spines. 5 Third tibiae with no dorsal spines. L. abmingani n. sp. 5 Ventral surface of abdomen with a transverse black band. L. finkei n. sp. Ventral surface of abdomen yellow-brown, without markings. L. burti n. sp. 6 Second and third metatarsi equally long. L. fletcheri n. sp. Second metatarsus shorter than third. L. halei n. sp. Lycosa abmingani n. sp. (PI. II, fig. 15) ¢—Total length, 13-0 mm. Length of carapace, 6°5 mm. Width of cara- pace, 4°6mm, Length of abdomen, 7-2 mm. Width of abdomen, 4-1 mm. Carapace yellow (in alcohol) with a longitudinal brown band extending from the sides of the head to posterior margin. Radial grooves dark brown. Legs and sternum brownish-yellow. Tarsal scopulae dark brown. Labium and maxillae brown. Chelicerae and fang dark reddish-brown, Dorsal surface of abdomen yellowish-brown clothed with dark brown hairs and black bristles. A median longitudinal dark brown patch on anterior half, followed by two pairs of black spots. Ventral surface yellowish, clothed with white hairs and fine black setae. Head with slanting sides. Thoracic groove longitudinal. On the lower edge of the brown band at each side of the head is a row of about six black bristles. There is also a row of five bristles extending from the lower edge of PLE to lower edge of PME. Numerous erect bristles occupy the interocular space and also the area extending from the eyes to the thoracic groove, There are a few bristles at the sides of the groove. On each side near the posterior end of the groove is a radial row of four bristles, extending about half-way to the margin of the carapace. First row of eyes shorter than the second in ratio 21: 25, slightly curved downwards. The ratio of eyes AME: ALE: PME: PLE = 5:4: 10:8. AME separated from each other by 2/5 of their diameter, from PME by the same distance, and from ALE by half that distance, PME separated from each other by 7/10 of their diameter. PILE separated from each other by 20/8 of their diameter and from PME by 10/8 of their diameter. The quadrangle of the posterior eyes wider behind than long in ratio 31 : 25. Clypeus 6/5 of diameter of AME. A single long bristle between AME and a transverse row of four black bristles on the clypeus below AME. Qn each side there is also a small group of bristles on the margin near the condyles of the chelicerae. Chelicerae reddish-brown clothed in front with long black bristles and white hair. Lateral condyles yellow. Promargin of furrow with three teeth, of which the median is the largest and close to the distal one which is the smallest. Retro- margin with three equal teeth. Scopula on promargin only. Lip as wide as long. Maxillae with brown scopula and clothed with black bristles. Sternum oval, truncate in front and longer than wide in ratio 50: 34. It is lightly clothed with erect black bristles. 29 Legs: 4.1.2.3. Clothed with black bristles. Scopula dense and entire on first and second tarsi and metatarsi, bisected by a longitudinal band of setae on third and fourth tarsi. The scopula on the third and fourth metatarsi is very light. Trichobothria in two rows on tibiae and tarsi, in one row on metatarsi, There are also a few lateral trichobothria on the tibiae. Tarsal claws three. Upper claws on first tarsi with four teeth, on fourth tarsi with eight teeth. Third claw bare. Palpi yellow, clothed with black bristles. Palpal claw with four teeth. The segments of the legs and palpi have the following measurements in millimetres : Leg Femur Patella Tibia Metatarsus Tarsus Total I 4-2 2°55 3-1 3-0 2:2 15:0 II 3:8 23 2:8 2:9 2-1 13-9 Ill 3°5 1:8 2:9 3°5 2-1 13:8 IV... = 49 2-4 3:9 5+6 2-7 19-5 Palpi ... 2-0 1-0 1-3 —_ 1-7 6-0 The spines on the first two pairs of legs are small, those on the ventral sur- face of the first and second metatarsi being almost hidden by the scopula. On the ventral surface of the first and second tibiae the basal and middle spines are repre- sented by small bristles. The arrangement of the spines on the legs and palpi is as follows: First leg—Femur: dorsal 1-1-1, prolateral 2 near end, retrolateral 1~1-1, ventral 0. Patella: dorsal 1-1 fine bristles, elsewhere 0. Tibia: dorsal 0, prolateral 1 small spine near middle, retrolateral 0, ventral 2—2-2, the basal and middle pairs being bristles. Metatarsus: ventral 2-2-3 small spines, else- where 0. Second leg—Femur: dorsal 1-1-1, prolateral 1-1, retrolateral 1-1, ventral 0. Patella, tibia and metatarsus armed as in first leg. Third leg—Femur: dorsal 1-1-1, prolateral 1-1, retrolateral 1-1-1, ventral 0. Patella: dorsal 1—1 fine bristles, prolateral 1, retrolateral 1, ventral 0. Tibia: dorsal 0, pro- lateral 1-1, retrolateral 1-1, ventral 2-2-2. Metatarsus: dorsal 0, prolateral 1-1-1, retrolateral 1-1-1, ventral 2-2-3. Fourth leg—Femur: dorsal 1-1-1, prolateral 1-1, retrolateral 1-1, ventral 0. Patella and tibia armed as in third leg. Metatarsus: dorsal 0, prolateral 1-1-1, retrolateral 1-1~-1, ventral 1-2-2-3. Palpus—Femur: dorsal 1-1-2, prolateral 1 near end, retrolateral 1 near end, ventral 0. Patella: dorsal 1-1 bristles, prolateral 1 bristle, elsewhere 0. Tibia: dorsal 0, prolateral 2 bristles, elsewhere 0. Tarsus: dorsal 0, prolateral 2-1 bristles, retrolateral 1 bristle, ventral 0. Abdomen oval. Spinnerets yellow. Form of epigynum is shown in pl. II, fig. 15. Locality—-Finke River, 25 miles from Abminga, South Australia; Coll. 520 (1 adult ¢). Goyder’s Lagoon Bore, South Australia; Coll. 647 (1 adult @ and 1 immature ¢ ). ' Lycosa burti n. sp. (PL II, fig. 16) . ?—Total length, 18-0 mm. Length of carapace, 8°O0 mm. Width of cara- pace, 6°0 mm. Length of abdomen, 11‘0 mm. Width of abdomen, 7-0 mm, Carapace brown (in alcohol) and densely clothed with grey hairs. A grey longitudinal band extends from eyes to posterior margin. Lateral margin grey. Dorsal surface of legs greyish-brown. Ventral surface of legs from apical third of tibia to end of tarsus much darker, Chelicerae black. Maxillae brown. Labium, sternum and coxae very dark brown. Dorsal surface of abdomen fawn with a median brown patch on front half. An indistinct pattern of transverse bars on posterior half. Sides of abdomen fawn. A dark brown, almost black, shield covers the ventral surface and extends from the epigastric furrow to the spinnerets. The middle area of the shield is somewhat lighter in colour and 30 marked by a pair of indistinct longitudinal fawn stripes. The front margin of the epigastric furrow and the region immediately surrounding the epigynum are light brown. Further towards the front the ventral surface, including the lung- covers, is dark brown. Sides of head slanting. Thoracic groove longitudinal. A median row of weak bristles extends from front of head almost to the thoracic groove. There is a pair of setae behind each PLE. A fringe of grey hairs above each of the four posterior eyes. A circlet of setae round each PME and a row of setae between the lower edge of PME and PLE. First row of eyes shorter than second row in ratio 25 : 36. The ratio of eyes AME : ALE: PME: PLE = 5:4: 15:12. The AME separated from each other by 3/5 of their diameter and by the same distance from ALE and PME. PME separated from each other by 9/15 of their diameter, and from PLE by 14/15 of their diameter, PLE separated from each other by 28/12 of their diameter. The quadrangle formed by the posterior eyes wider behind than in front in ratio 45 : 36, its length being equal to its width in front. Clypeus equal to the diameter of AME. A transverse row of four strong setae on front edge of clypeus. Chelicerae black, clothed in front with dense grey hair and long black bristles. Lateral condyles large and yellowish-brown. Promargin with three teeth. Retromargin with three teeth. Scopula dark brown and on promargin only. Labium slightly longer than wide in ratio 20 : 19, and with lateral excavations at base. Front of labium slightly emarginate. Maxillae wider in front than at base and nearly twice the length of the labium. Scopula brown, Sternum oval and longer than wide in ratio 57 : 44, It is clothed with brown hair and long black setae. Fourth coxae contiguous. Legs: 4.1.2.3. Clothed with grey hairs and black setae. All tarsi and meta- tarsi scopulate to base. In the third and fourth legs the scopula is bisected by a band of setae. In the first two pairs of legs the tibiae have a light scopula on the apical two-thirds of the ventral surface. Trichobothria in two rows on tibiae and tarsi, in one row on metatarsi. There are also a few lateral trichobothria on the sides of the tibiae near the base. Upper tarsal claws of front legs with six teeth, of hind legs with seven teeth. Lower claw small and bare. Palpal claw with about four teeth. The segments of the legs and palpi have the following measurements in millimetres: Leg Femur Patella Tibia Metatarsus Tarsus Total I. 568 2:96 4-35 4°47 2-78 20°24 IIo... = 510 2°73 3°94 412 2:90 18-79 TIT, = 4-99 2-32 3-60 4-81 2°55 18-27 IV bbe 6°84 2-90 5-45 8°12 3°36 26:67 Palpi .... 2-61 1-57 1-51 — 2°32 8-01 The spines on the legs and palpi are arranged as follows: First leg—Femur: dorsal 1~1~1, prolateral 2 near end, retrolateral 1—1-— i, ventral 0. Patella: dorsal 1-1 fine bristles, prolateral 1, elsewhere 0. Tibia: dorsal 0, prolateral 1—1, retrolateral 1 very short spine near end on left leg, O on right, ventral 2-2-2. Metatarsus: ventral 2-2-3, elsewhere 0, Second leg—Femur: dorsal 1-1-1, prolateral 1-1, retrolateral 1-1 — 1, ventral 0. Patella: dorsal 1-1 fine bristles, prolateral 1, elsewhere 0. Tibia: dorsal 0. prolateral 1-1, retrolateral 0, ventral 2-2-2. Metatarsus: ventral 2-2-3. Third leg — Femur: dorsal 1-1-1, prolateral 1-— 1, retrolateral 1-1-1, ventral 0. Patella: dorsal 1-1 fine bristles, prolateral 1, retrolateral 1, ventral 0. Tibia: dorsal 1-1, prolateral 1-1, retrolateral 1— 1, ventral 2-2-2. Metatarsus: dorsal 0, prolateral 1—1- 1, retrolateral 1-1-1, ventral 2~2~3, Fourth leg—Femur: dorsal 1-1-1, prolateral 1-1, retrolateral 1 near end, 31 ventral 0. Patella, tibia and metatarsus armed as in third leg. Palpus — Femur: dorsal 1-1-2, prolateral 1 near end, retrolateral 1 near end, ventral 0, Patella: dorsal 1—1 fine bristles, prolateral 1 bristle, elsewhere 0 . Tibia: pro- lateral 2 bristles, elsewhere 0. Tarsus: prolateral 1-1, elsewhere 0. Abdomen oval, clothed with black setae and grey hairs. The form of the epigynum is shown in pl. I, fig. 16. Locality—Burt’s Waterhole, South Australia, 55 miles south of Birdsville. Coll. 645 (1 adult @ ). Lycosa finkei n. sp. (Pl. Il, fig. 17-18) 9 —Total length, 15°O mm. Length of carapace, 6°2 mm. Width of cara- pace, 4°6 mm. Length of abdomen, 9-0 mm, Width of abdomen, 6°0 mm. Carapace brown (in alcohol) with a median longitudinal yellowish band. Interocular space black. Chelicerae black. Labium, maxillae, sternum and coxae dark brown, Dorsal surface of abdomen yellowish-brown with a faint dark brown median patch in front and five indistinct brown chevrons on posterior half. Ventral surface of abdomen fawn. A black spot immediately in front of the spinnerets and a transverse black band with a trilobed posterior edge close behind the epigastric furrow (pl. II, fig. 17). A narrow fawn band in front of the furrow. Lung-covers brown and the area between them dark brown. Spinnerets dark brown. Head with slanting sides, Thoracic groove longitudinal with a pair of setae close in front of its anterior end. The front row of eyes shorter than the second in ratio 23 :33, and curved downward. Ratio of eyes AME: ALE: PME: PLE = 5:4:13:10. The AME are separated from each other by 3/5 of their diameter, from ALE by 2/5 of their diameter and from PME by the same distance. The PME are separated from each other by 8/13 of their diameter and from PLE by once their diameter. The PLE are separated from each other by 21/10 of their diameter. The quadrangle formed by the posterior eyes is wider behind than in front in ratio 36 ; 33 and its length is equal to its width in front. The clypeus is slightly less than the diameter of AME and is provided with a transverse row of four setae. Chelicerae clothed in front with yellowish hairs and long brown setae. Pro- margin of furrow with three teeth, of which the median is the largest. Retro- margin with three subequal teeth. Maxillae wider in front than at the base and provided with a thick brown scopula. Labium slightly longer than wide in ratio 16 : 15, truncate in front and with lateral excavations at the base. Sternum oval, pointed behind, longer than wide in ratio 50: 38 and clothed with erect brown setae and short grey hairs. Legs: 4.1.2.3 Tarsi and metatarsi scopulate to base. The first and second tibiae slightly scopulate. The scopula on the third and fourth tarsi bisected by a band of setae. On the third and fourth metatarsi the scopulation is very slight and mainly on the sides of the segment. Trichobothria in two rows on tibiae and tarsi, in one row on metatarsi. Upper tarsal claws of front legs with six teeth, those of hind legs with eight teeth. Third claw small and bare. The palpal claw has four teeth. The segments of the legs and palpi have the following measure- ments in millimetres: Leg Femur Patella Tibia Metatarsus Tarsus Total I 4°5 2-4 3-4 3-4 2°3 16-0 II 4-3 2-3 3-1 3:2 2-2 15-1 III 4-1 2-0 2:6 3:8 2:3 14°8 IV 5-2 2:2 4-4 6+4 2-9 21-1 Palpi 2:2 1:2 1-2 = 1-7 6-3 32 The spines on the legs and palpi are arranged as follows: Furst leg—Femutr: dorsal 1-1-1, prolateral 2 near end, retrolateral 1-1-1, ventral 0, Patella: dorsal 1-1 fine bristles, elsewhere 0. Tibia: dorsal 0, prolateral 1, retrolateral 0, ventral 2-2-2. Metatarsus: ventral 2—2—-—3, elsewhere 0. Second leg—Femur: dorsal 1— 1-1, prolateral 1-1, retrolateral 1-1-1, ventral 0. Patella, tibia and metatarsus armed as in first leg. Third leg—Femur: dorsal 1-1-1, prolateral 1-1, retrolateral 1-1-1, ventral 0. Patella: dorsal 1-1 fine bristles, pro- lateral 1, retrolateral 1, ventral 0. Tibia: dorsal 1-1, prolateral 1-1, retro- lateral 1-1, ventral 2~2-—2. Metatarsus: dorsal 0, prolateral 1-1-1, retro- lateral 1-1-1, ventral 2-2-3. fourth leg—Femur: dorsal 1-1~—1, pro- lateral 1-1, retrolateral 1 near end, ventral 0, Patella, tibia and metatarsus armed as in third leg, Palpus—Femur: dorsal 1-1-2, prolateral 1 near end, retro- lateral 1 near end, ventral 0. Patella: dorsal 1-1 fine bristles, prolateral 1 bristle. elsewhere 0. Tibia: dorsal 1 bristle, prolateral 2 bristles, elsewhere 0. Tarsus: prolateral 1-1 bristles, retrolateral 1 bristle, elsewhere 0, Abdomen oval. The form of the epigynum is shown in pl. II, fig. 18. Locality—Finke River, 25 miles from Abminga, South Australia, Coll. 520 (l adult 9 ). Lycosa fletcheri n. sp. (PI. II, fig. 19) ?—Total length, 13-0 nm. Length of carapace, 5-0 mm. Width of cara- pace, 3-6 mm. Length of abdomen, 8-0 mm. Width of abdomen, 4-9 mm. Carapace dark brown (in alcohol) with a light brown patch surrounding the thoracic groove and a small light brown marginal spot above each coxa. Ocular space black. Surface of carapace clothed with white hairs. Legs and palpi yellowish-brown. Chelicerae nearly black. Maxillae, labium and sternum dark brown. Dorsal surface of abdomen light brown with dark brown markings. Ventral surface and sides yellowish-brown without markings. Sides of head slanting. First row of eyes shorter than second in ratio 20 : 27. Ratio of eyes AME : ALE: PME: PLE=5: 3: 10: 9. AME are separated from each other by 2/5 of their diameter, and from ALE and PME by the same distance. PME are separated from each other by 7/10 of their diameter and from PLE by once their diameter. PLE are separated from each other by 21/9 of their diameter. The quadrangle of the posterior eyes is wider than long in ratio 33:26. Each PME is partly surrounded by an irregular circle of bristles. There is a single bristle between AME, and also a row of five bristles just below and between PLE and PME. A median longitudinal row of about five weak bristles extends from the eyes to the thoracic groove. At the anterior end of the groove is a pair of bristles. Clypeus is equal to 4/5 of the diameter of AME and is furnished with a transverse row of four strong setae. Chelicerae nearly black but clothed with white hairs and long black bristles in front. Lateral condyles large. Promargin of furrow with three teeth, of which the median is the largest. Retromargin with three sub-equal teeth. Scopula brown and on promargin only. Labium as wide as long. Maxillae wider in front than at the base, with a well-developed brown scopula and black serrula. Sternum oval, longer than wide in ratio 36: 27, clothed with white hairs and, near the margin, a few brownish bristles. It ends in a sharp point between the fourth coxae. Legs: 4.1.2.3. First and second tarsi and metatarsi densely scopulate to base. Scopula on third and fourth tarsi and metatarsi not very dense and bisected by a longitudinal band of setae. The upper claws of first legs with five teeth, those of fourth legs with six teeth. Trichobothria in two rows on tibiae and tarsi, in one row on metatarsi. Palpi yellowish-brown with end segment darker. Palpal 33 claw with four teeth. The legs and palpi have the following measurements in millimetres : Leg Femur Patella Tibia Metatarsus Tarsus Total IT 3°9 1-9 2°8 2:7 1-7 13-0 II 3-6 1-7 2:5 27 1-7 12-2 III 3-1 1-6 273 2-9 1-6 11-5 IV 4-1 1-8 3-5 4-9 2-1 16:6 Palpi 1-7 0-9 1-0 —_ 1-5 5-1 dorsal 1—1 fine bristles, elsewhere 0. Tibia: dorsal 0, prolateral 1, retrolateral 0, ventral 2—2-~2. Metatarsus: ventral 2-2-3, elsewhere 0. Second leg— Femur: dorsal 1-1-1, prolateral 1—1, retrolateral 1-1-1, ventral 0. Patella armed as in first leg. Tibia: dorsal 0, prolateral 1-1, retrolateral 0, ventral 2-2-2. Metatarsus armed as in first leg. Third leg—Femur: dorsal 1-1-1, prolateral 1-1, retrolateral 1-1-1, ventral 0. Patella: dorsal 1-1 fine bristles, prolateral 1, retrolateral 1, ventral 0. Tibia: dorsal 1-1, prolateral 1-1, retro- lateral 1-1, ventral 2-2-2. Metatarsus: dorsal 0, prolateral 1-1-1, retro- lateral 1-1-1, ventral 2-2-3. Fourth leg—Femur: dorsal 1-1-1, prolateral 1-1, retrolateral 1 near end, ventral 0. Patella and tibia armed as in third leg. Metatarsus: dorsal 0, prolateral 1-1-1, retrolateral 1-1-1, ventral 1-2-2-3. Palpus—Femur: dorsal 1-1-2, prolateral 1 near end, retrolateral 1 near end, ventral 0. Patella: dorsal 1-1 fine bristles, prolateral 1 bristle, else- where 0. Tibia: dorsal 0, prolateral 1-1 bristles, retrolateral 1 bristle, ventral 0. Tarsus: dorsal 0, prolaterai 2—1 bristles, retrolateral 1 bristle, ventral 0. Abdomen oval, clothed with yellowish and brown hairs, The form of the epigynum is shown in pl. II, fig. 19. Spinnerets yellowish-brown. Locality--Charlotte Waters, Northern Territory, 27 May 1939. (1 adult @.) Lycosa goyderi n. sp. (PI. TL, fig. 20) ¢ Total length, 8-2 mm. Length of carapace, 4-4 mm. Width of carapace, 30mm. Length of abdomen, 4:1 mm. Width of abdomen, 2-9 mm. Carapace dark brown (in alcohol) with a narrow median longitudinal stripe of yellowish-brown. Caput, chelicerae, labium and sternum very dark brown, almost black. Maxillae brown. Legs yellowish-brown with faint bands of dark brown on femora and tibiae. Dorsal surface of abdomen dark brown with two pairs of dark spots near the middle and three transverse rows of indistinct spots on posterior half. Ventral surface of abdomen and spinnerets yellowish-brown. Sides of head slanting. Carapace clothed with short brown hairs. A median row of short black setae ends in a pair of bristles in front of the longitudinal thoracic groove. First row of eyes almost straight and as long as the second row of eyes. Ratio of eyes AME: ALE:PME:PLE = 11:9:21:18. The AME are separated from each other by 6/11 of their diameter, from ALE by 4/11 of their diameter, and from PME by 6/11 of their diameter. PME separated from each other by 15/21 of their diameter and from PLE by once their diameter. PLE separated from each other by 42/18 of their diameter. Quadrangle of © posterior eyes wider behind than in front in ratio 68: 52. The length of the quadrangle is equal to its width in front. There is a seta above each AME and © also a large bristle between them. The clypeus is 9/11 of the diameter of AME and is furnished with a row of four strong bristles. Chelicerae clothed in front with black bristles. The promargin armed with three teeth, of which the median is the largest. Retromargin with two teeth. c 34 Scopula brown and on promargin only. Maxillae wider in front than at the base. Labium truncate in front, as wide as long and about half the length of the maxillae. Sternum shield-shaped, longer than wide in ratio 30: 24. It is clothed with erect black setae and fine rectumbent yellowish hairs. Fourth coxae contiguous. Legs: 4.1.2.3. Light scopula on tarsi, that of the fourth tarsi being confined to the sides of the segment. The ventral surface of the fourth tarsi is occupied by a band of setae. Weak scopulation on the first and second metatarsi, none on the third and fourth metatarsi. Upper tarsal claws with about six teeth. The lower claw bare. Palpal claw with one large and two very small teeth. The segments of the legs and palpi have the following measurements in millimetres: Leg Femur Patella Tibia Metatarsus. Tarsus Total Toe, 0 1-51 2-03 1-97 1-56 9°97 Tio... «62°61 1-33 1-86 1-91 1-33 9-04 Ill ... 2:44 1-27 1-55 2-09 1-28 8-63 IV... 3°25 1-56 2:55 3+36 1-74 12-41 Palpi.. 1-39 0-69 0-81 — 1-04 3+93 The spines on the legs and palpi are arranged as follows: First leg—Femur: dorsal 1-1-1, prolateral 1 near end, elsewhere 0, Patella: dorsal 1-1 fine bristles, elsewhere 0. Tibia: dorsal 0, prolateral 1—1, retrolateral 0, ventral 2-2-2. Metatarsus: ventral 2-2-3, elsewhere 0. Second leg—YFemur: dorsal 1-1-1, prolateral 1-1, elsewhere 0. Patella: dorsal 1-1 fine bristles, prolateral 1, elsewhere 0. Tibia armed as in first leg. Metatarsus: prolateral 1 near middle and 1 apical, ventral 2-2-3, elsewhere 0. Third leg—Femur: dorsal 1-1-1, prolateral 1-1, retrolateral 1-1-1, ventral 0. Patella: dorsal 1-1 fine bristles, prolateral 1, retrolateral 1, ventral 0. Tibia: dorsal 1-1, pro- lateral 1-1, retrolateral 1-1, ventral 2-2-2. Metatarsus: dorsal 0, prolateral 1-1-1, retrolateral 1-1-1, ventral 2-2-3. Fourth leg—Femur: dorsal 1-1-1, prolateral 1-1, retrolateral 1 near end, ventral 0. Patella, tibia and metatarsus armed as in third leg. Palpus—Femur: dorsal 1-1-1, prolateral 1, retrolateral 1, ventral 0. Patella: dorsal 1-1 fine bristles, prolateral 1 bristle, elsewhere 0, Tibia: dorsal 0, prolateral 1-1 bristles, retrolateral 1 bristle, ventral 0. Tarsus: dorsal 0, prolateral 2-1 bristles, elsewhere 0. Abdomen oval. Clothed with yellowish hairs and short black setae. A fringe of white setae in front. The form of the epigynum is shown in pl. I, fig. 20. Spinnerets normal for genus. A smali colulus present. Locality—Goyder’s Lagoon Bore. South Australia, Coll. 647 (1 adult ¢ ). Lycosa halei n. sp. (PI. I, fig. 21) ?—Total length, 20°0 mm. Length of carapace, 9°5 mm. Width of cara- pace, 8°0 mm. Length of abdomen, 11:0 mm. Width of abdomen, 7°5 mm, Carapace yellowish-brown (in alcohol), clothed with recumbent white hair. Radial grooves dark brown and clothed with black hair. Legs light brown, clothed with white hair and black bristles. Tarsi appear black underneath owing to the dark scopula, Labium, sternum and chelicerae dark brown, Fang nearly black. Dorsal surface of abdomen light brown speckled with black, the small black spots forming six transverse bands. Ventral surface of abdomen light brown with a narrow transverse black band immediately behind the epigastric furrow, Behind the band are a few black spots. Lung-covers light brown. Area between lung- covers nearly black. Spinnerets light brown, clothed with black hairs. Carapace convex. Head with slanting sides. Thoracic groove longitudinal. First row of eyes shorter than second. Ratio of eyes AME: ALE: PME: 35 PLE — 8: 6:21:18. AME separated from each other by 5/8 of their diameter, from ALE by 3/8 of their diameter and from PME by 4/8 of their diameter. PME separated from each other by 14/21 of their diameter and from PLE by 20/21 of their diameter. PLE separated. from each other by 46/18 of their diameter. Quadrangle of posterior eyes wider than long in ratio 62 : 46. A row of four strong bristles, together with several smaller setae and white hairs on clypeus. Clypeus equal to twice the diameter of AME. PME surrounded by a circlet of white hairs. A black bristle between AME and a pair of black bristles a little above AME. An irregular circle of black bristles round each PME. Three or four black bristles behind each PLE. Chelicerae clothed with white hair interspersed with slender black setae. Pro- margin of furrow with three tecth, of which the median is the largest. Retro- margin with three equal teeth. Scopula on promargin only and of a dark brown colour. Labium as wide as long. Maxillae wider in front than at base. Scopula dark brown. Serrula short. Sternum longer than wide in ratio 65 : 60, pointed behind, truncate in front and clothed with erect black setae. Legs: 4.1.2.3, All tarsi and metatarsi scopulate to base. The tarsal scopulae bisected by a longitudinal band of setae. The band is more strongly developed on the third and fourth than on the first and second tarsi. In the first two pairs of legs the tibiae are also scopulate almost to the base, Trichobothria are in two rows on the tibiae and tarsi, and in one row on metatarsi. On the tibiae there are also a few lateral trichobothria on each side near the base. Tarsal claws three. Superior claws with six teeth, inferior claw without teeth. The segments of the legs and palpi have the following measurements in millimetres. Leg Femur Patelia Tibia Metatarsus Tarsus Total I 7°5 3-6 5°3 5°7 3°5 25°6 IT 8-0 3-4 5-2 6-0: 3:5 26°1 Il 7-0 32 5°3 6-0 3°5 25:0 IV 8-0 355 7-0 8-5 4-1 31-1 Palpi 3°2 1-8 2-6 —_— 3-2 10-8 The spines on the legs and palpi are arranged as follows: First leg—Femur: dorsal 1-1-1, prolateral 2 at apex, retrolateral 1-1-1, ventral 0. Patella: dorsal 1—1 fine bristles, prolateral 1 near middle, elsewhere 0. Tibia: dorsal 0, prolateral 1-1, retrolateral 0, ventral 2-2-2. Metatarsus: dorsal 0, prolateral 1-1-1, retrolateral 0, ventral 2-2-3. Second leg—Femur: dorsal 1-1-1, prolateral 1~1, retrolateral 1 — 1-1, ventral 0. Patella and tibia armed as in first leg. Metatarsus: dorsal 0, prolateral 1-1, retrolateral 0, ventral 2-2-3. Third leg—Femur: dorsal 1-1-1, prolateral 1-1 -1, retrolateral 1-1-1, ventral 0. Patella: dorsal 1—1 fine bristles, prolateral 1, retrolateral 1, ventral 0. Tibia: dorsal 1-1, prolateral 1—1, retrolateral 1~—1, ventral 2-1-2. Meta- tarsus: dorsal 0, prolateral 1-1-1. retrolateral 1-1-1, ventral 2-2-3. Fourth leg—Femur: dorsal 1-1-1, prolateral 1-1-1 on left leg and 1- 2-1 on right, retrolateral 1 at end on left leg and 1-1 —1 on right, ventral 0. Patella armed as in third leg. Tibia: dorsal 1-1, prolateral 1-1, retrolateral 1-1, ventral 2-2-2. Metatarsus: dorsal 0, prolateral 1-1-1, retrolateral 1-1-1, ventral 2-2—1—3, Palpus—Femur: dorsal 1-1-2, prolateral 1 at end, retro- lateral 1 at end, ventral 0. Patella 1-1 fine bristles, prolateral 1 near base, else- where 0, Tibia: dorsal 1 bristle, prolateral 1-1 bristles, elsewhere 0, Tarsus: dorsal 0, prolateral 2—1 bristles, retrolateral 1 bristle, ventral 0. Abdomen ovate, clothed with recumbent white hairs interspersed with black bristles, many of which arise from little spots composed of black hairs. The form of the epigynum is shown in pl. II, fig. 21. Spinnerets normal for the genus. Colulus distinct. 36 Locahity—Eleven miles east of Hale River, Simpson Desert, Coll. 549 (1 adult ¢). This species bears some resemblance to Lycosa palabunda L. Koch, but differs from it in the form of the epigynum, in the arrangement of the eyes and in the markings on carapace. Lycosa madigani n. sp. (Pl. Il, fig. 22-25) 9—Total length, 16:0 mm. Length of carapace, 9°0 mm. Width of cara- pace, 6°0 mm. Length of abdomen, 8°O0 mm. Width of abdomen, 5:0 mm. Carapace yellowish-brown (in alcohol) with a wide longitudinal band of black hairs on each side. Margin yellow. Legs yellow-brown. Tarsi and meta- tarsi dark underneath. ‘Sternum black. Prolateral surface of first coxae black. Labium and maxillae dark brown. Chelicerae almost black. Abdomen brown above with a faint pattern of transverse bars. Sides of abdomen yellowish-brown. Ventral surface yellowish-brown with a large black shield behind the epigastric furrow (pl. II, fig. 22). The shield reaches about half-way to spinnerets. Lung- covers and region in front of epigastric furrow yellowish-brown. Head with slanting sides. Thoracic groove longitudinal with a pair of setae immediately in front of its anterior end. First row of eyes shorter than the second, Ratio of eyes AME: ALE: PME: PLE: = 8:5: 19: 17. AME separated from each other by 4/8 of their diameter, from ALE by 2/8 of their diameter, and from PME by 2/8 of their diameter, PME separated from each other by 13/19 of their diameter and from PLE by 17/19 of their diameter. PLE separated from each other by 33/17 of their diameter. Quadrangle of posterior eyes wider than long in ratio 54: 47. A row of four large bristles on clypeus. Behind each PLE an oblique row of six long setae. The four posterior eyes with a dorsal fringe of yellowish hairs and long brown setae. A number of setae which point forward occupy the space enclosed by the quadrangle of the posterior eyes. Chelicerae clothed in front with white hairs and black bristles. Condyles well developed. Promargin of furrow with three teeth, of which the median is the largest. Retromargin with two equal teeth. Scopula on promargin only. Fang black and well curved. Labium longer than wide in ratio 22: 19. Maxillae wider in front than at the base. Clothed with black setae. Scopula dark brown. Serrula short. Sternum longer than wide in ratio 53 : 47, black and clothed with black setae. Legs: 4.1.2.3. All tarsi scopulate, but the scopulation on the third and fourth tarsi is not very dense and is divided by a broad band of black setae. A scopula is also present on the first and second metatarsi but not on the third and fourth. In the first two pairs of legs the scopula extends on to the ventral surface of the tibiae. Trichobothria in two rows on tarsi and tibiae, in one row on metatarsi. There are also a few lateral trichobothria on each side of the tibiae near the base. Tarsal claws three. The superior claws with eight teeth, inferior claw without teeth. Palpal claw with seven teeth, The segments of the legs and palpi have the following measurements in millimetres : Leg Femur Patella Tibia Metatarsus Tarsus Total Too... 656 2°9 3-9 3-7 2°8 18-9 ITI... 5-4 2°8 3°6 3-9 2-7 18-4 III ane 5-0 2-5 3°3 4-5 2-9 18+2 IV... 65 31 4-6 6-0 3-2 23-4 Palpi ... 2:+9 1:4 1-4 — 2-0 77 The spines on the legs and palpi are arranged as follows: First leg—Femur: dorsal 1-1-1, prolateral 2 near end, retrolateral 1—1—1, ventral 0. Patella: 37 dorsal 1 ~1 fine bristles, prolateral 1, elsewhere 0. Tibia: prolateral 1-1, ventral 2-2-2, elsewhere 0. Metatarsus: ventral 2-2-3, elsewhere 0. Second leg— Femur: dorsal 1-1-1, prolateral 1-1-1, retrolateral 1- 1-1, ventral 0. Patella and tibia.armed as in first leg. Metatarsus: prolateral 1, ventral 2-2-3, elsewhere 0, Third leg—Femur armed as in second leg. Patella: dorsal 1-1 fine bristles, prolateral 1, retrolateral 1, ventral 0, Tibia: dorsal 1-1, prolateral 1-1, retrolateral 1-1, ventral 2-2-2. Metatarsus: dorsal 0, prolateral 1-1-1, retrolateral 1-1-1, ventral 2-2-3. Fourth leg—Femur: dorsal 1-1-1, prolateral 1-1, retrolateral 1-1, ventral 0. Patella: tibia and meta- tarsus armed as in third leg. Palpus-—-Femur: dorsal 1-1-2, prolateral 1 near end, retrolateral 1 near end,.ventral 0. Patella: dorsal 1-1 fine bristles, pro- lateral 1 bristle, elsewhere 0, Tibia: dorsal 1 bristle, prolateral 1-1 bristles, elsewhere 0. Tarsus: dorsal 0, prolateral 2-1, retrolateral 1, all bristles, ventral 0. Abdomen ovate. Dorsal surface clothed with light brown hairs and fine black bristles. Five pairs of small spots composed of black hairs on anterior half. Sides and ventral surface, excepting the black shield behind the epigastric furrow, clothed with pale yellow hairs. The form of the epigynum is somewhat variable. (See pl. II, fig. 23 and 24.) Spinnerets clothed with dark hairs. Colulus present. é—Total length, 10°8 mm. Length of carapace, 5-7 mm. Width of cara- pace, 4*1 mm. Length of abdomen, 5°1. Width of abdomen, 3°5 mm. The male resembles the female in colouration and markings of carapace, legs, chelicerae, labium, sternum, ventral surface of abdomen and spinnerets. The dorsal surface of the abdomen, however, is marked in the anterior two-thirds with a median longitudinal patch of dark brown, while the sides are speckled with small black spots. Carapace as in female. First row of eyes shorter than second. Ratio of eyes AME: ALE: PME: PLE = 6:4: 13:12, AME separated from each other by 4/6 of their diameter, from ALE by 1/6 of their diameter and from PME by 2/6 of their diameter. PME separated from each other by 10/13 of their diameter and from PLE by 11/13 of their diameter. PLE separated from each other by 21/12 of their diameter. The quadrangle of the posterior eyes wider than long in ratio 35 : 32. Chelicerae clothed in front with white hairs and slender black bristles. Pro- margin with three teeth, retromargin with two teeth. Scopula on promargin only. Labium longer than wide in ratio 13 : 11. Maxillae as in female. Sternum black, longer than wide in ratio 45 ; 36, clothed with black setae. Legs: 4.1.2.3. The first and fourth pairs of legs are equal in length. AN tarsi except the fourth scopulate. A scopula is also present on the first and second, but not on the third and fourth metatarsi. The trichobothria are arranged as in the female. Superior tarsal claws with about eleven teeth. The inferior claw small and bare. The form of the palpus is shown in pl. IJ, fig. 25. The segments of the legs and palpi have the following measurements in millimetres: Leg Femur Patella Tibia Metatarsus Tarsus Total I 4-9 23 3:7 4-2 2-9 18°60 IT 4-8 2°3 3-6 4-0 2:8 17-5 Til 4-6 2-1 3°2 4-4 2-7 17-0 Iv 4-9 1-8 3-8 4-8 2-7 18-0 Palpi 2-4 1-2 1-2 —_ 1-7 6:5 The spines on the legs are larger and more numerous than in the female, and those of the fourth tibiae are curved. The arrangement of the spines is as follows: First leg—Femur: dorsal 1—1-—1, prolateral 2 near end, retrolateral 1-1-—1, ventral 0. Patella: dorsal 1-1 fine bristles, prolateral 1, retrolateral 1, ventral 0. Tibia: dorsal 1, prolateral 1-1, retrolateral 1-1, ventral 2~2~—2. Metatarsus: 38 dorsal 0, prolateral 1-1 -—1, retrolateral 1-1-1, ventral 2-2-3. Second leg— Femur: dorsal 1-1-1, prolateral 1-1, retrolateral 1-1-1, ventral 0. Patella, tibia and metatarsus armed as in first lege. Third leg—-Femur: dorsal 1-1-1, prolateral 1-1, retrolateral 1-1-1, ventral 0. Patella: dorsal 1-1 fine bristles, prolateral 1, retrolateral 1, ventral 0. Tibia: dorsal 1-1, prolateral 1~1, retro- lateral 1—1, ventral 2~2-—2. Metatarsus : dorsal 2 at apex, prolateral ]-1-1. retrolateral 1-1-1, ventral 2-2-3. Fourth leg—Femur: dorsal 1-1-1, prolateral 1-1, retrolateral 1 near end, ventral 0. Patella: dorsal 1-1 fine bristles, prolateral 1, retrolateral 1, ventral 0. Tibia and metatarsus armed as in third leg. Palpus—Femur: dorsal 1-1-1, prolateral 1 near end, retrolateral 1 near end, ventral 0. Patella: dorsal 1-1 bristles, prolateral 1 bristle, elsewhere 0. Tibia: dorsal 1 bristle, prolateral 1-1 bristles, elsewhere 0. Tarsus: ventral 4 at apex, elsewhere 0. Abdomen oval, shorter than carapace. Ventral surface with a black shield behind epigastric furrow as in female. Spinnerets light brown clothed with dark hair. Locality—Six miles north of junction of Todd and Hale Rivers, Coll. 540 (1 adult ¢ and 1 pullus). Centre of Simpson Desert, Coll 570 (2 adult ¢@ @ ). Indinda Well, near Andado Station, Northern Territory (1 adult 9). Family OXYOPIDAE Genus Oxyores Latreille 1804 OXYOPES ELEGANS L., Koch 1878 Locality--Andado Station, Northern Territory (1 immature @ ). The immaturity of this specimen makes the specific identity somewhat doubt- ful. It is the only member of the genus Oxyopes in the present collection. Three species belonging to this genus were collected by the Horn Scientific Expedition to Central Australia in 1894. Family ZODARIIDAE Sub-Family ZODARIINAE Genus STorRENA Walckenaer 1805 Storena toddi n. sp. (PI. II, fig. 26-28; pl. ITI, fig. 29-30) é—Total length, 4-1 mm. Length of carapace, 2:1 mm. Width of cara- pace, 1-5 mm. Length of abdomen, 2°0 mm. Width of abdomen, 1:3 mm. Carapace yellow (in alcohol) with a V-shaped patch of dark brown extending from the sides of the head region to the posterior margin. Clypeus dark brown. Legs yellow. Chelicerae and palpi slightly darker than legs. Sternum, Jabium and maxillae pale yellow. Dorsal surface of abdomen dark brown with a white spot above the spinncrets and four pairs of white spots arranged as shown in pl. 11, fig. 26. Sides of the abdomen white, ventral surface light brown. Carapace smooth and without bristles. A few minute hairs on clypeus and round the margin, Thoracic groove longitudinal. Eyes in two strongly pro- curved rows, All eyes with black rims. The interocular space is black except between the PME. Eye ratio AME: ALE: PME: PLE = 9:7:6:8. The eyes are arranged as shown in pl. II, fig. 27. The AME are separated from each other by 5/9 of their diameter, from ALE by 3/9 and from PME by 7/9 of their diameter. The PME are separated from each other by 9/6 of their 39 diameter and from PLE by the same distance. The PLE are separated from ALE by 3/8 of their diameter and from AME by 4/8 of their diameter. The quadrangle formed by the median eyes is wider in front than behind in ratio 23 : 21, and its length is slightly less than its width in front. The clypeus is very high and slopes steeply to the front (pl. II, fig. 28). The distance from AME to the margin of the clypeus is equal to 38/9 of the diameter of AME. There is a small seta between the AME and in line with their lower margin. A thin dark brown line extends from the eye-space down the middle of the clypeus almost to the margin. Chelicerae conical, clothed in front with black hairs. Lateral condyles present. Margins of furrow without teeth. Promargin with a black scopula. Fang short. Maxillae strongly converging, provided with a black scopula. Serrula absent. Labium triangular, its apex reaching almost to the front of the maxillae. Sternum shield-shaped, longer than wide in ratio 18: 16, and lightly clothed with small hairs which point backwards. There are a few erect setae near the margin. Legs: 4.1.3.2. Slender, tapering and clothed with short barbed hairs. Trichobothria in two rows on tibiae, in one row on metatarsi and tarst. Three tarsal claws. The upper claws similar and armed with about eleven teeth, The lower claw small and bare. The form of the palpus is shown in pl. III, fig. 29. The segments of the legs and palpi have the following measurements in milli- metres : Leg Femur Patella Tibia Metatarsus! Tarsus Total I... 1:86 0-58 1-51 1-51 1-16 6-62 II — 1-74 0-58 1-39 1-57 1-04 6-32 Ill... 1:74 0-64 1-27 1-80 0-99 6°44 IV...) 2-09 0-70 1-74 2°44 1-28 8-25 Palpi ... @-81 0-35 0-17 — 1-16 2°49 The spines on the legs and palpi are arranged as follows: First leg—Femur : dorsal 1-1-1, prolateral 1 near end, elsewhere 0. Patella: ventral 2 near end. elsewhere 0. Tibia: dorsal 1 near base, prolateral 1-1, retrolateral 0, ventral 2-2-2 and about 26 small spines distributed over the whole ventral surface (pl. IIT, fig. 30). Metatarsus: dorsal 2 at apex, prolatera] 1-1, retrolateral 1 at apex, ventral 2—2~-2 and about nine small spines on basal half. Second leg— Femur: dorsal 1-1-1, prolateral 1 near end, elsewhere 0. Patella: prolateral 1-1, elsewhere 0. Tibia: dorsal 1 near base, prolateral 1-1, retrolateral 0, ventral 2-2-2. Metatarsus: dorsal 2 at apex, prolateral 1-1, retrolateral 1 at apex, ventral 2~2-2. Third leg—Femur: dorsal 1-1-1, prolateral 1-1, retrolateral 1 near end, ventral 0. Patella: dorsal 1, prolateral 1 ~1-—1-1, else- where 0. Tibia: dorsal 1-1, prolateral 1-1, retrolateral 1 near end, ventral 2-1-2. Metatarsus: dorsal 2 at apex, prolateral 1-1-1, retrolateral 1-1-1, ventral 2-2-2. Fourth leg—Femur: dorsal 1-1-1, prolateral 1 near end; elsewhere 0. Patella: dorsal 1, prolateral 1-1—1-1, elsewhere 0. Tibia: dorsal 1-1, prolateral 1-1-1, retrolateral 1 near end, ventral 1-1-2, Meta- tarsus: dorsal 2 at apex, prolateral 1-1-1, retrolateral 1-1-1, ventral 2-2 ~-2-. Palpus—Femut: dorsal 1 —1, prolateral 0, retrolateral 1 near end, ventral 1-1-1. slender bristles. Patella: dorsal 1 near base, prolateral 1, elsewhere 0. Tibia: dorsal 0, prolateral 2 bristles, elsewhere 0. Tarsus: ventral 6 near apex. Abdomen oval, clothed with very small fine hairs. At anterior end are six slender bristles, arranged three on each side just above petiolus, Anterior spin- nerets much longer than the posterior pair, which are small and indistinct. Middle pair not visible. Locality—-Six miles north of junction of Todd and Hale Rivers, Coll. 540 (1 adult 3). % 40 Family THERIDIIDAE Sub-Family LATRODECTINAE Genus Latrropectus Walckenaer 1805 LaTRODECTUS HASSELTIZ Thorell 1870 Locality—-Camp No. 37, Cowarie Station, South Australia (1 adult 9). This poisonous spider is widely distributed throughout Australia, including Tasmania. It also occurs in New Zealand, India and Arabia. Family ARGIOPIDAE Sub-Family ARGIOPINAE Genus ARGIOPE Audouin, 1825 ARGIOPE PRoTENSA L. Koch 1871 Locality—Six miles north of junction of Todd and Hale Rivers, Coll, 540 (1 pullus). Sixteen miles east of Hay River, near Queensland border, Coll. 608 {1 2). Fourteen miles north-east of Cowarie Station, South Australia, Coll. 659 (1 pullus). Twenty miles west of Cowarie Station, South Australia, Coll. 661 (1 pullus). Camp No. 16, Hay River, near Queensland border (1 pullus), Camp No. 21, Annandale Station, Queensland (1 9). Camp No. 37, Cowarie Station, South Australia (1 2 mature and 1 pullus). Sub-Family ARANEINAE Genus ARANEUS Clerk 1757 ARANEUS TRANSMARINUS (Keyserling) Locality—Finke River, 25 miles from Abminga, South Australia, Coll. 520 {1 9). Birdsville-Marree Track, Mount Gason, South Australia, Coll. 651 (1 @). Twenty miles west of Cowarie Station, South Australia, Coll 661 (1 2). Camp No. 21, Annandale Station, Queensland (2 2°9). Camp No. 23, thirty miles north-west of Birdsville, Queensland (1 ¢ ). Sub-Family NEPHILINAE Genus NEepHiILa Leach 1815 NEPHILA IMPERATRIX L, Koch 1871 Locality—One mile east of Andado Station, Northern Territory, Coll. 503 (1 ¢). Finke River, 25 miles from Abminga, South Australia, Coll. 520 (1 ¢@). Sixteen miles east of Hay River, near Queensland border, Coll. 608 (1 ¢). Kaliduwarry Station, Queensland, Coll. 620 (2 @ 9). Birdsville-Marree Track, Mount Gason, South Australia, Coll. 651 (1 @). Twenty miles west of Cowarie Station, South Australia, Coll. 661 (1 2). Camp No. 2, twenty-two miles north of Andado Bore No. 1, Andado Station, Northern Territory (1 pullus). Camp No. 19, Hay Rvier, near Queensland border (1 2). Camp No. 21, Annandale Station, Queensland (1 9). Camp No. 23, thirty miles north-west of Birdsville, Queensland (1 2). Family CTENIDAE Sub-Family CALOCTENINAE Genus Opo Keyserling 1887 Odo australiensis n. sp. (Pl. III, fig. 31-34) @—Total length, 9°7 mm. Length of carapace, 4°35 mm. Width of cara- pace, 3°13. mm. Length of abdomen, 6°09 mm. Width of abdomen, 3°71 mm. 4} Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust., 1944 Vol. 68, Plate III 42 Carapace yellow (in alcohol) with four irregular dark brown patches on each side. Legs yellow with faint brownish rings, Chelicerae reddish-brown with a dark brown patch in front. Maxillae, palpi, labium and sternum yellow. Abdomen yellow with four pairs of small dark brown marks in the middle third of the dorsal surface. Sides of abdomen speckled with dark brown. Carapace convex, clothed with a band of white silky hairs near the margin, and above this a band of dark brown hairs extending from PLE to posterior margin. Thoracic groove longitudinal, Front of groove ends in a thick patch of brown hairs. A median row of small setae extends from eyes to the thoracic groove. A long seta behind and a row of six setae above each PLE. The eyes are arranged in two strongly recurved rows (pl. III, fig. 31). Ratio of eyes AME: ALE: PME: PLE = 7:5:9: 10. AME separated from each other by 2/7 of their diameter, from ALE by the same distance and from PME by 4/7 of their diameter. The PME are separated from each other by 2/9 of their diameter, from PLE by 5/9 of their diameter and from ALE by 4/9 of their diameter. The posterior row of eyes is longer than the front row in ratio 32 : 26. The quadrangle formed by the four median eyes is wider behind than in front in ratio 20 : 17, and its width behind is equal to its length. Clypeus narrow, being equal to 6/7 of AME. A row of about eleven setae along margin of clypeus. Chelicerae conical. Furnished in front with a number of long brownish bristles. Lateral condyles large. Promargin of furrow with three teeth, of which the middle one is the largest. Retromargin with two teeth. A scopula is present on the promargin. Maxillae parallel. Clothed with long yellowish setae on outer side. Scopula extending slightly onto the ventral surface. Labium wider than long in ratio 20 : 15, excavated at the base, and not exceeding half the length of the maxillae (pL. ITI, fig. 32). Sternum slightly convex, longer than wide in ratio 50:47, clothed with brownish setae and white hair around the margin. The setae near the first coxae are larger than those on other parts of the sternum. The fourth coxae meet behind the sternum. Legs: 4.3.1.2, Trochanters notched. All tarsi and metatarsi scopulate. In the first two pairs of legs the scopulation extends onto the sides of the basal halt of the tibiae. The scopulae of the third and fourth metatarsi and tarsi are bisected by a longitudinal band of setae. Trichobothria in two rows on tarsi and tibiae, in one row on metatarsi. Two tarsal claws which are long and slightly curved. About five teeth on the claws of the first tarsi, and about eight on those of the fourth. Palpal claw with five teeth. The segments of the legs and palpi have the following measurements in millimetres: Leg Femur Patella Tibia Metatarsug Tarsus Total TI... 360 1-74 2:96 2:38 1+74 12-42 i NSPS) 1-68 2-84 2-32 1-74 11-83 Wi... = 360 1-56 2:78 2°96 1-91 12-81 TV...) 481 1-74 4-06 4°23 2-20 17-04 Palpi ... = 1-74 0-93 0-81 — 1-45 4:93 Spines on legs and palpi are arranged as follows: first leg—Femur: dorsal 1—1-—1, prolateral 2 near end, retrolateral 1 near middle, ventral 0. Patella 0. Tibia: dorsal 0, prolateral 1-1, retrolateral 0, ventral 2-2-1. Metatarsus: ventral 2 near base, elsewhere 0. Second leg-—-Femur: dorsal 1~1-—1, prolateral 1—1~-1, retrolateral 1 near middle, ventral 0. Patella 0. Tibia: dorsal 0, pro- lateral 1-1, retrolateral 0, ventral 2—2-—2. Metatarsus: ventral 2 near base, elsewhere 0. Third leg—Femur: dorsal 1-1-1, prolateral left 1-1-—1-1 (right 2-1-1-1), retrolateral 1-—1-—1-1, ventral 0. [Patella 0. Tibia: dorsal 2—1, prolateral 1-1, retrolateral 1-1, ventral 2-2-2. Metatarsus : dorsal 0, prolateral 1-2-1, retrolateral 2-1-1, ventral 2--O~1, Fourth 43 leg—Femur: dorsal 1-1-1, prolateral 1-1-0 -1, retrolateral 1 near end, ventral 0. Patella. Tibia: as for tibia of third leg. Metatarsus: dorsal 0, prolateral 1-2-2, retrolateral 2-2-2, ventral 2-2-1. Palpus—Femur : dorsal 1-1-1, prolateral 1 near end, retrolateral 1 near end, ventral 0. Patella: dorsal 1~1, prolateral 1, retrolateral 0, ventral 0. Tibia: dorsal 1-1, prolateral 2-2, elsewhere 4. Tarsus: dorsal 1-1, prolateral 2-2, retrolateral 2—2, ventral 3 near claw. ; Abdomen oval, clothed with white hair and fine brown setae. In front there are dark curved bristles. The epigynum has the form shown in pl. III, fig. 33. Six spinnerets. The anterior pair cylindrical and two-segmented. The end seg- ment is very small and sunken in the apex of the first segment. The posterior spinnerets slightly longer than the anterior. The middle spinnerets slender and hidden by the others. §—Total length 6-°9 mm. Length of carapace, 3-48 mm. Width of carapace, 2°61 mm. Length of abdomen, 3-48 mm. Width of abdomen, 2-09 mm. The colouration and markings as in the female. The body, however, is some- what smaller and the legs longer and more slender, The eyes are arranged in two strongly recurved rows. The AME are rela- tively larger than those of the female. Ratio of eyes AME: ALE: PME: PLE = 7:4:5:5. The AME are separated from each other by 2/7 of their diameter, from ALE by 1/7 of their diameter, and from PME by 3/7 of their diameter. The PME are separated from each other by 2/5 of their diameter and from PLE by 4/5 of their diameter, The PILE are separated from ALE by 4/5 of their diameter. The posterior row of eyes is longer than the front row in ratio 25: 21. Owing to the large size of the AME the quadrangle formed by the median eyes is wider in front than behind in ratio 14: 12. It is longer than its front width in ratio 15 : 14. The clypeus is 5/7 of the diameter of AME. The chelicerae resemble those of the female. Vhe promargin of the furrow is armed with three teeth, the retromargin with two. The maxillae as in the female. The labium wider than long in ratio 13 : 9 and less than half the length of the maxillae. The base of the labium is not so strongly excavated as in the female. Sternum oval, convex and slightly longer than wide in ratio 45 : 43. Fourth coxae meet behind sternum. Legs: 4.1.3.2. Long and slender. All tarsi and wmetatarsi scopulate. Trichobothria as in female. Two tarsal claws, similar and armed with about 8 teeth. The palpus has the form shown in pl. IT, fig. 34, The tibia is short and on its retrolateral side there is a short black bifid apophysis. The segments of the legs and palpi have the following measurements in millimetres : Leg Femur Patella Tibia Metatarsus Tarsus Total I a. ~—6-4°06 1-45 3-60 3°36 2-32 14-79 IT Jot 3-88 1-39 3:48 3:36 2°26 14-37 Wi. 3°77 1-28 3-19 3°83 2-38 14°45 IV... 493 1-45 4-29 5°22 2-78 18°67 Palpi .. 1-51 1-33 0-40 ne 1-51 4°75 Spines on the legs and palpi are arranged as follows: First leg—Femur: dorsal 1-1-1, prolateral 2 near end, retrolateral 1~1—1, ventral 0. Patella 0. Tibia: dorsal 1, prolateral 1-1, retrolateral 1-1, ventral 2-2-2. Metatarsus: dorsal 1, prolateral 1-1, retrolateral 1-1, ventral 2~1. Second leg—Femur: dorsal 1-1-1, prolateral 1-1-1, retrolateral 1- 1-1-1, ventral 0. Patella 2. Tibia: dorsal 1, prolateral 1-1, retrolateral 1-1, ventral 2-2-2. Metatarsus: dorsal 1, prolateral 1—1, retrolateral 1-1, ventral 2—1. Third leg—Femur: dorsal 1-1-1, prolateral 1-1-1 -1, retrolateral 1-1-1-1, ventral 0. Patella 0, Tibia: dorsal 1-1. prolateral 1-1. retrolateral 1-1-1, ventral 44 2-2-2. Metatarsus: dorsal 0, prolateral 1-2-1, retrolateral 2-2-1, ventral 2-1-1. Fourth leg—Femur: dorsal 1-1-1, prolateral 1—1-—1-—1, retro- lateral 1~1~-1, ventral 0. Patella 0. Tibia: dorsal 1-1, prolateral 1-1, retro- lateral 1-1-1 ventral 3-2-2. Metatarsus: dorsal 0, prolateral 2-2-2, retro- lateral 2-2-2, ventral 2-2-1. Palpus—Femur: dorsal 1-1-1, prolateral 1 near end, retrolateral 1 near end, ventral 0. Patella: dorsal 1—1 bristles, pro- lateral 1, elsewhere 0. Tibia: dorsal 1 bristle, prolateral 1—1 bristles, retro- lateral 1 bristle, ventral 0. Abdomen oval and fringed in front with dark curved bristles which are coarser and more numerous than in the female. Locality — Eleven miles east of Hale River, Simpson Desert, Coll. 549 (1 adult ¢). Centre of Simpson Desert, No. 8 Camp, Coll. 567 (1 adult @ ). Family EUSPARASSIDAE Sub-Family EUSPARASSINAE Genus Isopena L. Koch 1875 IsopEDA pEssLERI (Thorell) Heteropoda pessleri Thorell 1870, Ofv. K. Vet. Akad. Forh., 387. lsopeda pessleri L. Koch 1875, Arachn. Austral., 684. Tsopeda pessleri H. R. Hogg 1896, Horn Exped., Zool., Ar., 342. lsopeda pessleri H. R. Hogg 1902, Proc. Zool. Soc. Lond., 444. Locality —Camp No, 16, Hay River, near Queensland border, Coll. 606 (229 and 2 pullus). Kaliduwarry Station, Queensland, Coll. 620 (1 ¢). Goyder’s Lagoon Bore, South Australia (1 pullus). Andado Station, Northern Territory (2 pullus). Genus PeprAna Simon 1880 PEDIANA HORNI (Hogg) /sopeda horni H. R. Hogg 1896, Horn Exped., Zool., Ar., 340. Pediana horni H. R. Hogg 1902, Proc. Zool. Soc., Lond., 462. In his original description of this species Hogg (1896, 340) states that “on tibia III and IV there is one spine on the upper side.” Some years later (1902, 462) he transferred the species to the genus Pediana and said that there are “no spines on tibia III or IV.” In view of these contradictory statements it is difficult to identify the species, However, the specimen in the present collection agrees very closely with Hogg’s original description, and possesses a dorsal spine on the third and fourth tibiae. Locality—Finke River, 25 miles from Abminga, South Australia, Coll. 520 (1 adult 2). PEpIANA REGINA (L. Koch) Heteropoda regina L. Koch 1875, Arachn. Austral., 716. Pediana regina H. R. Hogg 1902, Proc. Zool. Soc. Lond., 460, Locality—Goyder’s Lagoon Bore. South Australia, Coll. 647 (1 pullus). Sub-Family MICROMMATINAE Genus Oxios Walckenaer 1873 OLI0S INFRAMACULATUS (Hogg) Heteropoda inframaculata H. R. Hogg 1896, Horn, Exped., Zool., Ar., 343. Neosparassus inframaculatus H. R. Hogg 1902, Proc. Zool. Soc. Lond., 428. Locality—Camp No. 13, 24 miles west of Hay River, Simpson Desert (1 pullus). ? 45 Family THOMISIDAE Sub-Family MISUMENINAE Genus THArpyna L. Koch 1874 Tharpyna simpsoni n. sp. (PL. ITI, fig. 35-39) ?—Total length, 5-6 mm. Length of carapace, 2:0 mm. Width of cara- pace, 2;°0 mm. Length of abdomen, 3-8 mm. Width of abdomen, 3-4 mm. Carapace dark chocolate-brown with cream spots (in alcohol), Radial grooves lighter brown. Face, sides and ocular tubercles cream with brownish blotches. Femora cream, spotted and blotched with dark brown on dorsal, ventral and prolateral surfaces. Retrolateral surface dark brown. Other podomeres with brown and cream markings not so distinct as on femora. Labium brown. Maxillae brown towards inner side and base, cream towards outer side and apex. Sternum cream with brown blotches. Dorsal surface of abdomen almost covered by an irregular brownish-black patch, marked with a few cream spots (pl. III. fig. 35). Sides of abdomen cream, speckled with dark brown. Ventral surface light brown, speckled with cream and dark brown. Lung-covers brown, Spin- nerets cream. The carapace is as wide as long with steep sides and flat upper surface. It is clothed with a number of coarse black setae, some of which are arranged in radial rows. The eyes are arranged in two recurved rows (pl. III, fig. 36). The posterior row is longer than the front row in ratio 112: 89. The median eyes are much smaller than the lateral eyes. All the eyes have conspicuous black pupils. The ratio of the diameters of the pupils AME: ALE: PME: PLE=6: 10:5: 10. The AME are separated from each other by 14/6, from ALE by 22/6 and from the PME by 20/6 of their pupil-diameter. The PME are separated from each other by 28/5 and from PLE by 33/5 of their pupil-diameter. The PLE are separated from ALE by 25/10 of their pupil-diameter, The median ocular quadrangle is wider than long in ratio 38 : 30. The lateral eyes are mounted on slightly raised tubercles. The chelicerae are small and cone-shaped. There are about 13 coarse setae on the front of the paturon. Margins of furrow without teeth. Fang small. Labium longer than wide in ratio 3: 2. Surface provided with about 15 short setae. Maxillae longer than labium in ratio 23 : 18, converging and almost meeting in front of lip (pl. III, fig. 37). Surface of each maxilla furnished with about 14 coarse setae. Sternum shield-shaped, longer than wide in ratio 41 : 36, ending in a sharp point between the fourth coxae, This point bears three con- spicuous setae. The lateral margins of the sternum are furnished with two or three rows of coarse setae, the central region with a few hairs (pl. III, fig. 37). Legs: 124.3. Laterigrade. Clothed with longitudinal rows of spine-like setae, except the retrolateral side of each femur, which is smooth. The setae on the legs and body are barbed (pl. III, fig. 38). Trichobothria are present on tibiae, metatarsi and tarsi. Two tarsal claws, each having about ten teeth, are present. Claw tufts absent. Palpi are small and without a claw. The segments of the legs and palpi have the following measurements in millimetres: Leg Femur Patella Tibia Metatarsus ‘Tarsus Total Io...) =61574 0-87 1:51 1-45 0:87 6-44 il +, 1-85 0-93 1:56 1-27 0-81 6:42 III... = 1-23 0-70 1-16 0-99 0-64 4:72 IV...) 1°27 0-70 1-16 0:99 0-64 4-76 Palpi 2... +52 0-35 0-41 — 0-58 1-86 46 The spines on the legs differ very little from the ordinary setae. They are arranged as follows:—First leg—Femur: dorsal 1-1-1-1, prolateral 1-1—1-1, elsewhere 0. Patella: dorsal 1-1 very small, elsewhere 0. Tibia: dorsal 1 near middle, elsewhere 0. Metatarsus 0. Second leg—Femur: dorsal 1-1-1-1, elsewhere 0, Patella: dorsal 1-1 very small, elsewhere 0. Tibia : dorsal 1 before middle, elsewhere 0. Metatarsus 0. The spines on the ¢hird and fourth legs are arranged as on the second. Abdomen broadly ovate and somewhat dorso-ventrally compressed. It 1s furnished with coarse setae arranged in rows. There is a pair of large oval muscle spots near the middle of the dorsal surface. The epigynum has the form shown in pl. III, fig. 39. Locality—Twenty miles west of Cowarie Station, South Australia, Coll. 661 (1 adult 2). Family CLUBIONIDAE Sub-Family LIOCRANINAE Genus Miturca Thorell 1870 Miturca LINEATA Thorell Locality—Finke River, 25 miles from Abminga, South Australia, Coll. 520 (2 pullus). Mount Gason, Birdsville-Marree Track, South Australia, Coll. 651 (2 pullus). Fourteen miles north-east of Cowarie Station, South Australia. Coll. 659 (1 g and1 @). Family SALTICIDAE Sub-Family PLEXIPPINAE Genus Sarris Simon 1876 Saitis lacustris n. sp. (PI. III, fig. 40) g—Total length, 4°70 mm. Length of carapace, 2-49 mm. Width of cara- pace, 1°85 mm. Length of abdomen, 2°44 mm. Width of abdomen, 1:97 mm. Thorax dark brown (in alcohol). Caput nearly black. The dorsal surface of the head is clothed with recumbent white hairs interspersed with a few slender erect black bristles. Clypeus yellow and densely clothed with white hairs. Dorsal surface of the three distal segments of the palpi yellow and clothed with long white hairs. Legs dark brown with yellowish-brown markings on dorsal side of patellae, the ventral side of the femora and the coxae. Chelicerae brown with patches of yellowish-brown in front. Mazxillae, labium and sternum dark brown. Legs lightly clothed with white silky hairs. Abdomen dark brown above; paler at the sides and underneath; not marked by any distinct pattern; clothed with silky hairs. Carapace high and convex. Head region somewhat flat, but sloping gently forward from the posterior eyes. Thorax sloping steeply under the front of the abdomen. Eye-group wider in front than behind in ratio 25: 23. The front width greater than the length in ratio 25: 18. First row of eyes slightly recurved, wider than the second in ratio 25: 24. Ratio of eyes AME: ALE: PME: PLE = 7:5: 1:5: 3-5. AME separated from each other by about 1/7 of their diameter and from ALE by about twice this distance. PME separated from ALE by a distance equal to the diameter of AME, and from PLE by 4/7 of the diameter of AME, that is the eyes of the second row are nearer PLE than ALE. Clypeus 4/7 of diameter of AME and sloping backward. Chelicerae conical, not diverging, condyles lacking. Margins oblique. Two teeth on promargin, one on retromargin. Lip triangular, about as wide as long. 47 Maxillae short and wide. Sternum oval, longer than wide in ratio 17: 11. Fourth coxae almost contiguous. Legs: 3.4.2.1. Trichobothria in two rows on tibiae, in one row on meta- tarsi and tarsi. Two tarsal claws, similar, with about five teeth. The three distal teeth are large and widely spaced. Palpi are clothed with long white hairs on the dorsal surface and sides of the tarsus, tibia and patella. No spines are present, but there is a small black seta on the dorsal surface of the femur and patella near the apex of the segment. On the prolateral side the tibia is produced into a sharp apophysis. The genital bulb has the form shown in pl. III, fig. 40. The segments of the legs and palpi have the following measurements in millimetres: Leg Femur Patella Tibia Metatarsus Tarsus Total I... = 1-28 0-8t 0+87 0-87 0-70 4°53 Wo. 1-33 0-87 0-87 0:87 0-70 4-64 WI...) 1°85 0-87 1-22 1-28 0-58 5-80 Vow. 151 0-70 0-99 1-28 0-70 5-18 Palpi ... 0°60 0-35 0-23 _ 0-64 1-82 The spines on the legs are arranged as follows: First leg—Femur: dorsal 1-1-1, prolateral 1 near end, elsewhere 0. Patella: dorsal 1-1 fine bristles, prolateral 1, retrolateral 1, ventral 0. Tibia: dorsal 1 near base, prolateral 1-1, retrolateral 1, ventral 2~2-—2. Metatarsus: dorsal 1 near base, prolateral 1-1, retrolateral 1-1, ventral 2—2. Second leg—Femur: dorsal 1-1-1, prolateral 1 near end, retrolateral 1 near end, ventral O. Patella: dorsal 1—1 fine bristles, prolateral 1, retrolateral 1, ventral 0. Tibia: dorsal 1, prolateral 1~1, retro- lateral 1, ventral 2-2-2. Metatarsus: dorsal 1, prolateral 1—1, retrolateral 1-1, ventral 2-2. Third leg—Femur: dorsal 1-1-1, prolateral 1-1 near end, retrolateral 1 near end, ventral 0. Patella: dorsal 1-1 fine bristles, prolateral 1, retrolateral 1, ventral 0, Tibia: dorsal 1, prolateral 1-1, retrolateral 1-1, ventral 1-2. Metatarsus: dorsal 1, prolateral 1-1, retrolateral 1-1, ventral 2-2. Fourth leg—Femur: dorsal 1-1-1, prolateral 0, retrolateral 0, ventral 0. Patella: dorsal 1-1 fine bristles, prolateral 1-1, retrolateral 1-1, ventral 0. Tibia: dorsal 1, prolateral 1-1-1, retrolateral 1-1-1, ventral 1-2. Meta- tarsus: dorsal 1, prolateral 1-1-1, retrolateral 1-1-1, ventral 2—2-2. Abdomen oval somewhat dorso-ventrally compressed. Spinnerets six, almost cylindrical. Anterior pair much larger than the others. Colulus absent. Locality—Surface of North Lake Eyre, two and a half miles from shore, Coll. 669 (1 adult 2). Sub-Family MARPISSINAE Genus Ocrisiona Simon 1901 OCRISIONA sp. Locality—Twenty miles west of Cowarie Station, South Australia, Coll. 661 (1 pullus). The specimen is immature but appears to be closely related to, if not identical with, Ocrisiona complana (L. Koch). LITERATURE Brruta, A. 1903 Ann. Mus. Zool. Acad. Sci., St. Petersbourg, 8, xxxili-xxxiv Datmas, COMTE DE 1917 Ann. Soc. ent. France, 86, 317-430 GLAvERT, L. 1925 Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust., 49, 85-87 Hocc, H. R. 1896 Horn Exped., Zool., Ar., 309-356 Hoce, H. R. 1902 Proc. Zool. Soc. Lond., 414-466 Kocu, L. 1871-1889 Arachn. Austral., Nurnberg KRAEPELIN, K. 1908 Fauna Siidwest-Australiens, Jena, 2, 89-95 48 KRAEPELIN, K. 1916 Arkiv. for Zoologi, Stockholm, 10, 1-43 PuLierne, R. H. 1914 Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust., 38, 447-448 Ratnzow, W. J. 1915 Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust., 39, 772-793 Rainsow, W. J., and Putterne, R. H. 1918 Rec. Aust. Mus., Sydney, 12, 81-169 Srranp, E. 1913 Zool. Jahrb. Abt. f. Syst., Jena, 35, 599-624 THorELL, T. 1870 Ofv. K. Vet. Akad. Forh., 387 Fig. Fig. Fig. tw Nee aE Fig. Fig. Fig. Fig. Fig, Fig. Fig. 10 Fig, 11 OMT Aun Fig. 12 Fig. 13 Fig. 14 Fig. 15 Fig. 16 Fig. 17 Fig. 18 Fig. 19 Fig. 20 Fig, 21 Fig. 22 Fig. 23 Fig. 24 Fig. 25 Fig. 26 Fig. 27 Fig, 28 Fig. 29 Fig. 30 Fig. 31 Fig. 32 Fig. 33 Fig. 34 Fig. 35 Fig. 36 Fig. 37 Fig. 38 Fig, 39 Fig. 40 DESCRIPTION OF PLATES Piate [ Urodacus yaschenkoi—Sternum, genital operculum and. pectines. _ Urodacus yaschenkoi—Ventral view of left chelicera. Urodacus yaschenkoi—Trichobothria on ventral surface of brachium of left pedipalpus. Urodacus yaschenkoi—Trichobothria on inner side of wnder-hand of Ieft pedipalpus. Urodacus yaschenkoi—End of fourth tarsus, showing minute inner claw. Urodacus yaschenkoi—Last two segments of first leg showing dorsal row of seven spines on metatarsus. Aganippe stmpsoni n.sp—-¢@ Dorsal view of eyes. Aganippe simpsoni n.sp.—Sternum, labium and maxillae. Aganippe simpsont n.sp.—An upper claw of first tarsi. Aganippe simpsoni n. sp.—An upper claw of fourth tarsi. Pardosa eyret n.sp.— @ Dorsal view of abdomen, to show the shape of the median dark brown patch. Pardosa eyrei n.sp.—Front view of eves. Pardosa eyret n. sp—Ventral view of right palpus. Pate IT Pardosa pexa n. sp— 4 Ventral view of Icft palpus. Lycosa abmingani n.sp— 9 Epigynum. Lycosa burti n.sp.— 9 Epigynum. Lycosa finket n.sp— 9 Ventral view of abdomen. Lycosa finkei n.sp— Q Epigynum. Lycosa fletcheri n.sp.— 9 Epigynum. Lycosa goydert n.sp.— 9 Epigynum, Lycosa halei n.sp—Q Epigynum, Lycosa madigani n.sp.— Q Ventral view of abdomen, Lycosa madigant n.sp.—Epigynum of a specimen from the Simpson Desert. Lycosa madigani n, sp.—Epigynum. of a specimen from Indinda Well. Lycosa madigant n.sp— @ Ventral view of right palpus. Storena toddi n.sp.— @ Dorsal view of the carapace and abdomen. Storena toddi n.sp—Dorso-anterior view of cyes. Storena toddi n.sp.—Lateral view in outline. Priate IIT Storena toddin.sp.—~ @ Ventral view of left palpus. Storena toddin,sp-——Spines on ventral surface of tibial segment of first pair of legs. Odo australiensis n. sp— 9 Front view of eyes. Odo australlensts n. sp—Maxillae, Jabium and sternum. Odo australiensis n. sp.—Epigynum. Odo australiensis n.sp.— ¢ Left palpus from below. Tharpyna simpsoni n, sp-—- 9 Dorsal view of carapace and abdomen. Thar pyna simpsoni n. sp-—Dorsal view of eyes. Thar pyna simpsoni n. sp.—Maxillae, labium and sternum. Thar pyna simpsoni n. sp.—A barbed seta from the legs. Tharpyna simpson n. sp—Epigynum. Sattis lacustris n, sp— g Ventral view of left palpus. THE SIMPSON DESERT EXPEDITION, 1939 SCIENTIFIC REPORTS: NO. 2, GEOLOGY - DESERT SANDS By DOROTHY CARROLL, University of Western Australia Summary The grading, mineralogy and various other features of some sands collected in the Simpson Desert by the Simpson Desert Expedition of 1939 are described in this paper. The material was examined through the courtesy of Dr. C. T. Madigan. 49 THE SIMPSON DESERT EXPEDITION, 1939 SCIENTIFIC REPORTS: No. 2, GEOLOGY ~— DESERT SANDS By Dororny Carroii, University of Western Australia (0 [Read 13 April 1944] Pirate IV INTRODUCTION The grading, mineralogy and various other features of some sands collected in the Simpson Desert by the Simpson Desert Expedition of 1939 are described in this paper. The material was examined through the courtesy of Dr, C. T. Madigan. The Simpson Desert is situated almost in the centre of Australia, where it covers about 56,000 square miles between Lat. 23° S. and 27° S. and Long. 135° and 139° E. (Madigan 1938, 506.) The Desert consists of straight, parallel, spinifex-covered sand-ridges running in a north-north-west, south-south-easterly direction. Individual ridges, which are about 60 feet high on an average, may run unbroken for fifty miles or more. There are three or four ridges to the mile, and cach ridge is separated from the next by a narrow flat. ‘To the north of the Simpson Desert the country gradually merges into a sandy plain; to the south is Lake Eyre. East and west it gradually changes to plain country with remnants of sediments and wide flats, on which water from the infrequently flowing rivers dries up. (Madigan 1936, 213.) The sand is fine-grained, bright red in colour, except in the south-east of the Desert, and consists mainly of quartz. It is somewhat similar (Madigan 1938, 915) to the sand in English hour-glasses, which is obtained from. the Bunter sandstones which originated as desert sands in the Triassic period. (Boswell 1933, 31.) The samples examined can be divided into those from the crests of dunes and those from the hollows. Most of the sands are bright red in colour, except Nos. 3 and 4, which are white, and several of the inter-ridge sands from the eastern side of the Desert which are brownish. The distribution of samples is given in Table !. Further particulars of locality and depth of sample appear in the Appendix. TABLE [ Geographical Distribution of the Samples within the Simpson Desert Nos. Nos. Nos. Nos. Sands from dune crests pass bad ~— 2 = ronan 1 6223 6222 3,4 — 6227 — = on 6228 _— = Sands from inter-ridge areas, etc, .... = 6224 6221 6236 — 6225 6232 ome — 6226 6233 — —_ 6229 6234 vat aa 6230 6235 — — 6231 — a G) Written in 1940, while a Research Fellow of the University of Western Australia. Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust., 68, (1), 28 July 1944 D 50 GRADING AND SORTING OF THE SANDS 1 MECHANICAL ANALYSIS Mechanical analyses of the samples were made by hand-shaking through a set of Tyler screens giving the Wentworth scale (Wentworth 1922) of grade terms for sediments. The details of these analyses are given in Table II. TaBce I] Mechanical Analyses of Simpson Desert Sands Retained on: 16 32 60 115 250 —~ 250 Screen openings (mm.): 0:99 0-49 0-24 0-12 0-06 — Sands from crests: % % % % % % 1 ps yt 53 — ~ 12-65 69:57 17-11 0-27 2 a _ ants — a 1-5 83-18 14-82 0-50 6223 at ae An, — = 6°34 61:28 31-47 — 6227 if he; uy = 1:63 11-20 41-63 43-14 4-39 6228 ed te otis — _ 14:02 76°42 9-32 0-24 6222 ~~, sans are — 2-13 27-10 = 49-25 20°70 1-82 3 - Bae site — 0:27 33-56 = 2-02 13-82 0-49 4 A _ fe ~ 0-28 50-17 39-65 9-57 0-33 Sands from inter-ridge areas: 6224 Rake hag ae — §+1 7°54 = 20°76 60-59 5-91 6226 Se eet mm 1-93 5-94 12-80 33-28 41-06 4-99 6229 _ aes cas te 3°02 15-87 18-05 57°40 = 5-66 6231 Lach ae As 0-25 §-27 23-51 24-84 42-19 3°94 6232 ef: be Put — 0-42 4:12 19-87 66°74 8-85 The samples from the dune crests are coarser than those from the inter- ridge areas. The dune crest sands are well sorted and contain no grains larger than 1 mm. diameter. In general the bulk of each sample is contained in the —60 +115 grade, i.c., the grain diameters are between 0°24 and 0°12 mm, This distribution of size is shown in fig. 1, where the frequency curves have high sharp peaks at the position of the maximum grade. Fine dusty material makes up the smallest grade. The samples from the inter-ridge areas were collected as soil profile samples, but in this investigation only the surface and lowest samples were sieved. The maximum grade in the inter-ridge sands is in the —115 +250 grade, grain diameters between 0°12 and 0°06 mm. ‘This difference in size of the grade con- taining the bulk of the sand grains in the dune crest sands and the inter-ridge sands is seen in fig. 1, Gypsum was found in all sand samples taken near Lake Eyre. In the case of No. 6236, from an inter-ridge area north of Lake Eyre, no mechanical analysis was made, as the coarse secondary gypsum crystals were in sufficient proportion to give a false impression of the coarseness of the sand as a whole. In Nos. 3 and 4, dune crest sand from the east side of the Lake, the gypsum was less and finer and the mechanical analyses were done in the usual way. 2 Sorrine The samples from the ridge crests and from the hollows are well sorted. There is very little difference in the degree of sorting between the samples collected at the edges and at the middle of the Desert, although the best sorted sample is from the middle of the Desert, and samples from the eastern and southern sides show slightly less perfect sorting, which appears in the frequency curve of fig. 1 as a spreading and a lowering of the peak. Samples from the ridge slopes are not nearly so well sorted as those from the ridge crests (see 6227, fig. 1). 31 3 COMPARISON WITH OTHER DESERT SANDS The grade containing the bulk of the sand in samples from the ridge crests in the Simpson Desert is slightly finer in grain size than similar sands from other deserts; for instance, the majority of sand grains in the Libyan Desert are between 0-8 and 0-08 mm. and less than 3% are smaller than 0:04 mm. (Bagnold 1935, 343). In the Simpson Desert sands the greatest number of grains are between 0°24 and 0°06 mm., and there is sometimes a greater percentage of very fine grains than in the Libyan Desert sand. Mechanical analyses of wind accumu- lated sands for grain size show that the peaks of such curves never occur of the small side of 0-015 cm. and rarely of 0:022 cm. Sand having a peak size nearest 100 70 39 Percentage by weight between sizes indicated 10 Mesh 16 Mms. 0-98 Grain-size Fig. 1 MECHANICAL ANALSES OF THE SIMPSON DESERT SANDS Sands from middle of Desert, Nos. 2, 6223, 6227, 6228, shown thus: —-—--——--- Sands from edges of Desert, Nos. 1, 3, 4, 6222, shown thus —--—-—-— —--- Inter-ridge sands, middle of Desert, Nos. 6224, 6229, shown thus: —.—.—.—.— Inter-ridge sands, edge of Desert, No. 6232, shown thus: 7 eae to this is found at the crests of dunes (Bagnold 1937, 435). It will be seen from fig. 1 that the Simpson Desert sand fits into this limit, and the analyses can also be matched with many of Wentworth’s aeolian sands (Wentworth 1932). The difference in grain size between the sand from crests and hollows in the Simpson Desert is similar to the differences observed in the Libyan Desert. 52 MINERALOGY OF THE SANDS 1 LABoRATORY PROCEDURE The heavy minerals were separated from quartz in the sands with bromo- form. Experience has shown that by using one of the finer grades of any sedi- mentary material for separation a larger crop of more easily identifiable heavy minerals is obtained than if the unsieved sand is used (Carroll 1939, 101), for most heavy minerals belong among the originally smallest grains in rocks, and are therefore to be expected in the finer grades of sediments. This statement is particularly true for zircon, rutile, tourmaline and the minerals more rarely scen in heavy residues. During transportation large grains of the heavy minerals, even if they were present in the source rock, cannot be carried as readily as can quartz and felspar grains (Rubey 1933). Therefore, although some heavy mineral grains could probably be obtained from the grade containing the bulk of the sand, it is more profitable to obtain them from the sand with grains smaller than those in the maximum grade. Often the very finest grade shows abundant heavy minerals. (See fig. 3. Dark grains are heavy minerals in an unseparated fine sand of less than 0-06 mm. grain diameter,) Before microscopic examination, the red film of iron oxide was removed by boiling in 1:1 conc, HCI. 2 DETAILS OF THE MINERALOGY (i) Heavy Minerals Table III gives the details of the heavy mineral assemblages, the grade of sand separated, and the index figure, or percentage by weight of the heavy frac- tion. The percentage figures for the individual minerals were obtained by count- ing the grains in 10 to 12 microscope fields, amounting to approximately 500 grains for each residue. These figures refer only to the non-magnetic minerals as the highly magnetic grains, usually comprising one-third to one-half of the heavy fraction, were removed before mounting so that the remaining grains could be more easily seen. The order in which the minerals are arranged in Table III has no special significance, Where counts were not made, the presence of a mineral is indicated by ++. As seen in Table III the residues contained the following heavy minerals: magnetite, ilmenite (and leucoxene), tourmaline, rutile, zircon, amphiboles, epidote, zoisite, garnet, sillimanite, titanite, staurolite, anatase, apatite, kyanite, chlorite, corundum, monazite, andalusite, and spinel. The first ten of these are present in nearly every sample. Details of the Individual Minerals are: Ilmenite—The ilmenite percentage of the total heavy residue in Table III includes that for leucoxene, which may make up about one-third of the total. Both ilmenite and leucoxene grains are rounded. Tourmaline often occurs as spherical grains, commonly of green, brown, pinkish-brown, and blue colours, respectively. Pale blue, parti-coloured blue and brown, and mauve grains were much less common. Some samples contain worn prismatic grains, but the tourmaline is generally well worn, which indicates a long period of attrition. Rutile, in deep reddish-brown, well-worn prismatic grains is one of the minor constituents of these residues. Small golden-brown geniculate twins, also well worn, occur in sample 6224 from the middle of the Desert. Zivcon—Each non-magnetic residue contains between 9 and 40%, generally about 24%, of zircon grains the majority of which are well worn, clear, colour- less, and contain few inclusions. There are occasional brownish grains (No. 1) 53 ‘yuasaid = +4 ‘yuepunge Aisa = ‘soTdules []@ 10} pourutsajyap jou ‘sa8ejusoied sue alqu} ut soinsiy $BolW IAPii-19U Woy pues = PY ‘adpls Jo jso19 wosy puvs = et++pe+t+tt mp pore +4 “ttt<+ ++ attt++ +4 a tthe +t geese + e_tt+++ $+ + e+ t+tt+++4+4H+ + SHtt+t+ tt net mm _ CAPILLARIA EMBERIZAE Yamaguti Fig, 11 Both males and females of a species of Capillaria were taken from Emberiza cityinella from Dunedin. Males about 13-13-5 mm. long, females to 14 mm. Ratio of oesophageal to post-oesophageal region = 1: 2-4 in both sexes. Breadth across head 9» in the female, 8 in the male; at base of oesophagus 54m in female, 45 » in male; at widest part of body 72 in female, 54 in male; across anal region 30 in female, 36» in male. Anus 16, from posterior end in female. Egg, 22» by 54. Cuticle at posterior end of male swollen to form two lateral “alae” 6, long, which at the extremity of the worm are constricted and give place to a small “bursa” containing two pairs of papillae. Spicule 1:26 mm. long; sheath not spinous. The specimens differ from Capillaria emberizae Yamaguti 1941 from Emberiza spp. from Japan in the form of the bursa and the ratio of body parts in the female, but otherwise agree with it. Capillaria lepidopodis n. sp. Fig. 13 A single female worm, of which the posterior extremity is missing, was taken from Lepidopus caudatus from St. Vincent’s Gulf. The worm is 25-2 mm. long, the oesophagus 7:1 mm. long, the rest of the body 18-1 mm. at least (worm much coiled and tip of tail missing), so that the ratio of anterior to posterior parts of body is about 1:3. The width at the head is 11», at base of oesophagus 54 p, at widest part 724. The vulva is a simple opening situated just behind oesophagus; the eggs are 30» x 60 y, their shells marked with fine irregular grooves. According to the method of identification of Capillaria spp. from fish, devised by Heinze 1933, this species falls into the group in which females are longer than 10 mm.; this group comprises C. gracilis (Bellingh.), C. fritschi (Trav. 1914), and C. plerophylli Heinze 1933. Of these it is distinguished from C. pterophylli and C. gracilis by the shape of the egg, and from C. fritschi by the absence of papillae on the cuticle. LITERATURE Barrp, W. 1861 P.Z.S., 207-208; A.M.N.H., (3), 8, 269-270 Bayvis, H. A. 1929 Discovery Reports, 1, 543-559 Coppotp, T. 5. 1879 Parasites. A Treatise, etc., London CrAM, E. 1927 U.S. Nat. Mus., Bull. 140 Heinze, K. 1933 Zeitschr. Parasit., 5, 393-406 JAGERSKIOLD, L. 1909 Nova Acta reg. Soc. Sci., Upsal., (4), 2, 1-48 Jounston, T. H. 1912 Proc, Roy. Soc. Qld., 21, 63-91 Jounston, T. H., and Mawson, P. M. 1940 Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust., 64, 240-252 Jounston, T. H., and Mawson, P. M. 1941 Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust., 65, 110-115; 254-262 Jounston, T, H., and Mawson, P.M. 1943 Rec. S. Aust. Mus., 7, (3), 237-243 Jounston, T. H., and Srmpson, E. R. 1943 Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust., 66, 172-179 Leucxart, R. 1876 Die menschlichen Parasiten, 2 Linstow, O. 1889 Mitt. Zool. Samml. Mus. Naturk., Berlin, 1, (2), 5-28 Ruporrit, C. 1819 Entozoorum synopsis. YaAmacuTi,'S, 1941 Jap. Journ. Zool., 9, (3), 343-395; 441-480 A CONTRIBUTION TO THE KNOWLEDGE OF THE MICROCOTYLIDAE THE OF WESTERN AUSTRALIA By DOROTHEA F. SANDARS, M.Sc., Hackett Student, University of Western Australia Summary The measurements (taken from specimens mounted in balsam) are the average for several parasites where possible, and those of the type specimen are given in brackets. The parasites were fixed in Kleinenberg's picric acid; acetic acid alum carmine was the commonly used stain, but cochineal alum carmine was also utilised. 70% alcohol saturated with chlorine gas was used as a destaining agent with both stains. Borax carmine was also used, followed by weak acid alcohol as the destaining agent. 67 A CONTRIBUTION TO THE KNOWLEDGE OF THE MICROCOTYLIDAE OF WESTERN AUSTRALIA By DororHea F. Sanpars, M.Sc., Hackett Student, University of Western Australia [Read 11 May 1944] INTRODUCTION The following is a list of the hosts and the respective parasites obtained from them: GERRES OVATUS Waite—Microcoiyle gerres n. sp. Penrapopus MILIr Bory St. Vine.—Microcotyle pentapodi n. sp. ScorPis AEQUIPINNIS Richdon.—Microcotyle scorpis n. sp. HELotes SEXLINEATUS Q. & G—Microcotyle helotes n. sp. CaARANX GEORGIANUS Cuv, Val.—Gonoplasius carangis n. g., 1. sp. AGONOSTOMUS FORSTERI Cuv. Val.—Diplasiocotyle johnstoni n.g., n. sp. The measurements (taken from specimens mounted in balsam) are the average for several parasites where possible, and those of the type specimen are given in brackets. The parasites were fixed in Kleinenberg’s picric acid; acetic acid alum carmine was the commonly used stain, but cochineal alum carmine was also utilised. 70% alcohol saturated with chlorine gas was used as a destaining agent with both stains. Borax carmine was also used, followed by weak acid alcohol as the destaining agent. Appreciation is expressed for the co-operation of the Government Fisheries Department, which has been very useful in this work, especially under the present conditions due to war-time restrictions. The writer would also like to express thanks to Professor G. E. Nicholls for his help and encouragement; to Miss O. Goss for guidance, and to Professor T, Harvey Johnston for assistance in prepar- ing this paper for publication. Microcotyle gerres n. sp. (Fig. 1-3) From the gills of the silverfish, silverbelly or roach, Gerres ovatus, from Mandurah. The gills of the host species were examined frequently during a period from the middle of February to the middle of June, 1943. The parasites were not numerous at any time, nor does there appear to be any period when their occurrence is more prevalent. The maximum taken from one fish was three. Of 52 fish examined only 15 had parasites, only one Microcotylid being present in most cases. M. gerres is a small, elongated form, having a total length 2-43 mm. (2°35) and a maximum breadth of 0°36 mm. (0°37) across about the middle of the genital complex. Body tapering slightly towards both ends. Body width across region of oral sucker 0-14 mm.; across region of penis 0-20 mm. Cotylophore distinctly demarcated from rest of body; 1-07 mm. (0°98) long, hence about two-fifths of total body length. Fifty pairs of posterior suckers on cotylophore, varying in size from anterior to posterior; anterior having width of 0-038 mm. (0-037), those at about the middle length 0-058 mm. (0°062), and those posteriorly 0-042 mm. (0°050) ; the length in each case being 0°025 mm, (fig. 3). Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust., 68, (1), 28 July 1944 68 Oral suckers approximately circular, 0-063 mm. diameter, without transverse septa. Three groups of “sticky” glands near mouth and anterior to oral suckers (fig. 1). Buccal cavity large; pharynx circular 0-037 mm. diameter; oesophagus 0-125 mm. long with lateral diverticula and dividing just in front of penis, at 0:20 mm. from anterior end of body ; intestinal canals with numerous lateral diver- ticula and extending 0°63 mm. into cotylophore (fig. 1). Brain rectangular, at 0°13 mm. from head end; a pair of small nerves pass- ing forwards from its anterior corners; a pair of longitudinal nerves and a pair of smaller nerves given off posteriorly (fig. 1). Sixteen testes, subcircular, average diameter 0°375 mm., occupying inter- vitelline field 0-63 mm. long, approximately the posterior half of body anterior to cotylophore; several of most anterior lying beside part of main genital complex. Vas deferens, wide, running from anterior end of testicular field in an almost straight course to penis; anterior end of latter 0-187 mm. from anterior end of body (fig. 1). This Microcotylid is peculiar in that it possesses no genital arma- ture, there being merely a chitinous penis, which, when extended, has a length of 0°046 mm. (0°037) (fig. 2). Ovary median, differing from the typical ovary in that it begins on the left side of the intervitelline field about half-way up the genital complex, and curves over to the right, the oviduct then passing posteriorly to be joined by the common vitelline duct. Vitellarium arising 0°24 mm. from anterior end of body, occupying two lateral fields which join behind testicular field and extend 0°65 mm. (0°63) into cotylophore. Vitelline ducts arising laterally at unequal distances from anterior end; left and right ducts leaving vitellarium at 0°96 mm. and 0°88 mm. respectively from anterior end of worm; common vitelline duct passing posteriorly for 0-04 mm. to unite with oviduct; genito-intestinal canal passing to the left. Uterus thin-walled, straight, dorsal, passing forwards to open by pore at anterior end of penis (fig. 1). M. gerres appears to be a rather distinct form, bearing perhaps the closest resemblance to M. sillaginae Woolcock (1936) and M. parasillaginae Sandars (1944). There are, however, many outstanding differences between these forms, as shown in the table (measurements in mm.). Tasie I Oral Et Pairs and Suckers Relation of Total Length of Size of Size of with or Genital | Intestinal Body Cotylo- Posterior Oral without No. of Lengthof| Atrium | Bifurcation Length phore Suckers Suckers Septa Testes Penis Armature} to Atrium M, gerres and 2-43 1.07 50; 0.063 Without 16 +046 Absent Anterior Ca # Vary.: Diam. Body Ant..0.038, length | Mid. 0.058, Post. 0.042 M. sillaginae .. 4.0 Half- 32; +08 x .04 With 1 +037, Absent Anterior length -05—.07 plus or more wide Papilla M. parasillaginae 2.15 Ca.4 25-27; -08 x -048 With 14 +048, Present Posterior length Constant No = 064 Papilla | i 69 Microcotyle pentapodi n. sp. (Fig. 4-7) From the gills of the butterfish, Pentapodus milii, from Rockingham. The gills of several hosts were examined during January 1943, and all were heavily infected with Microcotylids. Examination from 23 to 26 April 1943 showed the fish to be infected, 0-5 parasites being obtained from each fish, No systematic investigation could be carried out, but examinations indicated the Microcotylids as being more numerous during summer months and decreasing in April. M. pentapodi is a small, elongated, slender form, 2°06 mm. (2°14) long; maximum width 0°25 mm. at approximately half-way along the body proper; body tapering towards both ends; body width 0-2 mm. at level of genital armature ; Be. Be TS uP cal @ Fig. 1-7—1-3, Microcotyle gerres: 1, whole specimen; 2, penis; 3, skeleton of posterior sucker. 4-7, Microcotyle pentapodi: 4, whole specimen; 5, genital armature; 6, skeleton of posterior sucker; 7, egg. 70 0-16 mm. across oral suckers. Cotylophore sharply demarcated from rest of body, 0°623 mm. (0°617) long, anterior border 0:04 mm. (0-05) wide, 0-023 mm. (0-016) long (fig. 6). Oral suckers with transverse septa; width 0:°063 mm. (0-066) ; length 0-052 mm. (0°05). Buccal cavity large, opening anteriorly ; pharynx 0-033 mm. wide, 0-05 mm. long; ocsophagus passing anteriorly for 0-22 mm., then bifurcat- ing immediately behind genital sucker, uniting again in cotylophore and extending into it for 0°25 mm. ; lateral diverticula present (fig. 4). Fifteen circular testes in intervitelline field; latter approximately one-fifth of body length, 0°059 mm, (0-066) diameter in middle of testicular field, 0-046 mm. (0°05) diameter at both ends. Vas deferens thick-walled, wide, passing anteriorly and medially in a sinuous course to genital atrium 0°24 mm. from head end of worm. Atrium unusual in being completely surrounded by a large sucker (genital sucker), 0°125 mm. (0°15) maximum width, 0-1 mm. maxinuni length. Atrial hooks approximately central in atrium and forming complete circlet, 0-06 mm. wide, 0-05 mm. long, 0:24 mm. (0°25) from anterior end of body. Two curved tows of hooks arranged lengthwise occur posteriorly to this. All hooks extremely small, Atrial cavity with two lateral pockets, diameter approximately 0-025 mm., outside the armature of spines (fig. 5). Median ovary arising near anterior testes and passing forwards to form enlarged broad curved portion, thence transversely and backwards. Vitellarium commences 0°35 mm. (0°38) from anterior end of body, uniting behind testicular field and extending 0-32 mm. (0°28) into cotylophore. Paired vitelline ducts 0-16 mm. long, originating 0-83 mm. from head end, uniting as common vitelline duct 0-15 mm. long, joined by oviduct; genito-intestinal canal, passing to left. Uterus thin-walled, straight, opening into genital atrium: between two curved rows of hooks, posterior to vas deferens. Posteriorly to left of genital pore, 0-3 mm. from anterior end of worm, a single pore (probably vaginal) opens (fig. 4). Egg single, oval, with appendage 0-15 mm. at each end, observed in uterus ; egg length (excluding appendages) 0-2 mm., width 0-05 mm. (fig. 7). M. pentapodi appears to be related to M. ditrematis, which Yamaguti (1939) related to M. incisor Linton (1910). It differs from M. ditrematis in the genital atrium, which, although apparently of a related type in both, shows obvious differ- ences. Both bear saccular outgrowths; in M/. ditrematis single and armed; in M, pentapodt, paired and unarmed. It also shows some resemblances in general structure to the group M. elegans and M. sebastis Goto (1895), M. hiatulae Goto (1899), M. australiensis MacCallum (1921), M. bassensis Murray (1931), ABBREVIATIONS AC, alimentary canal; AGS, anterior glandular structure; ALH, anterior large hooks; ANC, anterior nerve cord; ANT, anterior; B, brain; BC, buceal cavity: C, cotylo- phore; Cl’, cilia of Ist region of body of larva; CI’’, cilia of 2nd region of body of larva; CI’’’, cilia of 3rd region of body of larva: CVD, common vitelline duct; DGS, duct con- necting glandular structures; DS, dorsal sucker: F, egg: E’, eyespot: EC, excretory canal; EP, excretory pore; EV, excretory. vesicle: GA, gemtal atrium; GC, genital com- plex; GD, genital duct, GH, genital hooks; GIC, gcnito-intestinal canal; GP, genital pockets of atrium; GS, genital sucker; H, hooks; I, intestine: M, mouth (fig. 25-30 miracidium): MB, muscular base; O, ovary; O’, developing ovary; OES, oesophagus; OS, oral sucker; OSH, hooks of oral sucker; OV, oviduct; P, penis; PGS, posterior glandular structure; PH, pharynx; PNC, posterior nerve cord; PS, posterior sucker: RS, receptaculuim seminis; SH, small hooks: SO, shell gland and ootype: SPS, small pusterior sticker; T, testes: T’, tail: TS, transverse septum; U, uterus; UP, uterine pore; V, vitellarium; VC, vaginal canal: VD, vas deferens: VITD, vitelline duct; VP, vaginal pore. 71 M. temnodontis Sandars (1944). hese vary in structure of the genital atrium. Other differences shown in the table (measurements im mm.), TABLE I] Se a i Oral | Genital ViteHlarium | Pairs and | Suckers, | Atrium extends Length ot Size of With or. With or into Total Catylo- Posterior Without Without No. of Cotylo- ' Length phore Suckers Septa | Sucker | Testes phore | j fe eee | 7 fate Resta tiie i. ~j M. pentapodi | 2606 | 0662 24-25 ; With | With | 15 0.32 | 4x 2028 | : ! i AM, ditrematis .. | 3.4-4-5 1.2-2.1 39-44 ; With Without 22-35 Almost to -06-.08 Post. End i i | 1 | . AM. tenmodontis .. | 2-72 | 0.72 553 Without | Without 21 0.08 ' “G16 x 32 | M. australicnsis .. 4.0 led Numerous ;/ ? _ Without 25 ? : | M.sebastis .. 0. 5-50 1.83 29; With | Without | 40 Nil + 068-.128 \ | | | Melegaus .. .. | 4-0 1.3 50: With =| Without | 27 ? | -04-.063 | Mf. victoriae rh 4.82 Ca. 1-2 21; ? | With | Without 18-22 | } ? { i | | Muhiatulae .. 1.) 355 23; ? Without 15 Nil { ? | Microcotyle scorpis n. sp. (Fig. 8-10) From the gills of the sweep, Scorpis aequipinnis, from Safety Bay. In January 1943, from the gills of the only sweep examined, six Microcotylids were collected. No further specimens could be obtained, hence no systematic examina- tion could be made. M. scorpis is a broad, compact form of total length 2-67 mm. (2°68), maxi- mum breadth (at level of ovarian curve) 0°66 mm. "Body tapering anteriorly to 0-38 mm. from front of body, then narrowing conspicuously. Body width across genital armature 0-22 mm.; across oral suckers 0°20 mm. Body not tapering posteriorly; cotylophore not distinctly separated (fg. 8). Cotylophore of total length 0°83 mm. (0°81); width across anterior berder 0°63 mm., across renal border 0-09 mm. Twenty suckers along left border of cotylophore which i 0:63 mm, lang, 34 along right border whieh 4 is 0°94 mm. Tach sucker 0-037 mm. long, 0-062 mm. (0°05) wide (fig. 10). Oral suckers, without transverse septa, maximum width 0-07 mm. (0-075), length 0-062 mm. Mouth aperture at anterior end. Cireular muscular pharynx, diameter 0-037 mm., leading into oesophagus 0°125 mm. long; latter bifurcating immediately anterior to region of genital atrium; latter 0°24 mm. from anterior end of body. Intestinal canals with numerous lateral diverticula and extending 0:5 mm. into cotylophore, but left arm 0-13 mm. longer than right arm (fig. 8). Anterior portion of both longitudinal excretory ducts run along either side of body (fg. 8). 72 Brain complex rectangular, dorsal to oesophagus, at 0°13 mm. from anterior of body; one pair of nerves passing forwards, another pair backwards (fig. 8). Testes 32, irregularly shaped, varying in size from 0.112 mm. wide by 0:025 mm. long, to 0-212 mm. wide by 0°05 mm. long, close together, occupying approximately one-third of total body length posteriorly. Vas deferens thick- walled, fairly wide, winding anteriorly, opening into ventral genital atrium; latter 0-275 nin. from anterior end of body and with an armature of conical hooks curving inwards, length 0-012 mm. Genital armature arranged ovally, maximum width 0-037 mm., maximum length 0-025 mm. Ovary, maximum length 0°35 mm. median, arising in front of anterior testes, passing forwards to left, bending to right, curving to pass backwards and then joined by common vitelline duct. Vitellarium commencing 0°40 mm. from anterior end of body, occupying both lateral fields, extending 0°44 mm. (0°41) into cotylo- phore where the two arms join behind the testes. Left vitelline duct arising 0°69 mm. from anterior of body, right 0°56 mm.; left passing 0°38 mm. posteriorly, right 0-50 mm., before joining to form common vitelline duct with length 0:23 mm.; genito-intestinal canal passing to right. Uterus thin-walled, passing posteriorly, then curving forwards to genital atrium (fig. 8). M. scorpis appears to be most closely related to M. seriolae Yamaguti (1939) and M. reticulata Goto (1895), the most obvious feature in common being the asymmetry of the cotylophore, whose suckers are in each case more numerous on the right side. The general anatomy of these forms seems to be similar; that of M. scorpis most resembling 47. seriolac. Many differences are shown in the table. TAsre III | Oral Total Length of; No.of [Av, Sizeof| Suckers Size of No, and Genital Body Cotylo- Posterior | Suckers of | with or Oral Form of Atrium Length : phore Suckers Cotylo- without Suckers Testes Armature t phore Septa | J) Adin Liens . lone spate es geri tea 7 " | i M.scorpis .. .. | 2.68 0-83 34 right, {0.037.long,} Without /0-062 long, $2, Present 20 left -062 wide x irregular | 0.07 wide i | H | M.seviolac .. .. | 4:1-8-5 | 1-78-3.5) Right /0.036-.12 ? 0-060~ | 0-100, Absent : 45-47, wide -075x | irregular i | left 39-42 -080-.093 | : i M. reticulata ‘ 6-10 Little more Right 42, |/0.075--227; Without ? Numerous, Present than 4 left 23 wide rounded Body ? length | Microcotyle helotes n. sp. (Fig. 11-14) From gills of the trumpeter, Helotes sexlineatus, from Swan River, at Ned- lands, Rockingham, Safety Bay. During January 1943 the gills of several hosts were examined and Microcotylids found. From two from Swan River, in mid- 73 eva: Ger Fig. 8-14—8-10, Microcotyle scorpis: 8, whole specimen; 9, genital armature; 10, skeleton of posterior sucker. 11-14, Microcotyle helotes: 11, whole specimen; 12, genital armature; 13, skeleton of posterior sucker; 14, egg. 74 March, 1 and 11 parasites respectively were collected. Of 23 fish from Safety Bay, in early May, two had each one parasite, three had each two. M. helotes is a medium-sized, elongated form of total length 2°87 mm. (2°69) ; maximum width (just anterior to commencement of paired vitelline ducts) 0°38 mm. Body tapering anteriorly and posteriorly. Width across. oral suckers 0-14 mm.; across genital atrium 0-2 mm. Cotylophore not distinctly demarcated from rest of body; 1-02 mm, (0°81) long; with 32 pairs of suckers, each 0-058 mm. (0°037) wide; 0-033 mm. (0-037) long (fig. 13). Oral suckers, 0-059 mm. (0-052) wide, 0-071 mm. (0-075) long, with trans- verse septa. Three groups of “sticky” glands anterior to oral suckers (fig. 11). Buccal cavity opening anteriorly ; pharynx circular, diameter 0-038 mm. Straight oesophagus passes 1-187 mm. backwards, dividing shortly behind genital armature, 0-31 mm. from the anterior of body. The two longitudinal arms with numerous diverticula, extending 0°46 mm. into the cotylophore. Brain rectangular, 0-15 mm. from head end; dorsal to oesophagus; one pair of nerves passing anteriorly, two pairs posteriorly (fig. 11). Fourteen irregular testes approximately 0-05 mm. by 0-054 mm, (0-037), in an intervitelline field 0°625 mm. long, hence one-quarter of body length; most anterior testes extending forwards, laterally to main genital complex. Genital armature of numerous minute hooks; of maximum width 0-087 mm. (0-087), maximum length 0-07 mm. (0°063) situated 0-24 mm. (0-25) from anterior end at body (fig. 12). Ovary, maximum length 0°3 mm., passing forwards to left, then swinging to right by an enlarged region, then passing backwards to become joined by common vitelline duct. Vitellarium begins 0-34 mm. from anterior of body, occupying both lateral fields, extending into the cotylophore 0-51 mm. (0°46), uniting behind testicular field. Paired vitelline ducts arising laterally 1:06 mm. from anterior end of body, passing posteriorly for 0-06 mm., then joining to form common vitelline duct, 07175 mm. long; genito-intestinal canal passing to left. Uterus thin-walled, median (fig. 11). Egg seen in uterus only; anterior appendage over 1 mm., posterior 0-06 mm.; body of egg 0°225 mm. long, 0-062 mm. wide (fig. 14). M. heloies appears to have closest affinities with M. acanthogobii Yamaguti (1939). In both the body is fusiform, and the cotylophore is not sharply de- marcated from the rest of the body. In M. acanthogobii it commences at the level of the posterior testes; in AZ. helotes it begins just anterior to the latter, Testes of both species are of like shape, and are similarly arranged. Major differences are tabulated (measurements in mm.). TABLE TV _ ae 4 2. —s eee a = = a Oral { Size of Suckers { Total Length of | Pairs of | Suckers of | with or Size of No. of Size of Body Catyto- Posterior Cotylo- without Pharynx Testes Body Lengti: phore Suckers phore Septa of Ege AK elites on 2.87 1.02 32 0-033 x With 0.038 14 0.255 x 0-058 diam. » 0-062 AL. acanthogobii . 1655- | 0.62-1.2 | 20-25 0.08 With |0.030-.048) 7-12 | -0-18-.30 3-05 diam. x { x +036--054 [0 -066—.075 Gonoplasius carangis. n.g., n. sp. (Fig. 15-19) From gills of the skipjack, Caranx georgianus, from North Beach, Rocking- ham. Vrom 24 fish exammed between mid-February and mid-July 1943, five parasites were obtained, two from one host, one from each of three others. No parasites were obtained from Carany caught at Mandurah, Bunbury, Augusta and Albany. G. carangis is a very elongated, narrow form of total body length 4°75 mm.; maximum width of body (anterior to cotylophore) 0-4 mm. in region of genital complex where ovary curves from one side to other; this width continuing for- _wards for 0°625 mm., then tapering very gradually both anteriorly and posteriorly ; width at level of genital armature 0-337 mm.; across oral suckers 0-275 mm. Cotylophore 0°75 mm. long, approximately one-sixth total body length, sharply demarcated from rest of body by increase in width. Anterior border of cotylo- phore 0°525 mm. wide, posterior border 0-037 mm. Cotylophore with unequal lateral borders; right 0-112 mm. long, bearing 34 small suckers; left 0°56 mm., bearing 17 small suckers, each with characteristic framework (fig. 18); constant length 0°037 mm.; width of anterior suckers 0-062 mm.; middle suckers 0-075 mm.; posterior 0°05 mm, At anterior end of body five conspicuous glandular structures, four large, one small; of three around buccal cavity two are large with maximum width 0-125 mm., length 0-037 mm.; most anterior central glandular structure 0°05 mm. wide, 0°037 mmm. long. Close to oesophagus, at 0-162 mm. from anterior of body, two more glandular structures, left with maximum width 0°075 mm., length 0-1 mm.; right with maximum width 0-087 mm., length 0-1 mm, From each, running anteriorly, are two ducts; the inner branches 0:062 mm. from anterior of body, the outside branch in each case going to one of the large anterior structures and the inner to smaller central structure. Hach anterior structure has two branches from two posterior groups (fig. 16). Laterally and dorsally, 1-01 mm. from anterior of body are two pairs of structures of unknown function, appearing as apertures with edges set with minute hooks in a slightly muscular structure (fig. 19). These may be remnants of dorsal suckers in process of disintegration, since Microcotyle agonostomi, M. canthari, M. alcedimis, and M. centrodontis have small similarly situated suckers, Buccal cavity at extreme anterior end of body, containing oral suckers with maximum width 0-15 mm., length 0-062 mm., and with transverse scpta. Pharynx close to oral suckers, length 0-05 mm., width 0-037 mm. Oesophagus unbranched, total length 0°31 mm. Intestinal bifurcation about middle of genital atrium. Two longitudinal ducts in lateral fields of body have numerous lateral branches, and extend into cotylophore, 0°31 mm, on right and 0-15 mm. on left, beyond vitel- larium, At 0-875 mm. from anterior end of body in mid-ventral line, 0-25 mm. posterior to genital atrium, is excretory vesicle, a nearly globular structure with maximum width 0-05 mm., length 0-037 mm. Paired lateral longitudinal ducts connect with vesicle (fig. 15). Testes 48, rounded, 0-025-0-05 mm. diameter, occupying about one-fifth of total body length in an intervitelline field; vasa efferentia clearly seen between many of the testes; winding vas deferens passing anteriorly centrally; very coiled between excretory vesicle and genital atrium (fig. 15). Genital atrium with complex arma- ture on ventral body surface, 0-387 mm. from anterior end of body; armature of small and large hooks, some set in a muscular base at anterior and posterior ends of atrium and of varying shapes; small hooks distributed between these; large anterior hooks 0-037 mm. long; largest posterior hooks 0°025 mm. long; small 76 hooks in central groups 0-012 mm. Width of anterior part of atrium (with armature) 0°137 mm.; of middle part 0-075 mm.; of posterior 0-125 mm.; maximum length of genital atrium with armature 0-237 mm. (fig. 17). tp fb oe Fig. 15-19-—Gonoplasins carangis: 15, whole specimen; :16, anterior of body showing glandular structures; 17, genital armature; 18, skeleton of one posterior sucker; 19, structure, probably dorsal suckers. Conspicuous ovary at anterior end of posterior half of body, beginning imme- diately anterior to the testicular field, from which it winds to the right and at 2-62 mm. from anterior end of body, then curves to left and passes posteriorly on 7 right. Ovary, maximum length 0:412 mm., maximum width 0:062 mm. Two lateral fields of vitellarium commencing 0:587 mm. from anterior end of body, quite distinct anteriorly and posteriorly ; posteriorly left arm extending 0-235 mm. into cotylophore; right 0-037 mm. Paired vitelline ducts arising from lateral fields 2-625 mm. from anterior end of body; base of each with enlargement, pro- bably vitelline reservoirs; ducts then passing 0-012 mm, posteriorly to unite as common vitelline duct, 0-187 mm. long and joining oviduct. Genito-intestinal canal entering right intestinal arm. Uterus Straight, thin-walled, opening apparently posterior to male pore. GeNERIc Dtacnosts: Gonoplasius n. g, Microcotylidae—Body very elon- gated, narrow; symmetrical except for the cotylophore, Latter comparatively short, sides unequal in length, longer side with a greater number of small suckers. Genital atrium large, armed with small and large hooks, some of the latter being embedded in a muscular base. Several groups of large glands associated with buccal cavity. Excretory system with terminal vesicle, median, dorsal, posterior to genital atrium. Gonoplasius bears a very strong resemblance to Microcotyle Beneden and Hesse, but differs in several features. One of the most conspicuous differences is the presence in the former of the groups of anterior glandular structures, some around the buccal cavity and the rest near the oesophagus. Gonoplasius has a completely different and much more elaborate genital armature than that of Microcotyle. Goto (1897) stated regarding the excretory system, “in Microcotyle there is no distinct terminal sac, the vessel presenting just a perceptible enlarge- ment before it opens to the exterior.” Also in Microcotyle the excretory opening appears to be always on the same level as the genital armature or anterior to it In Gonoplasius there is a very conspicuous excretory vesicle posterior to the genital atrium, opening medially and dorsally. Diplasiocotyle johnstoni n. g., n. sp. (Fig. 20) From gills of the yellow-eyed mullet or pilchard, Agonostomus forsteri, from Mandurah and Bunbury. From the middle of February to the middle of August 1943, gills of 146 of these fish were examined, 185 parasites being obtained, there being usually only one parasite per fish until the middle of May. After that date they were very numerous, especially in June, when on one occasion 21 parasites were taken from one fish; the average at that period being three parasites per fish. D, johnstoni is a large form, of total length 5-96 mm. (6-47) ; maximum body with 0°83 mm. (0-937) across region anterior to testicular field; body tapering anteriorly and posteriorly ; body width across oral suckers 0-25 mm.; across genital atrium 0°287 mm. Cotylophore 1:77 mm. (1-94) long, hence occupying approxi- mately one-third total body length; anterior margin 1:25 mm. long, posterior margin 0-562 mm. Seven large long-stalked suckers along each margin of cotylophore; one pair of minute suckers at extreme posterior end of cotylophore. Former of varying sizes; most. anterior pair 0-425 mm. wide, 0-312 mm. long; middle pair 0-437 mm. wide, 0-312 mm, long; penultimate pair 0°375 mm. wide, 0-25 mm. long; last pair 0-25 mm. wide, 0-187 mm. long. All suckers with characteristic skeleton of a median hollow piece, with solid piece attached at one end to form U-shape; on either side two more pieces, one arm of which moves in the other which is slightly hollow (fig. 22). The pair of minute stckers 0°062 mm. wide, 0-044 mm. (0-05) long, have skeletons much as above, except that the lateral pieces are comparatively longer (fig. 23). A pair of small, simple, dorsal, lateral suckers of 0-075 mm. diameter at 1-125 mm. from anterior side of body. 78 Fig. 20-32—JDiplasiocotyle johnstoni: 20, whole specimen; 21, genital armature; 22, skeleton of large posterior sucker; 23, skeleton of small posterior sucker; 24, egg; 25 and 26, egg showing developing miracidium; 27, egg after miracidium has escaped; 28 and 2), miracidium: 30, miracidium elongated (28, 29, 30 to same scale = °1 mm.) ; 31, very immature specimen ; 32. immature specimen (scale = +2 mm.). 79 Buccal cavity with subterminal aperture, with pair of conspicuous oral suckers, without septa, 0-137 mm. wide, 0°109 mm. (0°125) long, with inner margins set with small hooks. Pharynx, close to oral suckers, diameter 0-10 min. Oesophagus 0-375 mm. long with numerous lateral diverticula. Intestinal bifurca- tion dorsal to genital atrium; two main longitudinal ducts along each side of body with numerous lateral diverticula, uniting behind testicular field; in cotylophore forming common canal 0-875 mm. long. Alimentary canal extending total distance of 1624 mm. into cotylophore. Twenty-two sub-quadrangular testes, all closely applied together in an inter- vitelline field, occupying approximately one-quarter total body length. Testes varying from 0°10 to 0°212 mm, in width, 0-075 to 0-25 mm. in length. Vas deferens passes anteriorly to genital atrium (fig. 20). Genital atrium 0-525 mm. from anterior end of body, armed with hooks constantly 0-013 mm. long; one central circlet of 15 hooks and on either side of this a semi-circle each with nine and seven hooks respectively (fig, 21). Conspicuous ovary, shaped like mark of interrogation (viewed dorsally ), arising anterior to testicular field towards left of body; maximum width 0-137 mm.; maximum length 0°562 mm.; oviduct passing diagonally to right. Vitellarium occupying both lateral fields, beginning 1-022 mm. (0-687) from anterior end of body. Vitelline fields distinct anteriorly, joining posteriorly to testicular field and passing 1503 mm, (1-562) into cotylophore. Paired vitelline ducts commencing 1°125 mm. from anterior end of body in same region as dorsal suckers and passing 1-06 mm. posteriorly to unite as common vitelline duct, 0°312 mm. long, which joins oviduct. Genito-intestinal canal joining right arm of alimentary canal. Uterus passing posteriorly and then curving forwards as a thin- walled duct to open into atrium. Often as many as six eggs at one time seen in uterus. Eggs oval, with long hooked tail at end opposite to operculum, Egg ‘2 mm. wide, 0-575 mm. long, including tail 0-038 mm. long; hook 0-013 mm. long, 0-10 mm. wide (fig. 24). GENERIC DrAcnosis: Diplasiocotyle n.g. Microcotylidae — Body large, symmetrical; mouth aperture subterminal; buccal cavity with two oral suckers. Mid-ventral genital atrium armed with equal-sized small hooks. Conspicuous cotylophore without hooks but bearing several pairs of large suckers with typical skeletal support ; also one pair of small suckers at posterior extremity, Diplasiocotyle is assigned to the Microcotylidae, since it agrees with known members in its general anatomical structure. It probably approaches Microcotyle most closely, but differs in the cotylophore, which in the latter genus has numerous small suckers, all of approximately the same size, whereas Diplasiocotyle bears suckers of two widely different sizes but the majority are extremely large. Skeletal structures of these suckers differ from the type found in Microcotyle. The name of Professor T. Harvey Johnston is associated with the species, SEVERAL STAGES IN THE Lire History or DIeLAstocoryLe JOHNSTONI A number of specimens of D. johnstoni were taken from their host and placed in some small glass dishes containing water from the Swan River at Crawley, which was approximately of the same salinity as sea water. After periods varying from one to several hours, these forms which had been quite inert, recovered and became active. A few of these specimens produced some eggs, laying an average of 25 each, although some produced as many as 60, which, when laid, sank to the bottom of the dish. The parasites lived usually for a period of three days, but some remained alive for four days, during which they were quite active. In order to hatch the eggs it was found necessary to keep them in sterilized river water at a constant temperature and in an enclosed vessel to prevent evapora- 80 tion and to ensure a constant salinity. A larval form, almost ready to be hatched, moved quite actively and rotated within the egg by means of cilia (fig, 26 and 27). The operculum was eventually forced open by the movement of the miracidium which, after it had liberated itself, immediately began to swim about quite rapidly (fig. 27). The opening of the operculum required from one to two hours. The eggs hatched within 19 days after having been laid, producing larvae with bodies constricted into three definite regions, each covered with cilia. A cotylophore region is distinctly constricted and bears three pairs of minute hooks set in small projections, as well as two pairs of large median hooks 0-037 mm. long, one pair of which can be protruded from the posterior end of the body. This miracidium has a maximum length of 0-186 mm, including 0-062 mm. occupied by the cotylophore and a maximum width of 0-062 mm. when at its normal length. The eye-spots then are situated 0°062 mm. from the anterior extremity of the body (fig. 28 and 29). The body can be extended considerably, reaching two or three times its normal length (fig. 30). The miracidia move very rapidly by a rotating move- ment and are usually most numerous round the edges of the container. These larvae continue their movements for two days, at the end of which time their activities are considerably lessened and death soon follows, if the required host has not been reached. The youngest parasite form (fig. 31) recovered from the gills of the host has a maximum length of only 0°687 mm. ; maximum with 0°137 mm. at approximately the anterior end of the genital complex. The developing cotylophore occupies 0-312 mm. of the total body length and bears altogether four pairs of suckers and two developing suckers. Three pairs of these suckers, those centrally situated are large, those of the middle pair being 0-125 mm. wide, 0-05 mm. long. Posterior to these three pairs is another pair of much smaller suckers, 0°062 mm. wide, 0-05 mm. long. The right side of the cotylophore bears both at its anterior and its posterior ends a small developing sucker, The anterior one of these is 0-062 mm. wide, 0-037 mm. long; while the most posterior one is 0-025 mm. wide, 0-037 mm. long. The small paired oral suckers have a diameter of 0-037 mm.; no hooks are apparent along the edges. At this stage the genital organs have not become differentiated, though a genital mass is present, occupying the region of the future ovary and testes. This mass has a maximum width of 0°075 mm. and a maximum length of 0°25 mm. Another immature, but later and more developed stage (fig. 32) in the life history was also obtained from the gills of Agonostomus forsteri. Total body length of parasite 1-375 mm. and the maximum width of the body anterior to the cotylophore 0-175 mm., occurring across the middle of the testicular field. The cotylophore, 0°525 mm. long, occupies approximately two-fifths of total body length and measures 0°237 mm. across its anterior border, while the width across its posterior border is 0°162 mm. It bears three pairs of large suckers; the largest is the central pair with a maximum width of 0-137 mm. and a maximum length of 0-112 mm. The most posterior pair have each a maximum width of 0-075 mm. and maximum length of 0°05 mm. Anteriorly to these four pairs of suckers is another pair, 0-087 mm. wide and 0-075 mm, long. The most anterior pair of suckers are in the process of developing, and the larger of these has a maximum width of 0-075 mm. and a length of 0037 mm. The oral suckers in the buccal cavity have acquired very small hooks along their edges; each sucker has a maximum width of 0-075 mm. and a maximum length of 0-05 mm. The buccal cavity leads into the pharynx, which is very close to the oral suckers and has a diameter of 0°05 mm. The oesophagus has lateral branches and bifurcates at 0°25 mm. from the anterior end of the body. 81 4 The pair of longitudinal arms of the alimentary canal pass backwards and unite immediately behind the testicular field. By this stage the genital complex has advanced sufficiently for the testes to have become differentiated and individual follicles can be recognised. Each follicle has an average diameter of 0°012 mm. The whole testicular field is 0:25 mm. long. The ovary has not yet become specialised. Leading from the held occupied by the genital organs is a duct, probably the developing vas deferens, which terminates at 0-312 mm. from the anterior end of the body, There are no signs of any genital armature. LITERATURE Braun, M. 1879-1893 in Bronn, Klassen u. Ordnungen des Tierreichs, Bd. 4, Abt. i.a., Mionelminthes . Brown, E. M. 1929 Proc. Zool. Soc., London, 67-83 Goro, 5. 1894 Journ. Coll. Sci., Tokyo, 8, 1-273 Goto, 5S. 1899 Journ. Coll. Sci., Tokyo, 12, 263-295 Linton, E. 1940 Proc. U.S. Nat. Mus., 88, 1-172 MacCatium, G. A. 1921 Zoologica, 1, (6), 135-284 Murray, F, V. 1931 Parasitology, 23, 492-506 Parowa, C., and Perucia, A. 1890 Atti Soc. Ligust. di Sci. Nat. Geogr., Genova, 1, Fasc. III, 59-70 SAnpars, D. F. 1944 Journ. Roy. Soc. Western Australia, 29 (in press) Wootcock, V. 1936 Parasitology, 28, 79-91 ¥Amacuty, S. 1933-1934 Jap. Journ. Zool., 5, 249-541 Yamacutr, S. 1938 Jap. Journ. Zool., 8, (1), 15-74 Yamacuti, S. 1939 Jap. Journ. Zool., 9, (1) NOTES ON AND ADDITIONS TO THE TROMBICULINAE AND LEEUWENHOEKITINAE (ACARINA) OF AUSTRALIA AND NEW GUINEA By H. WOMERSLEY, A.L.S., F.R.E.S., Entomologist, South Australian Museum Summary Since the publication of the preliminary monograph on the "Trombiculinae of the Austro-Malayan and Oriental Regions” by Womersley and Heaslip (Trans. Ray. SOC. S. Aust., 67, (1). 68-142, 1943) a large number of larvae and a few adults have been received from various localities in Australia and New Guinea. Some of these specimens represent new species, which are described and figured in this contribution. 82 NOTES ON AND ADDITIONS TO THE TROMBICULINAE AND LEEUWENHOEKIINAE (ACARINA) OF AUSTRALIA AND NEW GUINEA By H. Womerstey, A.L.S., F.R.E.S., Entomologist, South Australian Museum [Read 11 May 1944] Since the publication of the preliminary monograph on the “Trombiculinae of the Austro-Malayan and Oriental Regions” by Womersley and Heaslip (Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust., 67, (1), 68-142, 1943) a large number of larvae and a few adults have been received from various localities in Australia and New Guinea. Some of these specimens represent new species, which are described and figured in this contribution. In the above cited paper, on p. 71, it was also suggested that, when sufficient material was available for study, it would be useful taxonomically, to study the “Standard Data” statistically. The additional material now in hand has enabled me to do this for certain species, and in most cases it is possible to get some idea of the theoretical possible range of variation in the different characters used. In 1943, stress was laid firstly on the number and arrangement of the dorsal setae, and secondly on the Standard Data. The statistical studies show that where the arrangement and number of dorsal setae are close in two species, there are usually significant differences in the statistics of the Standard Data. Further, in certain species it is revealed that there are slight but statistically significant differences in a few or many characters of the same species from different localities. This is of much importance and, as indicating geographical races or variations, may throw some light on the occurrence or not of “scrub-typhus” in different areas. The statistical calculations have been based on Simpson and Roe’s “Quantita- tive Zoology” and the statistics employed are: (1) Mean, (2) Standard Deviation, (3) Theoretical Range as expressed by M + 3c, and (4) the Coefficient of Variation. Closely allied species and different populations of the same species have been compared by calculating the Standard Deviation (Error) of the Difference of Means, using the formula = mt My, , ™ = + 92 ad a/ N. OM, N*M, 2 1 and regarding a value of d/og>2 as a positive and significant difference.‘)) In the above cited 1943 paper, all the specimens of Leeuwenhoekia then avail- able were referred to the one species, L. australiensis Hirst. With fresh and additional material now before me, I have found that three species are repre- sented, while three other species are also described. The genus is thus represented in Australia and New Guinea by six species, five of which are new. While studying this material, especially fresh mounts, it was! found that the genus differs from all other genera of the Trombiculinae in possessing a pair of true stigmata from which tracheal tubes traverse the body. These stigmata are situated one on each side, between the base of the gnathosoma and the first coxae. The atrium itself is not so well chitinised as the so-called “‘ventral stigma” or “urstigma”’ which 1s present in all larval Trombidiidae between the first and second coxae, and from which no ©) d= Difference of Means. Trans. Roy. Soc. 8. Aust., 68, (1), 28 July 1944 83 The presence of such an important feature in the genus Leeuwenhoekia necessitates the separation of the genus from the rest of the Trombiculinae (except possibly Hannemannia) as a new subfamily, the Leeuwenhoekiinae. The genus Hannemannia in the structure of the dorsal scutum, with its paired AM, but lacking the median anterior process, is possibly closely related and, if shown to possess true stigmata, should be placed in the new subfamily. No such stigmata have, however, been figured for any species, and the genus is so far unknown from Australia or New Guinea. in addition two insufficiently described species, Schéngastia salmi Oudms. 1922 from Java and Schéngastiella disparunguis Oudms. 1929 also from Java, are discussed. Subfam. TROMBICULINAE s. str. Genus Trompicuta Berl. 1905 Acari nuovi; Manipl. IV, 155, in Redia II, fase. 2, 1905. Trombicula translucens n. sp. Fig, 1, A-E Description—Adult @. Colour in life a translucent white with the body con- tents showing through as a dark mass. Length 850, width across propodosoma 425 », across hysterosoma 510». Eyes absent. Crista 104» long, with triangular posterior sensillary area, with paired fine ciliated sensillae 50 » apart at bases and \ HAD AS aN SA ws e Sen wa SS AS Fig. 1 Trombicula translucens ».sp. Adult: A, dorsal; B, crista, C, front tarsus and metatarsus; D, posterior dorsal seta, FE, anterior dorsal seta. 8&4 75 long. Body clothed with strongly ciliated setae, those on the propodosoma short, 13 «; on hysterosoma anteriorly 13 », posteriorly to 65 » long, and appear- ing as a characteristic fringe. Legs rather short, anterior the longest; front tarsi - 110 » long by 45 » wide, metatarsi 65 » long. Locahiiy—Two adult females from moss from Mount Arden, South Aus- tralia, October 1943 (H. M. Cooper). Remarks—This species, by the key (loc. cit. 1943, 48) to the adults and urymphs, will fall into the akamushi group. All of this group, however, are from Japan and are all said to be reddish in colour. The posterior fringe of long setac seems to be rather characteristic, Trombicula scincoides n. sp. Fig. 2, A-C Deseription—Larvae. Colour in life a light reddish-yellow. Shape oval. Length to 550», width to 340, (moderately engorged). Dorsal scutum with Fig. 2 Trombicula scincoides n.sp. Larva: A, dorsal; B, ventral; C, scutum x 500. 85 transverse rows of punctuations, shaped as in figure and with the following Standard Data in microns, derived from 12 specimens. Standard Theoretical Observed Coeff. of Mean Deviation Range Range Variation AW -) - &89+140°85 2:95 +0°60 80-3-97°9 86°5-93-0 3°3 PW -_ - 106°8-0°76 2°65 40°54 98-9-114°-7. 103-0-111:0 2-5 SB - = 47-540°30 1:10+0-22 44-2-50°8 46:0-50°0 2°3 SD - - 46°240°30 0-94 +0:20 43-4—49-0 45-0-48:0 2:0 A-P - - 30°14+0°30 0-°99+0-21 27°1-33-1 29-0-32°0 3°3 AM - - 35:54+0:42 1-354+0°32 31°5-39°5 33-0-38°0 3°8 AL - - 38:5+40°30 0-99 +0-21 35°5-41°5 37°0-40°0 2°5 PL - - 44-8+0°52 1-80 +0°37 39°4—50°2 43-0-48-0 4-0 Sens. - - 55°740°48 1-60 40°34 50-9-60-5 51-0-58-0 2:9 Sens) 120 60 Pw SB 118 ‘ 50 [> oo ; AL AM + 100 40 7 AW : AP { 90 30 80 20 Graphs showing the Statistics of the Standard Data of larval Trombicula scincoides n. sp. PSB is slightly longer than ASB. edge of scutum. fairly stout and straight with serrations rather than ciltations. (Measurements in microns.) Fyes 2--+ 2, about one diameter fron Mandibles and palpi normal. Dorsal setae arranged 2.6.6.4.2, Legs: 1 240 ys, 86 {I 260», III 200,; all tarsi with paired claws and longer median claw-like empodium, I and II with the usual dorsal rod-like seta. All coxae unisetose with a long slender finely ciliated seta; a pair of such setae between coxae I and between coxae III; thereafter ventral setae arranged 6.2.4.2., the posterior two rows stronger and more like the dorsal setae. Locality and Host—A number of specimens from the axillae of a scink, Lygosoma (Liolepisma) bicartnatus (MacL. 1877) from New Guinea, October 1 1943 (R. N. McCulloch), host 7d. by Mr. J. R. Kinghorn, Australian Museum, Sydney. 2, but SD and A-P both show an insignificant value of <2:0. The statistical evidence from the Standard Data therefore confirms the separation of the two species based on the DS. 90 TROMBICULA DELIENSIS Walch 1923 Kitasato Arch Exper. Med., 5, (3,) 63, 1923; Tr. 5th Bien. Congr. Far East. Assoc. Trop. Med., Singapore, 1923 (publ. 1924). Trombicula vanderghinstei Gunther 1940, Proc. Linn, Soc. N.S.W., 65, (3-4), 252. Trombicula deliensis Wom, and Heasp. 1943, Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust., 67, (1), 87. This is one of the most abundant species both in New Guinea and in Queens- land, It was originally described from Sumatra, and Mehta’s record (1937) of “T deliensis” as associated with scrub typhus in the Simla Hills may be correct. From information available from both Queensland and New Guinea this species is probably one of the few which secm, so far, to he somewhat more definitely associated with scrub typhus in those areas. Morphologically the species is well separated by the DS being 2.8.6.6.4.2, and by the “Standard Data.” Since the original “Standard Data” was published, collec- tions have been received from the Buna and Milne Bay area of New Guinea. These collections, together with the original lot from Cairns, Queensland, and the small lot from Bulolo, New Guinea, described by Gunther as vanderghinstei, have been studied statistically and separately. The difference between the various pairs of populations have been tested for significance by taking the value of d/o, The Standard Data for the individual populations are as follows: Cairns—Number of specimens = 20. Standard Theoretical Observed Coeff. of Mean Deviation Range Range Variation AW - - 63:15+0°50 2°2440°35 56°4-69°8 60°0-67°0 3: PW -) - 76°9540°75 3°38 40°53 66°8-87-0 70°0-82:°0 4-4 SB - = 29:°9+40°34 1°53 40-24 25°3-34°5 26°0-32-0 5-1 SD - - 37°24+0°43 1°9440-30 31°4-43-0 35:0-41-0 5:2 A-P - - 28'4+0°28 1-28 +0°20 24-6-32°2 27°0-30:0 4:5 AM - - 55:94+0-49 2°15+40°34 49°4-62°3 52:0-60-0 3°8 AL - - 43:6+0:49 2°20+0°35 37-0-50°2 40-0-48-0 5:0 PL - - 62°640°56 2°52+40-40 55-1-70°1 57:0-67°0 4-0 Sens. - - 62°8+0°52 2°09 40°37 56°5-69°1 60°0-65-0 3:3 Bulolo—Number of specimens = 4. Standard Theoretical Observed = Coeff. of Mean Deviation Range Range Variation AW - - 65°0+0°47 0°82 40°33 62°6-67°4 64-0-66:0 1-25 PW - - 74:°041-24 2716+0°81 67°5—~80°5 71:0-76:0 29 SB - - 29°3+0:98 1-70+0°69 24:°2-34°4 27°0-31-0 5:8 SD - - 39°7-—1:26 2°184+0°89 33°2-46°2 36°0-40:0 5°5 A-P - - 27:5+0°75 1°50+40°53 23°0-32-0 26°0-30°0 5-4 AM - - 54:241-82 3°6341-28 43-3-65°2 50-0-60-0 6:7 AL - - 42:7-0°25 O-5140°18 41°25-44:25 42:0-43-0 1:2 PL - - 61°7-0°74 1:-4840°52 57°25-66°25 60°0-64:0 2-4 Sens. - - 65:0 No variation recorded Milne Bay—Number of specimens = 22. Standard Theoretical Observed = Coeff. of Mean Deviation Range Range Variation AW - - 67°240°57 2°69 +0°40 59°2-75°2 61-0-72-0 4:0 PW - - 84:241:°32 6:204+0°93 65°6-102°8 =72:0-93-0 7°3 SB - - 32:2+0°43 2°02 +0°30 26°2-38-2 29-0-36-0 6:2 SD - - 40°0+0°41 1:9440°29 34:2-45°8 39-0-44-0 4-8 A-P - - 30°440°25 1:13 +0°18 27°033°8 29-0-32-0 3°7 AM - - 52°840°48 2°25 40°34 46:0-59°6 47°0-57°0 4:2 AL - - 42:340°31 1-45+0°22 38°0-46'6 40°0-45-0 3°4 PL - - 58:0+0°63 2°95 +0°44 49-0-67°0 50-0-65-0 5:0 Sens. - - 63°04+0°61 2:54 40°44 55-4-70°6 61-0-68-0 4-0 91 Buna—Number of specimens = 7. Standard Theoretical Observed Coeff, of Mean Deviation Range Range Variation AW - 70°440°69 1°84+40°49 64°9-75-9 68-0-72:°0 2°6 PW - 83°741-07 2°86+0°76 75°1-92°3 79°0-86°0 3°4 SB - 32:8+0°91 2:41 +0°64 25-6-40-0 29-0-36-0 7°3 SD - 41°85+41-30 3°3540°89 31°8-51°8 39-0-47-0 8:0 A-P ~ 30°341:04 2°76 40°74 22:°0-38-6 25-0-32-0 9-1 AM - 67:°6+40-96 2°554+0°68 60-0-75-2 65-0-72-0 38 AL - 55°340°56 1°48 +0-40 50-8-59°8 54-0-57°0 27 PL - 86°441°47 3°90 + 1-04 74°7-98:1 83-0-94°0 45 Sens. - 69°7+1-30 3°454+0°92 59°35-80-0 62°0-72°0 5-0 The significance of the differences between these populations, taking a value of d>2e¢4as being positively significant, is shown in the following table. Table of Significance of Four Populations of T. deliensis AW PW SB SD A-P AM AL PL Sens. Cairns-Buna_ - OF te + + 42 9b + + Cairns-Milne Bay f | fH GE He at Cairns-Bulolo - 5 ees eee eo eS, ae Buna-Milne Bay a oe Lan 2S ss gs t+ ae Buna-Bulolo - - + ~~ ae $+ +} bog Milne Bay-Bulolo a BL : Ag te aie Ot It is seen that while the Cairns population shows a significant difference from, and might conceivably be separated from those of Buna and Milne Bay, yet they are linked together by the Bulolo population. T. deliensis is, then, rather a widely variable species, and for specific identification the range of variation of the Standard Data as given by the four above populations combined must be taken into account. It is also to be noticed that the statistics for AM, AL and PL of the Buna populations are markedly higher than for the other populations, and this may indicate a tendency for a genetical separation in this locality. The. statistics of the “Standard Data for the combined populations are as follows: Standard Theoretical Observed Coeff. of Mean Deviation Range Range Variation AW - 65-940-°50 3°58 40°35 55°2-76'6 60:0-72-0 5-4 PW - &0°340°80 5°77 +0°57 63°0-97°6 70:°0-93-0 7°2 SB - 31:°340°31 2°28+0°22 24-5-38°1 26:°0-36'0 7°3 SD - 39-040-37 2°67 40°26 31:1-47-1 35-0-47°0 68 A-P - 29°:440°26 1°93+0°19 23°6-35-2 25°0-32°0 6°5 AM - 56°04+0°74 5-30+0°52 40-0-72-0 47-0-72:0 9°5 AL - 44:040°63 4°574+0-44 30°7-58°3 40-0-57°0 10:0 PL - 63°341-20 8°7840°85 37:0-89-6 50-0-94-0 5-4 Sens - 64°240°52 3°48 40°37 53°7-74°7 60-0-72-0 5-4 The acconipanying graphs of the parameters for each particular character of the different populations give a more visual picture of the variations within the species. Each measurement, e.g., AW, PW, etc., in microns is shown separately for the four populations in the order from left to right of Cairns, Bulolo, Milne Bay and Buna. The Means for each are linked together, and to the right again is a graph showing the statistics considering the four populations as one. The statistics shown.are: Mean +3o,y, theoretical range as expressed by Mean +3o, the value of Mean +2c, and the obscrved range (indicated by x,x). To save space the graph of Sens. has been increased 20, so that this must be allowed for in reading. 92 1to Pw a0 76 36 Graphs showing Variation in Statistics of Standard Data of four populations of larval Trombicula. deliensis Walch. (Measurements in microns, except Sens., to which 20,4 has been added to save space. Populations from left to right in each set are from Cairns, Bulolo, Milne Bay and Buna, followed by the combined. graph.) TROMBICULA MINOR Berl. 1904 Trombicula minor Berl. 1905, Acari Nuovi, Manip. TV, 135; Womersley 1939 (July), Trans. Roy. Soc. S .Aust., 63, (2), 152; Gunther 1939 (December), Proc. Linn. Soc. N.5S.W., 64, (51-6), 466; ibid., 65, (5-6), 477; Womersley and Heaslip 1943, Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust., 67, (1), 92. 93 Trombicula pseudoakamushi v. deliensis Walch 1924, Tr. 5th Bien. Congr, Far East. Assoc. Trop. Med., 601. Trombicula hirsti Sambon 1927, Ann. Mag. Nat. Hist., (9), 20, 157; nec Hirst 1929, ibid., (10), 3, 564; nec Womersley 1934, Rec. S. Aust., 5, (2), 212; Gate 1932, Parasitology, 24, 143. Trombicula hirsti v. morobensis Gunther 1938 (nom. nud.), Med. J. Aust., 2, (6), 202. Trombicula hirsti v. buloloensis . Gunther 1939, Proc. Linn. Soc. N.S.W., 64, (1-2), 78. Trombicula minor vy. deliensis Wom. and Heasp. 1943, Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust., 67, (1), 93. Of this species, which is common in parts of New Guinea and Queensland, separate populations for each area (New Guinea 23 specimens, Queensland 50 specimens) have been examined with the following results: Queensland. Standard Theoretical Observed — Coeff. of Mean Deviation Range Range Variation AW - - 83:440°38 2°69+40°27 75°3-91-4 75°0-90-0 3°2 PW - - 96°6+40°37 2°63 +0°26 88-7-104°5 90-0-104:0 2-7 SB - - 42-84+0°21 1-5240°15 38° 347-3 40°0-47-0 3°5 SD - = 67:7 40°33 2:35 40°23 60°7-74-7 61:0-72:0 3°4 A-P - - 35:9+0°+17 1-21 +0-12 32°3-39°-5 32°0-39-0 3:4 AM -) - 40°6+40°33 2°33 40°24 33°6-47°6 34:0-47-0 5°7 AL ~ - 45°940-33 2°35+40°23 38-9-53-0 40-0-50°0 4+] PL - - 54-140-28 2°00 40-20 48-1-60-1 47-0-60°0 37 Sens. - - 64 440-57 3°08 +0°40 55°2-73:7 51-0-68°0 4-8 New Guinea. Standard Theoretical Observed Coeff. of Mean Deviation Range Range Variation AW - - 84:5+40-°64 3°06+40°45 75°3-93°7 80:0-91-0 3°6 PW - - 99°340-46 3°1040°33 90°0-108-6 95-0-106-0 2-2 SB - ~ 44°340°33 1-58 +0°23 39°6-49-0 41-0-47-0 3°5 SD - - 65:°44+0-41 1-894+0-29 59-7-71-7 61:0-70-0 2°9 A-P - - 34:64+0-40 1-93 +0°28 28-8404 31:0-38-0 5-7 AM - - 47-1+0°60 2°68+0°42 39°1-55°] 43-0-50-0 5:7 AL - - 53+140°56 2°72 +0-40 45-0-61:2 48:0-58-0 51 PL - - 57:7+0°60 2°89 40°43 49-0--66-4 50-0-64:0 5:0 Sens - - 58:94+0-81 3°65 40°57 48-0-69°9 50-0-65-0 6:2 Comparing these two populations in which the ranges of variation but not the ranges of Means, except for AW and SB, overlap considerably, it is found that, taking the standard error of the difference of means, they are significantly different for all characters except AW, the values for d/og being AW 1°48, - PW 4°37, SB 4:05, SD 4-0, A-P 3-5, AM 10-0, AL 11-6, PL 6°8, Sens. 5+7. Further, the ratio of PW/SD differs considerably, as follows: Queensland 1-427, New Guinea 1°519, It seems reasonable therefore that, while both populations may belong to the saine species, and there is not sufficient difference to regard the New Guinea (and Sumatran) material (previously recorded as T. minor v. deliensis Walch) as 1 distinct variety, yet there is a geographical genetical difference between the two populations. The two closely allied species, T. wichmanni Oudms. and T. hatorii Wom. and Heasp. are not known from sufficient material but appear to be significantly different, in the Stan «rd Data, and in the ratio of PW/SD which for wichmanni is 1°85 and for hatorii 1°57. 94 ; Pw 110 x Te 100 Comparison of Trombicula minor Berl, from Queensland and T. minor v. deliensis Walch x from New Guinea. (The first graph of each set is T. minor. Measurements in microns.) Sens. re T i PL | AL x » x aa , 60 - Ty 7 AM SB y | 50 17 af x : rl i! is L _ / oo * x Ty / 5 yy, AY ' a 7 AP / . , + * 40 7 a med 6 36 95 Trombicula sarcina n. sp. Fig. 5, A-C Description—Larva. Shape shortly oval. Length 25», width 160 p. Dorsal scutum as figured with the following Standard Data in microns: AW 79, PW 90, SB 36, ASB 25, PSB 32, SD 57, A-P 32, AM 26, AL 34, PL 40, Sens. ? Dorsal setae 26 in number, arranged 2.6.6, then two well separated clusters of 6 on each Fig. 5 Trombicula sarcina n.sp. Larva: A, dorsal; B, ventral; C, scutum x 500. side (see fig. 5 A), 40-47 » long, fairly robust and well ciliated. Eye 2-2. Palpi and mandibles typical of the genus. Venter: gnathosoma with a pair of ciliated setae, a pair between coxae I and between coxaec III, thereafter 4.2, and then a pair of clusters of 9 to 10 each as on the dorsum (fig. 5B). All coxae unisetose. Legs: I 270p, I] 250p, III 290; tarsi I and II with dorsal rod-like seta; all tarsi with paired claws and claw-like empodium. Locality and Host—aA single specimen (one of two) found in lesions on the skin about the shanks and coronets of sheep, Clermont, Queensland, March 1944 (sent by Mr, D, A. Gill, McMaster Laboratory, Sydney). Eight specimens collected on boots in ti-tree sheep camp, Clermont, Queensland, April 1944. Remarks—This species is rather closely related to T. mtmor in the general conformation of the scutum but differs in the length of AM, AL, and PL, and 96 more particularly in the greater number of DS, and their arrangement posteriorly into two well separated lateral clusters. The sensillae are missing except for a short piece of one, but long enough to place the species in Trombicula, With the eight specimens from Clermont, Queensland, received after the above descrip- tion was drawn up the Standard Data are as. follows: Standard Theoretical Observed Coeff. of Mean Deviation Range Range Variation AW -) - 77:040°63 1940-44 71-35-82-65 = 75-0--79-0 2°45 PW - - 88°65+40°57 1-740°40 83-55-93-75 85-0-90°0 1:91 SB - = 40°140°85 2°55+0-°60 32°5-47°7 36°0-43-0 6:3 SD - + 57:0 No variation recorded A-P - - 57-0 No variation recorded AM -. - 29:040°47 1-4140°33 24°8-33-2 26°0-32:0 4°85 AL - = 35°840-21 0°6340-15 33°9-37°7 34:0-36°0 1°8 PL - - 42:7+40°31 0-944+0°22 39-9-45-5 40°0-43:0 2:2 Sens. - - 57-0 No variation recorded Genus SCHONGASTIA Oudemans 1910 Entom., Ber., 1910, 3, (54), 86. Schongastia pusilla n. sp. Fig. 6, A-C Description—Larvae. Colour in life probably light yellowish-red. Shape ovoid. Length to 210», width to 155. Dorsal scutum typical of the genus, as figured, and with the following Standard Data as derived from 28 specimens. Standard Theoretical Observed = Coeff. of Mean Deviation Range Range Variation AW - - 54-8540°48 2°57 +0°34 47-1-62°5 50-0-61°0 4:7 PW -) - 72:74+0°51 2:7240°36 64°5-80°8 68°0-79-0 3-7 SB - - 21:25+0°21 1-1340°15 17-85-2465 19°0-23°0 5+3 SD - - 50°640°47 2°34 40°33 43-6~57°6 44-0-57-0 4-6 A-P - ~ 25:454+0°31 1:68 +0°22 20°4-30°5 23:°0-32:0 6°6 AM - - 30°-4+0-30 1°50+0°21 25°9-34°9 28:0-32:0 5-0 AL - ~ 57°540°54 2°87 40°39 48-9-66°1 54-0-61-0 5:0 PL - = 44-2+0°70 3°63 40°49 33°3-55°1 39-0-50-0 8-2 Sens. - - Nude, ca. 33 » long, with head 24 x 24p Dorsal setae slender, tapering and ciliated, and arranged 2.8.2 (outer). 8.8.6.2.2. Eyes 2+ 2. Mandibles and palpi normal for genus. Legs: I 2504 long, II 210», III 235 »; tarsi with paired claws and median claw-like empodium ; tarsi I and II with the usual sensory dorsal rod. Venter: all coxae unisetose; between coxae I and between coxae III with the usual pairs of similar setae; thereafter the setae are arranged approximately 2.6.6.6(4).4(2). (2). Locality —In numbers, collected on boots in Kunai grass, Buna area of New Guinea, 1943, together with S. blestowet Gunther and T. walcht Wom, and Eeasp. ftemarks-—This is rather a small species and in the key (Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust., 67, (1), 102) comes near to S. katonis Wom. and Heasp. but can be distinguished by the Standard Data and arrangement of DS, and the nude head of the sensillae. As it might also be confused with S. blestowei, with which it occurs, the Standard Error of the Difference of the Means for both species have been compared and found to be significant (see under S. blestowei). 07 Fig. 6 Schéngastia pusilla n.sp. Larva: A, dorsal; B, ventral; C. seutum x 500. SCHONGASTIA BLESTOWET Gunther 1939 Schéngastia yeomansi Gunther 1938, Med. J. Aust., 2, (6), 202, (nom. nud.); blestowet Gunther 1939, Proc. Linn. Soc, N.S.W.. 64, (1. 2). 92; Womers- ley and Heaslip 1943, Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust., 67, (1), 103. Of this species, which so far is only known from New Guinea, I am now able to report on three populations irom different areas, viz., Suein River, Sepik Dis- trict (7 specimens from man); 3 specimens from Bulolo from Megapodius duperrexi, and 32 specimens collected on boots, Buna area. The Standard Data for the first two populations were reported in 1943, but are now examined statisti- cally with those of the Buna collection. Buna—Number of specimens = 32. AW PW SB SD A~P AM AL PL Sens. Mean 67°64+0°80 88-8+0°70 27°25 40°35 67°1 40°77 32'7+0°35 39°5+0-40 77°8 40°99 59-640°85 35-0 Standard Deviation 5040-62 3°95 40°49 Theoretical Range 52-6-82°6 77°0-100°5 21°2-33°3 54°3-79-9 26°8-38°6 33°0-46:0 61°0-94°6 45-5-74+1 Observed Range 61-0-79-0 82°0-97:°0 25-0-29-0 56:0-75-0 29-0-36°0 35°0-43-0 70-0-90°0 50-0-72-0 Not individually measured Coeff. of Variation 7A KNIUID ND PNuDdRu 98 Suein River, Sepik District, on man, Number of specimens = 7. Standard Theoretical Observed Coeff. of Mean Deviation Range Range Variation AW - - 65:0 No variation recorded PW - - 89°34+0°66 1-75 +0°47 84-0-94-5 87:0-91-0 1-95 SB - + 25°740°26 0°704+0-19 23°6-27°8 24-0-26-0 27 SD - - 60°440°75 1-99+0°53 54-4-66°4 58-0-65-0 3:3 A-P - - 30°0+0:28 O-7540°20 27°75-32:25 29-0-31°0 2°8 AM - - 36°2+0°70 1:87 40°50 30-6-41°8 35°0-40-0 5-1 AL + & 65:0 No variation recorded PL - = 50°85-+0°37 0°99 +0°26 47 -8-53-9 50-0-52-0 1:95 Sens. - - 35-0 No variation recorded Bulolo (cx Megapodius)—Number of specimens = 3 Standard Theoretical Observed Coeff. of Mean Deviation Range Range Variation AW - - 90°0+0°47 0-81 40°33 56°6-61 4 58:0-60-0 : PW -) - 90:040-47 0:91 40°33 77°0-83:0 78-0-82°0 1°4 SB - - 33:040°81 1-4140°57 28 °8-37-2 32-0-35-0 4-2 SD - - 62:0 No variation recorded A-P - - 20-0 No variation recorded AM - - 37-0 Only 1 specimen measured AL = - 63-0 Only 1 specimen measured PS - - 60:041°42 2°00 + 1:0 54-0-66-0 58°0-62°0 3°3 Sens. - - 30:0 No variation recorded The above three populations have been tested for significant differences and the results summarised in the following table, a value of d/o >2 being regarded as positive, those in the neighbourhood of 2:0 being indicated by +. Significance of Differences of three Populations of S. chéngastia blestowet Gunther. AW PW SB SD A-P AM AL PL Buna-Suein Rv. = 4 ma + + + + ae + Buna-Bulolo - 7 + + 4 + + + + 7 Suein Rv.-Bulolo — - + + + + + oy + a From this it is seen that the Bulolo specimens regarded in the 1943 paper as a variety megapodius of blestowei differ significantly from those of Suein River and Buna, but that the Suein River population only differs from the Buna popula- tion in the factors SD, A-P, AM, AL and PL. That megapodius should be regarded as a distinct variety is also borne out by: (1) that its host is a bird Megapodius duperreyi and (2) that on the venter behind coxae III the setae number 26 arranged ca. 6.6.4.4.4.2, whereas in blestowei {, typ. they number 40, arranged approximately 8.8.8.6.4.4.2. The ratios of the PW/SD of the three populations are Buna 1°32, Bulolo 1-29, Suein River 1-48. A comparison of the Standard Data of these populations with those of S. pusilla shows a positive difference in all characters, the values of d/o in all cases greatly exceeding one of 2. SCHONGASTIA SALMI Oudms. 1922 Ent. Bericht, 1922, 6, (126), 81; idem, 6, (128), 114. This species, overlooked in the 1943 paper, was described from Java without any figure and with only the briefest description, a translation of which is as follows: 99 “Differs from hitherto described species in the form of the scutum, which is trapezoidal, wider behind than in front, anteriorly concave, posteriorly strongly convex with a deep medial incision. The posterior half of the scutum is finely wrinkled as is the dorsal cuticle. On the dorsum with 12 transverse rows of 10 ciliated setae. “Living in grass; parasitic on ——-——? Kediri, (Java), Dr. A. J. Salm.” In a short additional note (above) Oudemans says, “Tenkoe des abres; in gras, Magelang, Sept. 1916.” There is, uniortunately, nothing in the above by which one can place the species in Schdngastia, Neoschéngastia or Paraschéngastia, except possibly the wrinkling (striations) of the posterior half of the scutum which perhaps suggests a member of the last genus. it seems, therefore, that until the type can be located and examined, the species must be regarded as “incertae sedis”. Genus NEoscr6éncastra Ewing 1929 Manual of External Parasites, 1929, 187. Fig. 7 Neoschingastia mccullochi n.sp. Larva: A, dorsal; B, ventral; C, chelicera; D, scutum x 500; E, dorsal seta. 100 Neoschongastia mecullochi n. sp. Fig. 7, A-E Description—| arvae. Shape ovate. Length 170y, width 130,, Dorsal scutum as figured, with the following Standard Data in microns: AW 48, PW 6/, SB 19, ASB 19, PSB 16, A-P 20, AM 16, Al. 42, PI. 64, Sens. 22 (head nude, 17x17). Dorsal setae 48 » long, foliate with very large lateral teeth (ci. fig. 7 A) and arranged 2,6.6.6.4.2. The scutal AL and PL are similar to the DS in form; but AM is of normal form. Eyes 2 + 2, close to the margins of the scutum. Man- cibles and palpi normal. Legs: [ 248 » long, Hi 208 », LI] 248 »; tarsi with paired claws and median claw-like empodium. Venter: all coxae with 1 normal ciliated setae; a similar pair between coxae | and between coxae [1], and thereafter arranged 2.6.4.4.2, the first row of 4 stronger and more ciliated than the rest. Locality—A single specimen collected on boots, Abidari, New Guinea, 28 July 1943 (R. N. McCulloch). Remarks --'This species is close to N. foltata Gunther, but differs in the broader and stronger teothed DS, which are only 26 in number as compared with 32. Other differences lie in the smaller scutum and the Standard Data. Genus GUNTHERANA Womersley 1943 Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust., 1943, 67, (1), 132. Guntherana parana n. sp. Fig. 8, A-B Description—lLarvae. Shape broadly oval, without a distinctive waist. Length to 195 », width to 143». Anterior dorsal scutum rectangular as figured, with the follawing Standard Data based on seven specimens. Standard Theoretical Observed Coett. of Mean Deviation Range Range Variation AW - - 46°740°78 2°054+0°55 40'6-52°8 43-0-50-0 4-4 PW - - 64°7+41-:00 2:654+0°71 56°7-72°6 61:0-68-0 4+] SB - - 17-440°34 0:90 +0°24 14°7-20°'1 16°0-18-0 5-2 SD - - 46°64+0°4 1-05 +0-28 43-5—-49-7 44-0-47-0 2°25 A-P - - 29°140°5] 1-354+0°36 25-1~33°1 27 0-32-0 4:7 AM - - 30°0+40°4 1:07 +0°28 26°8-33 2 29-0-32-0 3°5 AL - - 30°04+0°:4 1:07 +0°28 26° 8-332 29-0-32°0 3:5 AL - - 74:0+1°6 4°3741-17 60°9-87-1 68-°0-81-0 5°9 PL - - 98-441-6 4-3441-13 85°4-111-4 93-0-108-0 4:4 Sens. - - No variation recorded The ratio (19: 16). 2.6.4.6.2, of PW/SD = 1°39 and the ASB is slightly greater than PSB Sensillae globose, the head nude and 16x 16. the last 2 being 90-120, long. Posterior dorsal scutum somewhat Dorsal setae arranged reniform, 104 wide, by 65, long, not subdivided, with very fine pitting (or pubesence) and with three pairs of very fine setae uniformly 31 long. Eyes 2+2. Mandibles and palpi normal as in G. bipygalis (Gunther). All coxae unisetose, a pair of setae between coxae T and between coxae III, and thereafter ventral setae 8.6.4.4.2, Legs: I 260, I] 235 », HI 286 uw; tarsi with paired claws and a claw-like empodium; tarsi 1 and 11 with a short smooth sensorial rod dorsally. Locality—A number of specimens collected on boots at Abidari, New Guinea, 28 July 1943 (R. N, McCulloch). Remarks—Differs from the genotype in the smaller anterior dorsal scutum with different Standard Data, especially SB, and the fewer and different arrange- 101 ment of the DS (20 as compared with 28 in bipygalis). The posterior dorsal scutum also differs, the setae being uniform in length, whereas in bipygalis they are shorter and not uniform. The remarkable habit of C. bipygalis of attaching its eggs to the fur of its host has not been observed for G. pavana, neither has it yet been found upon any host. Fig. 8 Guntherana parana n.sp. Larva: A, dorsal; B, scutum x 500. Genus WaALcurA Ewing 1931 Proc, U.S. Nat. Mus., 80, (8), 10. Genotype Walchuun glabruam Walch. WaALCHIA DISPARUNGUIS (Oudms. 1929) = Schéngastiella disparunguis Ouds. 1929, Ent. Ber., 7, (165), 398. This species was described from specimens from the ears of Mus rattus var. from Garoet (W. Java), Aug., W. C. van Heuren. Oudemans’ original description, translated, reads as follows: “Length of a moderately engorged specimen 225 p, greatest breadth 145 p. Scutum roughly pentagonal with one angle directed posteriorly; in each of the other four angles a seta. On each shoulder is a seta and behind the scutum five rows of six setae in each. Pseudostiginal organ clavate, the stem about one-third of its length. Dorsal setae about 30 » long, brush-like and shortly ciliated. Eyes small, cornea half-spherical, Venter: all coxae (also maxillae) with a feathered seta; coxae III with two such. Between coxae I and between coxae III a pair of similar setae. Then 17 pairs of setae similar to the dorsal sctae. Gnathosoma dorsally with six pairs of smooth setae, ventrally with one more; externally on the tibiae with a short smooth seta, and on the very short and difficult to see palpus are four setae of which one is a short thick rod-like olfactory seta, the three others are short thick setae distally divided into four or five branches. Palpi claw bifid.” Oudemans was rather uncertain about placing this species in Schéngastiella Hirst as it differed from Hirst’s diagnosis in having only four setae besides the sensillae on the scutum instead of three pairs. He also noted that the scutum resembles that of Typhyothrombium Ouds. 1910 (= Gahrliepia Ouds. 1912), but 102 in his description it is suggested that the posterior angle is sharply defined (not tongue-like as in Gahrliepia as now understood) and similar to that of Walchia Ewing. Oudemans also refers to the disparity in form and size of the three tarsal claws, and named his species on this character. This feature, in which the median claw (empodium) is much stronger than the others and of median length, the outer longer and only slightly more slender, and the inner only slightly shorter than the median but much thinner, is, however, present in all the species of Walchia known to me and is, I believe, a good generic character. The multisetose coxae IIf also places Oudemans’ species in Walchia, but all other species have either one, three, four or six setae present and disparunguis is intermediate between W’. glabrum Walch (= pingue Gater) with three coxal setae and the group, morebensis Gunther, rustica (Gater) and turmalis (Gater) with only a single seta on coxac HII. In the DS it will be closely related to glabrum. WALCHIA GLABRUM (Walch 1927) Trombicula glabrum Walch 1927 Genesk., Tijdsch. v. Ned., Indie, 67, (6), 926. Watchia glabrum Ewing 1931, Proc. U.S. Nat. Mus., 80, (8), 10; Womersley and Heaslip 1943, Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust., 67, (1), 134. Walchia pingue Gater 1932, Parasitology, 24, Of this species I have now been able to examine seven specimens from the Runa area of New Guinea, 1943 (G. M. Kohls). The statistical values of the Standard Data for these specimens are as follows: Standard Theoretical Observed Coeff. of Mean Deviation Range Range Variation AW - - 29°34+0°26 0-70 +0-19 27°2-31-4 28°0-30-0 2°4 PW - - 51-4+0-90 2°5540°68 43°7-59°-1 48 °0-54-0 5:0 SB - - 26°85 +0°55 1:4640°39 22-5—31-2 25°0-29-0 5-4 SD - - 54°8540-47 1-25 +0°33 51:0+58-6 53-0-57°0 2°3 A-P - - 36°85 +0°37 *98 40°37 33-9-39°8 36:0-38-0 27 AL - os 29°0 No variation recorded PL - - 33:-440°:52 1-440°37 29-2-37°6 32°0-35:0 4-2 In the 1943 paper, on page 135, it was stated that one of the lateral claws was wanting. I now find that this is not so, the inner claw is definitely present but fine and difficult to see, in comparison with the outer claw and empodium. Subfam. LEEUWENHOEKIINAE nov. Trombiculinae with a respiratory spiracle situated in front of the first coxae and on each side of the gnathosoma, from which radiate tracheal tubes. A study of many specimens of Leeuwenhoekia has recently revealed the presence of the above pair of true spiracles, each of which is supplied with a tracheal system. The larvae of the Trombidtiidae are separated from those of the Erythraeidae by the presence ventrally between the first and second coxae of a pronounced and conspicuous spiracle-like opening or “urstigma”. No tracheal tubes, however, have ever been observed arising therefrom and its precise function is unknown. The above true stigma, however, is of a different type, smaller and less strongly chitinised, and long tracheae can be traced running down the body for a considerable distance. On the presence of an organ of such fundamental importance it becomes necessary to erect a new family, ranking with the Trombiculinae in the restricted sense, 103 Unfortunately, the allied genus Hannemanmia has not been found in this region and the presence of such an organ in the species of that genus requires determination by other workers. At present only the genus Leeuwenhoekia can be placed in the subfamily. Genus LEEUWENHOERIA Ouds, 1911 Entom., Ber., 3, (5-8), 137. Genotype Heterothrombium verduni Ouds. 1910. The first species of this larval genus to be recorded from Australia was L. australiensis Hirst 1925 (Trans. Roy. Soc. Trop. Med. and Hyg., 19), which was described from specimens collected in the suburbs of Sydney, where they were a source of much annoyance to people working in the gardens. Fig. 9 Leeuwenhoekia australiensis Hirst. Larva: A, dorsal; B, ventral; C, seutum x 500; D, palp; FE, tarsus I; F, tarsus and metatarsus 1V. In 1934 (Records S. Aust. Mus., 5, (2), 217) I recorded, under the same name, specimens taken from the ears of a cat from Glen Osmond, Adelaide (D. C. S., 1931), and in 1939 (Proc. Linn. Soc. N.S.W., 64, (1, 2), 95) Gunther 104 recorded it for New Guinea from a single specimen from a Cassowary at Bulolo, upon my determination. In my joint paper with W. G. Heaslip (Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust., 67, (1), 1943, 141) the Standard Data for a number of specimens from (Queensland were also recorded. It is now found that the Adelaide specimens are different and they are re- described as a new species. ‘Several other new species are also described and a key to the species of the genus presented. LEEUWENHOEKIA AUSTRALIENSIS Hirst Fig. 9, A-F Trans. Roy, Soc. Trop. Med. and Hyg, 1925, nec Womersley 1934. Rec. S. Aust. Mus. 1934, 5, (2), 217; Gunther 1939, Proc. Linn. Soc. N.S.W., 64, (1, 2), 95; Womersley and Heaslip 1943, Trans. Roy Soc. S. Aust., 67, (1), 141 (in part). A population of 13 specimens from Chatswood, Sydney, practically the type locality, collected in April 1943 (R. N. McCulloch), have been examined together with four from Cairns, Queensland, 1939, on bandicoots (W. G. Heaslip); four from bandicoots, Brisbane, Queensland, 1938, (W. G. H.), one from the same host, Little Mulgrave, Queensland, and one from man, Brisbane, Queensland, 1935 (F. H.S.). Both the Queensland and Sydney populations showed no significant differences in any of the characters used for the Standard Data. Another specimen from Bulolo, New Guinea, collected by Gunther does, how- ever, show a slight and significant difference from the Australian specimens in that the AL. and PI. are longer. It cannot, however, be regarded as more than a minor geographical difference. In his original description Hirst gives the following data: scutal length 60 4, width 96; length of anterior scutal process 21 2; AM 40-45, AL 464, PL 63% DS 42-43. The DS, according to his figures, are arranged ca. 2.10.7.10.12.11.8.6.4 = 70. A fresh description is now drawn up from the Chatswood, Sydney, material, except that the Standard Data is from the Sydney and Queensland material combined. Deseription—Length (excluding gnathosoma) to 340y, width to 230 .n. Shape an elongate oval. Dorsal scutum as figured, with following Standard Data: Standard Theoretical Observed — Coeff. of Mean Deviation Range Range Variation AW -- - 77°35+0°98 4°7340°70 63°25-91-45 = 72-0-90-0 61 PW - - 93:-441:0 4-78 +0°70 79°1-107°7 860-102-051 SB - = 30:240°43 2°06 40°30 24: 1-36°3 25:0-36°0 6'8 SD - = 70°8+0°73 3°5140-52 60°3-81°3 63°0-77°0 5°0 A-P - - 31°9+40°64 1:7640°45- = 26°6-37-2 29°0-36°0 9-7 AM -) - 44:940°68 3°27 +0°48 35°1-54°7 40-0-50-0 773 Al. - - 49-040-67 3°21+0°47 39-4-58°6 45-0-58:0 6:5 PL - + 63-640°57 2°75 40°40 55-4-71°8 58:0-70°0 4:3 Sens. - 64-040°71 2°77 +0°50 §5-7-72°3 61-0-68-0 4°3 Ratio of ASB/PSB = 41/30 and PW/SD = 1°32. Dorsal setae about 76 in number, 45-60 long and arranged approximately 2.12.8.8.12.12.10.6.4.2. Anterior median projection of scutum 25, long by 14h wide at base. The AM setae are 124 apart at bases and placed about 21 w behind the anterior margin of scutum. Eyes 2+ 2. Legs: longer than body, I 395 gz, Uf 310», IT 410», including coxae; coxae I with two setae, I] and JIT with one 105 seta, these setae 40 » long; tarsi | and HT with a stout dorsal sensory rod; all tarsi with paired claws and a longer median claw-like empodium; tibiae III with a pair of long slender whip-like setae and tarsi III with one such. Palpi and mandibles normal, chelae serrated. Gnathosoma with a pair of ciliated sctae. Between gnathosoma and coxae | on each side is a distinct, lightly chitinised stigma from which tracheal tubes run; between coxae I and coxae II on each side is the larger, more chitinised pseudo-stigmata (urstigma) from which no tracheal tubes arise, and which is characteristic of all larval Trombidiidae. Ventrally, between coxae I, there are no setae, a pair between coxae III, and thereafter about 60 setae, to 60 » long. Locality and Hosts—-As given in the introduction of this species. Remarks-—-The Standard Data for the single specimen from Bulolo, New Guinea, are as follows: AW PW SB ASB PSB SD A-P AM AL PL Sens. 83 07 32.43 32 32 30 54 61 72 60 As stated above, it is only significantly different in the values for AL and PL, and agrees in all morphological characters. Pending more material from Bulolo, it can only be regarded as a geographical variation. Leeuwenhoekia adelaideae n. sp. Fig. 10, A-C Description—Larvae. Shape elongate oval. Length to 360 4, width to 210 p. Dorsal scutum as figured, and the Standard Data based on the South Australian material as follows: Standard Theoretical Observed Coeff. of Mean Deviation Range Range Variation AW - - 76:440°88 1-96+0°62 70°5-82°3 74-0-80°0 2°5 PW - - 92:440°53 1:2040°38 88-8-96-0 90-00-93 -0 1°3 SB - - 28°84+0°65 1°47+0°46 24-4-33-2 26°0-30-0 5-1 SD - = 69°24+0:18 *404+0°12 68 °0—70-4 69-0-70-0 5 A-P - - 32:84+0-18 -40 40°12 31:°6-34:0 32°0-33-0 1:2 AM - - 41°2+0°65 1-47 +0-46 36°8-45-6 40-0-43-0 3°6 AL - - $7:840°43 98 4+0°31 34°9-40°7 37°0-39-0 2°6 PL - - 59°8+41-14 2°56+0°81 52-1-67°5 56°0-64-0 4-2 Sens. - - 63:040°86 1-734+0°61 57 -8-68°2 60:0-64-0 27 Ratio of ASB/PSB = 40/29 and PW/SD = 1°335, Dorsal setae ca. 52 in number and arranged ca. 2.12.8.10.8.6.4.2. Anterior median projection of scutum 18» long by 7 wide at base. The AM setae Il» apart at base and about 7 » behind anterior scutal margin. Eyes 2+ 2. Legs rather longer than body, 1 450, II 370 p, ITI 430 p, including coxae; coxae I with two setae, If and III with one seta each, these setae tapering, finely ciliated and about 50 » long; tarsi I and II with a stout dorsal sensory rod; all tarsi with paired claws and a rather longer slender, claw-like empodium; tibiae III with a pair of long slender whip-like setae, tarsi III with one such. Palpi and mandibles normal, chelae serrate. Gnathosoma with a pair of long ciliated setae, Between gnatho- soma and coxae I on each side with a true stigmal opening as in australiensis. Ventrally, no setae between coxae I, a pair between coxae III and thereafter about 26 setae to 40 » long. Remarks—Three specimens from rats from Cairns, Queensland, 1939 (W. G. H.), agree with the above data except that PW, A-P and especially AL and Sens., are significantly greater. It hardly seems possible, however, to regard these specimens as more than a geographical variation. Fig. 10 Leeuwenhoekia adelaideae n.sp. Larva: A, dorsal; B, ventral; C, scutum x 500. The Standard Data for these specimens are as follows: Standard Theoretical Observed = Coeff. of Mean Deviation Range Range Variation AW - - 74:041:05 1°82+0°74 68°5-79-5 72°0-75°0 2°5 PW - 88-341-°96 3°40+1-39 78° 1-98°5 85-0-93-0 3°8 SB - - 29-0 No variation recorded SD - = 67°341:90 3°3041°35 57°4-77°2 65:0-72-0 4-9 A-P - - 31:0+0-°81 1°-414+0-58 26°8-35°2 29°0-32-0 4-5 AM - - 43°341°65 2°87 41°17 34°7-51-9 40-0-47-0 6'°6 AL - - 45°-7+41-09 1-89 40°77 40-1-51-3 43°0-47'0 . 4-1 PL - 58-04+1-49 2°5841-05 50:3-65°7 54-0-60-0 4-45 Sens. - 70°7 40°54 -94 +0-38 67:°9-73°-5 70-0-72°0 1°33 107 Locality and Hosts—Five specimens from ears of domestic cats, three from Glen Osmond, South Australia, November 1931 (D.C. S.), and two from Unley, South Australia, February 1941 (R. V. S.). Also three specimens from rats, Cairns, Queensland, 1939 (W. G. H.). Leeuwenhoekia hirsti n. sp. Fig. 11, A-C Length (excluding gnathosoma) 3304, width 275 g. Description—Larva. Dorsal scutum as figured with the following Standard Shape an elongate oval. Fig. 11 Leeuwenhoekia hirsti n.sp. Larva: A, dorsal; B, ventral; C, scutum x 500. Data in microns: AW 79, PW 97, SB 29, ASB 46, PSB 31°5, SD 77:5, A-P 36, AM 43, AL 43, PL 54, Sens. 72, DS 45-60, Ratio PW/SB = 1:252. Dorsal setae rather more robust than in australiensis, 82 in number and arranged ca. 2.8.12.10.10.12.8.8.6.4.2, the anterior rows rather confused. The AM setae ll» apart at base and about 21 » behind anterior scutal margin. Anterior process of 108 scutum 29» long, and 11» wide at base. Eyes 2+ 2. Legs: I 360 ,, I] 330n, - ITI 375 p, including coxae; coxae I with two setae, II and III with one seta, these setae to 40 long; tarsi [ and I] with dorsal rod-like seta; tibiae ITI with two long whip-like setae, tarsi II] with one such; all tarsi with paired claws and rather longer, median claw-like empodium. A true stigma present on each side of gnatho- soma. Palpi normal, with bifurcate tibial claw. Mandibles normal, chelae serrate. No setae between coxae I, a pair between coxae III, and thereafter 12.12.12.10.10. 8.6.4.2 setae, to 36» long. Locality—-Described from a single specimen collected on boots at Skull Pocket, Kairi, Queensland, February 1943 (R. N. McC.). Remarks—In the Standard Data this species agrees with australiensis, but differs in the greater number of DS (82) and in the somewhat deeper scutum, giving a PW/SD of 1:252. The DS are also more robust, and the ventral setae more numerous. Leeuwenhoekia mecullochi n. sp. Fig, 12, A-C Description—-Larvae. J.ength (excluding gnathosoma) to 315, width to 210». Shape an elongate oval. Dorsal sctitum smaller and not as long as in other Big. 12 Leeuwenhoekia neceniloch v.sp. Larva: A, dorsal; B, ventral; C, scutum 500. 190 species, as figured with the following Standard Data in microns, based on four specimens. Standard Theoretical Observed Coeff. of Mean Deviation Range Range Variation AW, - - 64:040°87 1:73 +0°61 58°8-69:2 61-0-65°0 27 PW - - 81°041-00 2°0040°71 75:0-87:0 79-0-83:°0 2°5 SB - = 25-0 No variation recorded SD - - 1041-41 2°83 + 1-00 62°5-75°5 67°0-75-0 4-0 A-P - - 32:°540°43 0°87 40°31 29:9-35°1 32°0-34-0 27 AM -) - 36°5+40°43 0°87 40°31 33°9-39° | 36°0-38°0 2:4 AL - - 38:041-0 2°04+0°-71 32-0-44-0 36°0-40°0 5:2 PL - = 54-0 No variation recorded Sens. - - 44°341-09 1:8940°75 38-6-49°9 43 -0-47°0 4°3 Ratio of ASB/PSB = 39/29 and of PW/SD = 1-194. Dorsal setae ca. 70 in number 45-55 » long, and arranged ca, 2.8.10.8.10.10,10. 6.4.2. Anterior median projection of scutum about 22 long and 10, wide at base. The AM setae Il » apart at base and about 15 » behind anterior margin of scutum. Eyes 2+ 2. Legs: [ 345, If 290», II] 360 4; coxae I with two setae, If and I11 with one seta, these setae to 47 » long, tarsi I and II with dorsal rod- like seta, all tarsi with paired claws and median claw-like empodium; tibiae III with a pair of long slender whip-like setae, tarsi II] with one such. Gnathosoma with a pair of ciliated setae. A true stigma present on each side of gnathosoma. No setae between coxae I, a pair between coxae TIT, and thereafter 12.10.10.10. 6.4.2. setae, to 36 long and finer than the dorsal and other ventral setae, Palpi normal with bifurcate tibial claw. Mandibles with serrate chelicerae. Locality—Four specimens collected on boots, on edge of scrub. Trinity Beach area, Queensland, July 1943 (R. N. MeC.). Remarks—Very distinct from all other species with approximately similar number of IDS and whip-like setae on tibiae and tarsi If], in the Standard Data of the scutuni. Leeuwenhoekia southcotti n. sp. Fig, 13, A-C Description—Larvae, Length (excluding gnathosoma) to 310, width to 260. Shape elongate oval. Dorsal scutum small and relatively short, as figured, with the following Standard Data in microns based on seven specimens. Standard ‘Theoretical Observed Caeff. of Mean Deviation Range Range Variation AW -- ~ 62:715+0°56 1-484+0°-39 57°7-66°6 61-0-65:0 2: PW -— - 82-4+0-66 1-7640°46 77°\-87°7 79:0-85°0 271 SB - - 28:64+0°37 1:0+0°26 25°6-31°6 26°0-29:°0 374 SD - - 49:140°51 1:35 40°36 45-1-53-1 47-0-50-0 27 A-P - - 27:640°49 1:29+0°34 23°7-31°5 260-290 4-6 Al, - - 29-95+40-41 1-20+0°30 26°6-33°3 29°0-32°0 37 PL - ~~ 40°85+40°51 1°35 +0'36 '36°8-44-9 40-0-43-0 3°3 Sens. - - 64:340°58 1°48 40°43 59-9--68°7 61:0-65:0 2°3 Ratio of ASB/PSB = 24/19 and of PW/SD = 1-744, Dorsal setae ca. 42, arranged ca. 2.6.6.8.8.6.4.2, strong, ciliated and apically blunt. Anterior median projection of scutum 14» long by 5 wide at base. The AM setae with bases 5 «4 apart and about 4» behind anterior margin of scutum. Eyes 2+ 2. Legs: 1 340, 11 305, IIT 390 p, including coxae; coxae I with two setae, If and IIT with one seta, 32 » long; tarsi I and II with usual dorsal rod- like seta, III without any whip-like setae on tibiae or tarsi; all tarsi with paired claws and longer claw-like empodium. Gnathosoma with a pair of ciliated setae. 110 On each side of gnathosoma and between coxae I is a true stigma as in aus- traliensis. No setae between coxae I, a pair between coxae III, and thereafter 84444.44 setae. Palpi normal with bifurcate tibial claw. Mandibles with chelae serrated. Locality and Hosts—Two specimens from a skink (Lygosoma sp.) from Adelaide River, Northern Territory, Australia, June 1943 (R. V. S. Slide ACB 169B) and eight specimens from a similar host and the same locality July 1943 (R.V.S. Slide ASB 169A). Remarks—Differs markedly from all other species in the Standard Data and the lack of the long whip-like setae on tibiae and tarsi II. : di e Y ie Pa. \ / Fig. 13 Leeuwenhoekia southcotti n.sp. Larva: A, dorsal; B, ventral, C, scutum x 500. Leeuwenhoekia nova-guinea n. sp. Fig. 14, A-C Description—Larvae. Length, fully fed to 800, unfed 400,, width fully fed to 600, unfed 320». Shape an elongate oval, in life and before mounting with a distinct contraction behind coxae ITT. Dorsal scuttum as figured, with the sides of the posterior angle slightly concave, and with the following Standard Data in microns based on 12 specimens. AW PW SB SD A-P AM AL PL Sens. Mean - 85°7541-35 98-441°18 27°940°65 73°041-84 - 34°25 41-23 41°540°94 62'141°68 72°84+0°74 58°7 1°33 111 Deviation Standard Range Theoretical 71°7-99°8 86-°1~110-7 21-1-34-7 574-886 23°85-44-65 32°6-50-4 44-6-77°6 65-1-80°5 46-1-71-3 Range Observed 79-0-93-0 94-0-108-0 25-0-32°0 65-0-79-0 29-0--38°0 36°0-45°0 54°0-72:0 70°0-79:0 54-0-65-0 Variation Coeff. of w f _ SE AAO SIS S08 = DO on BR Re et Re ee Fig. 14 Leeuwenhockia nova-guinea n.sp. Larva: A, dorsal; B, ventral; C scutum x 500. Ratio setae ca, 62 and arranged ca. 2.12.8.10.12.10.6.2, but the transverse rows are difficult to interpret, fairly strong and strongly ciliated. cess of scutum: 25 » long by 11 » wide at the base. 14, apart and placed 14» behind the antcrior margin of scutum. Anterior pro- The AM setae with their bases Eyes 2+ 2. Legs: I 480 long including coxae, II 430», ITI 490 »; coxae I with two slender, 112 60 yw, fine setae, I] and II] with one seta; no pair of setae between coxae I, a pair between coxae HIT and thereafter about 70 setae 30-45 » long; tarsi with paired claws and slender claw-like empodium; tarsi I and II with short dorsal rod-like seta; tibiae III with a pair of long simple whip-like setae and tarsi III with one such, Palpi normal with bifurcate tibial claw. Mandibles with serrate chelae. Gnathosoma with a pair of ciliated setae. Between base of gnathosoma and coxae I, on each side is the characteristic true stigma of the subfamily. Locality and Hosts—A number of specimens from a magpie, Gymnorhina sp. Buna area, New Guinea, 21 November 1943 (G. M. Kohls), and froma kingfisher, same locality, 27 November 1943 (G. M. K.). Remarks-——Differs from other species in the number of DS, the Standard Data and the form of the dorsal seutum, as well as the construction behind the third pair of coxae., Key To THE AUSTRALIAN AND NEW GUINEA SPECIES OF LEEUWENHOEKIA 1 Tibia and tarsi of leg IIL with some Jong simple whip-like setae. 2 No _ long whip-like setae on tibiae or tarsi of leg III. Scutum small and relatively shallow, PW/SD=1-74. AW 62-1544-45, PW 82-445-3, SB 28-6 43:0, SD 49-144-0, A-P 27-643-9, AM 20-941-1, AL 29-9-4.3-3, PL 40-8 +44-0, Sens. 64-344-4. DS relatively short, straight and blunt at apex, 42 in number. ; LL. southcotti v.sp. bo PW/SD tess than 1-3, PW/SD ereater than 1-3. 4 3) PW/SD = 1-194, DS ca. 70 in number. AW 64-04.5-2, PW 81-:046-0, SB 25-0, SD 71-048-5, A-P 32-542-6. AM 36-542-6, PI 54-0, Sens. 44-345-7. DS fed tapering 45-55 , long. L. mecullochi n. sp. PW/SD = 1-252. DS ca. 82 in number AW 79-0, PW 97-0, SB 29-0, SD 77-5, A-P 36:0, AM 43-0, AL 43-0, PL 54-0, Sens. 72-0. DS tapering. LL. hirsti n. sp. 4 DS 52-54 in number. PW/SD = 1-336. AW 76-445-9, PW 92-44.3-6, SB 28-84 4-4, SD 69:-241-2, A-P 32:841+2, AM 41-2444, AL 37-842°9, PL 59°8 47°7, Sens. 63-0 45-2. LL. adelaideac n. sp. DS 62 in number. PW/SD = 1-32. AW 85-7414-0, PW 98-44 12-3, SB 27-9 4.658, SD 73:0415-6, A-P 34:2410-4, AM 41-548-9, AL 62:1417-5, PL 72:8 47-7, Sens. 58-7 4 12-6. L. novd-yuinea uw. sp. DS 76 in number. PW/SD = 1-32. AW 77-3414-2, PW 93-44 14-3, SB 30-2+46-1, SD 70-84 10-5, A-P 31-945-3, AM 44-949-8, AL 49-049-6, PL 63-648-2, Sens. 64-0 48-3. L. australiensis Hirst N.B.—The values of the Standard Data given in this key are the Means plus or minus three times the Standard Deviation, 7.e., they indicate the theoretical tange of variation. LIFE HISTORY OF THE TREMATODE, ECHINOCHASMUS PELECANIN. SP- By T. HARVEY JOHNSTON and E. R. SIMPSON, University of Adelaide Summary Echinochasmus pelecani n. sp. This small echinostome has been found in the small intestine of the pelican, Pelecanus conspicillatus Temm., at Tailem Bend, Murray River, on several occasions during the past six years, the number present being always small. The following measurements (in millimetres) have been taken from specimens which were egg-bearing, the average being based on ten worms in glycerine or methyl salicylate. Length 1-4-2-57 mm., average 1-92; maximum breadth -29--4 mm., average -36, occurring in the vicinity of the acetabulum, though the width at the oral crown (excluding the oral spines) is in most cases almost equal to it. Oral sucker terminal, approximately circular, though sometimes the length is slightly greater, -062--075 mm. diameter. Acetabulum circular. -24- -28 mm. diameter; distance of its anterior edge from head end of worm -72-1-1 mm., the ratio of this distance to length of worm 1: 2-2-2-9; acetabulum entirely in anterior half in. larger specimens, more or less completely so in smaller worms, the post-acetabular length being relatively greatest in largest worms. The ratio of the breadths of the oral and ventral suckers is nearly 1:4 (1: 3-7-4-0) in most specimens, but in the best-preserved material the oral sucker is -087 mm. wide by -070 long, and the acetabulum -225 mm. in diameter, the ratio of breadths thus being approximately 1: 2-6. The maximum breadth of such a worm was -35 mm, in the vicinity of the acetabulum, while the oral crown measured -31 mm. in width. 113 LIFE HISTORY OF THE TREMATODE, ECHINOCHASMUS PELECANI n. sp. By T. Harvey Jounston and E. R. Simpson, University of Adelaide [Read 11 May 1944] Echinochasmus pelecani n. sp. This small echinostome has been found in the small intestine of the pelican, Pelecanus conspicillatus Temm., at Tailem Bend, Murray River, on several occasions during the past six years, the number present being always small. The following measurements (in millimetres) have been taken from specimens which were egg-bearing, the average being based on ten worms in glycerine or methyl salicylate. Length 1°4-2-57 mm., average 1°92; maximum breadth -29--4 mm., average *36, occurring in the vicinity of the acetabulum, though the width at the oral crown (excluding the oral spines) is in most cases almost equal to it. Oral sucker terminal, approximately circular, though sometimes the length is slightly greater, -062--075 mm. diameter. Acetabulumi circular, -24--28 mm. diameter ; distance of its anterior edge from head end of worm +72-1-1 mm., the ratio of this distance to length of worm 1:2+2-2-9; acetabulum entirely in anterior half in. larger specimens, more or less completely so in smaller worms, the post-acetabular length being relatively greatest in largest worms. The ratio of the breadths of the oral and ventral suckers is nearly 1:4 (1:3-+7-4-0) in most specimens, but in the best-preserved material the oral sucker is -O87 mm. wide by -070 long, and the acetabulum *225 mm. in diameter, the ratio of breadths thus being approximately 1:2°6. The maximum breadth of such a worm was °35 mm, in the vicinity of the acetabulum, while the oral crown measured -31 mm. in width, In most specimens the covering of body spines had disappeared, since the worms disintegrate rather rapidly. These triangular, scale-like spines are closely arranged, similarly to those figured for E. donaldsoni by Beaver (1941), and the series extends on the dorsal and ventral surfaces from the oral region at least as far as the level of the testicular region. The collar spines are lost more or less completely soon after the death of the worms. The series is interrupted mid-dorsally where the interval between two spines is rather less than the diameter of the oral sucker. The majority of the spines are about °075 mm. long by 16-17 », but the three situated on each ventral lobe are smaller and exhibit an alternate arrangement (fig, 10). The inmost is the smallest, ‘045 mm. long by 12°52; the next -065--07 mm, by 174; and the next ‘0575 by 15-16. There are about 10 minute spinules on the anterior border of the oral sucker. Prepharynx about as long as oral sucker; pharynx -0753-:103 mm. long, as long as or slightly longer than diameter of oral sucker, -038--07 mm, wide, usually “O55. Ocsophagus long, widening posteriorly, bifureating immediately in front of genital aperature. Crura extending to sides of excretory bladder. Lateral excretory siphons passing forwards laterally from caeca, oesophagus and pharynx, terminating each as a narrow canal close to prepharynx a short distance behind oral sucker, 2 *15--21 mm. broad, in contact with posterior testis; latter more elongate, usually rounded-triangular but occasionally almost elliptical, -15-'275 mm. long, -138- *20 mn. broad. Cirrus sac relatively large, lying largely in area bounded by crura and anterior border of acetabulum, but extending dorsally above latter to about its middle; -175--25 mm. long, *112--162 mm. broad; seminal vesicle consisting Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust., 68, {1), 28 July 1944 Testes almost entirely in third quarter of worm: anterior *11--20 nm, long, bei 114 of rounded anterior and posterior chambers; numerous prostate glands associated with most anterior part of cirrus sac; cirrus very short, simple. Ovary more or less spherical, -07--08 mm. diameter, lying on right side of midline just in front of anterior testis; oviduct arising dorso-medianly, and curv- ing downwards to enter Mehlis gland lying on left side of midline and continuing ventrally as the uterus; inner portion of latter sometimes considerably swollen with semen (receptaculum seminis uterinum of Yamaguti). Uterus thrown into a few convolutions closely crowded into region between anterior testis and acetabu- lum, then passing above latter to one side of, and somewhat ventral to, cirrus sac as the metraterm to terminate in the shallow genital atrium. Eggs 1-24 in uterus; -075--087 by -050--062 mm.; average of 20 eggs, “081 x :059. Vitellaria lateral, extending from anterior border of excretory vesicle to level of posterior border of acetabulum, fields more or less coalescing in post-testicular region; rarely with narrow irregular isthmuses crossing testicular zone. ‘Transverse vitelline ducts lying immediately in front of anterior testis, one on more ventral level than the other; passing below corresponding crus to travel inwards and dorsally to enter the prominent yolk reservoir ; latter approximately median, dorsal. Laurer’s canal transverse, just in front of anterior testis. A specimen which had not yet produced an egg but whose seminal vesicle was distended with sperms, possessed the following measurement in millimetres :— length 1-47 mm.; breadth of oral crown -30, breadth at acetabulum -286; oral sucker °057 diameter; acetabulum °20 by °185; sucker ratio 1:2°6; front of acetabulum at -72 mm. from head end, ie., at almost half body length. In three specimens which were each producing the first egg, their dimensions were 1-4 long, -29 broad; 1-6, -36; and 1°65, -37 respectively, with the front of the acetabulum at 1: 2-°3-2-4 of body length distant from the anterior end. Very young worms were taken on various occasions. The smallest worm (a well-preserved specimen, fig. 12) found in a pelican measured -42 mm. long; “162 mm. across the oral crown; °125 mm. across the acetabular level; breadth of oral sucker -045 mm., of acetabulum -07, the ratio of widths thus being 1: 1:6; the two testes and ovary were recognisable; and the oral crown showed the same relative sizes and positions of the oral spines as in the adult. In specimens *7 (fig. 13) and ‘8 mm. (fig. 14) long the corresponding measurements were :— “187, -20; 125, -187: *375, -40 (ratio 1:1°86, 1:2); -05, -06; and -087, °137 (ratio of widths of suckers 1:1°7, 1:2°3) respectively. Vitelline glands in an immature condition were abundant, but rather restricted in their distribution, in a specimen 0°99 mm. long; they were not seen in smaller worms. We believe that our species is £. mordax (T.ooss) described (1899, 688) from an Egyptian pelican, P. onocrotalus, but the account of the parasite is brief and Looss’ figure indicates a different arrangement of the ventral collar spines. We are not aware of any subsequent description of that species and consequently consider it wiser to describe our own as new, than to include it under E. mordar. We expect that re-examination of the latter will reveal an arrangement of the collar spines similar to that seen in the Australian parasite and will lead to the suppression of our specific name. The dimensions mentioned by [.ooss generally fall within the range stated by us; the general form is similar; the presence of 22 collar spines in both; the inmost ventral collar spine has a similar length; his figure shows that the ratio of the breadths of the oral sucker and acetabulum is about 1:2°6; the front end of the acetabulum is at about two-fifths of the body length; and the eggs have similar dimensions. The host in each case is a species of Pelecanus. Echinostomum mordax was selected by Odhner (1910, 163) as the type of a new genus, Heterechinostomum (Echinochasminae), but Price (1931, 6) 115 Fig. 1-10, Echinochasnms pelecani—1, cercaria; 2, lateral view of cercaria showing genital system; 3, cysts on gills of fish; 4, metacercaria in cyst; 5, metacercaria; 6, redia; 7, mouth of redia, end view, showing pharyngeal lips; 8, freehand sketches of cercaria: (a) in resting position, (b and c) when swimming; 9, adult, ventral view, collar crown and body spines omitted; 10, head region, ventral view; 11, head end, lateral view; 12-14, very young stages from pelican, spines omitted from 13, 14. Fig. 1, 4-6, 9-14, drawn with the aid of a camera lucida; fig. 4 and 5 to scale below fig. 5; 10 and 11 to scale below 10; 9, 12 to 14 to same scale. 116 suppressed the latter as a synonym of Echinochasmus, to which genus he trans- ferred H. mordax, Two Australian species of Echtnochasmus have been described: &. teniicollis S. J. Johnston 1919, from a cormorant in New South Wales; and E. prostho- vitellatus Nicoll 1914 from a hawk in Queensland. The former species was transferred to Paryphostomum by Price (1931) and by Johnston and Angel (1942), and was subsequently shown by Johnston (1942) to be a synonym of P. radiatum (Rud.). FE, prosthovitellatus, because of the forward distribution of its vitellaria, was transferred by Price (1931, 6) to Lpisthinium. The presence of 22 spines on the oral collar links £. wordav and E. pelecant with a small number of other species of the genus. LE. schwartsi Price (1931), from the muskrat and dog in U.S.A., seems to be the nearest species, but it differs in the sizes of the suckers, length of oesophagus, size of eggs, and arrangement of the oral spines on the ventral lobes. &£. neulvi Yamaguti 1939, from Milzvus migrans in Japan, is a smaller species with a less extensive uterus containing very few eggs, with a shorter oesophagus, and with a different form of the testes; but it has a similar arrangement of the oral spines on the ventral lobes, and the eggs are of similar size. FE. dietzevi Issaitchikov (1927), a 20-spined forin, possesses three alternating angle spines on each side, as also do the 24-spined species. FE. bursicola (according to Odhner 1910. pl. v, fig. 1) and £. cerci Bhalerao (1926). LE. bursicola was placed under Episthintum by Lithe (1919), under Echinochasmus by Odhner (1910, 162}, and restored to /pisthiminm by Price (1931). We have not succeeded in our attempts to infect with eggs of E. pelecani, Ameria spp., Limnaca lessoni, Plotiopsis and Corbicuina angast, the chief mollus- can species occurring in the Murray and its swamps at Tailem Bend. However, we have encountered very commonly in Plotiopsis tate? (Melantidae) as a natural infection, a cercaria which, though gymmocephalous, enters fish and gives rise to an echinostome metacercaria belonging to Echinochasmus, This larva possesses the same number of collar spines, and these have a similar arrangement to that present in £. pelecamt, Such similarity has not been observed in any other adult and larva known to us. Plotiopsis is restricted in the region to the banks of the Murray, occupying a zone about three to six feet in depth, pelicans utilising the adjacent bank as a resting place. We had not used the molluse for our subsequent attemps at infection because we had not yet succeeded in rearing the species in our aquaria. For the reasons given above we consider that the redia, cercaria and metacercaria to be described are the larval stages of HH. pelecant, CERCARIA STAGE This cercaria is the commonest of those observed by us to be emitted from Plotiopsis tatei (Melaniidae) at Tailem Bend and Swan Reach, and was found in 514 out of 7,123 examined, the percentage of infected individuals being 7-2. The highest infection rate was observed on 12 December 1937, when 227 out of 519 individuals collected harboured the parasite, the percentage of infection being nearly 44. The cercaria has been met with fairly regularly since then during the period November to May of cach year. It has not been looked for during the remaining months. The swimming movements of this small active cercaria resemble those of an echinostome. The resting position is typical (fig, 2), the organisms hanging as a fine cloud in the water in that part of the tube which is of optimum light intensity. The cercariae are given off in great numbers usually before 8 o’clock in the morn- ing for the first few days in the laboratory, but on succeeding days few cercariace emerge, Snails kept in captivity over the winter have not been observed to give 117 off cercariae in the following December, although small rediae were found in the liver. In ten specimens killed in boiling 10% formalin the body length varied from 114 to 179» (average 1292), and the breadth from 68 to 87» (average 79). The anterior sucker varied in length from 30 to 38», and in breadth from 27 to 30 »; and the posterior sucker measured 27 to 30 w long by 27 to 30 broad. The sucker ratio is 17:16. The distance of the posterior sticker from the anterior end varied from 61 to 152 (average 84,2). The short annulate tail measured 91 to 178 » long (average 122). Both suckers have a frilled edge. The anterior sucker is retractile and can be withdrawn for some distance into the body of the cercaria, which then acts as a hood, Three refractive structures having the appearance of ducts are present on the dorsal part of the sucker, and ventral to them are 10 minute spinules, The body cells stain heavily with neutral red. Cystogenous cells are arranged in four longitudinal groups and fill the central parts of the body. They are pale yellow and, are filled with rod-shaped granules. In, nearly every specimen two refractive spots were seen on either side of the pharynx. These were the nuclei of the most anterior cystogenous cells of the two median rows. The body has a fine granular appearance, due to minute spines on the surface. Collar spines are not apparent, but in a few specimens refractive dots (apparently the immature collar spines) are seen arranged vertically as in fig. 1. Following the mouth is a prepharynx. The pharynx is pear-shaped and is consistently on its side when the cercaria contracts. The oesophagus is long and the intestine is large and refractive and reaches to the bladder. The first part of the intestine is particularly hard to sce. The excretory system resembles that of an echinostome. The bladder is bilobed and a small duct leads posteriorly to a wide prominent opening at the junction of tail and body. The two main excretory tubes meet before entering the bladder by a median duct. About nine excretory granules, some of them com- pound, are present. Before these excretory tubes reach the anterior sucker, they form a loop and descend to the level of the middle of the ventral sucker. Two ciliated patches are present in these parts (fig. 1). The tube then divides into two; the ascending ramus, travelling anteriorly, gives off a secondary branch near the level of the pharynx; and the posterior ramus divides into two in the region of the bladder. Flame cells were not seen, though consistently looked for, and immature cercariae were examined. The excretory system in the tail is seldom seen. It consists of a median tube dividing into two in the distal part of the tail, This was confirmed by the study of immature cercariae. The reproductive apparatus is represented by two masses of cells medially placed, dorsal to the posterior sucker, They are connected by a strand of cells (fig. 2) .. Their position indicates that the anterior is the anlagen ofthe cirrus sac and associated structures, and that the posterior mass will differentiate into the gonads. ReEprA STAGE _. Rediae (fig. 6) are present in all stages of development in thé tissues of the snail. The liver is not usually discoloured but contains rediae and cercariae, which are often present in far greater numbers elsewhere in the body., These parts are coloured orange, and in heavily infected snails are compact masses of cercariaée and rediae. The former are present in such numbers that they must, after birth, remain in the tissues of the snail several days before being emitted. — _. One well developed redia measured about 1-68 mm. and contained numerous developing cercariae and germ. balls. “The mouth leads into a.small vestibule just in front of a well-developed pharynx. The mouth of the, pharynx (fig..7) has 118 two semi-circular lips with thickened (probably chitinised) edges which form strong biting jaws. The intestine is large and extends beyond the two foot pro- cesses. The collar and birth pore are usually readily seen. The walls contain orange pigment. Some snails giving off this cercaria during the summer were kept through the winter and retested in the following December; although no cercariae had been given off in the aquarium during the latter period, a number of small rediae were found in the liver. METACERCARIA STAGE The cercaria has been found experimentally to encyst in the laboratory in the: fish, Oryzias latipes and Gambusia affinis. Tadpoles (Crinia sp.) and the snails, Limnaea lessoni and Ameria spp. were tried, but with negative result. The meta- cercariae (fig. 3) are found only on the gills of the fish, where they may be present in great numbers. They are oval and fairly uniform in size. Of ten specimens the average measurements were 88 » by 68. In the laboratory all the cysts were dead on the third day after the death of the fish. The cyst is thin-walled and’ easily broken and the expressed metacercariae die almost immediately, thus mak- ing examination difficult. The addition of horse serum to the water did not merease their longevity. Free metacercariae measure about 0°18 mm, long, with a maximum width (across the oral crown) of 075 mm. Small spines in transverse and longitudinal ° rows completely cover the body, giving a fine, but distinctly hairy, appearance to. the metacercaria. Ventrally the collar spines become smaller and the first and third spines from the ventral end are markedly smaller than any of the others. The third spine, set at an angle to the others, is the most anterior in position. No. separate group of corner spines was seen. Body spines, slightly smaller than the rest, are present between the mid-dorsal gap of the collar spines and continue up to the anterior sucker. The ten oral spinules noticed in the cercaria are still. present, though not readily seen. The globules (usually eight or nine on each: side) present in the metacercaria are probably the ducts of small gland (cysto- genous) cells. They stain the same shade as the three oral ducts. We fed to a pigeon and to a rat numerous small fish which had been infected in the laboratory, an estimated total of about 200 cysts being fed in each case, but no adult stages were recovered, Yamaguti (1933) described various stages in the life cycle of some Japanese species (EF. elongatus, E. rugosus and E. rediodupli- catus), having obtained his adults by feeding to rats, mice or dogs, infected molluscs or tadpoles in’ which the mctacercaria stage occurred. He also figured the miracidium of FE. rugosus (1933, 113). Cuirea (1931, 292) reported that cysts of Z. liliputanus occurred on the gills of Roumanian marine fish and obtained adults by feeding the latter to dogs. Kurisu (1931) found that, from a cercaria from Melania, adult stages of E. grandis could be obtained from experimental rats and dogs. Beaver (1941) published an excellent account of the life history of E, donaldsoni from a grebe. Our cercaria may be compared with that of Echinochasmus donaldsoni, as described by Beaver (1941). The behaviour and general characteristics are similar, The latter cercaria is distinctly smaller and the spination present on the ventral sucker and ventral lip of the anterior sucker were not noticed in our specimens. The body spines and collar spines have been seen, though with diffi- culty, in our form. Slight differences in the excretory system are apparent. The number of excretory granules is less and their position more restricted in our. cercaria, and the bladder seen in the proximal part of the tail is not present in our - form, unless the excretory sac, consistently present below the dorsal excretory pore, be it. The difference between the two is more marked in the metacercaria, where the collar spines number 22 in our form but only 20 in E. donaldsoni. 119 Rediae are similar in both forms, though in our species they are considerably larger, and the lips of the pharynx are reinforced. Cercaria indica XLI (Sewell 1922) is probably the cercaria of an Echino- chasmus, Its habits and general appearance, including the three oral ducts, are similar to those of our cercaria. Obvious differences are the much greater size of the Indian form, the presence of diverticula at the base of the caudal excretory canal, and the presence in the redia of an intestine which does not reach the level of the foot processes. Type specimens of the various stages have been deposited in the South Aus- tralian Museum. We desire to acknowledge generous assistance rendered by Messrs. G. G., F., and Bryce Jaensch and L. Ellis, of Tailem Bend, in regard to collecting host material. The work was carried out with the aid of the Common- wealth Research Grant to the University of Adelaide. SUMMARY 1, The anatomy of Echinochasmus pelecani n.sp. from Pelecanus con- sptcillatus is described. 2. Cercariae and rediae from Plotiopsis tatet are regarded as its larval stages, the metacercaria developing experimentally in freshwater fish (Oryzias latipes, Gambusia affinis). LITERATURE Beaver, P. C. 1941 Jour. Parasit., 27, 347-354 Buarerao, G. D. 1926 Parasitol., 18, 387-398 Crurges, I. 1931 Arch. Roum. Path. Exp. Microbiol., 4, 291-299 Dietz, E. 1910 Zool. Jahrb. Syst. Suppl., 12, (3), 256-512 Jounston, S.J. 1917 Jour. Proc. Roy. Soc. N.S.W., 50, (1916), 187-261 Jounston, T. H. 1942 Trans, Roy. Soc. S. Aust., 66, 226-242 Jounston, T. H., and ANnceLt, L. M. 1942 Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust., 66, 119-123 Kurisu, Y. 1931 Jap. Jour. Zool., 4, 1933, 105, Abstract of paper published in Japanese in 1931 Looss, A. 1899 Zool. Jahrb. Syst., 12, 521-784 Ltwe, M. 1919 Siisswasserfauna Deutchlands, Heft 17 Nicott, W. 1914 Parasitol., 7, (2), 105-126 ; OpHNER, T. 1910 Nordostafrikanische Trematoden, etc. Results Swedish Zool. Exp. Egypt and White Nile, 23 A, 1-170 Price, E,W. 1931 Proc. U.S. Nat. Mus., 79, (4), 1-13 SEWELL, R. B. 1922 Cercariae indicae. Ind. Jour. Med. Res., 10, Suppl. YamacvTl, S. 1933 Jap. Jour. Zool., 4, (1),1-134 YAMAGUTI, S. 1939 Jap. Jour. Zool., 8, (2), 129-210 THE OCCURRENCE OF CYCLOCLYPEUS IN THE TERTIARY DEPOSITS OF SOUTH AUSTRALIA By IRENE CRESPIN, B.A., Commonwealth Palaeontologist, Mineral Resources Survey Branch, Canberra, A.C.T. Communicated by Sir Douglas Mawson Summary In a recent microscopic examination by the writer of a sample of bryozoal limestone from a locality labelled “4 miles below Morgan, River Murray, South Australia,” and collected by Mr. F. A. Cudmore some years ago, the discovery was made of the zonal foraminifera Cycloclypeus victoriensis Crespin. As far as can be ascertained, this is the first record of the occurrence of the genus Cycloclypeus in the South Australian Tertiary deposits. In the Victorian Tertiaries Cydoclypeus is restricted to a definite horizon in the Middle Miocene, namely the Batesford Substage (Crespin 1943), which is considered as a subdivision of the Balcombian Stage 120 THE OCCURRENCE OF CYCLOCLYPEUS IN THE TERTIARY DEPOSITS OF SOUTH AUSTRALIA By Irene Crespin, B.A., Commonwealth Palaeontologist, Mineral Resources Survey Branch, Canberra, A.C.T. Communicated by Sir Douglas Mawson [Read 11 May 1944] In a recent microscopic examination by the writer of a sample of bryozoal limestone from a locality labelled “4 miles below Morgan, River Murray, South Australia,” and collected by Mr. F. A. Cudmore some years ago, the discovery was made of the zonal foraminifera Cycloclypeus victoriensis Crespin. As far as can be ascertained, this is the first record of the occurrence of the genus Cycloclypeus in the South Australian Tertiary deposits. In the Victorian Tertiaries Cyclo- clypeus is restricted to a definite horizon in the Middle Miocene, namely the Bates- ford Substage (Crespin 1943), which is considered as a subdivision of the Balcombian Stage. Cycloclypeus victoriensis is very common in certain beds in the limestone quarries at Batesford near Geelong, Victoria. It is also recorded from the Hamil- ton Bore in Western Victoria, which is the nearest known occurrence to the present South Australian one at Morgan. The genus is restricted to a very limited zone in the Gippsland Bores. In all these instances it is found in association with the important zonal foraminiferal genus Lepidocyclina, together with a typical fora- miniferal assemblage. Further systematic collecting from the limestones near Morgan may yield Lepidocyclina, The genus Cycloclypeus is practically restricted to the Indo-Pacific region. it is found living in shallow, warm, tropical waters in the vicinity of coral reefs. Tt is well distributed in the Miocene rocks in North-west Australia, Papua, New Guinea, the Netherlands East Indies and Japan, the various species being of dis- tinct zonal value. _DeEscrtpTion or THE LIMESTONE AND NOTES OF THE ForRAMINIFERAL ASSEMBLAGE The rock from Morgan is a cream-coloured bryozoal limestone containing foraminifera, bryozoa, fragments of echinoids, molluscan shells and ostracoda. The bryozoa are well preserved and all species are typical of those present in the bryozoal limestones referable to the Balecombian Stage in Victoria. The species of ostracoda are similar to those found in all Balcombian deposits, As previously stated, the foraminiferal assemblage in the limestone from Morgan is typical of the Batesford Substage. Operculina victoriensis Chapman and Parr is very well developed and the eccentric shapes of many of the tests indicate the warm to hot climatic conditions under which the organisms existed. Gypsina howchini Chapman and Amphistegina lessonii d’Orb. are also common, and the irregular shapes of the tests of these forms are also results of the climatic conditions. Numerous tests of a species of Elphidinm are present. The form is apparently new and seems referable to “Elphidium sp.” recorded by Howchin and Parr (1938) from the Miocene beds in the Abattoirs Bore near Adelaide. Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust., 68, (1), 28 July 1944 121 Foraminifera determined from the limestone near Morgan are as follows: Textularia fistulosa Brady Dorothia parri Cushman Clavulinoides ssaboi (Hantk.) var. victoriensis Cush. Trifarina brady: Cushman Dentalina soluta Reuss Gypsina globulus Reuss Notorotalia howchini (Chapman, Parr and Collins) Cibicides victoriensis Chapman, Parr and Collins: Siphonina australis Cushman Llphidium sp. Amphistegina lessonii d’Orb, Operculina victoriensis Chapman and Parr Cycloclypeus victoriensis Crespin REFERENCES CMAPMAN, F. 1910 A Study of the Batesford Limestone, Proc. Roy. Soc. Vict., ns., 22, (2), 263-314 CHAPMAN, F., and PArr, W. J. 1938 Australian and New Zealand Species of the Foraminiferal Genera Operculina and Operculinella, ibid., 50, (2), 283-287 Crespin, I. 1936 The Larger Foraminifera of the Lower Miocene of Victoria, Pal. Bull. No. 2.(Dept. of the Interior) Cresptn, I. 1940 The Genus Cycloclypeus in Victoria, Proc. Roy. Soc. Vict., 1.8., 53, (2), 301-314 CRESPIN, I. 1943 The Stratigraphy of the Tertiary Marine Rocks in Gipps- land, Victoria, Pal. Bull. No. 4, Min. Res. Surv., Canberra Howcuin, W., and Parr, W. J.. 1938 Notes on the Geological Features and Foraminiferal Fauna of the Metropolitan Abattoirs Bore, Adelaide, Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust., 62, (2), 287-317 ON THE ANALYSIS OF BERYL FROM BOOLCOOMATTA, SOUTH AUSTRALIA By A. W. KLEENMAN, M.Sc. Summary Beryl, associated with quartz, feldspar and muscovite, is a not uncommon constituent of the pegmatites associated with the Boolcoomatta granitic Bathylith. The first specimens from this area were collected by Professor D. Mawson in the year 1906. In more recent years some few tons have been mined to meet the demand for beryllium ore. 122 ON THE ANALYSIS OF BERYL FROM BOOLCOOMATTA, SOUTH AUSTRALIA By A. W. Ki&eman, M.Sc. [Read 11 May 1944] Beryl, associated with quartz, feldspar and muscovite, is a not uncommon constituent of the pegmatites associated with the Boolcoomatta granitic Bathylith. The first specimens from this area were collected by Professor D. Mawson in the year 1906. In more recent years some few tons have been mined to mect the demand for beryllium ore. The beryl is met with as prismatic crystals from less than an inch to several feet in diameter. Its colour varies from waxy yellow-green to a bluish-green. though the Refractive Index (w = 17581) remains sensibly constant for specimens that have been examined from several localities in the area. Of the specimens collected from many occurrences on Old Boolcoomatta and Outalpa stations, two have been subjected to critical chemical analysis with the following results. The analyses are as set out below: Molecular Proportions A B in B SiO, - * - - - 64°70 64°51 1-075 Al,O, - - ~ - - 19-00 18-90 “185 FeO (total Iron) - - - 1-50 1-57 ‘O11 BeO~ - - - - - 12-50 12-74 “510 MgO - - - = - 13 “14 0035 CaO - - - 3 = 36 25 0045 Na,O - - - - - 34 “34 0055 K,O, Li,O, Rb,O, Cs,0-— - nil nil H,O-— - - - - “10 -07 H,O-+ (loss on ignition) - 1-74 1-72 095 TiO, - : - . nil nil 100-37 100-24 A. is a light bluish-green beryl from a small open cut one mile south of Bin- berrie Hill. B. is a light yellow-green specimen, collected from an open cut on mineral claim 2785, four and a half miles south of Bimbowrie. The specific gravity (compared with water at 4° C.) of specimen A was deter- mined as 2°654 but it contains many microscopic bubbles, hence the true value exceeds that obtained. The determination of Refractive Index was made by the immersion method using sodium light, the Refractive Index of the liquid being checked on an Abbe Refractometer beside the microscope. Through the good offices of Mr. M. Mawby, who recently visited America to investigate the supply of the lighter metals, I was able to obtain a copy of a graph which Dr. W. T. Schaller, of the United States Geological Survey, has compiled from a study of the better class analyses of beryl. In this graph, which Dr. Schaller is preparing for publication and which he has emphasised, is only tentative, the percentage of the various oxides has been plotted against the Re- Trans. Rey. Sac. S. Aust., 68, (1), 28 July 1944 123 fractive Index ». According to the graph our specimen should have 126% BeO, 64:9% SiO,, 2°0% H,O, and 1-7% total alkalies. The only oxides that differ widely from our analysis are the alkalies. The explanation seems to be that the calcium, and perhaps iron and magnesium, are proxying the alkalies in this beryl. The analysis, when calculated on a basis of 18 oxygen atoms and excluding water, gives the result: (Bey.gq, Ca-go, Mg, Fea, Na-gg) Algvog (Sis-o1 Altos) Ors: This agrees with the accepted formula, Be,, Al,, Sig, O,,- However, if the water is considered and the whole calculated to 18 atoms of oxygen the result is: (Bes.zg, Cayo, Mg-oo, Fe-yg, Nagg) Al y-o9: Sts-7¢ (Or6-98» OH y-02)- This is similar to the grossularoid formula suggested recently (Hutton 1943, Belyankin and Petrov 1941, Pabst 1942), where four hydroxyl groups replace one silicon-oxygen group. Rough tests suggest that the majority of the water is lost at about 700°-800° C. Some Notes on THE QUANTITATIVE EsTIMATION OF BERYLLIUM IN BERYL In the analysis of Beryl the chemist is faced with several difficulties, con- sequently a summary of the following methods based upon the author’s experience in this field is worthy of record, Schoeller and Powell (1941) review the methods for separating Beryllium from all the elements which are precipitated with it by ammonia. However, the analysis can go astray long before the ammonia oxides are assembled free from other metals. Fusion with sodium carbonate and subsequent double evaporation with hydrochloric acid to remove silica does not get beryllium into solution, In fact, fusion at 1,100° C., as suggested by some authorities, results in forming ignited beryllium oxide which is insoluble in concentrated hydrochloric. Sulphuric acid will dissolve the beryllia but is not suitable where silica is to be separated and, in any case, it is not expedient to have any amount of sulphate present at this stage. However, the presence of even small amounts of potassium keeps beryllium in an acid-soluble form, and it is suggested that fusion mixture be used to attack the mineral. This attack is effective with ordinary finely ground powders. Some beryllia remains with the silica, and is recovered after the evaporation of silica. with hydrofluoric acid, by fusion with potassium pyrosulphate. Assembly of the Oxides of the Ammonia Group In ordinary mineral analysis, alumina, iron, titania, etc., are precipitated by a slight excess of ammonia, using methyl red as an indicator. Mellor quotes the iso-electric point of beryllium hydroxide at pH 7°5, and it is therefore suggested that brom-thymol blue be used as an indicator in preference to methyl red, as it~ appears that the precipitation of beryllium hydroxide is not complete at the end — point of methyl red. In the presence of the sulphate ion beryllium hydroxide ts not quantitatively precipitated at any pH. The filtrate from this precipitation should be evaporated down to small bulk as recommended by Washington (1930) and, to assist the recovery of traces of hydroxide, about 1 cc of a 10% aqueous solution of tannin should be added. The small amount. of oxide which has been recovered from the silica and which has been brought into solution by fusion with potassium pyrosulphate should be . precipitated separately in order to keep the main bulk of the analysis free from sulphate. About 1ce of tannin solution can be added to ensure complete pre- cipitation. 124 The Separation of Aluminium and Beryllium Schoeller and Powell (op. cit., 49) recommend the fusion of the ignited oxides from the ammonium precipitate with 6 grams of sodium carbonate for two hours. (This sodium carbonate should be free from potassium.) Leaching the melt leaves beryllium and iron as an insoluble residue and alumina passes into the filtrate. This alumina can be precipitated as hydroxide after acidifying the filtrate with nitric acid. The leached residue from the fusion is washed with hot water, ignited and weighed as “crude BeO”. This precipitate is then dissolved in potas- sium pyrosulphate; iron and traces of alumina are precipitated by tannin in the acetic acid solution, Schoeller and Powell, (op. cit., 48) add ammonia till it pro- duces turbidity and then just clear the solution with acid. They then precipitate by adding 10 grams each of ammonium chloride and ammonium acetate, and one gram of tannin in water. This, however, tends to co-precipitate some beryllium, and it is recommended that the ammonia, be added ‘to slight turbidity (or the end point of bromphenol blue) and then 3cc of glacial acetic be added and the aluminium and iron precipitated as before. This procedure precipitates aluminium, iron and titanium free from beryllium. If doubt exists as to the completeness of precipitation of aluminium, enough ammonia should be added to neutralise most of the acetic, If no precipitate is formed aluminium was completely precipitated. lf any precipitate is formed it should be carefully examined to determine whether it is aluminium or beryllium hydroxide or a mixture of both, The Separation of Iron and Beryllium Iron cannot be separated from beryllium by boiling with a slight excess of caustic soda, as is advocated by some workers (Groves 1937, Van Tongeren 1937). Gilchrist (1943) has shown that beryllium hydroxide is precipitated hydrolytically by sodium hydroxide in solutions ranging from pH 4°7 to pH 10. Experiment has shown that in the separation of iron from beryllium, with slight excess of sodium hydroxide, considerable amounts .of beryllium are precipitated even in a short period of boiling, Probably the separation can be made by using warm solutions but this possibility was not tested, as.with small amounts of iron the precipitation with tannin is much more convenient. The precipitate with tannin does not adsorb sulphate as the charge on the colloidal hydroxide is neutralised by the colloidal tannin. = REFERENCES Beryankin, D. S., and Petrov, V. P. The Grossularoid Group (Hibschite Plazolite), Am. Min., 26, 450-453 i GitcHrist, R. 1943 Analytical Separations by Means of Controlled Hydrolytic . Precipitation, Journ. Res., Nat. Bur. Stand., U.S.A.,. 30, 89 Groves, A. W. 1937 Silicate Analysis, London Hetron, C. O. Hydrogrossular, a New Mineral of the Garnet-Hydrogarnet Series, Trans. Roy, Soc. N.Z., 73, 174-180 Mertor, J. W. 1923 A Comprehensive Treatise on Inorganic and Theoretical Chemistry, 14, London Passt, A. Re-examination of Hibschite, Am. Min., 27, 783-792 SCHOELLER, W. R., and Powett, A. R. 1940 The Analysis of Minerals and Ores of the Rarer Metals, London Van TONGEREN, W. 1937 Gravimetric Analysis, Amsterdam : Wasuincton, H. 5S. 1930 The Chemical Analysis of Rocks, 4th Ed., New York WincHeELL, A. N. 1933 Elements of Optical Mineralogy, 3rd Edit.. New York LARVAL TREMATODES FROM AUSTRALIAN FRESHWATER MOLLUSCS PART IX By T. HARVEY JOHNSTON and E. R. SIMPSON, University of Adelaide Summary Cercaria ellisi n. sp. A new echinostome cercaria with 45 collar spines has been studied in the laboratory for several years. It is frequently obtained from Limnaea lessoni, from the Murray at Tailem Bend, and is the only echinostome cercaria, with the exception of C. Paryphostomi-radiati, so far noticed by us from this snail host. During the months mentioned the following numbers of snails were found infected with it: May 1937, 10 out of 119 collected; December 1937, 100 of 639; April 1938, 1 of 12; October 1939. 1 of 4; February 1940, 2 of 63; November 1940, 1 of 15; February 1941, 1 of 106; January 1942, 6 of 116; February 1942, 2 of 96; March 1941, 30 of 883; May 1942, 1 of 8; Marcl1 1943. 1 of 3 - a total of 156 out of 2,064 examined during the period October to May, 1.e., 7-5%. It was not recognised in collections made on other occasions during the spring, summer and autumn 1937-1944. 125 LARVAL TREMATODES FROM AUSTRALIAN FRESHWATER MOLLUSCS PART IX : By T. Harvey Jonnsron and E, R. Simeson, University of Adelaide [Read & June 1944] Cercaria ellisi n. sp. (Fig. 1-6) A new echinostome cercaria with 45 collar spines has been studied in the laboratory for several years. It is frequently obtained from Limnaea lessoni, from the Murray at Tailem Bend, and is the only echinostome cercaria, with the exception of C. Paryphostomi-radiati, so far noticed by us from this snail host. During the months mentioned the following numbers of snails were found infected with it: May 1937, 10 out of 119 collected; December 1937, 100 of 639; April 1938, 1 of 12; October 1939, 1 of 4; February 1940, 2 of 63; November 1940, I of 15; February 1941, 1 of 106; January 1942, 6 of 116; February 1942, 2 of 96; March 1941, 30 of 883; May 1942, 1 of &; March 1943, 1 of 3—a total of 156 out of 2,064 examined during the period October to May, i.e., 7°5%. It was not recognised in collections made on other occasions during the spring, summer and autumn 1937-1944, ‘The cercariae are almost incessantly active and exhibit in swimming the typical echinostome figure of 8 When the movement slackens, the tail moves slowly from side to side and the body straightens and is thrust forwards. They are negatively phototropic. The greatest nunibers of cercariac are emitted between 11 and 12 in the morning, The body measurements (in micra) given below are taken from 10 specimens killed by adding to the liquid containing them an equal volume of boiling 10% formalin: length of body from 190-239 » (average 224) ; across region of ventral sucker 129-141 » (average 136); anterior sucker 34-42» long (average 38) by 38-46 » wide (average 42). The posterior sucker was difficult to measure, since in most specimens it was flattened, as in fig. 1. The length in such cases was from 23 to 34, but in well-extended specimens ranged from 46 to 53. The breadth was more constant, varying from 57 to 65 » (average 61). No satisfactory sucker ratio could be ascertained, though their relative breadths in compressed specimens are about 1:1°5. The distance of the posterior sucker from the anterior end of the cercaria varied from 103 to 148 (average 129), and the length of the tail from 342 to 440 w (average 391). There is no finfold on the tail. The collar, which is not very evident, bears 45 inconspicuous spines (includ- ing four corner spines at each end) arranged in two:rows, The spines of the aboral row are slightly longer than those of the oral series. One spine from the aboral row and one from a corner group both measured 11-9. On the ventral and dorsal surfaces minute spinules are arranged regularly as far as the level of the ventral sucker. The alimentary system is typical of echinostomes. The pharynx is suc- ceeded by a relatively long oesophagus, from which the intestinal caeca arise at the level of the anterior border of the acetabulum and extend to the urinary bladder. Cystogenous cells are numerous and finely granular. The glands were not seen. The genital anlage consisted of two cell masses connected by a string of cells, one mass slightly posterior to the ventral sucker, the other on a level with the anterior border of the ventral sucker. Trans, Roy. Soe. 8. Aust,, 68, (1), 28 July 1944 126 The excretory system is typical of echinostomes. The cercariae were studied in equal parts of horse serum and water. In most specimens 22 flame cells were seen on each side, arranged as in fig. 1, and appeared to be grouped in threes, but their connections were extremely difficult to work out. These cells opened into a descending ramus which, near the base of the bladder, connected with an ascend- ing ramus, The latter had 15 ciliated patches arranged as in fig. 1, and its con- volutions were fairly constant in the cercariae studied. Ona level with the top of the pharynx it loops around to enter the main excretory tube. This, as far as the level of the acetabulum, is filled with many small granules, two or three being present in cross section. At the level of the acetabulum the concretions cease, and the main tube forms a characteristic bend in towards the centre and continues to the bladder. The latter is in two parts, a smaller anterior and larger posterior. From the latter a median tube extends for a short distance into the tail and opens by two Fig. 1-6—Cercaria ellisi: 1, cercaria, collar spines omitted; 2, enlarged freehand diagram of posterior part of excretory svstem of one side to show position of ciliary flames and flame cells: 3, head end, showing spination; 4, cyst; 5, cercaria, general appearance; 6, redia. Fig. 1, 3 and 4 drawn to scale below fig. 3. short branches laterally. A small external opening is present on the dorsal sur- face of the bladder. Cysts have been obtained experimentally from the following hosts: Amertanna pyramidata; A. tenuistriata (abundant in mantle cavity); Planorbis tsingy; Limnaea lessoni,; Plotiopsis tatei (abundant in mantle cavity) ; Corbiculina angasi (a few); and a tadpole, Crinia signifera (numerous in kidneys). The almost circular cysts varied in measurement between 118 and 133 #; 10 from tadpoles averaged 126 by 125 », while those from snails were slightly smaller, 122 by 122 p. Two young tadpoles were placed in water infested with C. ellisi, and within a few minutes cercariae were seen creeping over the surface of the tadpoles and 127 entering and emerging through the various apertures. After four hours the tad- poles were killed. Twenty-nine cysts and five tailless cercariae were found in the tissues of the mesonephros of one; they were present in least numbers amongst the tubules of the kidney, and in greatest numbers massed near the glomeruli along the nephric ducts. They were also present in the mesenteries. Another tadpole, killed two hours after having been placed in infected water showed, in addition to the positions mentioned above, two cercariae encysted in the auricle, and several around the heart and aorta, in addition to one in the lung. Cysts were fed to a canary in February and March 1942, and to a fowl in November and December 1939, but the adult stage was not obtained. The specific name is given in recognition of assistance received for many years from Mr. L. Ellis, of Tailem Bend and Murray Bridge. Cercaria ellisi most closely resembles C. clelandae Johnston and Angel 1939. When killed under the same conditions our cercaria is slightly shorter and wider than C. clelandae (230-290 » by 89-130»). This difference is more marked in the metacercaria, the cysts of C. clelandae being consistently 30» larger. in diameter than those of the present species, C. clelandae could not be made to encyst in tad- poles which are a normal secondary host of C. ellzsi. The rediae in our species are similar but grow to a larger size and contain more developing cercariae. The gut is dark-coloured in C. clelandae and inconspicuous in our form. Slight differences occur in the excretory system, which was extremely difficult to work out. Seven- teen flames and 24 flame cells have been counted on each side in C. clelandae, but only 15 flames and 22 flame cells were seen on each side in our form. As the flame cells are inconspicuous, one or more may have been overlooked. During January 1943 faecal material deposited by a pelican at Tailem Bend was placed in an aquarium along with several Limnaea lessom, Amerianna spp., Hydrobia and Segmentina australis, and some carp. The snails were tested at the end of February, and weekly after that. Ninety days later two of the Limnaea were observed to be giving off a 45-spined echinostome cercaria closely resembling Cercaria ellisi, and continued to do so until they died on 5 May 1943 and 5 June 1943 respectively. The remaining snails which had not already died before the latter date, showed no infection. The body length of these cercariae measured 201 to 243 » (average 216) ; the maximum breadth 106-125 » (average 118); and the tail 293-343 » long (average 326). The anterior sucker was 42 to 57 uw long (average 46) ; the posterior sucker 42-57 » (average 46) long by 46-49 » (average 48) across, and its distance from the anterior end of the cercaria varied from 106 to 140, (average 114). These measurcments are similar to those given above for C. ellisi, the main differences being in the breadth of the ventral sucker and the length of the tail, which are somewhat less in this form, ‘The material examined consisted of preserved free cercariae as well as of others taken from preserved Limnaea snails, and the former may not have been mature when measured. The collar spines are similar to those of C. ellisi, and body spines are present on the dorsal and ventral surfaces down to the ventral sucker. Numerous cysts were found in the liver (particularly at the apex) and mantle cavity and scattered throughout the tissues of the longer-lived host snail. The average measurement of ten cysts was 120 by 121». 114, was the lowest and 125 » the greatest length measurement observed by us. The Limnaea snails used in the experiment were laboratory bred and free from infection. In experimental infections of snails, to obtain cysts of C. ellisi, it is unusual to find these else- where in the body than in the mantle cavity. It is possible that the cysts present in the liver belonged to cercariae which had encysted there instead of emerging 128 and then encysting in a suitable host. It was very difficult to count the oral spines of these metacercariae, but there seemed to be about 43. We regard this form as belonging to C. ellisi.. The characters of the collar spines of C. ellisi (and C. clelandae) indicate that the adult is probably a species of Echtmostoma or allied genus. The vertebrate host is probably a bird whose diet includes freshwater molluscs. Nicoll (1914, 112) described Echinostoma hilliferum, a 47-spined species from a coot, Porphyrio melanotus, North Queensland. Echinostoma bancrofti Johnston (1928, 140), described from a waterhen, Gallinula tenebrosa, from the Burnett River, Queens- land, is recorded to have about 44 collar spines arranged in two alternating rows, with the four corner spines larger and more prominent, but the actual number of oral spines is more likely to be 43 or 45. Gallinula tenebrosa and other species of waterhens and coots occur abundantly in the swamps at Tailem Bend. We have not yet found in the pelican an echinostome with 45 collar spines. Water- hens and pelicans frequent the same narrow bank between the swamp and Murray River on which the faecal sample was collected. Contamination of the material from a pelican with that from a waterhen was thus possible. Cercaria gigantura var. grandior nov. (Fig. 7, 9-11) On 27 January 1943 one, and on 24 February 1943 two, snails of Amerianna pyramidata, from Tailem Bend, were found giving off a cercaria closely resemb- ling C. gigantura Johnston and Angel 1941, which these authors regarded as the larva of Petasiger australis. On the latter date two snails also (Asmerianna pyramidata) gave off C. gigantura, and it was possible to study the two cercariae side by side in the laboratory (fig. 8, 9). Macroscopically they appeared to be quite distinct. C. gigantwra var. grandior was much the larger and was relatively a sluggish cercaria. The resting period was usually 4-5 seconds (2-3 seconds in C, gigantura) ; and the tail, because of its greater size, did not move as freely from side to side as that of C. gigantura, Microscopically C. gigantura var. grandior differed in the following charac- ters: The tail was considerably larger, varying in length from 571 to 1,175 », with an average of 717 in ten specimens (C. gigantura 434 to 584). its breadth ranging from 144 to 245 w, with an average of 184 (C. gigantura 134 to 200 2). The longitudinal muscles were more distinct in our variety, and the circular muscles less so. There was no clear area between the central longitudinal muscle strand and the outer edge (a consistent feature in C. gigantura), and the tail was much less transparent. The myomere cells in the tail were also smaller. The tail whip was neither as distinctly marked off, nor as long, as in the typical form, its approximate length being 53 to 114 with an average of 79 (C. gigantura 83-192 p). The body of the cercaria seemed in no essential particular other than size to differ from that of C. gigantura, The measurements of the varicty, with those of C, gigantura added in brackets for comparison, were as follows. Length of body 137-300 », average 258 yp (105-267); breadth of body across ventral sucker 57-103 », average 70m (50-100); length of anterior sucker 30-38», average 34 (21-30 ») ; breadth of anterior sucker 30-38 », average 34 w; length of posterior sucker 34-42 p, average 36 (21-30 yw) ; breadth of posterior sucker 34-42 y, average 36 » (28-38 »). On remeasurement we found that the size of the ventral sucker of C. gigantura fell within the range of that of the variety, The spinules present on the ventral surface of the body were slightly larger in the new variety. The position and character of the collar spines were identical. The length of the latter was 5y. Their length in C. gigantura was given in error as 13 p. but on re- 129 measurement they were found to have the same length (5) as in the variety; thus bringing the species closer to C. Petasigeri-nitidi Beaver 1939. Our snail hosts died before work on the excretory system of the cercaria was completed. The details found agreed with those of C. gigantura. In addition, there was seen in the proximal part of the tail of one specimen a short tube apparently connecting with the excretory bladder in the tail stem. This tube had two short arms, hence it was possible that the excretory tube extended into the Fig. 7-14. fig. 7, 9-11—Cercaria gigantura var. grandior: 9, with tail contracted; 10, with tail elongated—its more usual condition while alive; 11, cyst. Fig. 8—Cercaria gigantura (typical), for comparison with its variety, fig. 9. Fig. 8-10 to same scale (below 9) ; 7 and 11 to same scale (beside 7). Fig. 12-14—Cercaria angelae: 12, body; 13, tail; 14, a, b, c, freehand sketches of attitudes of living cercariac. tail for a short distance and opened by two branches laterally. The redia was similar to that of C. gigantura. Cercariae were found experimentally to encyst around the oesophagus and pharynx of the aquarium fish, Gambusia affinis, and leopard fish, Phalloceros caudimaculatus, Cysts were not recovered from a Barbus exposed to infection at the same time. The cysts were similar to those off C. gigantura but the dimen- 130 sions were slightly larger, ranging from 129 to 133» in length, and 91 to 99g in breadth (C. gigantura 125 by 75»). Cercaria angelae n. sp. (Fig. 12-14) Cercaria angelae is a small furcocercaria which has been found consistently, though not frequently, emerging from its snail hosts, dmerianna pyranidata and A. tenuistriata, from the Tailem Bend swamps. The examination of snails for its presence took place from 15 January 1941 to 3 February 1944, and the per- centage infection for the period was 0-9%. The largest number of infected snails was observed. on 15 January 1941, when 27 out of 861 snails were found giving off the parasite. We have associated with this new form the name of our col- league, Miss L. M. Angel. C. angelae remains fairly evenly distributed in water, and is an active and yigorous swimmer, appearing to have no resting period. The maximum emission from infected snails occurred between 12 noon and 1.30 p.m., during the summer months. Cercariae collected during these hours were all dead by 9 a.m. the next morning. The following measurements of 10 cercariae were obtained after adding to the water containing them an equal volume of boiling 10% formalin: Body length 111-216 » (average 158); body breadth 27-53 (average 41); length of tail stem 163-190 » (average 175) ; breadth of tail stem 30-46» (average 36) ; length of furcae 163-190 (average 176); length of anterior organ 30-46 (average 37) ; length of posterior sucker 19-23 » (average 19) ; breadth of posterior sucker 19-23 » (average 22); distance of posterior sucker from anterior end of cercaria 53-110 » (average 77). _ About eight rows of irregularly-placed spines are present, forming a collar immediately behind the mouth. Two rows of irregularly situated spines (about 12 in number) lie immediately dorsal and anterior to the mouth. Scattered spines, difficult to see, occur on the anterior part of the body, and two irregular rows of spines are present on the ventral sucker. The body has about the same width as the tail stem, and the furcae and tail stem are of almost equal length. The mouth is subterminal and the pharynx is immediately behind the anterior organ. The latter is more muscular in its posterior portion, though not markedly so. Immediately behind the pharynx are eight large nucleated cells staining deeply with neutral red. The oesophagus is difficult to see and divides into two imme- diately in front of the ventral sucker. The length of the intestine was not deter- mined owing to the presence of gland cells obscuring it. Four pairs of large, granular, irregularly-shaped penetration glands, staining with neutral red, are present posterior to the ventral sucker. Their ducts lead anteriorly (fig. 12) with irregular swellings opposite the nucleated post- pharyngeal cells, and with an enlarged section in the anterior part of the anterior organ. A pair of clear cells, with a central granular portion, are ‘present just anterolateral from the ventral sucker. They do not stain with neutral red; perhaps these preacetabular bodies (of Cort and Brackett 1937) are non-pigmented eyes. The reproductive anlage is represented by a group of cells, staining with haematoxy- lin, in the posterior part of the body. Six well-defined caudal bodies are present in the tail stem. The first caudal body is often considerably smaller than the remainder. A small pair of caudal bodies is present at the base of the furcae. They vary considerably in shape and size, the size probably depending on the age of the cercaria. In this region two globules of similar material are usually present, attached to the central core which supports the caudal bodies, The bladder consists of two rounded parts each connecting with a short median section which reaches the tail. From the bladder a slightly coiled collect- 131 ing tube extends to the level of the posterior part of the ventral sucker. Here it forms a loop, from which arises a postacetabular transverse commissure which joins the loop of the excretory tube on the other side. The main duct then divides into two, an anterior and, a posterior collecting tubule. Two flame cells open into the posterior collecting tubule, and five flame cells into the anterior collecting tube. Their arrangement is given in fig. 12. Two flame cells are present in the proximal part of the tail. A median excretory tube runs down the tail stem, divides into two branches which open at the tip of the furcae. The long, much twisted sporocysts, present in the liver of the snail host, are colourless or faintly tinged with yellow, and are hard to disentangle without breaking. One end is pointed and very retractile, the other end rounded, the rest of the body being of uniform thickness except where the cercariae are mature. One sporocyst measured was 21 mm. long, Attempts to obtain the metacerearia by exposing to infection freshwater molluscs, prawns, crayfish and aquatic insect larvae, and fish (Gambusia, Barbus) and a leech (Limnobdella australis) were unsuccessful. Many laboratory-bred tadpoles of Limnodynastes tasmaniensis were also utilised, most of them unsuc- cessfully, but in one of them a number of Tetracotyle were recovered many months later in the walls of the thorax and rectum, in the pericardium, and in tissues of the tail and those near the base of ,the forelimbs. The oval cyst, about 325 by 400 », had a thick clear outer wall, and a thin pigmented inner wall surrounding the Tetracotvle which varied in size in different cysts. The Tetracotyle will be described later. The presence of a pharynx was not demonstrated with certainty. C. angelae is a Strigeid larva belonging to the pharyngeal longifurcate group. The posterior position of the eight gland cells and of the transverse excretory canal, as well as the presence of a well-developed acetabulum suggest that the adult may belong to Apatemon, Strigea, or perhaps Apharyngostrigea. In swimming constantly during its free life our cercaria is similar to C. longifurca, C. dohema and the cercaria of Cotylurus flabelliformis. Of these three, C. angelae in its anatomy somewhat resembles C. dohema Cort and Brackett 1937. The measurements of our specimens (which were killed in similar manner to theirs) agree within a few micra with those given for C. dohema, except that the furcae appear to be 20 » shorter in our species. Caudal bodies agree in number and size except that in our specimens the caudal bodies at the base of the furcae are not so large, The caudal excretory tube in C. angelae (though not readily seen) opens at the tip of each furca. The excretory bladders are similar; that illustrated in fig. 12 for our species is somewhat contracted, but when it is fully expanded it assumes the form given for C. dohema. The number of flame cells is four on each side of the body in C. dohemea, but there are seven in our species and their arrangement is somewhat different. The nucleated postpharyngeal cells are absent in C. dohema which has three instead of four pairs of penetration glands in the postacetabular region. C. riponi Brackett (1939) from Stagnicola from Michigan is another Strigeid cercaria somewhat resembling our form, The most striking differences are in its swimming habits; the different number and arrangement of the flame cells and caudal bodies; the presence of only three pairs of postacetabular gland cells; the smaller preacetabular bodies; and the absence of the postpharyngeal group of nucleated cells. The presence of four pairs of longitudinally arranged postacetabular glands has been rarely recorded. Lutz (1933, 35, 40, 53, pl. ii, fig. 8) mentioned and figured a “Pseudodistomulum” with such an arrangement, This organism, which is really a cercaria that has shed its tail, was found encysted in a Brazilian frog, Ayla crepitans, and a Tetracotyle resembling it was reported by him as occurring in young birds, snakes and some carnivores. The adult stage was stated to be- 132 Strigea vaginata (Brandes) from Brazilian Accipitrine birds. Dubois (1938, 94, fig. 37) republished Lutz’s figure as M esocercaria Strigeae-vaginatae. From the foregoing it is most probable that the adult of C. angelae is a Strigea from an Australian bird of prey, several species having already been recorded from hawks and owls from North Queensland. C. pseudoburti Rankin 1939 has four pairs of postacetabular gland cells, but their arrangement is different from that in,C. angelae. In C. burti Miller the eight postacetabular glands are arranged in two transverse series (Cort and Brooks 1928, pl. xxviii). This cercaria is the larva of an Apatemon and closely resembles that of A. gracilis as described by Szidat (1929). Cercaria helvetica Dubois (1929, 94, pl. iv, fig. 14) from Limnaea and .Planorbis in Switzerland has the eight glands postacetabular and arranged in two close longi- tudinal rows, and has pre- and postacetabular excretory commissures, but the relative lengths of the prepharynx and oesophagus are different from those of C. angelae. Dubois’ cercaria also belongs to Apatemon (Dubois 1938, 96). The cercaria of Apharyngostrigea pipientis, described by Olivier (1940), has its eight glands almost surrounding the acetabulum, and also differs from C. angelae in the relative lengths of ‘the prepharynx and oesophagus and in the form of the tail stem, especially when contracted. SUMMARY (1) Cercaria ellisi n. sp., a 45-spined echinostome, is described from Limnaea lessoni. The cyst stage occurs in the molluscs, Amerianna spp., Planorbis isingt, Limnaea lessoni, Corbiculina angasi and Plotiopsis tatet; as well as in the tadpole of Crinia signifera, The adult probably occurs in a Ralline bird, e.g., a waterhen. (2) Cercaria gigantura var. grandior nov. from Amerianna pyramidata differs from the type form in the characters of the tail and in having slightly larger cysts. The latter occurs in freshwater fish. (3) Cercaria angelae n.sp. from Amerianna spp. is a Strigeid larva with eight longitudinally arranged postacetabular penetration glands. The metacercaria is a Tetracotyle occurring in tadpoles. Its adult stage is perhaps a species of Strigea parasitic in Australian birds of prey or an Apharyngosirigea from herons. We desire to acknowledge assistance generously given by Messrs. G. G. Jaensch, Bryce Jaensch and L. Ellis, of Tailem Bend, Murray River, in regard to material. The work was carried out under the terms of the Commonwealth Research Grant to the University of Adelaide. Type material is being deposited in the South Australian Museum, LITERATURE Braver, P. C. 1939 Jour. Parasit., 25, 268-276 Brackett, §. 1939 Jour. Parasit., 25, 263-266 Cort, W. W., and Brackett, S. 1937 Jour. Parasit., 23, 265-280; 297-299 Cort, W. W., and Brooxs, S. T. 1928 Tr. Amer. Micr. Soc., 47, 179-221 Dusors, G. 1929 Bull. Soc. Neuchat. Sci. Nat., 53, (1928), 1-177 Dunors, G. 1938 Monogr. Strigeida, Mem. Soc. Neuchat. Sci. Nat., 6, 535 pp. Jonnston, T. H. 1928 Rec. S. Aust. Mus., 4, (1), 135-142 Jounsron, T. H., and Ancer, L. M. 1939 Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust., 63, 200-203 JoOuNSTON, 2; H., and Ancer, L. M, 1941 Trans. Roy. Soc. 5S. Aust., 65, 285-291 Lurz, A. 1933 Mem. Inst. Osw. Cruz, 27, 33-60 Nicott, W. 1914 Parasitol., 7, 105-126 Otivier, L. 1940 Jour. Parasit., 26, 447-477 RaAnkKIN, J. S. 1939 Jour. Parasit., 25, 87-91 AUSTRALIAN ACARINA, FAMILIES ALYCIDAE AND NANORCHESTIDAE By H. WOMERSLEY, A.L.S., F.R.E.S., Entomologist, South Australian Museum Summary Subfam. BIMICHAELINAE noy. The family Alycidae Canest. 1891 (previously unknown from Australia), as hitherto understood by acarologists, includes the following twelve genera: 133 AUSTRALIAN ACARINA, FAMILIES ALYCIDAE AND NANORCHESTIDAE By H. Womerstey, A.L.S., F.R.E.S., Entomologist, South Australian Museum [Read 8 June 1944] Subfam. BIMICHAELINAE nov. The family Alycidac Canest. 1891 (previously unknown from Australia), as hitherto understood by acarologists, includes the following twelve genera: Alycus C. L, Koch 1842 (= Pachygnathus Dugés 1834). Bimichaelia Sig Thor 1902 (= Michaela Berl. 1884, preoc.). Nanorchestes Tops. and Trt. 1890 (== Monalichus Berl. 1904, in part). Caenonychus Ouds. 1903. Sebaia Ouds. 1903 (= Monalichus Berl. 1904, in part). Sphaerolichus Beri. 1904, Speleorchestes Tragh. 1909, Leptalicus Berl. 1910. ? Alicorhagia Berl. 1910. Hybalicus Berl. 1913. Epistomalycus Sig Thor 1931. Willania Ouds. 1931. The family name Pachygnathidae has been used by Oudemans, Vitzthum and other workers, on the opinion of the first author that Dugés’ genus Pachygnathus (type P. villosus Dugés 1834) is synonymous with Koch’s Alycus (type A. roseus Koch 1842). A comparison, however, of the original figures and description of Dugés and Koch, reproduced by Oudemans in his “Krit. Hist. Acarol., IIc, 868- 869,” does not support this view, and it seems preferable at present to keep to Sig Thor’s use of Canestrini’s family name Alycidae based on Koch’s genus. In the Zool. Anz., 95, 109, 1931, Sig Thor erected a third suborder, the Monopro- stigmata, of the Prostigmata (in which he also placed the Stomatostigmata as a suborder) for the genera Nanorchestes and Speleorchestes. In the Prostigmata s. str. the peritremal tubes are paired and open in front of the mandibles, and in the Stomatostigmata the opening is medial and behind the mandibles, whereas in the Monoprostigmata the stigmal tube is unpaired, somewhat hook-like, with a small median sac, and opens amidst the mouth parts and in close association with the mandibles, Sig Thor, however, did not follow this up by making the necessary new family for these genera, and the name Nanorchestidae is herewith proposed. A close study of the other genera hitherto placed in the Alycidae reveals further important differences in the various genera which suggest that it is in reality a rather heterogeneous assemblage. The genus Bimichaelia, with very long slender mandibles with short simple, almost styliform chelicerae, and without dorsal setae, must be separated from the rest, which all have short robust mandibles with stout, sometimes dentate chelicerae, and with two dorsal setae. or this genus, a new subfamily, Bimichaelinae is proposed. The genera Nanorchestes, Speleorchestes, Epistomalycus, Sebaia, Caenony- chus and Wéillania all have the tarsal claws wanting, a claw-like empodium, a more or less triangular well developed epistome overlapping the base of the mandibles, besides a more or less quadrate propodosomal shield. As yet, how- ever, only in the first two named genera has the structure of the stigmal organ Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust., 68, (1), 28 July 1944 134 been defined. Nevertheless, on the other above mentioned characters the other four genera are more nearly related to Nanorchestes and Speleorchestes than to Bimichaelia or the Alycus group of genera. In Nanorchestes and Speleorchestes the epistome is longitudinally bilobed, freely jointed to the anterior margin of the propodosoma, and without any setae. In the latter genus Tragardh shows the two lobes of the epistome united to their respective mandibles. Whether this is due to pressure in mounting, or is a further development from the form seen in Nanorchestes cannot be decided, but if these two lobes adjoined they would cer- tainly resemble closely that found in the latter genus. The genus Caenonychus Ouds. has been rather inadequately described and has been variously placed in the Eupodidae by Oudemans, the Tydeidae by Vitz- thum and the Alycidae by Sig Thor. From the details available it would seem to be better placed in the new family Nanorchestidae and might possibly be synonym- ous with Trigardh’s Speleorchestes, in which case Caenonychus would have priority. While in Nanorchestes and Speleorchestcs the epistome is distinctly marked off from the anterior margin of the propodosoma, in Epistomalycus and Willania, it is not only fused with the propodosoma but arises some distance behind the anterior margin, and in both genera near the apex is furnished with a pair of ciliated setae (or “vertical hairs” of Oudemans). W#illanta was described with- out any figure, but there does not appear to be any reason why it should be separated from Sig Thor’s genus Epistomalycus which was described in March 1931, two months before Oudemans’ description was published. The genus Sebaia was erected by Oudemans for Berlese’s Alicus (Monali- clus) siculus on the basis of its clavate posterior sensillae and has been quoted as a synonym of Monalichus. Berlese, however, although placing siculws in Monalichus, definitely stated that M. arboriger, now Nanorchestes arboriger, was the type. Sebaia, then, is a synonym only in part of Monalichus. In the present paper the old family Alycidae is divided into the Alycidae s. str. and Nanorchestidae fam., nov., as follows: Large to small mites, of subquadrate, globose, spherical or elongate form, with an evenly rounded epistome, and tarsi furnished with paired claws and a ciliated more or less pad-like or claw-like empodium, Propodosoma often with a crista and rounded lens-like pseudo-capitulum, and with usually two pairs of sensillae. Fam. Alycidae Canest. s. str. Very small mites, usually saltatorial. Propodosoma with a more or less quadrate shield and with a prominent triangular epistome. With (? always) an unpaired somewhat sickle-shaped peritremal tube opening orally and in close association with the mandibles. Claws absent, empodium present and claw-like. Fam. Nanorchestidae nov. Fam. ALYCIDAE Canest. 1891 s. str. In this family should be included the genera Bimichaelia, Alycus, Sphaeroli- chus, Hybalicus, Leptalicus and Paralycus g.nov. Of these Bimichaelia can be separated from all the rest on the very different form of the mandibles, etc., and is here placed in a new subfamily, Bimichaelinae, the remaining genera forming the Alycinae. The following key will separate the genera: 1 Mandibles very long and slender with short non-dentate, almost styliform chelicerae; without dorsal setae. Propodosoma with a broad, more or less distinct crista ending anteriorly in a lens-like pseudocapitulum; with two pairs of sensillae of which the posterior are globose, the anterior filamentous. Eyes absent. Body form subquadrate. Claws 2; etopodium ciliated, not claw-like. Subfam. Bimichaelinae nov. Gen. Bumichaclia Sig Thor 1902 =: Michaelia Berl. 1884 preoc.) 135 Type—M. angustana Berl. 1884, A. M. S., fasc. 6, Italy ; also M, setigera Berl. 1904. Redia II. Acari nuovi, Manip. III, Italy; M. subnuda Berl. 1905. Redia IT. Mat. pel. Manip. V, Italy; M. grandis Berl, 1913. Redia IX. Acari nuovi. Manip. VII-VIII, Java; and the following new species, B. australica n.sp., B. stellaris n.sp. and B. pusilla n.sp., from Australia, B, nova-sealandica n.sp., from New Zealand. Mandibles short and robust with short slender cheliccrae, Propodosoma without crista, with or without pseudocapitulum, with one or two pairs of sensillae of which the posterior may be globose, clavate or filamentous. Shape subquadrate, elongate- oval or globose. Subfam. Alycinae nov. 2 2 Body shape subquadrate. Propodosoma with both pairs of sensillae filamentous, with- out crista. or pseudocapitulum. Hysterosoma with impressed transverse lines. Eyes present. Two claws with claw-like ciliated empodium. Gen. Alycus Koch 1842 Type— Ty rent Poa Fig. 4 As would be expected, the soils are closely related to the geological history of the area and the major soil groups closely parallel the physiographic features. 1 THE Popsots The podsols can be further subdivided into two large groups: (1) the podsolised sands; (2) the gley podsols. (1) The podsolised sands Podsols are essentially soils which are best developed in cold temperate climates under conditions of excess rainfall, when intense soil leaching occurs. 150 The distribution of podsols throughout the world is markedly. influenced by geology (21). Because they are most strongly developed in soils poor in: base reserves, it is not surprising that they occur so widely in the sand ranges and the sandy heath areas in the South-East. These podsolised sands are associated with dry sclerophyll forest, or with sclerophyllous heath vegetation, and are re-deposited (aeolian) sands which have PROFILE CHARACTERISTICS OF THE PRINCIPAL PODSOLISED SAND TYPES (after Stephens ef alia) sand with Dark grey moderate Light grey sand Light yellow or yellow sor sand Yallow sand and brown ts organic cem.gravel Brown oryellow- au b POND sandy clay loam MT. BURR SAND (E. Baxteri) sand with Grey moderate organic matter Light grey Light yellow 12" sand 2an or yellow sand Brown Light grey 96" org.cem.gravel and sand 108" sand Mottled B2 N120" clay CAROLINE SAND (CE. Baxtert - E. Huberiana) sand with moderate Grey AL organic matter on Light grey sand Light yellow to yellow O" sand Brown 90"org.cem.,gravel and Mottled yellow yellow sand > grey, brown B2 ‘ NOE Lag with red inclusions NANGWARRY SAND (CE. Baxteri — LE. Hiuberiana) Grey sand with much organic matter . 2 Light erey or white sand 72" sand with black Yellow or brown illuviated organic matter pg one tnes hardp4n ) sand or clayey Grey or sénd ello ¥y Ww B3 clay YOUNG SAND (CE. Baxtert) Fig. 5 undergone considerable previous leaching. They are quite variable in their degree of podsolisation, and range from podsolised grey and yellow sands to the more extremely podsolised types—the humus podsols, This variation in podsolisation is due prin- is enriched by the addition of humus. In the latter the B horizon cipally to climate and local drainage. The well-developed humus podsols, with a definite organic “hard pan” layer in the B horizon, mostly occur in areas of poor 151 drainage or of local impeded drainage, and are particularly prevalent in. hollows and about acid swamps. As we proceed northwards from the Mount Burr region humus podsols become much less prominent. os These sands are.for the most part overlying limestone (chiefly Pleistocene to Recent calcareous material), although in the Mount Burr region they may overlic volcanic ash, tuff and basalt. A few inches of sandy clay loam or sandy clay is frequently present immediately above the limestone. In the sandy areas south of Penola the topography is undulating and the sandhills much lower than in the ranges, and many of the sands are underlain by a considerable depth of grey and yellow clay, frequently with red inclusions or mottlings. These soils have affinities with the gley podsols. Some of the low- lying humus podsols also have gley affinities. The podsols typified by heath vegetation also occur in a much flatter situation than the range sands. This area has more the characteristics of being a sand sheet, but the soils are extremely variable in profile. Some are leached grey, white, or yellow-grey sands of variable depth overlying yellow and grey clays (mottling is not uncommon), while others are podsolised sands, which may even show considerable accumulation of humus in the B horizon. They are all wnder- lain by Pleistocene to Recent calcareous material but at variable depth. There are modifications of the heath soils in the more northerly portion of the area, which result in modified vegetation assemblages. The heath soils are all very wet in late winter and spring. The podsolised sands are very acid and for the most part range between pH 4:7 and pH 6-6. There is usually a considerable amount of organic matter im the A, and A, horizons. Their nitrogen status is low, normally less than 0-1% total nitrogen, and phosphate status (P,O,) less than :02% and usually less than ‘01%. The P,O, status of the Short Sand (associated with heath vegetation) is particularly low, -003--005%. The Mount Burr Sand, Nangwarry Sand and Caroline Sand are the principal normal podsolised sands already defined by soil survey. Of these, the Mount Burr Sand is the most important. The profile characteristics of the three types are sum- marised in fig. 5. The humus podsols, representing extreme leaching with the development of a more or less organic stained and/or cemented pan in the B horizon, are typified by the Young Sand and the Kilbride and Wandilo Sands (fig. 5 and 6). (2) The gley podsols The gley podsols or meadow podsols are a group of soils intermediate between true podsols and meadow (or gley) soils. Alternate or seasonal waterlogging and drying (due to impeded drainage) superimposed on normal podsol develop- ment results in a meadow podsol. The presence of rusty mottlings and streaks in the clay, indicative of alternating oxidising and reducing conditions, the slight humus staining, and the ferruginous gravel layer frequently present immediately above or in the clay, are characteristic of this group. In the lower South-East the meadow podsols are an important group of soils extending for the most part marginal to the black soil plains (rendzina) and flank- ing the western side of some of the sand ranges. The areas are all more or less low-lying and subject to waterlogging in winter. _ The most widespread and important soils amongst the meadow podsols are the Kalangadoo and Riddoch Sands. The former is the more widespread of the two. Marginal to much of the Kalangadoo Sand country, and very frequent about the Dismal Swamps area, there occurs a soil which has meadow podsol affinities iv which there is much more humus staining, and a heavy sesquioxide pan above the clay. This is the Wandilo Sand. It is relatively restricted in its distribution. 152 The profile characteristics of the meadow podsol types are summarised in fig. 6. Other soil types belonging to the podsolic group occur but are of limited occurrence and relatively unimportant. They are chiefly transitional types which are intermediates between the major types described. Stephens et alia (23) consider some of the sands associated with heath vege- tation as meadow humus podsols. PROFILE CHARACTERISTICS OF CERTAIN PODSOL AND MEADOW PODSOL SOILS (after Stephens et alia) at sand with perk loose sand with Grey mush oremas grey coarse organic gu matter matter Light grey l2e* Light grey or white sand loose sand Black and brown . 36! organic hardpan or stained leyer with 80" peenic herd- ae pai ironstone pan and gravel side gi i acs Mottled with channels Brey ec ery of sand mottled clay and yellow 104" clay calcareous material KILBRIDE SAND SHORT SAND (E. Baxteri) (X. australia — IT, rostrata) ‘ Dark send or loany erey fine sand with fine Grey sand with orgenic matter organic matter Light erey Bn - le" fine sand Light Dark yellow erey grey and 14" sand yellowbrown clay (with solonetzic Mottled yellow character) grey and brown 24" cay (with red inclusions ) 30" S| calcareous material KALANGADOO SAND RIDDOCH SAND (E. camaldulensis) CE, ovata— X. australis) Fig. 6 2 THe RENDZINAS Soils derived from or closely associated with calcareous parent materials are broadly of two classes, the rendzinas and terra rossa soils. The former are grey or grey-black, and the latter red or reddish-brown. The terra rossa soils have a less siliceous clay complex and show a distinctly lower base status than the rend- zinas. They may be even acid in reaction. The rendzinas are grey or grey-black soils which are associated with cal- careous parent material. As a world group they occur in both temperate and 153 tropical climates and are frequently called “lime humus soils” because they contain varying amounts of humus and free calcium carbonate. In the Lower South-East they occur chiefly on the plains over limestone where drainage is imperfect. The well-known Millicent clay and black and grey soils of the Naracoorte Plain and the Reedy Creek-Conmurra Plain belong to this group. Before artificial drainage PROFILES OF THE PRINCIPAL RENDZINA AND TERRA ROSSA SOILS (after Stephens et alia) Brown or dark DEK OE ONE an Statics brown 4" sand to clay loam Brown or gn red-brown Bu sand Brown aa sand to clay loam Red -brown i” « a ci BL 18" veryslight iron- Brown and stone gravel yellow-brown 26" mottled frieble clay ¢ sandy lime- Be variable: depth stone stone HINDMARSH SANDY LOAM COONAWARRA SERIES This is a deeper phase. The limestone frequently outcrops at the surface. Black L Black clay or clay FEREDL, WAGY loam(friable) k " Blac le Light grey g" nodular clay and white with moderates pipeclay celcium carbonate 24" ; with much an calcium carbonate Limestone c Calcareocus material MILLICENT CLAY Fig. 7 CONMURRA CLAY they were exceedingly wet in winter and spring. Agriculturally they have been used principally for barley growing, but are now frequently developed with pas- tures. Owing to the excess of calcium carbonate they are unsuitable for sub- terranean clover, and other legumes like barrel medic, burr medic, and straw- berry clover are substituted. Because of the poor local drainage conditions, excess salt (sodium chloride) accumulations ate not uncommon, and may frequently reach critical proportions. This is particularly so on the Naracoorte Plain (where several small salt lakes occur) and in parts of the Reedy Creek-Conmurra Plain, as evidenced by salt analysis of two surface soils collected by the author. NaCl Total Sol. Locality Depth pH % Salts % Between Naracoorte and Stewart - 0-2” 8-9 -09 +22 Near Konetta Station - - 0-3” 8-6 +12 “45 The rendzinas vary considerably, particularly in depth of profile. 154 In some areas well-drained limestone: hummocks-have weathered. to. a. dark- brown or almost black rendzina, These occur chiefly in the Hundred: of Riddoch, but are relatively unimportant. a On the Conmurra-Reedy Creek Plain many of the rendzinas are very shallow over a grey-white and calcareous C horizon, locally called “pipeclay.” Sometimes this is exposed at the surface. This.type has been called the Conmurra Clay by the author, The profile characteristics of the Millicent Clay and Conmurra Clay are summarised in fig, 7. Many of the rendzinas in the wettest situations have included shell fragments and shells of the common freshwater snail, Amerianna pectorosa, These grade into swamps proper. The total nitrogen level of the rendzina surface horizon is > °25%. Their P,O, status (-04%), and K,O status (48%) are higher than any of the lower South-East soils, except the volcanic suite. 3. Tue Terra Rossa Sorts The second group of soils closely associated with calcareous parent materials are the terra rossa soils, These are red or red-brown soils. The terra rossas in the Lower South-East fall into two large groups: (1) those developed over Miocene to Recent marine limestone, (2) those associated with the old dune rem- nants, the so-called “consolidated dunes.” (1) Over Miocene-Recent marine limestones (a) Developed over marine limestone in some moderate rises in the meadow podsol area, terra rossas which range between red-brown sands, loams and even clay loams occur. They are relatively unimportant, but a notable occurrence is about Coonawarra, a few miles north of Penola. (b) Associated with Miocene limestone in the Mount Gambier-Kongorong district are brown and red-brown soils belonging to this group. They have been used for agricultural and pastoral purposes for many years and have never been thoroughly examined. (2) Developed on the consolidated dunes: Associated with the consolidated dunes are brown and red-brown shallow rather sandy soils allied to the terra rossas. It has been suggested (4) that these consolidated sand dunes are the remnants of an old soil and represent a fossil B horizon. Downward leaching and redisposi- tion of lime in former caleareous dunes, followed by the removal of the upper leached horizons, has exposed this old B horizon. This varies for the most part between 1 and 7 feet thick, and is underlain by white calcareous sands with abundant shell fragments. The former A horizons have been re-sorted and re- deposited to form the present siliceous sands of the ranges—the Mount Burr Sand, Young Sand, etc. These “secondary” soils are best exposed and illustrated, and most developed in the South-East, on the Woakwine Range. ‘This is the first of the inland suc- cession of Ranges. They also occur associated with the limestone hills through- out all the ranges from the Woakwine to the Naracoorte Range, all of which represent old consolidated dunes. Most of the terra rossa soils of this group are brown and red-brown sands and sandy loams. In the Mount Burr Range the most important soil occurring on the consolidated dunes has been called the Hindmarsh Sandy Loam (23). v ~ EELS -] Wye . () i HW LLL / / Hoe Pid \ \ {i MA \ iit Se ! / adst his Lf EX F fo) OUNTIES GREY AND ROBE TENTATIVE SOIL MAP Hers BAY é& ‘155 .. . The total nitrogen in the surface soils of the terra rossas is usually between +20 and :25%. Their phosphate status varies from -O1 to -07% and, like their K,O status, is higher in the loamy types. 4 THE. VOLCANIC SOILS The volcanic soils of the Lower South-East are of very limited extent, but especially in the Mount Gambier and Glencoe districts are of great agricultural value. They are mainly associated with the weathering of volcanic ash and tuff and, to a less extent, basalt. The volcanic soils of Mount Gambier have beet: studied in detail by Prescott and Piper (19). The soils are immature and very variable, probably depending on the variable calcium carbonate content of the original parent material. The surface soils are mostly brown, dark brown or grey-brown sandy loams, loams and clay loams, ranging in reaction from pH 6-4 to pH 8-2. In the Mount Burr region the basaltic soils are more acid and range as low as pl 5-2. This is further evi- dence for the volcanism of this region having preceded that at Mount Gambier The most notable feature of the soils from a plant nutrition viewpoint is the high P,O, content, which was as high as 0°51% in one sample analysed by Prescott and Piper. The distribution of the major soil types in the area is shown on the accom- panying soil map. Towards the northern limits of the map the soils are much less familiar to the author. This area is very complex and relatively inaccessible and should be accepted with reserve. _ The relationship between soil type and physiography can be seen from refer- ence to fig. 1b, and reference to the vegetation map illustrates the soil and plant relationships. Soils having some affinities with the red-brown earths occur but are not “important. Some of the soils east of the Naracoorte Range, so-called “gilgai” soils, have affinities with the soils of the Victorian Wimmera, sometimes allied with the red-brown earths. Near Jucindale extremely limited soils with Eucalyptus leucoxylon savannah can be considered weakly podsolised red-brown earths... With impeded natural drainage, and alternating low-lying and range areas, local swamps are very numerous and very variable. They require a special study and, with the exception of several large swamp areas, have been omitted from the soil map. The coastal dune, coastal swamp and coastal heath plain area has all been mapped as a “coastal complex.” This also requires very detailed study, but the very highly calcareous nature ot the sands near the coast deserves mention. The soils will be further discussed in connection with the vegetation asso- ciations, THE VEGETATION The principal factors influencing the distribution of the main vegetation com- munities are undoubtedly edaphic and climatic. The very close general relation- ship existing between soils and vegetation in the Lower South-East of South Aus- tralia is readily illustrated by reference to the soil and vegetation map. NOMENCLATURE Much confusion of terminology, and indeed of concept, has for a long time hampered ecology. This has, in Australia, led to a lack of understanding and practically no co-ordination by different workers in different States. Recently Wood (26), realising the inadequacy of existing systems of study and classifica- tion of plant communities, reviewed the fundamental concepts in the light of Alus- tralian experience. This general confusion of terminology has been further increased by a great difference of opinion in the ecological schools regarding the 156 concept of succession, This has mostly beem due to a dual use of the word, when applied, not only to developmental and. biotic succession, but to successions which were deemed “theoretically possible’ under “theoretical” conditions of edaphic uniformity. There seems little of value in retaining succession for this latter case. The duplication of nomenclature, which is at least confusing, can be overcome by using for these closely related associations the “edaphic complex” as defined by Wood (26). An adequate scheme of classification for plant communities must in addition to the higher groups include a place for edaphic sub-associations and must be capable of expansion in the lower categories to include, for local or detailed work, the finer distinctions which the study of smaller areas will necessitate. Above all, it must provide for the welding of local associations and edaphic complexes into groups, which not only show the relationships of local associations to each other but also their significance in and to the broader categories. THE FLorIstTics In the present paper the floristics are far from complete. Apart from the great area involved and the relative inaccessibility of much of it, it was impossible for the author to visit it and collect specimens in late spring—the most favourable period. They are, however, sufficiently complete for the purposes of the paper, and in the case of the principal association—E. Barteri association (Dry Sclero- phyll Forest )—very detailed. PRINCIPAL VEGETATION UNITS The classification, nomenclature and chief structural differences between the communities are summarised below in Table I. TABLE [ Climatic Association Edaphic Complex Formation Climax Bc Basteré Cedaphie:citnix)* . | » Bacay FE. obliqua } E, Baxteri 1 Sclerophyll E, Baxteri-E, Huberiana Forest Xanthorrhoea australis~Hakeo rostrata ‘ Melaleuca gibbosa-Hakea rugosa, etc. X. australis-H. rostrata ivath || Mixed E. diversifolia E. diversifolia Mallee scrub Eucalypt Melaleuca pubescens M. pubescens Savannah woodland | Forest E. rostrata (E. camaldulensis) E. rostrata Eucalypt &. ovata-X. australis E ta~X trali. Savannaly . . » OVOALG-A . GUSTYAUS Woodland Gahnia trifida—Cladium filum | C. trifida-C. filum Savannah * By edaphic climax is meant the association occurring on the most widespread soil type in the area. All the communities have been seriously modified by biotic influences such as fire, agricultural development, and the imposition over the area of an artificial system of drainage. THe Dry ScLEROPHYLL Forests The dry sclerophyll forests are somewhat open with a sparse and discon- tinuous grass cover, but characterised by an abundance of sclerophyllous shrubs and undershrubs (pl. V, fig. 9-13). In the Lower South-East they reach their maximum development on the Mount Burr Range. 1 E. Baxtert association Rather than regard the £. Baxteri and E. obliqua associations as co-associa- tions, they have been given association rank, The distribution of the dominants is dependent on soil factors, and so accepting Wood’s “edaphic complex” in the 157 wider sense, E. Baxtert and £. obliqua associations are recognised. This forest reaches its greatest development on the Mount Burr Range, but it is the asso- ciation par excellence of all the sandy ranges. Many of the dominants have been removed by man, and everywhere the association shows evidence of bushfires, On the Mount Burr Range E. Baxteri forms an open canopy at about 40-50 feet. £. obliqua or E. Huberiana may occur, but very rarely, as associated dominants, Below the eucalypt canopy a few tall shrubs or small trees occur sporadically. Chief of these are Banksia marginata (honeysuckle), Acacia melanoxylon (black- wood), Exocarpus cupressiformis (wild cherry) and Bursaria spinosa (native box). Acacia pycnantha and A. mollisima occur rarely in this association; they more usually form almost pure societies on some of the shallow terra rossas of the consolidated dunes, Apart from B. marginata these shrubs and small trees do not contribute much to the physiognomy of the forest as a whole. This is governed principally by the abundance of sclerophyllous undershrubs and small shrubs, The most characteristic plants of this continuous sclerophyllous undergrowth stratum are Leptospermum myrsinoides (tea-tree), L. scoparium (tea-tree), Xanthorrhoea australis (yacka), X. quadrangulata (grass tree), Acacia oxycedrus, A, myrtifolia, Brachylomum ciliatum, Pteridium aquilinum, Epacris impressa, Astroloma humifusum, Hibbertia stricta and Leucopogon virgatus. Other plants occurring freely but less important include Hibbertia sericea, H. fasciculata, Leucopogon concurvus, Correa rubra, Lepidosperma carphoides, L. canescens, Scirpus nodosus, Pultenaea acerosa, Astroloma conostephioides and Isopogon ceratophyllus, Wahlenbergia gracilis and Goodenia geniculata are the most important annuals. The perennial composites, Helichrysum obtusifolium and H. Scorpioides are of seasonal import. Grasses occur very sparingly. The chief are Danthonia geniculata and S tipa semibarbata, Considerable fluctuations in the density and floristic composition of the lower strata occur. Some of these at least can be correlated with soil variation, e¢.g., the greater abundance of Acacia oxycedrus, Epacris impressa, Pteridium aquilinum and Isopogon ceratophyllus on the more extremely podsolised sands—the humus podsols. Pteridium aquilinum is very important where the forest has been made more open by tree removal. Sending up fronds from its subterranean ‘stem it is one of the first plants to recover from fire. In the absence ;of competition and with greater light intensity it rapidly becomes more abundant. Towards the northern limits of the area under consideration, with conditions of much lower rainfall (22-24”), this association becomes greatly modified. E. Baxteri is still the dominant tree, but it is depauperate and stunted and rather scrubby in habit and only 14-25’ high. The association is much more open, and the floristic composition is modified. The small trees and tall shrubs of the Mount Burr Range area are, with the exception of Banksia marginata (here much reduced), entirely lacking. Many of the undershrubs remain the same, but their frequency and their sociability are different. Some new species characteristic of the drier “mallee” areas further north like H ypolaena fastigiata, Phyllota pleuran- droides and Adenanthos terminalis are appearing, The most prominent of the sclerophyllous shrubs and undershrubs in this area are Xanthorrhoea australis, Banksia marginata, Banksia ornata, Leptospermum scoparium, L. myrsinoides, -eucopogon concurvus, Lepidosperma carphoides, Astroloma humifusum, A, conostephioides, Comesperma calymega, Phyllota pleurandroides, Isopogon cerato- phyllus, Epacris impressa and Pteridium aquilinum. Danthonia geniculata is the most frequent of the grasses, 158 2 Eucalyptus obliqua association This association is extremely limited. It occurs on better soils than the impoverished sands associated with the E, Baxteri association. = On the Mount Burr Range its occurrence is practically limited to: (1) the. deeper terra rossa soils, (2) transition soils at the edge of certain basaltic hills, (3) shallow sandy soils over limestone, less acid than the normal podsolised sands. The association is usually more open and the floristic composition of the associated sclerophyllous shrubs is modified. Plants like Acacia oxycedrus, Epacris Impressa, Leucopogon virgatus, Isopogon ceratophyllus, Leptospermum spp. are absent or much less important in the shrub stratum. Acaena Sanguisorbae is especially prominent, There is a belt of E. obliqua and £. vitrea parallel to the coast from west of Kongorong to Port MacDonnell and beyond. It is very broken and not continuous, and it occurs principally on a shallow red-brown loam (4-67) over Miocene (?) limestone. The trees are very poor and scraggly and rarely more than 20 feet high. The association here is obviously towards the limit of its edaphic range and enjoys a precarious stability. It is particularly open with very few undershrubs. The principal associated plants are depauperate Eucalyptus ovata (white or swamp gum), Exocarpus cupressiformis, Acacia melanoxylon, Pteridium aquilinum, Danthonia sp., Acaena Sanguisorbe and H ibbertia spp. Xanthorrhoea australis and Lomandra longifolia occur occasionally, Acacia mollisima (black wattle) and A. pycnantha tend to occur in almost pure societies, E. obliqua has a much more restricted edaphic and climatic range than E, Baxteri, which explains its limited occurrence.: Its approximate limits in the north are defined by the 24” rainfall isohyet. The occurrences in the Mount Burr Range and the other sand ranges of this association are so small that no attempt has been made on the vegetation map to differentiate these “stands” from the E. Baxteri association. The pH of a series of ten (10) surface soils collected at random by the author and others within the climatic zone in which both E. obliqua and E. Basxteri occur, are indicative of the relationship between soil reaction and tree dominance in the dry sclerophyll forest. pH is probably the most important single soil index. The correlation is shown below in Table II. j TasLe II RELATIONSHIP BETWEEN PH, as A SINGLE Som. INDEX, AND EucaLyrer DOMINANCE IN THE STRINGYBARK Forests Dominant Eucalypt Locality pH Ei. Baxteri i; Mount Burr Range 5-94 E. Baxteri Mount Burr Range 6°40 BL Baxteri East of Penola 5:46 E. Baxteri Reedy Creek Range (East of Konetta Stn.) | 5-24 LE. Baxteri ‘| East Avenue Range 4-98 FE, obliqua Section 93, Hundred Smith 6°79 E. obliqua ; Mount Burr Range 6°28 EE. obliqua Near Burnda Railway Station 6°30 E. obliqua Between Kongorong and Port MacDonnell 6-84 E. obliqua Mount Burr Range (Glencoe Hill) 8-09 Eucalyptus Huberiana (manna gum) is sometimes a co-dominant and in places may become locally dominant in the E. Baxteri forests of the Mount Burr 159 area. Its occurrence is frequently difficult to explain on grounds of soil variation. It is most likely that deep-seated soil changes are involved in some instances. some of the sands of the region overlie volcanic material at depth, and it is pos- sible that increased fertility at depth has an influence on tree distribution. &. Huberiana often occurs in the transition zone marginal to swamps, Here better water relationships prevail. Although having a slightly more limited climatic’ range than E. obligua it has wider edaphic limits. Water relationships are more important. 3. E. Huberiana-E, Baxteri association On the very shallow phases of the Nangwarry Sand Eucalyptus [ubertanu often becomes sole dominant. The habitat is a wetter one. The association is more open and the sclerophyllous undershrubs less abundant. E-rocarpus cupressi- formis, Acacia mollisima, A. melanoxylon and Pteridium aquilinum are pro- minent. Grasses, especially Themeda triandra, may be conspicuous. The forma- tion approaches savannah. This is not unusual when one considers that the Nang- warry Sand (shallower phases) has affinities with the gley podsols—soils which in the South-East are normally associated with savannah woodland. Over most of the Nangwarry area there is an association dominated by E, Huberiana and E. Baxteri, Associated plants are sitnilar to the sclerophyllous undershrubs elsewhere—Acacia melanoxylon, A. mollisima, Xanthorrhoea aus- tralis, Leptospermum myrsinoides, L. scoparium, Banksia marginata, B. ornata, Astroloma conostephioides, A, humifusum, Epacris impressa, Pteridium aquili- num, Hibbertia spp., Lewcopogon spp., etc. E. obliqua is very rare in this region. On the deeper phases of the Nangwarry Sand EF, Baxteri is sole dominant. £. vitrea, a low, somewhat dwarfed tree usually about 16 feet high with fibrous bark on the stem and lower branches and long, almost pendulous, narrow leaves, is common about some of the swamps in this area. E. pauciflora (Y has been recorded from our South-East but has not been reported in recent years. South of Wongalina Station and almost to Mount Benson there is a modified variable association allied to the dry sclerophyll forests. On yellow-brown and red- brown sandy soils over limestone (sometimes shallow) Eucalyptus obliqua occurs very sparingly. Shrubs and small trees are abundant and include Banksia marginata, Bursaria spinosa, Acacia pycnantha and Xanthorrhoea australis, Less important are Pteridium aquilinum, Dodonaea sp.. Scirpus nodosus, Casuarina stricta, Olearia sp., etc. THe Heatu The South-Eastern heath lands are best considered in relation to the sclero- phyll forests. They occur on low-lying podsolised sands. These sands are very variable in profile and some of them have affinities with the gley podsols. They are very acid and low in fertility. During the winter and early spring they are very wet. Towards the northern part of the area the heath soils are modified and for the most part much shallower. There is a parallel modification in floristic composition. On the better drained, slightly higher sands the heath invariably gives way to £, Baxteri dry sclerophyll, It can be considered an edaphic subclimax association of the dry sclerophyll forests. (E. Huberiana is occasionally present in the more southerly portions, and E, wvitrea has been recorded.) Mr. C. D. Boomsma (private communication) reports that Blakely identified a Eucalypt collected by him near the Victorian Border, Caroline, South Australia, as E. pauciflore. 160 1 Xanthorrhoea australis-Hakea rostrata association (pl. VI, fig. 14) The heath consists essentially of low sclerophyllous shrubs and undershrubs, for the most part 2 feet to 3 feet high. It is a difficult association to name because so many species are consistent, and being much of the same height there are many dominants. Many of the shrubs and undershrubs of the sclerophyll forest are prominent. The principal members of the heath are Xanthorrhoea australis (yacka), Banksia marginata, B, ornata (honeysuckle), Hakea rostrata (kidney bush), H. rugosa, H. nodosa, Darwinia micropetala, Leptospermum scoparium, L, myrsin- oides, Casuarina pusilla, C, paludosa var. robusta, C. distyla, Melaleuca gibbosa, Isopogon ceratophyllus, Epacris impressa, Leucopogon argatus, Pultenaea laxt- flora, Stylidium graminifolium (trigger plant), Hibbertia stricta and H. fascicu- lata, Others frequently present include Calythrix tetragona, Acacia verticilata, Dillwynia hispida, Rutidosis multiflora, Daviesia brevifolia, Pimelia flava, P. octophylla, Pultenaea tenuifolia and Sphaerolobium vimineum. Cyperaceous and Restionaceous plants present are Schoenus apogon, S. brachyphyllus, Chorizandra enodis, Leptocarpus Brownit, Lepidosperma car- phoides, L. concavum and L, laterale. Gahnia trifida, Caustis pentandra and Scirpus antarcticus have been recorded. The Juncaceae are represented by Juncus capitatus. Plants of an ephemeral or seasonal nature, abundant in late spring, are Drosera Planchonii, Stackhousia monogyna, the perennial composites, Helichrysum obtusifolium and H. scorpioides, together with a few orchids, chief of which is Caladenia Patersonii, Grasses are sparse although several genera are represented. Those recorded include Stipa Muelleri, Agrostis Billardieri and Aira caryphyllea, Several grasses are prominent in the transition area between the heath and the £. ovata-X. australis savannah, Chief of these are Themeda triandra, Stipa pubescens and Danthonia setacea, As pointed out under the section on soils, the heath profiles are rather variable. Sufficient work has not been done in relation to the floristic composition of the associated vegetation to decide whether variations in profile can be con- sistently correlated with floristic variations. XX. australis definitely prefers a slightly better drained habitat and is always more abundant on the small sandy “banks” (rarely more than 2 ft. or 3 ft. higher) that are common throughout the heath. Banksia ornata is indicative of a moderate clay subsoil. Although most of the heath conforms to the above description of the X. australis-H. rostrata association, towards the northern part of the area modifi- cations in the soils result in modified species composition. 2 Melaleuca gibbosa—Hakea rugosa association (a) About the southern edge of the Hundred of Spence, in the low-lying area between the sand ranges, there are very shallow grey soils (over limestone), which are very wet in winter and spring, with numerous very small limestone rises. On the low-lying wetter parts the principal plants are Melaleuca gibbosa, Darwinta micropetala, Hakea rugosa, Leptocarpus Brownu, Lepidosperma concavum and Pimelea glauca. On higher ground, or very small stony rises depauperate Euca- lyptus fasciculosa (pink gum), Xanthorrhoea australis, Hakea rostrata, Casuarina pusilla, Banksia marginata and Darwinia micropetala are associated. On slightly higher rises, in addition to E. fasciculosa, D. micropetala and X. australis, Mela- leuca sp. (aff. M. uncinata), Leptospermum scoparium and Isopogon ceratophyllus are common. 161 “(b) North of (a) (¢.g., sections 60 and 67, Hd. Spence) there are some further variations in floristic composition. The soils again are very shallow, and on them occur scattered depauperate E> fasciculosa with very occasional stunted Eucalyptus leucoxylon (blue gum). The remainder of the vegetation has heath affinities. Olearia floribunda, Melaleuca gibbosa, M. uncinata (?), Hakea nodosa, H, rugosa, Banksia marginata, Gahwa sp. (7), lsopogon ceratophyllus, Lepto- spermum scopartum, Darwinia micropetala, Calythrix tetragona, Astroloma cono- stephioides and Leptocarpus Brownii are the principal species. 3 E, fasciculosa-Banksia marginata association (pl. VI, fig. 16) South-east of Lucindale, east of Baker’s Range, there is a variation worth mentioning. The soil is rather variable, but principally grey sand over yellow and grey sandy clay over limestone at 10-12 inches. Scattered trees of E. fasci- culosa are common, with numerous sclerophyllous undershrubs—the principal species are Banksia marginata (honeysuckle), B. ornate, Leptospermum scoparvum, L, myrsinoides, Cladium filuin, Melaleuca gibbosa, Isopogon ceratophyllus, Dar- winia micropetala, Calythrix tetragona, Hakea rugosa, X, australis, Acacia verht- cillata, Astroloma conostephenioides, A. humifusum, Hibbertia fasciculata, Hib- bertia sp. and Epacris impressa, This association approaches maquis, but is grouped with the heath variants for convenience. 4 Cladium filum-Melaleuca gibbosa (?) association (pl. VI, fig. 15) Between the Reedy Creek and West Avenue Ranges and adjacent to the Reedy Creek, in the north-western portion of the area, the heath is frequently given a particular physiognomy by the abundance of Cladium filum (black butt) and Melaleuca gibbosa (?). Darwinia micropetala, Cladium junceum and Leptocarpis Browmii are common. These regions are particularly wet in winter and the soils variable. Two profiles examined by the author are given below in fig. 8. sandy clay loam grey 3m sand gen clay loan erey- 5 silty clay loam Lieht grey le" light grey silty clay limestone G limestone Fig, 8 The modifications in the heath as described above are due principally to edaphic factors, including water relationships. They have not been mapped separately. They can hardly be considered edaphic subclimax associations of the £. Baxteri sclerophyll forests in the same way as can the X. australis-H. rostrata association. It is probably best to regard all the heath associations as an edaphic complex, but one which has some definite floristic and edaphic links with the E. Baxteri edaphic complex. MALLEE Scru, 1 Eucalyptus diversifolia association (pl. VII, fig. 17-18) _ The mallee proper in our Lower South-East is practically limited in distribu- tion to a strip adjacent to the coast between Beachport and Robe. This area receives between 24” and 26” of rain per annum, Here, on shallow brown and K 162 red-brown soils (terra rossa) and somewhat deeper yellow-brown and yellow sands, over the “consolidated dune” limestone of the Woakwine Range, there is a typical low dense mallee scrub of E, diverstfolia, which rarely exceeds more than nine feet in height. Associated with EF. diversifola are a number of sclerophyllous shrubs and undershubs, many of which are common to the sclerophyll forest and the heath. The principal of these are Banksia marginata, Xanthorrhoea australis (yacka), Hakea rostrata, Pultenaea laxiflora var, pilosa, P, acerosa var. acicularis, Hibbertia sericea, Daviesi brevifoli, Astroloma humifusum, Dillwynia floribunda, Hakea sp. (probably H, vittata), Pimelia glauca, Thomasia petalocalyx and Acacia sp. (pro- bably A. myrtifolia), Lepidosperma carphotdes and L. concavwm are frequently prominent. Other plants occurring, and more or less important, include Halerr- hagts tetragyna, Correa rubra, Scirpus nodosus, the twining Comesperma volubile and the climbing Billardiera cymosa, The principal grass is Stipa sp. Acaena Sanguisorbae is very conspicuous on the shallower soils. Stackhousia monogyna has an important seasonal aspect. Dodonaea sp., Bursaria spinosa and Melaleuca pubescens are sometimes present, and occasionally may become locally important. On the coastal side of this association there may be a considerable admixture with coastal plants like Acacia longifolia var. Sophorae (locally called boobyalla) and Leucopogon parviflorus (white currant). Eucalyptus leucoxylon var. macrocarpa as a somewhat stunted form has been recorded in some hollows where water-relationships are improved. On most of the shallow soils associated with the isolated consolidated dunes which occur scattered throughout all the more inland sand ranges (1.¢., east of the Woakwine Range) Eucalyptus fasciculosa (pink gum) is widespread. It is approximately limited in the south by the 25” rainfall isohyet, above which it is replaced by E. obliqua, or where the soils are too shallow by societies of Banksia morginata and/or Dodonaea sp, It forms a rather open, savannah-like association and sclerophyllous shrubs and undershrubs are relatively rare. Bursaria spinosa, Banksia marginata, Dodonaea sp. are often present; the latter two frequently forming dense societies. Xanthorrhoea australis is usually abundant at the margin of the consolidated dune, where there is some admixture with sand. Astroloma humifusum and Acaena Sanguisorbae are usually prominent. The principal grasses are Danthonia setacea, D. semiannularis (?), Neurachne alopecuroides and Koeleria Michelu, The association, however, is not very consistent, varying prin- cipally with variations in soil depth, and it has not been practical to map in these isolated small areas on the vegetation map. Towards the northern limits of County Robe, particularly on the consolidated dunes of the Bull Island-Reedy Creek area, E. diversifolta (mallee) is associated with E, fasciculosa (pl. VII, fig. 18). As we proceed further north £. diversifolia becomes more important in this edaphic habitat, finally displacing £. fasctculosa altogether. £. fasciculosa is a species with a very wide potential habitat. SAVANNAH COMMUNITIES 1 Melaleuca pubescens association (pl. VII, fig. 19) Before considering the more important savannah communities dominated by the eucalypts, it will be more convenient to describe the association dominated by Melaleuca pubescens (dry-land tea-tree), This association is most important on the very shallow soils of the Woakwine Range, south of Beachport, and the belt of mallee just described (see vegetation map). It also occurs on a small coastal range of consolidated dunes towards Nelson (Victoria), on portion of Stuart’s Range (west of the Naracoorte Plain) 163 and some consolidated dunes at Bull Island (here, however, there occurs also E. fasciculosa). Melaleuca pubescens in this habitat is a small tree, about 15 feet high, fre- quently with a dense canopy. The association, however, is a very open one. Bursaria spinosa is sometimes conspicuous, but the associated plants are practi- cally confined to grasses and herbaceous annuals and perennials. Like most savannah communities it has been used for grazing since early settlement, and there is consequently a large number of introduced grasses and clovers. The principal grasses are Stipa tenuiglumis, Danthonia semiannularis, Festuca rigida, F. Myuros, Koeleria Michelii, K. phleoides, Aira caryophyllea and Bromus villosus. Other plants conspicuous in spring include Helichrysum apiculatum, Vittadinia triloba, Cynoglossum australe, Arenaria serpyllifolia (‘thyme-leaved sandwort), Brachycome debilis, Hydrocotyle sp., Geranium sp., Myosotis australis, Sherardia arvensis (field madder) and Juncus bufonius, Acaena Sangutsorbae is abundant on the very shallow soils. Metilotus tndica (King Island melilot) and Trifolium procumbens (hop clover) are usually abundant where the association has been regularly grazed. The soils are very shallow sandy loams over “consolidated dune” limestone, but where they become’ deeper (usual!y in valleys) Casuarina stricta and/or Xanthorrhoea australis and Pteridium aquilinum may be locally important. Very rarely Acacia melanoxylon occurs on deeper soils, On the coastal side of the Woakwine Range there is admixture with plants of the coastal complex like Leucopogon parviflorus and Acacia longifolia var. Sophorae. Other coastal species like the grasses Koeleria phleoides and Lagurus ovatus, which are very abundant, and the shrubs Sambucus Gaudichaudiana (white elder) and Solanum aviculare occur. This association adjacent to Beachport becomes intermixed with mallee and finally gives way to it altogether, although it re-occurs again near Mount Benson. The association is undoubtedly allied to a Melaleuca pubescens association in the Curramulka-Minlaton-Yorketown area on Yorke Peninsula (South Australia), where associated with M. pubescens on very shallow -soils over limestone are Bursaria spinosa (native box), Casuarina stricta and many grasses (principally Stipa spp. and Danthonia sp.). There is also a great admixture of mallee. This association, however, has not yet been studied by ecologists. M. pubescens also occurs sparingly towards the edge of some of the grey -rendzina country, as north-west of Lucindale, and occasionally on the margins of the Naracoorte Plain (rendzina). Although so different structurally, the Melaleuca pubescens association is undoubtedly closely linked edaphically with the Z. diversifolia association, and the equilibrium between them is probably a relatively unstable one. 2 Eucalyptus camaldulensis association (pl. VII, fig. 20; pl. VIII, fig. 21-22) This association is developed on the meadow podsols and is the association ‘par excellence of the Kalangadoo Sand. Unfortunately, it has been greatly modified by man, who has imposed an artificial drainage system. It was a typical savarinah dominated by E. camaldu- lensis (red gum, better known as E, rostrata), with numerous gum saplings and a ground flora chiefly of grasses and cyperaceous and juncaceous plants. A great deal of the area is at present being intensely developed under sub- terranean clover (Trifolium subterraneum) and perennial rye-grass (Lolium _ perenne), Other pasture species used are cocksfoot (Dactylis glomerata), white clover (Trifolium repens) and Phalaris (P. iuberosa). 164 The Kalangadoo Sand is naturally poorly drained and subjected to much excess water in winter and spring, and low-lying swampy areas are frequent. Most of these dry up in summer, and very few remain as permanent swamps or waterholes. Although these soils are waterlogged in winter, they dry out con- siderably in the summer. The principal grasses are Danthonia geniculata, Poa bulbosa and Briza mior. Others occurring less abundantly are Aira caryophyllea, Rottboellia compressa (mat grass), Microlaena stipoides, Hordeum maritimum, AH. murinum and Era- grostis diandra, Holcus lanatus (fog grass) is sometimes abundant. There are a great number of other monocotyledonous plants belonging to the Cyperaceae, Juncaceae, Amaryllidaceae and Centrolepidaceae, which are most prominent in the lower-lying and consequently wetter places. These include Cyperus tenellus, Scirpus setaceus, Juncus pallidus (pale rush), J. capilatus, J. panciflorus, Carex tereticaulis, Lusula campestris, Hypoxis glabella, Centrolepts oristata and Brizula gracilis. Other species frequently present are Lepidosperma concavum, Bartschia latifolia, Drosera peltata, Utricularia dichotoma, Rutidosts multiflora, Crassula macrantha, Leontodon hirtus (lesser hawkbit) and the com- mon introduced composite Hypochderis radicata (rooted cat’s ear or dandelion). Nanthorrhoea australis (yacka) is often abundant, but occurs chiefly on the imore marginal areas where the soils are transitional in nature, Here there are many shrubs like Bursaria spinosa, Banksia marginata, Acacia mollisima and A, melanoxylon associated, Simall societies dominated by Pteridium aquilinum (bracken fern) are frequent on the higher and slightly better-drained areas. The association is best known to the author in the Kalangadoo-Penola area. South of Kingston, on modified shallower but low-lying soils, E. camaldulensis is somewhat stunted and there is a modified ground flora, On the higher land, east of the Naracoorte Range. “gilgais” are not uncommon and the soils may have affinities with the red-brown earths. Here Melaleuca sp. (probably M. pubescens) and Casuarina Luehmannii (bulloak) sometimes occur as co-dominants. Eucalyp- tus leucoxylon (blue gum) is not uncommon, When more fully understood these variations can undoubtedly be grouped within, an “edaphic complex’”’—they are indeed separate, but very closely allied, associations. Small low-lying black soil swamps (wet in winter and spring) are frequent about the Kalangadoo area. The floristics are variable, depending upon the degree of swampiness, In late spring, after these swampy areas have more or less dried up. Myriophyllum elatinoides, Schoenus apogon, Centipeda Cunninghanui and the grasses Calamagrostis filiformis and Polypogon maritimus are common. Poa caepitosa occurs in the less swampy black soil areas. 3. Eucalyptus ovata-Xanthorrhoea australis association (pl, VILL, fig, 23-24) On some of the meadow podsols (¢.g., Riddoch Sand) and extending onto the rendzinas in part, is a savannah association which is given a characteristic physiognomy by the dominance of /, ovata (white or swamp gum), and in a lower stratum, X. australis (yacka), The soils are all low-lying and prior to drainage must have been very wet in winter and spring. Casuarina stricta (sheoak) and Banksia inarginata are sometimes present and may more or less replace E. ovate. Bursaria spinosa, Acacia melanoxylon and Viminaria denudata occur sparingly. Of the ground flora the principal species are grasses, Danthonia spp. (prob. D. geniculata and D, semtannularis), Hypochderis radicata, Erythraea Cen- taurium and Mentha sp. are usually common. In the wetter low-lying parts Chorizandra enodis, Lepidosperma lineare and L. concavum are abundant. 165 The association has been greatly affected by man and is difficult to assess fully from those remnants remaining. West of the Mount Burr Range adjacent to Tantanoola, on a somewhat deeper phase of the Riddoch Sand, X. australis is replaced to some extent by Lomandra longifolia, There is a large ecotone between this association and the heath in the Hun- dred of Riddoch. On the east side of the Reedy Creek-Conmurra Plain and adjacent to the Reedy Creek Range, on variable soils (some have affinities with the Riddoch Sand), there is a great mixture of species, which because of the frequent prevalence of X. australis is best considered here. Plants recorded include Eucalyptus fasct- ciulosa, E, leucoxylon, Melaleuca pubescens and Casuarina stricta, the grasses, Danthonia semiannularis, Brisa minor, Hordeum maritinum and Themeda triandra, while Cladium junceum and Lepidosperima lineare occur freely (pl. IX, fig. 27), The area is a very complex one because the soils are very variable and it cannot (at present) be satisfactorily grouped with any of the main associations. But at least in part there are some affinities with the E. ovata-X. australis associa- tion, and on the vegetation map the whole area has been mapped in with this asso- ciation, 4 Eucalyptus leucoxylon-Eucalyptus fasciculosa association (pl. IX, fig. 26) South-west of Bool Lagoon and in a narrow strip running south from Lucin- dale there is a rather variable association: HK, leucaxylon (blue gum) and, less abundantly, E. fasciculosa occur. There is considerable variation within the asso- ciation and detailed analyses, in connection with a survey of the soil types involved, is needed before the correct status of the community can be determined. The actual area though, is small, and the association or associations relatively unimportant. X. australis is usually abundant, and Banksia marginata is also frequently present. The principal grasses of the ground flora are Themeda triandra (kangaroo grass) and Danthonia sp. . 5 Gahnia trifida-Cladium filuim association (pl. IX, fig. 25) On most of the rendzina soils trees were almost entirely absent, and a savannah of which the principal plants were Gahnia trifida (cutting grass), Cladium filum (thatching grass or black butt) and the grass Poa caespitosa (locally called “white tussock”) occurred. Being treeless, if we except the ubiquitous Banksia marginata (honeysuckle), it was only natural that following drainage it should have been rapidly and almost completely developed. In the past it has been used chiefly for agricultural purposes, particularly barley-growing, but of latter years seeded pastures and shecp and dairying are becoming important. In view of the extensive development that has taken place, it is absolutely impossible to gather a satisfactory picture of the natural vegetation assemblages of these low-lying swampy rendzina plains. Little more can be done than mention the most common species occurring in the isolated pieces of vegetation that have escaped destruction. There is little doubt that Gala trifida, Cladium filum and Poa caespitosa were the most important and consistent species, but it is also certain that their relative abundance varied considerably. Considering the varying salinity of the soils, it is to be expected that modifications in floristic composition were common. From the original survey records, information concerning the occurrence of dense societies of B. marginata (honeysuckle) on some of these “plains” was obtained. Only a very occasional honeysuckle is left of this so-called “honeysuckle forest." The author macroscopically examined the soils of such an area defined by the early surveyors, but could see no difference, in field examinations, of the () This is no doubt the “honeysuckle country’ mentioned by Tennyson Woods in his “Geological Observations in South Australia.” 166 profiles in the “honeysuckle forest” area, and an adjacent area delineated by the surveyors as “cutting grass flat.” Nor did there appear to be any difference if microtopography. Most of the plants associated are wet habitat species like Leptocarpus Brown, Juncus maritimus var. australiensis, Cladium junceum, Centrolepis polygyna, Scirpus antarcticus, and Schoenus nitens. Danthonia semiannularis is fairly frequently present. In the more or less saline areas Distichlis spicata (emu grass) is often abundant. Cladium filum appears to be more tolerant to salinity than does Gahnia trifida, Mdetuieuca pubescens occurs sparingiy on some rendzina soils, ¢.g., a small wecurrence on very shallow dark grey soils allied to the rendzinas north-west of Lucindale township. OTHER COMMUNITIES Ihe Vegetation of the Volcanic Hills—The volcanic soils are limited (see soil map) und most of the larger areas have been farmed or in other ways the original vegetation entirely destroyed. Eucalyptus ovata (white gum) occurs occasionally, and Acacia melanoxylon (blackwood) and A. mollisima (black wattle) have been recorded. There appears to be some similarity with Patton’s “Basalt Plains asso- ciation” (14). The distribution of the volcanic soils is shown on the soil map, but because of the difficulties mentioned above no differentiation is made on the vegetation map. SWAMPs In an area like the Lower South-East, where natural drainage is impeded, swamps and semi-swamps are very common and vary considerably. They are far too variable and complex to be considered here and warrant particular and more detailed study. As yet the only ones described are the isolated Myriophyllum- Sphagnum bogs near Moynt MacIntyre (6), and recently one of the large coastal fens.“8) Because of its large extent mention should be made here of a large swamp occurring at the western edge of the Conmurra-Reedy Creek Plain.. The area dries out in summer but in winter and spring is covered with from one to two inches to a foot of water. The soil is dark grey, heavy, shallow over limestone, and exceedingly saline. A surface sample taken by the author had a pH 8:77, 25% sodium chloride and 67% total soluble salts. The dominant plant is Melaleuca halmaturorum (salt-water tea-tree)—a small tree about 8-10 feet high. Common in the ground flora are Aptum australe, Centrolepis polygyna, C. aristata, Triglochin mucronata, Polypogon maritimum, Calamagrostis filiformis and Poa lepida, Loranthus miraculosus var. melaleucae is a common parasite on the salt- water tea-tree. THE ORIGIN OF THE FLORA AND VEGETATIONAL DYNAMICS Positive earth movements in Pleistocene and Recent times resulted in the recession of the sea from the Lower South-East, west of the Naracoorte Range. About the same time warping and faulting in the basement complex in the old Murray guli was profoundly affecting the course of the Murray River, and block- faulting and downward movements in the Gulf Regions of South Australia formed the rift valleys of St. Vincent and Spencer Gulfs. This latter prevented further easterly invasion from the endemic centres of south-west Western Australia. Wood (27) has analysed the flora of the Fleurieu and adjacent peninsulas, and shown that the flora is composed almost equally of species from the east and west. He demonstrates the early spread of the western species and the later migrations from the east. Later migration from the west has been prevented by the gulf formation, This is entirely endorsed by the South-Eastern flora. @) Eardley, C. M. 1943 Trans, Roy. Soc, S. Aust., 67, (2) 167 In the Lower South-East colonisation of the newly-elevated area was almost entirely from the east—from the old early Pleistocene land surface. The sub- sequent imposition of a severe arid cycle (4) must have had profound effects on the stability of the vegetation. An analysis of the species of Australian origin collected by the author is given in Table ITI. TABLE III An ANALYSIS OF THE FrorA or THE Lower SoutHu-East Total number species (Australian) recorded - - - 212 Limited to eastern Australia and South Australia - - 136 Occurring in both east and west Australia - - - &§2 Endemic to South Australia - - - - - 23 Limited to South Australia and Western Australia - - 1 (a grass) The colonisation from the east is well illustrated by the Eucalyptus camaldu- lensis association which has obviously invaded the area by way of the Marambro, the Naracoorte and the Mosquito Creeks—particularly the latter. It occurs on all the meadow podsols defined by the Kalangadoo Sand, and has established itself on a small area of Riddoch Sand in the transition zone where these two allied soil types grade gradually into each other. There is evidence from the edaphic side, and considering that colonisation has been from the east, that the E. ovata-X, australis has spread at the expense of some of the Gahnia trifida-Cladium filum association, The former association occurs on the Riddoch Sand, but has occupied a large area of shallow rendzina soils, both north of Hatherleigh and near Furner (cf. soil and vegetation maps). But there are slight modifications in floristic composition in the two habitats, e.g., Poa caespitosa is usually present on the rendzinas. This invasion, however, which appears to have been proceeding very slowly, was suddenly and for all time ended when artificial drains were built. Land development since has steadily taken place, and is still proceeding. The dry sclerophyll forest, associated with the podsolised sands of the series of strand ranges, has apparently reached relative stability. It is suggested that very small land movements, either positive or negative, have little effect on the ranges, whereas in the lower lying areas, with their exceedingly gradual fall to the west and north-west very minor seismic fluctuations have a considerable effect on drainage and so actttal soil-water relationships. This would, no doubt, reflect on the stability of plant commumities associated with them. Since land development began many cosmopolitan herbs and grasses have been introduced and are frequently conspicuous in the ground flora in the savannah communities, Where important, they have becn mentioned in the descriptions of the association. DISCUSSION The general ecology of the vegetation of the Lower South-East of Sotth Australia has been described, The area is a very complex one, and the field for more detailed work is an open one. This study, however, throws an interesting light on general soil-vegetation-climate relationships, which have never been well presented or well understood. The arguments of varying schools pro and contra climatic climaxes and climatic climax succession, and the interpretation and mis- interpretation by other workers of their hypotheses, have led to a great deal of confusion amongst ecologists, particularly, as pointed out earlier, in relation to terminology. EpapHic CONSIDERATIONS In the area described in this paper the relationship between soils and vegeta- tion is for the most part remarkably clear cut; Where an association occurs on a 168 modified soil or differing soil type, e.g., E. camaldulensis association, on Kalan- gadoo Sand, on the higher moditied soils east of the Naracoorte Range or on shallow soils south of Kingston, there is always accompanying modifications in floristic composition. This was also so for variations within the heath soils, where the floristic variations were described as separate associations which could be linked into an edaphic complex, and again for the dry sclerophyll forest edaphic complex. The transition from meadow podsol (Kalangadoo Sand) to podsolised sand, and the sharp change in associated vegetation association and formation is well illus- trated in pl. IX, fig. 28. The only case in which the transition from association to association was not linked with obvious edaphic changes was in the case of the possible invasion of some of the rendzina soils by the E. ovata-X. australis association. But because of seismic fluctuations the communities of the low-lying plains with their poor drainage and varying salinity are not considered to have reached a relative stability comparable with the better drained types. Ecotone areas are essentially edaphic transition zones, The general relationships are in complete agreement with the conclusion that Wood (1939) has reached as a result of his wide experience with South Australian plant communities—'‘the edaphic complexes and formations .... are determined in the one climatic zone essentially by soil conditions.” The edaphic control of the distribution of the principal associations in portion of- the north-west of South Australia has already been established, and some variations within the associations themselves explained on edaphic grounds (7). The evidence from ecological studies elsewhere in Australia, which has recently been summarised (5), neglecting the invasion of eucalypt forest by rain forest (Blake, 1938), is also in general agreement with Wood’s conclusions. Admittedly the soils are inadequately dealt with in most of the early Australian ecology, and the opinions expressed are based on superficial observation. Too much value should not be placed upon them, but they are useful as supporting evidence. In the absence of information concerning soil profiles and soil variation, and indications of the nutrient levels and soil reaction, the conclusion of Fraser and Vickery (12) against edaphic control in the Upper Wilhams River and Bar- rington Tops Districts (New South Wales) is not admissable. Elsewhere edaphic factors are being recognised as more and more important. Clements, Long and Martin (8) have found that the dwarf and procumbent forms of dunes are not due, as is generally assumed, to aerial factors, but to edaphic factors (both water and nutrient). An association may occur on more than one soil type in a climatic zone. In such cases, however, there are always (from the author’s experience) modifica- tions in floristic composition and the soils are allied. They are, in reality, separate associations. Soil variations in the South-East can be correlated with floristic variations, and separate associations linked within Wood’s edaphic complex satis- factorily demonstrate the environmental relationships. Water relationships frequently compensate for edaphic variations. This applies especially to species or groups of species rather than whole associations. For example, in eastern Australia (Brough, Mcluckie and Petrie 1924, Fraser and Vickery 1938, Blake 1938) rain forest occurs on elevated basaltic soils, while in the narrow valley bottoms on poorer soils, where edaphic water relationships are compensating there is modified rain forest. Within the 10-inch isohyet in western Queensland (Blake 1938), on the gravelly downs, the vegetation of the Astrebla pectinata association tends to restrict itself to the margins of the crab- holes where water relationships are better. In the north-west of South Australia (Crocker and Skewes (7) ) the occurrence of numerous species like 4cacta aneura (mulga), Kochia pyranidata and Acacia Burkittii on different edaphic habitats is due to compensating moisture factors, 169 Within one climatic zone, then, the distribution of vegetation is controlled by edaphic factors, although abnormal water relationships may be compensating and result in species and groups of species occurring in two different edaphic habitats. CLIMATIC CONSIDERATIONS The effect of climate on vegetation has always been difficult to assess because of the great edaphic variability, which has usually been only poorly understood. Indeed, climate, until recently, was considered by pedologists to be all-important in influencing soil morphology to the almost complete disregard of geological his- tory. The better understanding of soil fertility, especially the light thrown on it by the opening up of the minor (micro) element field, has tended to a more balanced view. In the South-East the dune range remnants are arranged almost at right angles to the climatic zones, and pass through several of them, The same soil type is more or less continuous from regions with a rainfall of more than thirty inches per annuin in the south, to those receiving about 20-22 inches at the northern part of County Robe, and continues northwards to approximately the 17-inch isohyet. They extend over climatic limits ranging from Davidson’s Warm Tem- perate Semi-humid Zone, with P/E > 0-5 for mine months of the year, to his Warm Temperate Semi-arid Zone, with P/E > 0:5 for six months of the year. In the most northerly regions the dune ranges are less regular, but over the whole range one soil type occurs-—re-sorted, previously leached, deep siliceous sands of the Mount Burr sand type. The opportunities for fundamental studies on the effect of climate are indeed unique. The effect on the floristic composition and structure of the E. Barteri (stringybark) dry sclerophyll forest as we proceed from the Mount Burr Range region to the northern portion of County Robe has aleady been pointed out. We pass gradually from the highly developed forest in the south, where the dominant FE. Baxteri is approximately 50 feet high, to the more open forest in the northerly regions, with depauperate stunted E. Baxtert and modified associated plants. The change is a very gradual one—the dominants gradually become lower and asso- ciated plants slowly drop out. other more arid species appearing. As we proceed further north the E, Baxtert becomes more dwarfed and mallce-like in appearance and, finally, about the 19-inch isohyet reaches the limits of its climatic range (at least on this soil type) and disappears altogether. Before this it was mixed with E. angulosa (mallee), and occasionally £, diversifolia (white mallee), which now take its place. Most of the common sclerophyllous shrubs of the Mount Burr forest have disappeared; exceptions are Leptospremum myrsinoides, Xanthorr- hoea australis, Lepidosperma carphotdes, Hibbertia spp., Banksia ornata and a few others. New associated species like Leptospermum coriaceum, Phyllota pleu- randroides, Casuarina pusilla, Hypolaena fastigiata and Adenanthos terminalis are prominent. Further north, about the 174-inch isohyet (¢.g., Coonalpyn), E, dwersifolia is more prominent, and £. leptophylla also occurs associated with E, angulosa, ‘ The climate, therefore, affects a gradual modification of the floristic composition and structure of plant communities. In the more arid regions of the State it has already been recognised (25) that climate, in conjunction with migra- tion of species, has a sifting effect on the vegetation, in a gradual progression, with increasing aridity, through a series of communities—savannah woodland, mallee, tree steppes and finally shrub steppe. It has also been considered by Wood (26) that only by selecting arbitrary climatic zones can definite associations he delimited in this case. In the South-East this is definitely so on the “range” sands, but the soils over the range Wood has ‘indicated are by no means as con- stant in profile or nutrient levels. and with detailed soil survey work edaphic rela- “170 tionships would probably in many cases permit of more accurate association and formation delineation. But in any case the influence of climate on structure and composition of plant communities is a modifying one. It is not strictly true, then, in the circtumstances, to say that in the one climatic zone associations and formations are controlled by edaphic factors, but rather that this is so in the one climatic horizon. So that, in any extensive association, even under conditions of absolute edaphic uniformity, modifications in floristic com- position must be expected—varying, of course, with the rapidity of climatic changes—that is, whether the climatic zones are narrow or broad. If uniform soil types were widespread over climatic zones or numerous “climatic horizons,” it would be possible to build up “climatic climax” associa- tions in the sense suggested by Wood (1939). One could further build up “climatic complexes” analogous to edaphic complexes. In practice edaphic variation is usually so great that this is unnecessary. Climatic complexes of this type have been satisfactorily employed, however, in one instance (1), and will be necessary when extending this study into the Upper South-East. Reviewing the ecology of the mountainous regions of the Eastern States, and the difficulties experienced by all workers there, it is obvious that topographical climatic changes are producing continuous modifications in structure and com- position of the communities, masking most edaphic relationships. It is clear, too, that in these cases we are not dealing with associations in the true sense (floristic variation is too great), but rather with “climatic complexes,” and many of the pro- blems met by Pryor (20) and Pidgeon (15), with their “forest types,” could be overcome, and the relationships of the communities better expressed in terms of edaphic and more particularly climatic complexes. Summarising, it may be re-stated that most of the difficulties in Australian ecology have been due to a poor perspective as to the relative importance of edaphic and climatic factors, and especially to the great disregard of the edaphic condi- tions. Because species possess variable potential environments (both edaphic and climatic) the effect of climate on a natural assemblage of plants is to modify both structure and. specific composition, and climatic changes are, except in special cases, like sharp rain shadows, always gradual. Major soil variations, on the other hand, are usually sharp and clear cut, and depend principally on geologic history, but are modified by climate. Edaphic factors, therefore, cause sudden and profound changes in composition and structure, and are responsible for the distribution of formations and associations within any climatic horizon. ACKNOWLEDGMENTS The author wishes especially to acknowledge the assistance of Miss C. M. Eardley, upon whom the greatest burden of identification fell, and Mr. C. G. Stephens of the Soils Division, Council for Scientific and Industrial Research, who was particularly encouraging in the field. Of great assistance was the advice given by Prof. J. G. Wood, who from the outset took a personal interest in the work. REFERENCES CITED (1) Batpwin, J. G., and Crocker, R. L. 1941 Proc. Roy. Soc. S. Aust., 65, (1) (2) Brake, S. T. 1938 University of Queensland Papers (3) Broucu, P., McLucxig, J., Perriz, A. H. K. 1924 Proc. Linn. Soc. N.S.W. (4) Crocxer, R. L. 1941 Trans. Roy. Soc. S, Aust., 65, (1) (5) Crocker, R. L. Thesis, University of Adelaide Trans. Roy. Soc, S, Aust., 1944 VEGETATION MAP OF PORTION OF LOWER SOUTH-EAST Lf ? ay Y KS ALIS oe ‘) sv) aoe Ki a ‘ o*, ; SV SV » erste, Sade Ih mt AEN \ \\\ WY WEY ———— AEN aN EW SN moi \\ + ANAS y, ASS g Lf =5 — — i = =< % % 2 ” y = r = g = 2 € 5 2 3 ey 2 ne Pe s = S 2 x é 5 n 2 i 8 z & 2 = S 3 2 | ee 2 5 P g 3 aes a 7s ne £ 2 8s = s Be 5 3 sas = % Bee = 5 = § g 3 a = S = at Pee Set ee ee ee = 2 = FA 2 4 es es ae ct ES TS = z 2 SS = s Se Gees eteawee. Ge ks ee 171 (6) Crocker, R. L., and Earptey, C. M. 1939 Proc. Roy. Soc. S. Aust., 63 (7) Crocker, R. L., and Skewes, H. R. 1941 Proc. Roy. Soc. S. Aust, 65, (1) (8) Crements, F. E., Lone, and Martin, E. 1939 Imp. Bur. Pastures and Forage Crops (9) Davipson, J. 1936 Trans. Roy Soc, S. Aust., 60 (10) Fenner, C. 1930 Trans. and Proc. Roy. Soc. S. Aust., 54 (11) Fenner, C. 1921 ‘Trans. and Proc. Roy. Soc. S. Aust., 45 (12) Fraser, L., and Vickery, J. W. 1938 Proc. Linn. Soc. N.S.W. (13) Howcnin, W. “Geology of South Australia” (14) Parron, R. T. 1935 Proc. Roy. Soc. Vict. (15) Pipczon, I. M. Thesis, University of Sydney (16) Prescorr, 1929 Trans. and Proc. Roy. Soc. S. Aust., 53 (17) Prescorr, . 1942 Trans. Roy Soc. S. Aust., 66, (1) (18) Prescort, J. A. 1931 Coun, Sci. Ind. Res. (Aust.), Bull. 52 (19) Prescorr, J. A., and Piper, C. S. 1929 Trans. and Proc. Roy. Soc. S. Aust., 53 (20) Pryor, L.O. 1939 Thesis, University of Adelaide (21) Rosinson, G. W. “Soils, their Origin, Constitution and Classification” (22) Srantey, E.R. 1909 Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust., 33 (23) STEPHENS, et alia Coun. Sci. Ind. Res. (Aust.), Bull. 142 (24) Trumpie, H.C. 1937 Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust., 61 (25) Woop, J. G. “Vegetation of South Australia,” Govt. Printer, Adelaide (26) Woon, J. G. 1939 Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust., 63 (27) Woop, J. G. 1930 Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust., 54 (28) Woops, JuLtan, 1862 “‘Geology of South Australia” (29) Woops, TENNyson “Geological Observations in South Australia” JA. J. A EXPLANATION OF PLATES V-IX Prats V Fig. 9 Eucalyptus Baxteri association on Mount Burr Sand in the Mount Burr Range area. Banksia marginata, Xanthorrhoca quadrangulata and Pteridinm aquilinum are prominent in the photograph. Rainfall, 30 inches per annum, Fig. 10 #. Baxteri forest on deep podsolised sand. The typical sclerophyllous under- shrubs include Pteridiwn aquilinum, Xanthorrhoea australis and X. quadrangulata. Eucalyptus Huberiana sparingly present. Mount Burr Forest Reserve. Rainfall, 30 inches per annum. Fig. 11 4, Huberione association. Mount Burr Range. Soil, approximately 18” yellow- brown sand over limestone. Fig. 12 Depauperate E. Barteri dry sclerophyll forest on leaiched siliceous sands very closely allied to the Mount Burr Sand, east of Lucindale (Baker’s Range). X. quadrongulate Isopogon ceratophyllus, Banksia ornata, B. marginata and Leptospermum myrsinoides are the chief sclerophyllous undershrubs. Annual rainfall, 23 inches. Prate VI Fig. 13 Depauperate E. Baxteri forest on leached siliceous sands, West Avenue Range, pears qilende Xanthorrhoea australis is very prominent in the foreground. Annual rain- all, 24 inches. Fig. 14 Xanthorrhoea australis — Hakea rostrata association. The species conspicuous in the foreground include X, australis, Casuarina paludosa var. robusta, Isopogon. ceratophyllus, Banksia marginata. Epacris impressa, etc. Fig. 15 Cladium filum—Meloleuca gibbosa (2) association between Reed Creek and West Avenue Ranges adjacent to the Kingston-Bull Island road. , = Fig. 16 Eucalyptus fasiculosa — Banksia marginata association south-east of Lucindale. Other plaints included Acacia verticillata, Hakea rugosa, X, australis, Melaleuca gibbosa and Leptospermum myrsinoides. 172 Piate VII . Fig. 17. Eucalyptus diversifolia (white mallee) association on Woakwine Range near Beachport. Xanthorrhoea australis and Banksia marginata are here the most prominent of the associated sclerophyllous undershrubs. Fig. 18 E. diversifolia and E. fasiculosa ona consolidated dune between Reedy Creek and’ Bull Island. ; Fig. 19 Melaleuca pubescens association on Woakwine Range opposite Beachport. Acacna Sanguisorbae is here abundant. ; Fig. 20 Eucalyptus camaldulensis association between Hynam and Naracoorte. : Pirate VIII Fig. 21 E. camaldulensis association near Wattle Range H.S. Meadow podsol soil type: Fig. 22 E. camaldulensis association near Kalangadoo. Soil type, Kalangadoo Sand. Chief grass is Danthonia geniculata. Juncus pallidus (pale rush), J. capitatus and Scirpus calocarpus are also prominent. . Fig. 23 Eucalyptus ovata~Xanthorrhoca australis association between Hatherleigh and Konetta H.S. Soil, rendzina affinities. Fig. 24 E. ovata—X. australis association on Riddoch Sand (a. meadow podsol)..- Hd. Riddoch. Pate TX Fig.25 Ga/mia trifida (cutting grass) on black (rindzina) soil of the Millicent Clay type. Fig. 26 Eucalyptus leucoxylon — X. australis association near Lucindale. E. fasiculosa is also present. Fig. 27 Eucalyptus fasiculosa--X,. australis associated on a shallow meadow podsol (Riddoch sand affinities) west of Reedy Creck Range. Lepidosperma lincare in the foreground. Fig. 28 Transition between Kalangadoo Sand (meadow podsol) and Mount Burr Sand (normal podsol) near Mount McIntyre. The transition is sharp and paralleled by changes from the FE. Baxteri dry sclerophyl! forest on the Mount Burr Sand (background) to E. casmel- dulensis savannah on the meadow podsol. (Photograph, C. G. Stephens.) Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust., 1944 Vol. 68, Plate V ig. 9 F Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust., 1944 Vol. 68, Plate VI 16 ig. . Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust., 1944 Vol. 68, Plate VII Cc sare So : N 00 k (xy On fy hi Trans. Roy. Soc, S. Aust, 1944 Vol. 68, Plate VIII Trans. Roy. Soc. § . Aust., 1944 — = oe Rese d a soe a 4 ot, = sat Fig. 25 Vol. 68, Plate IX . 28 i F fy ee r fA f Th fee ‘ (AVY Ff [Derwand X MLah Sr f\~, VOL. 68 PART 2 — 30 NOVEMBER 1944 BERNARD ©. COTTON, 166 WELLINGTON RD., ADELAIDE, TRANSACTIONS OF THE ROYAL SOCIETY OF SOUTH AUSTRALIA INCORPORATED ADELAIDE PUBLISHED AND SOLD AT THE SOCIETY’S ROOMS KINTORE AVENUE, ADELAIDE Price - «= Twelve Shillings and Sixpe: > | Registered at the General Post Office, Adelaide, for transmission by post as a periodical A SPECTROCHEMICAL EXAMINATION OF SOME IRONSTONE GRAVELS FROM AUSTRALIAN SOILS By A. C. OERTEL and J. A. PRESCOTT Summary In a previous communication (Prescott 1934) an account was given of the chemical nature of a range of ironstone gravels associated with certain soils from Western Australia and South Australia. The principal feature of this record was the characteristic presence in these gravels of iron oxides corresponding to 22 to 66% of Fe203, and the low amount of manganese present. Similar results have since been recorded by Beater (1940) for concretions present in Natal coastal soils. and by Joachim and Kandiah (1941) for some concretions present in Ceylon soils. 173 A SPECTROCHEMICAL EXAMINATION OF SOME IRONSTONE GRAVELS FROM AUSTRALIAN SOILS (1) By A. C. Oerter and J. A, Prescorr [Read 13 July 1944] In a previous communication (Prescott 1934) an account was given of the chemical nature of a range of ironstone gravels associated with certain soils from Western Australia and South Australia, The principal feature of this record was the characteristic presence in these gravels of iron oxides corresponding to 22 to 66% of Pe,O, and the low amount of manganese present. Similar results have since been recorded by Beater (1940) for concretions present in Natal coastal soils, and by Joachim and Kandiah (1941) for some concretions present in Ceylon soils. The chemical nature of such gravels or concretions is of interest in throwing light on soil-forming processes, particularly in the case of ironstone gravels present in soil residuals associated with the laterite characteristic of certain uplifted pene- plains and presumably formed under climatic conditions different from those existing at present. The present communication records the results of a re-examination of the ironstone gravels previously mentioned using the spectrograph to determine the detectable constituents both in the original gravels and in their hydrochloric acid extracts. The examination of the hydrochloric acid extracts was made by a quantitative method based om the addition to selected samples of known amounts of the elements to bei estimated. The use of a rotating stepped sector wedge and the addition of the element cadmium to the extracts to serve as an internal standard enabled the selected samples to be used as standards for the analysis of the other samples. The details of the method as standardised in these laboratories will be given elsewhere. The elements selected for quantitative estimation in the hydrochloric acid extracts were: silver, boron, cobalt, chromium, copper, gallium, germanium, manganese, molybdenum, nickel, lead, tin, vanadium and zinc. It was found that the quantity of boron present was of the same order of magnitude as that present as impurity in the carbon electrodes, and no attempt was therefore made to estimate this element quantitatively. Germanium was found to remain in the residue even when added to the sample. Tin, although present in the original samples, was not detected in the extracts or the residues. The estimation of this element in hydrochloric acid extracts of soils needs further investigation. The quantitative estimations as given im Table { are believed to he correct to within 25%. PRELIMINARY Quatitarive EXAMINATIONS Small sub-sanples of each sample of gravel were arced between graphite electrodes. With the exception of boron and zinc all the above-named elements were detected in at least some of the samples. Cobalt was detected. in only two of the gravels. An unexpected result of this preliniinary examination was the easy detection of molybdenum in nearly all the samples. The complete qualitative examination of an ironstone gravel (No. 2954) from the Warburton Ranges, con- taining G65 of FeO, showed the presence of aluminium, barium, calcium, chromium, cobalt, copper, gallium, gerinanium, iron, lead, magnesium, manganese, () A contribution from the Division of Soils, Council for Scientife and Industrial Research. Frans. Roy. Soe. S.A., 68, (2), 39 November 1944 A molybdenum, nickel, potassium, silicon, silver, sodium, strontium, tin, titanium, vanadium and zinc. in three cases the soils associated with the gravels were also examined. They included the soils associated with the gravel (No. 1850) from Kuitpo, South Australia, a soil sample associated with a gravel (No. 1961) from Birdwood, South Australia, and the soil sample associated with the above-mentioned gravel No. 2954. This survey showed that the elements gallium, lead and molybdenum were present in considerably higher concentrations in the gravel than in the asso- ciated soil samples, whereas the elements cobalt and titanium were present at con- siderably lower concentrations in the gravel than in the associated soils. EXAMINATION oF THE Hyprocitoric Accu EXTRACTS The extraction of the gravels was made with concentrated hydrochloric acid of constant boiling strength on the water bath for 48 hours, as in the standard examination of soils with special precautions to avoid contamination. Ten of the eravels previously examined were selected as being sufficiently representative. The results of the quantitative examination of these extracts for 14 elements are recorded in Table I. The values for jron, aluminium and titanium are taken from the original published analyses, The amounts of chromium and vanadium in these campies may be compared with the amounts recorded by Simpson (1912) in his analyses of Western Australian laterites from Kalgoorlie and Coolgardie. They are of the same order. Lertrand (1942), in the examination of 20 soils, found quantities of vanadium over the range, 0-3 to 6°8 parts per 100,000. In order to give some perspective to these results, Goldschmidt’s figures for the abundance of these elements in the earth’s crust are given. There is evidently no change in order of magnitude associated with the relative concentration of otherwise of these elements in the ironstone gravels, but there is a suggestion that cobalt, copper, manganese and nickel are not concentrated in these gravels whereas gallium, molybdenum, lead, vanadium and zine may be. This confirms the evi- dence of the preliminary qualitative examination of some of these and other gravels and their associated soils. A qualitative examination of the residues after extraction showed that although most of the iron had been extracted by treatment with acid, by no means were all of the clements listed in Table I completely extracted. TasBLe [ Elements Ve Al Ti Ag Co Cr Cu Ga Mn Mo Ni Ph Vo Zn Sample No. Locality oy &% Yo Parts per 100,000 Western Australia— 2306 Gibson Desert 21.6 3,4 0.2 — (7) -- 60 1.8 10 18 2.5 2.0 4 100 24 2310 ” ” ihe 34.3 2.9 0.2 ~ zee 49 3.5 6 90 4.0 1.2 6 100 i5 2296 + ay cige 30.0 3.0 0.2 0.02 aio 1 2.0 8 25 3.9 0.6 5 50 18 Mingenew ... wn «27,9 1.5 0.2 _ 1 2 10.0 1 3 2.0 5.0 5 10 12 3968 Gingin we were EG 5.2 0.2 _ = 5 1.8 3 2 1.2 1.9 3 12 18 South Australia— 2481 Hawk’s Nest w 28.7 3.5 0.2 ao —_ 6 18 6 14 25 50 6 60 15 2485 i 5 we «35.0 49 0.2 — — 8 #10 4 7 M2 ohh 5 “Oh 42 1850 Kuitpo “hick wee O7B 4.3 0.2 —~- — 6 1.4 4 6 6.0 0.8 4 25 24 2962 Waitpinga .. .. 314 2.3 0.3 Ps — 2 O07 $ 18 2.0 10 2 30 7 Alawoona 24.3 1.1 G1 + 0.06 2 2 #14 #2 4 #12 20 1 16 6 Abundance in earth’s crust @) SL 8.8 0.6 O01 4 20 «10 1.5 93 15 #10 1.6 10 4 (@) Where no values are given, the element was not detected, (3) Goldschmidt (1937). Tue RAtio or MotyepeENUM TO lRON In view of the fact that the detection of molybdenum im the samples had proved to be easy, it was of interest to attempt to determine whether there had been a concentration of molybdenum in these gravels parallel with that of the iron or in greater proportion, The relatively high concentration of molybdenum ‘n iron conerctions from Wyoming, to the amount of 2 and 1-5 parts per 100,000 has also been noted by Stantield (1935). Dingwall, McKibbin and Beans (1934) were unable to detect molybdenum spectrographically in a group of Canadian soils, but Watson (1943) found quantities of molybdenum over the rauge 0-2 to 1-9 parts per million in a number of soils from the South Island of New Zealand. Sandell and Goldich (1943) found the average molybdenum content for 22 American igneous rocks to be 2-4 parts per million. These values may be com- pared with the 15 parts per million of Goldschmidt. Spectrograms of 83 actual soils from South Australia, New South Wales and Queensland were examined for molybdenum, but this element was detected in only eight cases. In order to compare the relative concentrations of iron and molybdenum mn these soils with those of the gravels, the relative mtensities of lines in the spectro- grams due to the two elements were compared. The known ratios of Mo to Fe in the hydrochloric acid extracts enabled the factor to be ascertained connecting these relative intensities with actual ratios. This factor was found from the average of ten observations to be 6 x 10°, Jn Table II are given the ratios of Mo to Fe in the original gravels. Tape I Ratio or Mo to Prin [RONSTONE GRAVELS Western Australia--- Sample No. Juccality Ratio 2306 - - Gibson Desert 19x 10-° 2310 - = iy iv 10x 10-° 2296 - - ts x 12x 10° Mingenew 24x 10° South Australia— 2481 - ~ Hawk’s Nest 24x 10-% 2485 - - * . 30 x 107 1850 - - Kuitpo i9x 10% 2962 - - Waitpinga 24x 10° Alawoona 8x 10> In the case of the eight Australian soils mentioned above this ratio was found to range between 5 x 10 and 10 x 10, as compared with the value of 30 x 10 -* derived from Goldschmidt’s table. The evidence is therefore in favour not only of an absolute concentration of molybdenum in these gravels, but also of a concentration relative to the iron probably of a twofold order, DISCUSSION The mobility of iron in the soil profile 1s determined principally by the fact that ferrous hydroxide is precipitated in the neighbourhood of pH 5-5, and that ‘ron therefore is mobilised under reducing conditions more acid than this, but less acid than the precipitating value for ferric hydroxide at pH 2-3. The elements which show no evidence of concentration in these gravels are precipitated as hydroxides at the following hydrogen ion concentrations : Chromium - pH 5:3 Cobalt - - pH68 Copper - pH5:3 Silver - - pH7-5 Nickel - - pHoe-7 Manganese - pH 8-5 176 and would be expected to be leached from the soil readily at all hydrogen ion concentrations more acid than pH 5 except for chromium which might form chromates under certain conditions. Phosphorus and vanadium are known to be concentrated in iron concretions and limonite (Lindgren 1923) as phosphate and vanadate and similar concentrations could be expected of molybdate and chromate, and probably of zincate and plumbate. In view of the fact that gallium hydroxide is readily dissolved hy aqueous ammonia, its behaviour may be expected to be parallel with that of zinc, so that the concentration of gallium in these gravels can be readily understood. SUMMARY Ten ironstone gravels from Western Australia and South Australia have been examined spectrochemically and the proportions of fourteen elements in these gravels determined quantitatively in their hydrochloric acid extracts. Cobali, copper, manganese and nickel are probably not concentrated with the iron, but gallium, molybdenum, lead. vanadium and zinc appear to be so con- centrated. Chromium is in an intermediate position. REFERENCES BEATER, B. E. 1940 Soil Science, 50, 313 BERTRAND, L). 1942 Bull. Soc. Chiin., France, 9, 133 Dincwari, A., Mckunix, R. R., and Beans, H. T. 1934 Can. Jour. Res. 11, 32 GoLpscuMipt, V. M. 1937 Jour. Chem. Soc., 655 Joacuim, A. W. R., and Kanpian, S. 1941 The Trop. Agriculturist, 96, 67 Linporen, W. 1923 Econ. Geol., 18, 439 Prescotr, J. A. 1934 Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust., 58, 10 SANDELL, I. B., and Gotpren, S. S, 1943 Jour. Geol., 51, 99 and 167 simpson, E. S. 1912 Geol. Mag., 5, 9, 404 STANFIELD, K. E, 1935 Ind. Fing, Chem. Anal. Edit.. 7, 273 Watson, |. 1943 N.Z. Jour. Sci. Tech., 25, 162 ECOLOGY OF THE SAND FLATS, AT MORETON BAY, REEVESBY ISLAND, SOUTH AUSTRALIA By L. W. STATCH, M.Sc., F.R.M.S. (Communicated by H. H. HALE Summary Because of the necessarily limited period of observation, the present study presents roughly the state of the populations of the sand flats at Moreton Bay only during the month of December 1930. Records of abundance for the larger members of the fauna were obtained by averaging series of counts over selected average quadrats, each being a square meter in area. The smaller organisms were evaluated from quadrats of nine square decimeters. Numerous counts of the surface fauna were taken and a typical sample 2.5 cm. in thickness and nine square decimetres in area, taken from 6 mm. below the surface of the sand was obtained to determine the penetration of the apparent surface fauna, the sand being sieved off through fine cloth and the organic residue being preserved for examination in the laboratory. 177 ECOLOGY OF THE SAND FLATS AT MORETON BAY, REEVESBY ISLAND, SOUTH AUSTRALIA © By L. W. Sracu, M.Se., F.R.M.S. (Communicated by Fl. M. Hale) fRead 13 July 1944 | Merraops Because of the necessarily limited period of observation, the present study presents roughly the state of the populations of the sand flats at Moreton Bay only during the mouth of December 1936, Records of abundance for the larger mem- hers of the fauna were obtained by averaging serics of counts over selected average quadrats, cach being a square metre marca. The smaller organisms were evaluated from quadrats of nine square decimetres. Numerous counts of the surface fauna were taken and a typical sample 2°5 em. in thickness and nine square decimetres in area, taken from 6 mm. below the surface of the sand, was obtained to determine the penetration of the apparent surface fauna, the sand being sieved off through fine cloth and the organic residue being preserved for examination in the laboratory. Tie HApirat Development and Relations—-Moreton Bay (fg. 1) 1s a shallow inlet about half a mile long on the north coast of Reevesby Island. It is backed by a ridge of sand dunes connecting two low, travertine-capped, granitic outcrops which terminate this local habitat to the east and west. The sand dunes protect the bay from the strong prevailing southerly winds, while the granitic outcrop forming Winceby Island, about a mile to the north, breaks the strength of the north winds, thus affording a great measure of protection from wave action. The sand flats are built up and are extended northward by sand blown from the dune ridge. The wind-blown sand assists the tide in the holding and burial of tidal scour, consisting principally of the marine angiosperm, Posidonia australis J. Hooker, the attrition and decay of which provides the bulk of the organic debris of the sand flats. The tidal scour is concentrated towards the eastern. half of the bay, the western half always being remarkably clean. The sandy bottom extends to a depth of five or six feet below low water mark, beyond which it is replaced by a dense growth of Posidonia australis, extending to the east and west and across to Winceby [sland. , This Posidonia bank limits the extension of the intertidal sand-flat com- munity to greater depths owing to the alteration of the substratum through biotic factors, the principal one being the matting effect of the rhizomes of Posidonia preventing penetration of the substratum by at least the larger members of the intertidal infauna. permit reference to pertinent literature on marine ecology published since preparation of this manuscript. Veatin, Rox, Soe. SoA, 68, 62), 39 November 19 t+ 78 quantitative work its character will not be discussed further. It may be noted, however, that this community corresponds to the subtidal Strongylocentrotus - Asterias biome of North America as described by Newcombe (1935, 238) and was observed to control in a similar manner the subtidal extension of a lociation of the mussel, Brachyodontes erosus Lamarck, occurring on a local development of gravel and sand substratum off the east end of Lusby Island. Notes on the echinoderm elements of this association are contained in another report (Stach 1938, 329, 330). Detailed Description—From high tide mark, the beach slopes regularly and rapidly to the 1’ 6” contour. Beyond this is a series of shallow inshore lagoons (bounded by the 2’ 6” contour) separated by low ridges connecting with the barring cuter sand flats and emptying by shallow channels with a very gradual fall to the sea at low water. Hayman and Henty (1939, pl. X, fig. 1) have pub- lished a photograph of portion of Moreton Day showing the dune ridge with inshore lagoon C in the foreground. As the tide recedes the water drains away SAN WELATS MORETON BAY, WIRCEBY ISLARD 7 [t9 ee meen alpen aes eee] i oO ENS 8 400 800 Feet O'= High Tide Strand Line PLANE TABLE SURVEY BY LW STACH nen soem — until, when the tide is fully out, a thin film of water about a quarter to half an inch deep covers the floors of the inshore lagoons. The broad sand flats barring the Jagoons fall within the 1’ 6” and 2’ contours over the inshore half of their area and fall away regularly and rapidly to low water mark, at the 6’ contour. The largest unbroken areas of sand flat occur in the western half of the area (fig. 1, A), most of which rises above the 1’ 6” contour. The thickness of sand in the long lagoon in the western half of the bay (fig. 1, B) exceeds one foot. In the lagoon to the east of this (fig. 1,C) sectioning revealed 6” of sand overlying at least 9” of coarse shell debris, principally composed of valves of Katelysia scalaring Lamarck and Soletellina biradiata Wood. Just on the seaward side of @) For Goniocidaris read Adelcidaris. 179 this lagoon and within the 2’ contour (fg. 1, D) a section in the sand flat showed 15” of sand overlying coarse shell debris. The next lagoon to the east (fig. 1, E) showed in section 1’ of yellow-grey sand followed by 2” of dark grey-brown fibrous, decayed organic matter, derived from Posidonia australis, overlying 5’ of sand passing into coarse shell debris, On the seaward slope of the sand flats in the eastern half of the bay there is over 24”" thickness of sand. COMPOSITION OF THE COMMUNITY The community under consideration may be regarded as a faciation (vide Shelford 1932, 111) within the sandy beach association of the intertidal biome, as yet undetermined, of southern Australia. The composition of what is here termed the Kaleiysia - Arenicola - lintcromerpha faciation is given as follows: Dominants—Katelysia scalarina Lamarck, a 27 11.0; : . 5 48 25 in? | § | ae 19 «11.5 5834 4 a 3 5 3 18.1 ; 5 ? . 3 6 66 33.1) | 923 172 18.5 § i LU rabusta Terricks 10 25 128 27 21 o, : eo ms : iu 9 30 | 163 17 10.4! : A + | 8 120 3500} 160 5735.6) 57D | 4 | : rf 30 | 136 22,—Ss«16.1| | 5 ‘ | a 13 28 | 207 1.4) 1 794 126 15.8 t l i Final Result of Series - - 5,433 1,261 23.2 Taste JV Showing Maximum Shade Temperatures during Tests and Percentage Germination obtained Maximun Shade Temperatures (January-March 1933) No. of Pass Frsoe F 81-902 F 91-1008 Fo rOta10® Bo Add-dbde FB : 5 12 5 7 2 . 4 13 5 5 j : - 7 10 6 7 1 Germination after Exposure to direct Heat of Sun Cone No + - - 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9. 10 No. ot sends 61 62 50 59 60 56 62 37 58 al No, gwermitated x - 2 1) 21 24 8 23 21 2 23 a8 germination = Z 44.2 0.0 42.0 40.6 13.3 410 338 385 43.1 45.9 Mean percentage germination — 33.6% Germination after Moistening followed by Drying Cone No. - - = 1 54 3 4 5 6 7 & 9 caf) No. ot seeds - - 35 60 on 58 57 58 61 58 on 58 Hours ot moisture - - Bi 4 6 8 10 aire le 20 24 48 No. yorminated — - 3 30 23 31 26 22°47 33 37 16 ae “% germination — - - $4.5 38.3 51.6 448 35.0 298 S40 637 266 4G Mean percentage germination - 187 A tree was selected and the seeds obtained from this tree were found to be 42°5% viable. Twenty additional cones were picked from this tree and these were divided into two lots of 10 cones each. The seeds from each cone were counted and tabulated separately. The seeds belonging to 10 of the cones were placed outside under the direct heat of the summer sun, precautions being taken to prevent rain from falling on the seeds. The degree of heat received by the seeds is indicated by the order of the maximum shade temperatures given in Table IV. On 30 March the seeds were removed and tested for germination by seeding in boxes and watering in the open. The value obtained was 33°6%. ‘This indicated that the seeds could tolerate the intense heat of summer without their viability being impaired. The seeds from the other 10 cones were submitted to a moisture time schedule which ranged from a period of two hours subjection to moisture with a progressive increase to a maximum, of 48 hours duration. At the termination of each period of treatment, the seeds were recovered and allowed to dry out thoroughly. After they had dried completely, they were tested for germination. The value obtained in this case was 44°2%. REGENERATION EXPERIMENTS These experiments provide evidence to support the view that the hard crust of the soil surface was the prime cause of failure of the seedlings to appear. It appeared reasonable to suppose that if a seed bed were artificially created, suffi- cient moisture would be conserved in the soil to bring about sufficient germination. During May 1933 an initial attempt to secure regeneration was essayed. An area of one acre carrying several seed trees was enclosed with wire netting and the surface soil broken into a fine condition. Following a single fall of 230 points in November 1933, 24 seedlings appeared beneath the mother trees in December, but on account of root competition the seedlings failed to establish and, at the end of March 1934, all of these had died. During March 1934 the average shade temperature over 11 consecutive days was 104° F. The work was persisted with, however, and in May 1934 the area was again harrowed. In November 1934, 88 seedlings appeared, and again in late spring of 1935 further seedlings brought the total in this small plot to more than 190, On 30 April 1938 the number of young trees was 188; it can thus be observed that loss had been negligible. On 1 January 1938 these young trees were measured. The following height classes give an indication of the growth rate: Height class - - 0-6” 6-12" 12-18” 18-24” 24-30" 30-36" 36-72" No. of young trees. - 21 §9 62 26 15 4 1 It is significant that regeneration ceased in the plot after the soil re-assumed the crusty nature which is invariably associated with virgin soils in that region. The germination of the seed is interesting. The seed coat bursts close to the micropyle, and by the growth of the axis the radicle is protruded and curves down into the soil. By elongation of the cotyledons. their basal portions are pushed out of the seed together with the apex which lies between them; the apical portion of the cotyledons remains within the endosperm till the whole of the contained food materials has been absorbed and used by the developing embryo. Ultimately the cotyledons are withdrawn from the seed and rising into the air form the first green leaves. These differ“considerably, however, from the foliage subsequently formed. In August 1937 a further experimental plot of eight acres was prepared along similar lines to those employed in the first attempt. In November 1937, 65 seed- 188 lings appeared. With the exception of two, which were situated beneath the seed trees, all of these were alive and presented a particularly vigorous appearance when last observed in April 1938. The dryness of the ground occasioned by the seed trees is no doubt responsible for the death of the two seedlings mentioned. It is important to note that the regeneration of certain native shrubs and trees such as Dodonaea attenuata, Cassia eremophila, Acacia ligulata and Myoporum platycarpum also occurred readily. These species survived the dry summer conditions and developed strongly. The conclusion to be drawn from the results of these experiments is that natural regeneration can be achieved, provided sttitable conditions of the surface soil are provided and both rabbits and live stock are excluded. The rate of growth is not rapid, but it is very necessary that areas from which timber has been removed should be permitted to regenerate. Measure- ments taken from trees of a known age and which have grown under natural con- ditions show that a height of 18 feet, with a butt diameter of six inches, can be expected in 14 years. The knowledge that regeneration will take place provided suitable measures are taken, permits the formulation of a definite scheme for the future management of areas which have grown native pine. It would appear that so long as the seedlings survive the summer following their appearance they can be considered to be well established. Protection from rabbits and stock is vital, and the creation of a seed bed by the breaking of the surface crust of soil is necessary in order to conserve soil moisture and provide a suitable medium for germination, This also encourages the seedlings of perennial grasses (Stipa spp.) and seasonal herbage, which provides shade and shelter. It has been contended by some authorities that the growth of these latter species should be prevented because of the drain upon soil moisture. The Stipa spp.. however, die down in early summer and the amount of moisture removed during the hot summer months is negligible. The dry stalks of these and the annual plants shade the tiny pines from the fierce summer heat, as was well demonstrated in Plot 1. It was also observed that seedlings competed successfully with a dense growth of Jnala graveolens, SEEDLING DEVELOPMENT The primary root of the pine seedling immediately commences to penetrate deeply into the soil. The following particulars relate to a seedling which appeared in November 1937 and was measured in March 1938, when 120 days old. Its height was 54 inches and the main axis had developed eight alternate lateral branchlets. none of which exceeded one inch in length. The basal portion of the leaves was decurrent, one-third of the total length of the foliar blade, and extended from the point of issue on the stem to the point of issue on the whorl below, thus covering the stem between the free leaf blades. The decurrent parts of the leaves do not form contact along their edges, so that a groove is formed in which the stomates are protected. As the scedlings become older the free portion of the blade gradually diminishes until the major portion of the blade is decurrent to the stem. The main axis of the root developed to a depth of 32 inches, with very little lateral formation. On account of the rapidity of development of the primary root it can be scen that root competition from shallower rooted plants is of little account. and seasonal! herbage which finishes its short life cycl: before the severe conditions of summer set in, is unable to remove moisture during the sunmmer months. Experiments with broadcast sowings indicated that deep covering of the seeds is undesirable. Seeds sown 3 inch, | inch, 2 inches and 3 inches below the surface 189 were able to form cotyledons which reached the surface of the soil, although the percentage of field germination fell away considerably at 3 inches. The cotyledons of seeds sown at depths of 4 inches and 6 inches failed to reach the surface and perished in spite of the fact that the germination had been quite good. It was also found that Murray pine developed fertile seeds at a comparatively early age. Seeds from a 12-year-old tree gave a germination of 20°5% A TRANsEcr Stupy or THE FLicut oF SEEDS Successful examples of natural regeneration in Victoria are so uncommon that an opportunity was taken in 1938 to record information resulting from such an occurrence near Mildura. Rabbit-proof fencing permitted scedlings to become established within the enclosure. Outside the fenee, where rabb Pe and hares were alle to find access. ® Parent Trees 6 Seedlings Fig. 2 Showing dispersal of secdiing trees from three parent trees. no regeneration occurred. The data obiained from this study indicates the dis- tance apart that primary belts of this species should be established in the event oj measures being taken to restore denuded areas of timber in the mallee. Where broadcast seedine i is necessitated by the complete absence of seed trees, the belts should be approximately 8 chains apart and placed to suit the topography and sou conditions of the region concerned, B 199 A plan of the area, drawn to seale, is given in fig. 2, and the following information refers to this instance. A study was carried out in November 1938. The average height of the young trees was 13 feet. Regeneration has commenced in 1934, and the number of seed- ling trees was 138. These were distributed as follows: Distance from parent tree Less than 1 chain 1-2 chains 2-3 chains 3-4 chains 16 63 36 23 The area seeded by three parent trees was approximately two acres. The following classification shows the number of young trees within different height classes: Height in feet ~ - I 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 No. of young trees - I 1 I 2 1 7 2 5 7 13 Height in feet - - Tt 12 13 14 #15 #16 17 18 19 20 No. of young trees - 8 15 15 16 13 5 10 3 5 8 SUMMARY Observations on the natural regeneration of Murray Pine (Callitris spp.) in the Yarrara belt of the far north-west of Victoria are recorded. The region is characterised by very irregular rainfall, averaging slightly more than 10 inches per annum, with an annual net evaporation rate of more than 80 inches. The principal characteristics of the seeds are described, and their germina- tion has been investigated. Seeds of three species, C. robusta, C. propingua and C. verrucosa, totalling 5,433 in number, gave an average percentage germination of 23°2%, shrivelled and undersized sceds being included in those tested. There was much variation in percentage germination from tree to tree; the highest value obtained for any series was 58°7%. It has been shown that the general absence of natural regeneration by Callitris is not due to seed sterility, but to unsuitable conditions of the surface soil, usually in the form of a hard crust, and in addition, to the depredations of both rabbits and livestock. it would appear that so long as the seedlings survive the summer following their appearance, they are able to resist extreme conditions of drought and may be considered as well established, provided they are protected from the grazing influences of rabbits and stock. The primary root of the pine seedling penetrates rapidly and is capable of attaining a depth of 32 inches with very little lateral formation after a period of 120 days from germination. Where broadcast seeding is necessitated by a complete absence of seed trees, belts approximately 8 chains apart should enable intervening strips to regenerate from the natural flight of the seeds. Belts should be placed to suit topography and soil conditions and require to be protected from both livestock and rabbits. PALAEOZOIC IGNEOUS ROCKS OF LOWER SOUTH-EASTERN SOUTH AUSTRALIA By D. MAWSON and W. B. DALLWITZ Summary The contribution to the knowledge of the igneous rocks of the South-Eastern District of South Australia deals with outcrops located in the region between the upper Coorong to Kingston on the south side and Keith to Bordertown on the north; excepted only are the adameilite and gianodiotite occurrences already described in an earlier contribution. The latter have been included in our map, fig. 1, in order to make complete the record for that area. 191 PALAEOZOIC IGNEOUS ROCKS OF LOWER SOUTH-EASTERN SOUTH AUSTRALIA By D. Mawson and W. B. DALewitz {Read 10 August 1944] PLATES X AND XI This contribution to the knowledge of the igneous rocks of the South-Eastern District of South Australia deals with outcrops located in the region between the upper Coorong to Kingston on the south side and Keith to Bordertown on the north; excepted only are the adamellite and granodiorite occurrences already described in an earlier contribution. The latter have been included in our map, fig. 1, in order to make complete the record for that area. ADAMELLITES AND GRANODIORITES The outstanding example of this suite is that opened up in the Highways Department’s Taratap Quarry. For a petrological description of this grano- diorite see Mawson and Parkin (5). There are several minor occurrences within a mile or so of the quarry in the serub country to the north-east of the adjacent salt swamp. One tiny outcrop is on the fence line of the Prince’s Highway half-a-mile south-east of the quarry. We could not tind evidence of the existence of the patch shown on Dr, Wade’s map (7) as located about 5 miles south-east of the Taratap Quarry. One patch is on the sea beach somewhat less than 14 miles to the west-north-west of the quarry. A number of small outcrops are located in the line of the Reedy Creck swamp water course, appearing at intervals between 13 and 17 miles to the north of the quarry, as indicated on the accompanying map (see also pl. X, fig. 1). QUARTZ-KERATOPHYRES Rocks of this nature appear to underlie the Tertiary to Recent sediments over a considerable area, but outcrops are few and scattered. The outcrops recorded extend in a roughly north and south direction, appearing at intervals from the Papineau Rocks (21 miles east-north-east of Kingston) to Didicoolum, a distance of over 25 miles. In one area rocks ot this group have suffered a con- siderable degree of metamorphism under severe shearing stress reducing them to the form recognised as porphyroid, The rocks to be described in this group have a chemical composition which determines them as rhyolites, but are overwhelmingly sodic. They contain very little potash and are abnormally low im mafic constituents. Though they contain some porphyritic albitic feldspar, the base is felsitie. ‘Thus they are palaeotypal, leucocratic, soda-rhyolites. In some outcrops minute lath-shaped albites appear in flow alignment reminiscent of trachytic structure, and this first suggested the term keratophyre as relevant. An analysis of the freshest material from the main outcrop showed their high silica content, which refers them to the quartz-kerato- phyres of some petrologists, the term which we have adopted for descriptive pur- poses herein, Tue Partneau Rocks Locarity A notable outcrop of dark felsitic quartz-keratophyre occurs on Section 173 of the Hundred of Minecrow (see pl. X. fig. 2). This outcrop is known as the Prats. Kay. Soe. SA. 68, 12), 30 November 1944 102 Papmeau Rocks (see map below). The exposed area which we examined is about 250 yards long and 100 yards across. It extends in an almost true north and south direction. It emerges from the Pleistocene and Recent sands of the Ardune Range on the northern edge of a swamp flat which was dry at the time of our visit. The floor of the drv lake which is part of a swamp channel between the East Avenue Range") and the Ardune Range is elevated only about 100 feet above sea level. The summit of the outcrep of igneous rock rises 140 feet above the lake floor. In the map accompanying Dr. Wade's report (7) two distinct outerops of igneous rock, both hatched to represent feldspar-porphyry and situated within one mile of each other are indicated as existing in this locality. Not being aware at that time that a second outerop had been indicated, we, in our brief look around from the high ground in that vicinity, missed sccing any second outerop that may he there, That some other outerop does exist within « few miles of this locality is 2 srry eee Se ade PS 7 % : , cre “ Me se H %, 1 in best By ¢ owes gto or ere +7 5ETe. ~ 7 mse Y ol 5 : a eed i Grsent caury ar deoteenamire + cay as + Maanse ot rr v gf x 2 Brneinenent wt On “ coNEWe ov A tee crth om re faamcoucary, Pay Migs x pares 2 . vs sean Ae a eee i , . : x av ot + Z s : 6 ° ‘ iar onesie 4 oe aa SEAL aMunnar o Hes rs nN, y : ee oO Ss “ i 8. 4 x ¥ a . + x 4 2 nea Se RADTRAWAY re v ¥ ¥ ¥ Sy ¥ ‘ ° a 4 % ¥ S % ¥ BLACKFORD AC indicated by the fact that we have found in the rock collection of the late Walter Howehbin a specimen [4473], labelled “Kingston District,” of a erey porphyry closely related but distinct from any that we have met with, The northern end of the outcrop is least affected by secondary changes: from there, material catalogued as rock [5779] was collected for petrological examination. This is a dark, faintly greenish-tinged grey rock with sparse crystals ot feldspar, discernible in the hand specimen, embedded in a felsitic groundmass. A microscopic examination discloses that the porphyritic crystals make up only about 7 per cent. of the whole rock. They consist entirely of plagioclase which is very close in composition to pure albite. It is only very little clouded. ©) The popular use of the term “Range” Region of South Australia refer for a considerable distance in the geography of the South-Eastern 8 to topographical features which are low ut persistent across the otherwise flat featureless country. They are no more than ancient, Pleistocene to Recent. vegetated and fixed sand dunes. 193 The average length of the individuals is about 1 mm., but some up to 3 mm. are present. Glomeroporphyritic aggregates of plagioclase are common. One such group observed consists largely of feldspar arranged in an intersertal pattern, with calcite, leucoxene, epidote, chlorite and iron ore occupying the interstices. Complex twinning is a feature of the feldspars in combinations of all four types; Carlsbad, Manebach, Baveno and albite are sometimes encountered. No definite potash feldspar could be found. The groundmass, while it is completely crystalline, is very fine-grained, the average grain-size being about 0°06 mm. There can be recognised quartz, faintly clouded feldspar, epidote, medium-green chlorite, leucoxene, black iron ore (often bordered by leucoxene), calcite and occasional needles of apatite. The latter have been observed within the albite phenocrysts. Although there is abundant epidote, coloured light brown and yellowish- brown, both in the groundmass and in the phenocrysts, the feldspar is not visibly “sy cove Bagger NS county pabeiibiri y yes \ eRe, i Wtewouna net ' ‘ : i { j S78 f moncan perme | gg? { pet WOCRS ei : 2 Tom's CARN gee { Pome raitic / | eres Monga re if ye vn peasantry ’ i Lf BaeOO SE Riantannrees 3 & 4 gf a ‘ 7 : altered. Thus it is suggested that this mineral, together with the chlorite, Jeu- coxene and a small quantity of calcite, is a product of recrvstallisation (perhaps late-magmatic ) wherein plagioclase and a ferromagnesian mineral were made over to the minerals named and a more acid plagioclase (albite). Probably nearly all the lime shown in the analysis is present in the epidote. The specific eravity of this quartz-keratophyre is 2°680, and a chemical analysis is given in the table on page 194, where there also appears the chemical composition of another quartz- keratophyre from the South-East of South Australia (see p. 19). The molecular proportions of potash and soda are: 7°3 of K,O and 88-7 of Na.O. For comparison are included published analyses of a “soda-rhyolite” from Canada, “soda-rhyolite’ from Wales, “quartz-keratophyre”’ from Greece and an “alsbachite” from Switzerland, all of which are very similar in composition to that now being described. For further comparison, there is also included in the table, analyses of a soda-rich aplitic differentiate from the granite of Port Elliot, South Australia, and an analysis (second grade) of an example of the “porphyroid” of Western Tasmania. 194 The norm of our rock is as follows: Quartz - - 38-46 Magnetite = - - 1-86 Orthoclase = - - 4:06 Ilmenite - - O61 Albite - - - 46°63 Apatite - ~ Q-19 Anorthite - - 5:14 Fluorite - - O11 Corundum = - - 0°30 Calcite - - - 0:10 MgsiO, (en) - 0:98 Water - - - 0°65 FeSiO, (hy) - - 0-92 ——— 100-01 From this norm the C.I.P.W., classification is I, 3, 2, 4, (Alsbachose )}. I Ii III lV Vv Vi Vil VIL Si0,, - - 76°40 75°22 77:44 79-64 78-48 75-61 75-73 76°02 Al,O, - (P94 12:29. 1055 11-44 «10°26 12°62, 12-70 s«14-60 Fe,O, - 1°28 1-25 2°24 0-11 1-81 1-10) 2-25 jO-2r FeO - - 1:33 1:73, 034.030 0-25-10) > 40-08 MnO - 0:09 trace 0-08 — — a — MgO - 0°39 0°28 0-09 0-15 0-53 0-98 0:60 0-04 CaO - - 1°30 1-38 0-99 0-71 1:07 2:18 2-00 Q-34 Na,O - 5§:-50 613 6°23 6°40 5-39 5-10 3-48 7-08 K,O - - 0-69 0-48 0-7] 0°38 0°37 0-68 2°04 0°96 H,O+ - 0:57 0-75 0-58 0-30 0-96 0-38) 1-29 (2) 0-34 H,O- - 0-08 0-09 0°33 0:16 0°03 0-04] to. 15 TiO, - 0°32 0°30 0-20 0-50 0°52 0°35 — 0-07 P,O, - 0-08 0-03 O17 0:08 trace 0-32 — _ EF a - OOS _ - =n eA CO, - - 0°05 — — 0-02 0-08 — aoe 100-07 Less O far F 0-02 —~ — see oe — — Total - 100-05 99-93 99-91 100-27 100-02 100-36 100700 = 99-95 I Quartz-keratophyre [5779] of Papincau Rocks, South Australia. Analyst, W. B. Dallwitz. HT Quuartz-keratophyre [443] of Marcollat. South Australia. Analyst, Smith, Department of Geology, University of Adelaide, E.R. Til “Seda-Rhyolite” ef Copper Island, Behring Sea. Analyst, W. Zygmun- tonska. See ref (9), p. 76. IV “‘Soda-Rhyolite” of Skomer Island. Wales. Analyst, E, G. Radley. ref. (9), p. 76. Vo “Quartz-keratophyre™ of Epidauros, Greece. Analyst, A. Jindner, ref (9), p. 76. VI “Alshachite” of Rusemschlucht, Switzerland, Analyst, 1. Hezner. ref (9), p. 98. VII “Porphyroid” of the West Coast, Tasmania. Analyst, W. Fo Ward. ref. (6), Vii “Soda- -aplite” of Port Elliot. Analyst, W. R. Browne, _ See ref (2). @y Determined by E. R. ‘Seenit. ©) Loss at red heat. See 195 Autometamorphosed Quarts-kcratophyre Two specimens [5780 and 5781] were collected from the southern end of the outcrop, where the rock has lost its even grey colour and is mottled greenish-grey and pink on a rather coarse scale. Here the phenocrysts of feldspar are flesh- coloured, These effects are ascribed to late-magmatic changes. Both of these rocks are essentially similar to [5779] and differ from each other only in degree of autometamorphic change. Thus in [5781], which is an example of the more greatly changed type, the pink feldspars embedded in the dark-coloured parts of the rock stand out more distinctly. In rock [5780] the groundmass consists largely of equidimensional wn- oriented albite grains (average size, 0°05 mim.), and differs from that of [5779] in containing very little quartz, Other important minerals prescni are green chlorite, calcite and epidote, and some larger pseudomorphous masses of brown leucoxene ; a few grains of partially replaced black iron ore remain. The chlorite, calcite and epidote are very tnevenly distributed: this feature and the different secondary reactions going with it appear to account for the mottling evident in the hand-specimen. The epidote is mostly brownish-grey, but some of it has a strong yellowish tinge and a spherulitic arrangement. A more or less spongy develop- ment is characteristic of the calcite, chlorite, and epidote. This is most notice- able in the carbonate mineral, in which areas 4 mm. or more in length, consisting of many grains, extinguish simultaneously. This calcite is very abundant in some parts of the slide, while it is completely absent in others: a fact which again emphasises the patchy nature of the changes in the rock. Varying amounts of chlorite are always found with the calcite. Very small needles of apatite are present, but are extremely rare. Feldspar phenocrysts are more abundant than in [5779]. Synneusis texture is rather common. The feldspar is again very close to pure albite, and some of it contains occasional flecks of orthoclase: here, and in the groundmass as well, it is slightly clouded. Complex combinations of twins, e.g., Carlsbad, Manebach and albite are not uncommon. One grain was observed to be divided into four sections by a combination of Carlsbad and Baveno twinning. The microscopic examination of [5871] reveals that calcite is very abundant making up 30% or more of the whole, and has often crystallised into grains up to 1 mm. across. Associated therewith are numerous small grains of newly- formed, water-clear albite, which is a by-product of the breakdown of the original feldspar in those areas. Epidote is scaree. Euhedral porphyritic feldspars are considerably more abundant than in [5780]. They are quite densely clouded, while the original groundmass feldspar is rather less altered. In some cases. clear, secondary albite, identical with that found with the calcite, borders the phenoerysts which show simple twinning much more often than multiple. Com- plex twinned crystals are not common, Another specimen [4431], collected by N. B. Tindale, is almost identical with our rock [5780]. However, calcite is absent in the microscope slide and there appears one large grain of purple fluorite in the hand specimen. Bin Bin H. ¥. L. Brown (1, p. 268) makes reference to what must be another occurrence of keratophyre. His statement is as follows: “Bin Bin Islands, four miles north-east of a deserted station, where an outcrop of felsite and feldspar porphyry is backed on the west side hy blue metamorphic quartzite. .... - As the place name Bin Bin does not appear on the county map, reference was made to Brown’s original sketch plan accompanying his field notes, still pre- 196 served at the Mines Department. The approximate location of Brown's “Bin Bin Islands,” taken from the above source, is indicated in the map illustrating this present contribution, On the recently published military map of the area the name Bin Bin appears situated some four miles to the west of Brown’s location, and evidently has reference to a spot associated with pastoral occupation. It is probable that Brown’s “blue metamorphic quartzite” is a fine-grained inty keratophyre, for he uses the same descriptive term for the keratophyre at his Gip Gip occurrence (wide postea). Apparently the quartz-keratophyre of this occurrence occupies one or more low rises in the flat swampy country about six miles north-west by north of the Papineau Rocks. MARCOLLAT A further occurrence of quartz-keratophyre was found at a point about seven miles from Old Marcollat Station buildings in a direction somewhat west of north. This appears to be the outcrop visited by H. Y. L. Brown and mentioned as “Gip Gip” in his record. The locality appearing as “Jip Jip” on the Survey Plans of the Lands Department is, however, some four miles to the north-west of Brown’s Gip Gip. Brown describes the rock as “bluish metamorphic quartzite, with dis- seminated iron pyrites.” Here we found the outcrop very small indeed, nearly circular and about 100 yards across. It rises as a low island mass to a height of about 30 feet above the level of the bed of a dry swamp flat. There is a cut of a few feet in depth blasted in its summit where miners, in the year 1896, gouged in search of gold. In the neighbourhood of this old working, the keratophyre is shattered and recemented as a coarse breecia [5890] in which mineralizing solutions have cir- culated, introducing frequent specks and grains of pyrrhotite up to 3 mm. in diameter, An assay made for us by T. W, Dalwood, of the Mines Department. showed gold to be absent. Very fresh rock is obtainable from the dump heap resulting from the mining operations, From this coarse breccia we culled for laboratory examination a fragment [4432] measuring about 9 inches in diameter which has the appearance of being original rock unaltered by subsequent mineralizing solutions. This rock [4432] was found to be a diopside-bearing quartz-keratophyre. [t is outwardly very similar to the keratophyre [5779] already described, which occurs 17 miles away to the south-south-west. Ags observed in the hand-specimen i differs mainly in being of a lighter grey colour and by being traversed by schlieren composed of mottled, turbid feldspar and a dark chloritized ferro- magnesian mineral, Pyrrhotite has been introduced along some of these schlieren, evidently lines of strain which permitted the invasion of secondary gases and solutions. Microscopically examined, this rock is found to be somewhat different from that [5779] of the more southerly occurrence already described. In it the por- phyritic crystals are almost twice as abundant as in the latter, These porphyritic individuals consist of idiomorphie feldspar, and to a considerably less extent of hulf-coloured diopside (Z,\e ==39° --:2V medium). Synneusis texture is common inthe feldspar, which consists largely of almost pure albite in which Carlsbad twinning is more abundantly represented than the lamellar type commonly asso- ciated with albite. A puzzling feature ix the presence within the feldspar indi- viduals of an optically positive and lower D.R. form: either merely albite of different orientation than the host or patches of an unidentified feldspar. The feldspar is slightly clouded and often contains a few flakes of greenish-White chlorite and a little diopside. 197 No quartz could be detected in the groundmass which consists of elongated plagioclase microlites up to 0-17 mm. long, showing some tendency to parallel arrangement. Abundant specks of leucoxene and chlorite are also present. Of the accessory minerals, the most important is greenish-white chlorite derived from the diopside; then follows dark brown leucoxene showing aggregate polarization and a suggestion of octahedral shape which probably indicates pseudo- morphism after titaniferous magnetite, some of which remains and is usually bordered by leucoxene; rarely minute needles of apatite are also present. For a chemical analysis of the material of this selected specimen we are indebted to E. R. Smith, B.Sc. This appears in the table on page 194. The norm is as follows: Quartz - - - 32°76 Hy. - - - 1°58 Orthoclase — - - 2-67 Imenite - - O61 Albite - - - 54-49 Magnetite — - - 1°86 Anorthite — - - 3:34 Apatite ; - 0:08 Wo. - - - 1-39 Water - - - 0°84 En. 2 $ - 0-70 —_—— Total - - 100-32 CLPWw.: J, 4, 2, 5 (Mariposose ). SCHISTOSE QUARTZ-KERATOPMYRES OF DIpICcooLuM Keratophyres related to the foregoing, but dynamically metamorphosed, occur in a third locality, namely in the vicinity of the abandoned hutments of the one- time sheep station of Didicoolum located some 25 miles north-north-west of the apineau Rocks of Section 173, Hundred of Minecrow, In Wade’s report (7) the neighbourhood of Didicoolum is hatched as a patch of “Quartzite and mica schist.” H. Y. L. Brown, in 1896, after a visit to inspect mining prospects in that locality, recorded (1) that there is there “An outcrop of rocks containing quartz veins and pyrites; strike N. and S.; dip, vertical.” At Didicoolum we found schistose rocks occupying a considerable area, but these are for the most part buried beneath Pleistocene to Recent sand ridges. All four specimens of bed rock which we colleoted in this area evidence a very con- siderable degree of metamorphism under shearing stresses. All have reached the biotite stage, but slight retrograde metamorphism has caused the development of chlorite in three of them. Schistose Quartg-keratophyres [5873], [5874], and [5875] are metamor- phosed representatives of the qtiartz-keratophyres already described. The first two are grey, owing respectively to finely disseminated chlorite and biotite. The third is a mottled dark grey and buff rock, which owes its appearance to the concentration of biotite into large lenses. All have developed in them a rude cleavage, due to the roughly parallel orientation of the micaccous minerals. A few unbroken, clouded, porphyritic crystals of plagioclase remain in all three. Their compositions could not be determined accurately, but measurements of maximum extinction-angles in the symmetrical zone consistently indicated albite: these angles varied from 12? in [5874] to 16°5° in [5875]. The sign throughout is positive and R.I, close to that of balsam. ‘The groundmagss in each consists of finely crushed feldspar, quartz and pale biotite (bleached and altered to chlorite in [5873] ), together with variable but small amounts of brown and. yellow-brown granular or radiating epidote (c.f., epidote in rock [5879] ) often in aggregates and streaks, and a little zircon. In addition [5875| and [5874] con- tain sericite, [5873] and [5874] black iron ore, and [5875] an occasional grain of 198 apatite. The biotite is completely unaltered in [5874], but a little chlorite has de- veloped in [5875]; in the latter colourless epidote also occurs in the residual plagioclase phenocrysts, around which biotite-rich bands usually wind. The quartz in all three rocks is partly scattered and partly segregated into irregular pockets, some of which are roughly lenticular. The fourth rock specimen collected [194], a biotite-plagioclase-orthoschist, represents a more basic rock, in all probability a quartz-diorite which has been subjected to the same process as the three rocks just described. The minerals present are abundant plagioclase and finely-divided biotite, epidote, quartz, black iron ore and apatite. Only very few (somewhat saussuritized) plagioclase pheno- crysts remain; they are optically positive and all R.I.’s are conspicuously greater than that of balsam, so that their anorthite-content is at least 38%, and, judging by the curvature of the isogyre in an optic axis figure, probably considerably more. Crushed augen of plagioclase and quartz are conspicuous. Chlorite is present in sinall quantity, while epidote is rather plentiful and sometimes occurs in fair-sized pockets. False cleavage has been developed as an effect of shear. PERIOD OF VULCANISM In the region under review, owing to paucity and isolation of the outcrops of pre-Tertiary rocks which emerge through the ubiquitous veneer of Miocene to Recent sediments, no field evidence is available clearly linking these quartz-kerato- phyres with either of the local granitic suites, namely the adamellite-granodiorite magma situated to the south or the soda-potash granites which occupy a large area to the north. However, since highly albitic differentiates are associated with the former suite at Encounter Bay (2) and Cape Willoughby (Kangaroo Island), it is more than likely that these highly sodic quartz-keratophyres of the South-East are also linked with the adamellite-granodiorite magma illustrated locally at the Taratap Quarry. The age of the keratophyres is thus likely to be that of the granodiorites which has been indicated (5) as probably Middle-Cambrian, It is interesting to note that in the Heathcote district of Victoria there are pre-Ordovician soda-rich volcanic rocks interbedded with Dinesus bearing beds regarded (3) as of Middle-Cambrian age. The Porphyroid Series of Western Tasmania is mainly of the nature of a quartz-keratophyre which has undergone varying degrees of metamorphism under shearing stresses. These felsitic rocks extend in a long line with axial direction parallel to that of the West Coast Range. Specimens forwarded by W. T. Twelve- trees (6) were examined and reported upon by Professor MH, Roscenbush in the year 1898. He classed them as porphyroids or flaser-porphyries. In his descrip- tion, epidotization and calcitization are recorded, and peculiar nests of albite are specially remarked upon. Rosenbush further states that in one specimen “nothing is left of the original groundmass; it has been converted to scricite, quartz and albite . . . . the chlorite indicated original pyroxene rather than biotite?’ An analysis by F. W. Ward (the Government Analyst of Tasmania of that time), which appears in Twelvetrees’ paper, is included herewith in the table on page 194. A glance at microscopic preparations of some of the Tasmanian porphyroids further convinced us of their essential similarity with our South Australian examples. L. K. Ward (8) states that after the eruptive period which produced the porphyroids, marked by both extrusive and intrusive phases, there was an absence of igneous activity in Tasmania until the close of the Silurian or perhaps some portion of the Devonian. He also states that a period of marked crustal move- ment appears to have followed closely upon that of the porphyroid eruption. 199 Fortunately, there is some direct palaeontological evidence as to the age of the Porphyroid Series of Tasmania, for it is associated with the Dundas slates which contain the fossil Hurdia, which appears (8) to indicate a Middle to Upper- Cambrian age. Thus there is good reason to regard the quartz-keratophyres and porphyroids of South-Eastern South Australia as equivalents of the Porphyroid Series of ‘Tasmania, and probably of Middle Cambrian age. The shearing stresses which reduced the quartz-keratophyre to the state of porphyroid were doubtless asso- ciated with great crustal upheaval which affected South Australia in Middle- Cambrian time. POTASH-SODA GRANITES Rather frequent outcrops of an even-grained, pinkish-coloured granite are distributed throughout an area of some 100 square miles in the Kongal Rocks- Yallamurray region. Also a white granite of somewhat different character appears alongside the Duke’s Highway some nine miles east of Keith. All these outcrops. with the exception of that at Kongal Rocks, are inconspicuous. They are located in a region elevated little above sea-level and of only very minor topographic relief. This area of scattered granite outcrops is clothed with a stunted forest growth and only rarely are there patches of beiter grown trees. Such vegetation is, how- ever, in marked contrast with the low scrubby growth on so much of the neigh- bouring country situated to the west and south-west. These pink granites are found to be so similar petro'ogically to those already described (5) outcropping to the south of Coonalpyn, that there appears to be no doubt as to their consanguinity, Thus, the outcrops in this area are regarded as part of a large batholith which includes also the granites of Murray Bridge and Coonalpyn. Section 123, HunpRED oF WIRREGA An unusually fresh and typical example of this group of rocks occurs as # low whaleback outcropping about 200 yards to the south of the road. This locality is about two miles west of Carew Well. The rock, which is exposed over a length of about 25 yards, is intersected by two fine-grained aplite [5803] veins of normal type, the major one being six inches in width. There was also observed traversing the outcrop a local irregular schliere composed of the normal flesh- coloured feldspar [5799], which is as coarse or coarser grained than that of the parent granite; it contains very little biotite and no quartz. In the hand specimen this granite [5785] is seen to be of coarse but fairly even grain. The obvious mineral constituents are a pinkish-buff coloured potash- feldspar, faintly smoky quartz, yellowish-white plagioclase and lustreless biotite. These minerals are not quite evenly distributed, the feldspars tending to be grouped in aggregates poor in quartz. Occasionally plagioclase forms a shell around the potash-feldspar. The texture is typically granitic and roughly seriate, for the grains of potash- feldspar are generally coarser than those of plagioclase, and the latter still coarser than those of quartz. The grains of quartz occupy areas as large as the potash- feldspar crystals, but these areas consist of composite grains. However, the above relationships of size do not always hold, since very large grains of plagioclase and quartz are not uncommon. The “potash-feldspar” is found to be a composite one, varying between perthite and antiperthite, according as the plagioclase is less or more abundant. It is usually anhedral and its average grainsize is about 0-5 cm., though some grains approach lcm. The plagioclase constituent is in long, wavy, branching and 200 confluent wisps, often twinned, and always in optical continuity throughout any bne composite grain. A rim of clear plagioclase partially borders some of these grains, and this material may be in optical continuity with that in the interior of the grain; furthermore, the included soda-lime feldspar is occasionally in optical continuity with an adjoining plagioclase crystal. Usually both the orthoclase and plagioclase in the composite grains are clouded, but the latter very much less so than the former; indeed, the plagioclase is not infrequently quite clear. In contradistinction to the “‘potash-feldspar,” the plagioclase occurs in sub- hedral to euhedral grains, some of which are quite markedly zoned: the inner parts of these are usually clouded through mild saussuritization, while the outer parts are almost or quite clear, The theoretical composition (Ab,,An,), as deduced from the analysis, is almost exactly the same as that determined by means of symmetri- cal extinction-angles (Ab,.An.); this is not surprising in view of the simple mineralogical composition of the rock. In a few cases grains of the albite are included in the “potash-feldspar.” There 1s nothing unusual about the quartz. It contains gas-liquid inclusions. The boundaries of the grains are usually quite irregular. Biotite, which is pleochroic from deep brownish-green to golden-yellow, probably makes up no more than about 3 to 4% of the whole. Its lustreless appearance may be due to partial change. One book shows very pronounced sieve- structure, the included minerals being quartz and fluorite. Leucoxene has separated from the mica, while feldspar in its vicinity is slightly stained with iran oxide. Black iron ore, Huorite, sericite, chlorite, allanite, and more rarely calcite and aircon are the accessories. Nearly all of the fluorite, some of which has a purple tinge, is embedded in biotite. while very small quantities of chlorite and sericite are included im the plagioclase, the latter as a component of incipient saussuritic alteration, One small crystal of altered allanite of a golden-yellow colour was found in biotite. The approximate nineral percentages in this rock are best gauged from the norm, Actually the composite feldspar preponderates over the albite crystals to the extent of about four or five to one. but the great abundance of albite in the former accounts for the normative percentages of plagioclase and orthoclase. On uccount of its paucity in Hime this rock is a potash-soda-granite rather than an adamelite, ! a Bel I If {il SiO, = - 781 76-74 73-77 ria ei Stee a gal MLO, - 12°38 12-00 13-06 Fiat 9 4 Sad CRORE heO, = 028 113 O72 See 9. ee OF ear Pe) - = 0-78 0-43 1-43 C4 aes ~ 0-03 0-06 0-16 Mn) - OO1 trace 0:05 E : - O10 O20 0-04 MeQ - 009 0:03 0-12 Cl - - — ~~ traee CaO + - 0-33 O49 0-89 S©)., - - -— ao nil Na,O - 379 4:23 355 S . = as ~- 0:02 KO - = $70 419 5-44 3. 3 . FEOF - O34 0-47 0:57 100-11 100-31 100-27 11 ,0O- - 14 O18 O11 Less QO tor F 0-04 0-08 0-02 hO, - O11 O10 O18 . - ~ — PLO. - 002 O04 0-08 Total - 100-07 100-23 100-25 8 nr re ee | ve Spee. Gray. 2°603 2-584 2-613 201 I Potash-soda granite [5785] from Section 123, Hundred of Wirrega, South Australia. Analyst. W. B. Dallwitz, Department of Geology, University of Adelaide. II Potash-soda Micro-granite [5885} from Hundred of Willalooka, South Australia. Analyst, E. R. Segnit, Department of Geology, University of Adelaide. lil Potash-soda Aporhyolite [4426] from Mount Monster, near Keith, South Australia. Analyst, W. B. Dallwitz. ‘The chemical composition of this granite as determined by one of us (Dall- witz} is given in the table on page 200. The molecular proportions of potash and soda are 50-0 of KO. Gl-l of Na.Q. “Phe norm is as Tollows: Chuarta ~ - ~ 25°53 Magnetite -- - O45 (rthoclase — - - 27°80 ilmenite + - O15 Allite - - ~ 31°96 Apatite - - - 0:06 Anorthite - - 1-50 Fluorite x - O19 Corundum — - - 0°60 Calcite - - - 0:09 MgSiO, (en. ) - 0°20 Water - - - O48 FesiO, hv.) - 1:06 a Total - - 100-07 CULPAW. Classification: 1.4 (3). 1,3 ( Liparose-Alaskose }. KonGanr Rocks About three miles-south of the granite outerop just described is a much more extensive development of a very similar granite. “Uhis locality is known as Kongai Rocks. The outcrop measures about 500 yards by 250 yards and rises above an already elevated region, indicating a considerable extension of the granite below the surrounding area. The specimen [4409| of Kongal granite is of a type closely similar both to 15785] and to [4410]. In granularity it is perhaps nearer to the latter, but the ‘eldspars perhaps more closely correspond with those of the former. Some grains of light-coloured plagioclase are distinguishable in the hand-specimen, but the bulk of the feldspar is perthite. A distinctive feature is the blackness of the smoky auartz—more so than in the case of any other of these potash-soda graniies. The ferromagnesian mineral is preponderantly biotite, though odd grains of aniphiboie are macroscopically visible. Grains of colourless Aluorspar are visible in) the microscope slide. Occasional narrow veins of an even-grained aplitic microgranite traverse the granite of Kongal Rocks. “These approach true aplites in character but contain rather more ferromagnesian mineral (biotite) than is admissable for such. Rocks j4434] and [4435] are examples of these veinstuffs; both are of similar nmiineral constitution but the former is coarser grained than the latter. They are con- stituted of quartz, orthoclase, a little microperthite and some highly albitic plagio- clase and a very little biotite; the latter is pleochroic from yellow to bronzy-brown, with remarkably strong absorption. No fluorspar was noted in these vein rocks. Section 297, HuNpRED OF WIRREGA Here granite is exposed on a sloping hillside to the east of the road. ft occupies an area about 400 yards by 150 yards. This is a hornblende-biotite- potash-soda granite, related to [5785 and 4409], but is also very similar to [4410 and 5894]. 202 In the hand-specimen available [4413] there is a marked deficiency in ferro- magnesian constituents, Some grains of hornblende are showing, but no biotite. GRANITE NorTH-EAst or Desrerr Camp On rising ground to the east of the road, about one mile north-east of Desert Camp, patches of granite are exposed. Other small outerops were met with within the next half-mile further to the north, confirming our view that a considerable area of granite probably underlies the clevated block country to the east of this locality. A representative specimen [4410] of the rock outcrop at one mile north-east of Desert Camp proves to be a hornblendic potash-soda-granite. It bears a general resemblance in the hand-specimen to the foregoing [5785]; it has, however, suffered somewhat from weathering, resulting in fairly general limonitic staining and the assumption by the feldspar of a pale buff colour, Under the microscope it is observed that though this rock is broadly the same as [5785], there is an important distinction in that amphibole and pyroxene are the dominant ferromagnesian minerals. These comprise both hornblende, with X = greenish-brown, Y = very dark greenish-brown, and Z almost opaque, and subordinate aegirine-augite in which ZAc—= 58° or more. Both these minerals are extensively, and in some cases almost completely, replaced by haematite. No separate, subhedral grains of albite were found. The small amount of plagioclase not in perthite and antiperthite is interstitial between grains of those feldspars ; as clear albite and chequer-albite, it forms pockets and narrow, border- ing shells. In the intergrown feldspars, which occasionally show Baveno twinning, the plagioclase is clear and the orthoclase clouded. Biotite is rare ; it occurs marginal to black iron ore and associated with haema- tite. Other minerals present are allanite, zircon and a little chlorite, The allanite is fresh, slightly pleochroic and zoned, the core being a deep rich brown and the border golden-brown. No fluorite was observed in the single section available. HORNBLENDIC GRANITES OF THE YALLAMURRAY — New MARcOLLAT AREA The track from New Marcollat [Head Station to Old Marcollat Head Station. at one-and-a-half miles south-west of the former, passes on the east side of a granite [5826] outcrop. This rises 20 feet above the plain, is 400 yards long by 155 yards across, and is directed in a SIO°W (true) direction, Beyond this point, after crossing to the east side of the track and walking in a general southerly direction for about one mile, a further outcrop [4411, 4412 and 5894] several hundred yards in length is met with; continuing south and somewhat to the east for a further mile, brings one to still another granite outcrop, It is probable that there are others again beyond that. One such outcrop which we did not visit is indicated on the Survey Department’s map of the Hundred of Marcollat, as exist- ing within three miles of the Yallamurray homestead in a south-west direction. All of these are petrologically very similar types and closely resemble [441 O} described above, though perhaps somewhat coarser grained. They ace hornblendic potash- soda-granites. .\egirine augite has not been observed in them, but fluorite is present. Occasional subhedral grains of albite are present. Allanite, if present, is very rare. Needles of apatite are not uncommon in specimen [4411]. SEcTION 11, Hunprep or StiritnG The most northerly locality where granite was met with in the area now under consideration is on the north side of the road nine miles south of Keith, The out- crop visited is meagre, and the rock was found to be considerably weathered. [ft 203 is possible that a further examination of this area may reveal a more extended outcrop than that examined by us. This granite [4414] is in appearance distinct from others discussed in this paper. It is a light grey allotriomorphic granite of a medium-coarse but even granularity. The feldspars are white to faintly flesh-coloured. The quartz is without the strong smoky character common in most of the granites extending from Murray Bridge to the South-East. The microscope slide reveals that the strongly microperthitic character of the larger feldspars so common in the other granites is wanting. Here the soda feldspar is mainly present as medium to acid oligaclase in small to meditim-sized crystals, some of which are continued in an outer zone of orthoclase. To a limited degree only, does plagioclase embedded in the orthoclase appear to have arisen by exsolution from original homogeneous feldspars. The ferromagnesian mineral is biotite, which for the most part has been much affected by chloritization. The original mineral is strongly pleochroie from light yellow to a deep greenish-brown, Zircon is common as small grains and rods in the biotite. There are present occasional well-defined rods of apatite. Though varying from the foregoing granites in some respects, there are not sufficient grounds for regarding this occurrence as other than of the same period of crustal injection. POTASH-SODA MICROGRANITES Apart from very minor aplitic micro-granite veins traversing some of the granite outcrops described under the previous section, there are some notable occurrences of microgranite in the region under consideration. Rocks of this nature were met with in several places located to the west of the potash-soda granite area, more particularly centred around Uncle Tom’s Cabin. They are in a widespread region of very low scrubby vegetation, most of which ig not more than several feet in height. However, in the immediate neighbour- hood of outcrops of these igneous rocks, or where the latter are located at shallow depth below the sand and limestone formations of Tertiary to Recent age, there are patches of eucalypts reaching the dimensions of a stunted forest growth. Hunprep o¢ WILLALOOKA A large mass (see pl. XI, fig. 1) of porphyritic microgranite forms a low hill located some five or six miles to the west-north-west of Kongal Rocks. It is on the north side of and a quarter of a mile from the track leading from Border- town to Uncle Toni’s Cabin. ‘The surrounding country is quite flat and occupied by low heath-like scrubby vegetation growing to some two to three feet in height, in which stunted banksia is an outstanding element. This granitic outcrop, which is no more than a couple of hundred yards across, is mainly a broad fat rock raised 45 feet above the surrounding plain, but this is surmounted near its southern edge by a knob which reaches to a total height of 90 feet above the plain. The rock is notably red in colour and porphyritic. Macroscopically examined, this porphyritic, granophyric, potash-soda, biotite- microgranite [5885] is medium-grained and consists of pinkish-red feldspar, semi-vitreous to smoky quartz and fine-grained biotite. Occasional feldspar crystals are well over 1 cm. in length. As seen under the microscope, the texture is decidedly porphyritic. Feldspar, quartz, and biotite phenocrysts are embedded in a matrix of fine-grained feldspar and quartz, The ratio of phenocrysts to matrix is about two to one, 204 Most of the feldspar is considerably clouded and has a pale brownish tinge in reflected light, due to finely-disseminated iron oxide. It appears that, among the feldspar phenocrysts, potash-bearing varieties—- errhgataae orthoclase partly inverted to microcline, microcline- -perthite are predominant, while in the groundmass plagioclase is greatly in excess “ad may even exclude the others altogether. In the compound feldspars the plagioclase is in the form of straight- sided tongues whose disposition suggests that the potash-feldspar may have been attacked by late-magmatic soda-rich solutions and partially replaced. The great abundanee of plagioclase in the matrix lends support to this idea. This latter fe'dspar is very often in the form of graphic intergrowths with quartz; thus the groundmass has a granophyric character, The graphic intergrowths frequently form a complete shell around phenocrysts, especially those of quartz. The composition of the ness could not be determined in the slide, but as Indicated by the norm it must be about 100% albite. As no calcite could he found in the section at hand and, of the assumption that none is present, the plagioclase cannot be more basic than Ab,-An,. The quartz, which is sometimes sthhedral, contains abundant gas-liquid inclusions. The feldspar crystals are subhedral to euhedral. An average valuc for the size of the porphyritic minerals is about 2 mm., though many grains arc up to 5 mm. across. Biotite makes wp about 25% of the rock. It nust be a highly ferriferous mica in view of the very low value of MgO in the analysis. The mica is pleochroic from very dark greenish-brown to ye ellow-green with a brownish tinge. In some places haematite has separated from: it asa result of partial deconiposition. Other minerals present are fluorite, black iron ore and a little, altered, golden- yellow allanite. Small grains of the first of these are often an intense purple. while patches of larger grains are also strongly coloured. Oxidation of the iron ore has given rise to rather marked strains in the vicinity of that mineral, A chemical analysis by E. R. Segnit appears in the table on page 200. The molecular proportions of potash and soda are: 68:2 of Na,O and 44:5 of K,O. The norm is as follows: Quartz - - - 35°64 Hlaematite — - - 0°32 QOrthoclase — - - 25:02 Apatite * - 0-10 Albite - - 35°63 Fluorite = - 0°39 Corundum — - - 0-30 Calcite - - 0-10 MegsSiQ,, Cen.) - QO-:10 Water - - - 0°65 Magucetite - - 1:16 Sry Imenite - - O15 Total L - 100-56 C.LP.W, Classification: 1, 4 (3). 1, 3 (4) (Liparose }, Uncre Tom's Canin In the neighbourhood of Unele Tom’s Cabin (also in the Hundred of Willa- looka), an duitstition of the former Didicooluin sheep station, there is a line of gramitic outcrops trending m a direction 65° to the east of south (true). The sur- rounding country is mainly a flat expanse of low heath-like scrub: localities where granite occur, either appearing at the surface or where it lies bencath shallow sandy surtane formations, are marked by the appearance of patches of trees whose exist- ence is made possible, no doubt, by the conservation of ground-water on the irregular surface of the granite. A well aie down through the sandy surface formation at Uncle Tom’s Cabin taps water 15 feet below on the surface of ihe granite. 205 The outcropping granite belt is about 200 yards wide and extends in a broken line for over three-quarters of a mile. In that distance there are four rock masses rising to a maximum height of somewhat more than 50 feet above the surrounding plain. There is a general uniformity in the character of the rock of all the out- crops, though portion [5887] of number three outcrop from the north end is some- what lighter in colour than the others. Also, there are represented transitional types between the more characteristic, porphyritic microgranite type and an almost normal plutonic granite. The rock [5886] from the most north-westerly outcrop is porphyritic, potash- soda, hornblende-biotite, microgranite. Embedded in a fine-grained groundmass there are crystals of flesh-coloured and some yellow-coloured feldspar, smoky and vitreous quartz and some dark ferromagnesian mineral. Certain of the feldspars are roughly tabular and over 1 cm. in length. The ratio of phenocrysts to ground- mass is in the order of between 1:5 and 2 to 1. Although the general structure of this rock is related to that of [5885] there are three notable differences, namely, that here the feldspar phenocrysts are about three times the diameter of the quartzes, whereas in [5885] they are not much larger; also, the groundmass is more or less even-grained and is not noticeably gtanophyric; finally there is here a second generation of feldspars, which is not altogether absent in [5885], though much less easily distinguishable, The average grain-size of the several minerals of this rock is as follows: porphyritic feldspars, 6 mm. x 4 mm., though some exceed 1 cm, in length; porphyritic quartz, 1:5 mm., but many grains up to 3 mm. in diameter: second generation feldspars, about 1 mm. but variable; groundmass (quartz and plagio- clase), 0°2 mm. This rock is even more rich in soda than [5885] because nearly all of the large porphyritic feldspar is anhedral to subhedral antiperthite, whose plagioclase- component appears to have an anorthite content of 5% or less; zoned plagioclase and a little perthite are also among the larger crystals. The soda-lime feldspar, whose composition ranges from acid oligoclase in the cores to albite in the peri- phery, sometimes occurs in glomeroporphyritic groups. Crystal intergrowths and complex twinning are not uncommon in the antiperthite, which, in addition, always shows excellent albite twinning and sometimes pericline. The second generation feldspars are predominantly albite (An, or less) which may be slightly zoned, but antiperthite and perthite are fairly well represented. All of the feld- spars are gencrally very much clouded, but least change has taken place in the second generation plagioclase (which may be almost free from it) and in the outer zones of the large subhedral phenocrysts of that mineral. Evidence in this rock again points to a progressive enrichment of the mother-liquor in soda as crystalliza- tion proceeded, for the second generation feldspars are largely albite, while one large crystal of plagioclase-poor perthite was seen to be bordered by a strongly- developed antiperthitic shell of varying width, It, therefore, appears that the bulk of the antiperthite and perthite was formed from slightly perthitic potash- feldspar by the action of soda-rich liquid. The quartz contains a few gas-liquid inclusions; it is occasionally found in graphic intergrowth with late-crystallizing plagioclase. Biotite and minor amounts of hornblende make up about 6 or 7% of the rock, The mica, which is usually in aggregates, is pleochroic from almost black with a greenish tinge to golden-brown when fresh; when bleaching has taken place, the colour-change seen is from dark greenish-brown to yellow. One grain of hornblende was observed to be pleochroic from deep red-brown to golden- c 200 brown, but this seems to be exceptional, for most grains have X = greenish- brown, Y = Z—very dark greenish-brown. Apart from occurring in fair-sized books, biotite, in very small flecks which sometimes have common orientation, is raiher eveuly distributed in many of the grains of antiperthite; some of these flecks have changed to green chlorite. Of the remaining minerals, fluorite, calcite, black iron ore, zircon and pale yellow-brown, slightly pleochroic altered allanite often accompany biotite. The hornblende is veined and partly or wholly replaced by oxides of iron, probably goethite and some haematite; a few scattered streaks of the latter are found in the hght-coloured minerals also. Sericite and a little calcite have been developed in the plagioclase crystals, especially the early-formed ones. A lighter-coloured rock [5887], in the hand-specimen differing mainly from the foregoing [5886] in that the feldspars are near-white in colour, not reddish. occurs in the third outcrop from the north-west end of the Uncle Tom’s Cabin lucahty. This porphyritic, potash-soda, hornblende-biotite-microgranite [5887] has not been analysed, but it is probably less sodic than rock [5886]. i:vidence for this is that the first generation of feldspars, which are slightly- perthitic crystals of orthoclase, are much less extensively replaced by late- magmatic perthite and antiperthite. However, some of the smaller ones, and even some of the larger ones, have been completely made over, but the changes have been rather patchy. The groundmiass of this rock is somewhat finer-grained and relatively more abundant than is the case of [5886]. As far as could be determined, the plagioclase in the antiperthite is about An,;. Some of the large phenocrysts of plagioclase are bordered by antiperthite, and perthite whose plagioclase-constituent is in optical continuity with that in the phenocrysts. Occasionally marginal plagioclase bears the same relationship to perthite and antiperthite. Other minerals present are quartz, hornblende, biotite, black iron ore, goethite, allanite, fluorite, zircon and a few needles of apatite. Biotite, pleochroic from very dark almost opaque reddish-brown to golden- yellow, is quite subordinate to the hornblende, whereas the reverse holds in [5886]. The hornblende occurs in very irregular grains which tend to be poikilitic towards the granular quartz and feldspar of the groundmass. — Its pleochroism is as follows: X = light greenish-brown, Y = very deep greenish- brown, Z= deep brownish-green; in one large grain of this mineral there is a lighter green core of amphibole. An interesting feature of the amphibole and mica is that they are never bordered by or included in the large feldspar crystals, but always occur in the groundmass. This fact supports the suggestion that a considerable amount of re-hashiug went on during the last stages of consolidation, and it may also account for the very irregular outlines of the grains of horn- blende and biotite. Goethite often borders and seanis the hornblende of which it is an alteration- product, and also occurs in small flecks in the groundmass and phenocrysts. It is very difficult or impossible to distinguish it from biotite in many cases, for their colours are almost identical. It, too, is undoubtedly a late-magniatic product. Allanite has the same mode of occurrence as the ferromagnesians. Its out- lincs are usually quite irregular; generally it is fresh and pleochroic in shades of golden-brown, but marginally it may he altered and show ageregate-polarization. Some of the smaller grains have suffered complete change. The crystals of zircon are up to 0-15 mm. across; they are often embedded in hornblende. wherein they give rise to pleochroic haloes. 207 Another part [5892] of the same outcrop (No. 3) is ol a _warmer-toned eranite than [5887], and not unlike [5886] but less porphyritic in appearance. In it, microperthite is much more conspicuous than is the case in [5887]. Horn- blende, pleochroic from medium yellow to dark green, is a conspicuous con- stituent, but biotite is scarce. Small grains and rods of zircon are common, mainly in association with ferromagnesian minerals. Several distinct grains of fluorspar were also detected. Occasional calcites are to be seen with sharp and clear-cut boundaries aud the appearance of being primary constituents of the rock. Johannsen (4, p. 238) in discussing “calcite granite’ makes reference to several records where calcite occurring in granite has been regarded as a primary snineral. The literature quoted indicates, amongst other things, the impossibility of calcite forming as an original erystallization in magmas, like granites, which are supersaturated with silica. In the case of our rock [5892| which is fresh and unweathered, the calcite is certainly not secondary in the fullest sense, namely, resulting from mineral changes effected after complete and final cooling of the crystallised magma. Actually the identity of our mineral as calcite has not been completely deter- mined, but it has been established as a carbonate mineral of the calcite group. In slides of rock [5892| there are to be seen “calcite” individuals up to 0-6 mm, in diameter which are perfectly homogeneous and optically continuous, with sharp line contacts against adjacent quartzes, which latter are idiomorphic against the calcite. The calcite formation is thus subsequent to the crystallization of the quartz, Llsewhere in the microscope sections calcite is seen in optically continuous individuals, apparently as arrested replacements of biotite; it forms tongues penetrating and extending along the cleavages of the latter mineral, The phenomena presented suggest that the calcite has developed as an auto- metamorphic reaction-mineral during the final pneumatolitic stage of magma solidification. Some of the evidence suggests that it is possibly original fluorspar which has been reduced to calcite by reaction with alkaline carbonates. Specimen [5891] exemplifies the rock from No. 4 outcrop at Uncle Tom’s Cabin. In character it represents a transition between the porphyritic micro- eranite [5886] and a normal plutonic granite. The ferromagnesian mineral is almost exclusively hornblende; only odd wisps of biotite are to be seen. Zircon is plentiful. Several patches of magnetite and a tiny scrap of allanite are present. Some tiny isotropic spindles embedded in the biotite appear to be fluorspar. Gir Gip Rocks, Hunprep or PEACOCK Along the brow of some high ground located about 11 miles to the north of Old Marcollat homestead, and recorded as Gip Gip Rocks on one of the maps of the Hundred of Peacock (Jip Jip in some of the older records), granitic rocks outcrop in several places. We were unable, on account of limited time available during our visit, to fully investigate this area, but specimens from two of the outcrops were collected. They are both much weathered, The first [4416] resembles somewhat the rock [5885] located five miles cast of Unele Tom’s Cabin, but is a nearer approach to a medium fine-grained biotite granite, The other specimen [4433] is an aplitic biotite- microgranite very similar to [4434], which latter is a narrow band cutting across the Kongal granite mass. POTASH-SODA QUARTZ-PORPHYRIES Mount MONSTER : At Mount Monster (pl. XI, fig. 2), situated seven miles S.S.W. of the town of Keith, there is a boldly outcropping mass of quartz-porphyry. Within a mile 208 to the north and two miles to the south-east of the central mass there are other outcrops of porphyry differing in petrological character from that of Mount Monster itself. The chemical analysis of this latter rock [4426] is stated in the table on page 200. The molecular proportions of potash and soda are 57-8 of K.O, 97°3 of Na,O. The norm is as follows: ‘ Quartz - - - 30°04 lmenite - ~ O41 Orthoclase — - - 32:25 Apatite - - 0°34 Albite - - - 29°87 Fluorite - ~ 0-09 Anorthite —- - 2°78 Calcite - - - 0:35 Corundum = - - 0°25 Pyrite - - - 0-04 MgsiO, - - 0°30 Water - - - 0-68 FesiO, - - 1°66 ——— Magnetite —- - 0°93 Total - - 99-99 C.I.P.W. Classification: I, 4, 1 (2). 3 (Liparose-Toscanose ), The Mount Monster porphyry is a reddish-brown rock with, as its most out- standing character, a great abundance of (about 50% by volume) porphyritic crystals, The devitrified base is of a liver-brown colour. The quartzes are smoky and the porphyritic feldspars are pinkish-buff coloured. In microscope slide the orthoclase individuals, which are abundant, are seen to be largely rendered “dusty” when observed in transmitted light. Plagioclases, which are less abundant, have also suffered in the same way. Where suitable for optical tests, the plagioclase has the characters of nearly pure albite (Ab,,An,) ; this is in close correspondence with the norm. The ferromagnesian mineral is biotite but most of it has been altered to secondary minerals, mainly chlorite. Accessories are zircon, fluorite (rare), black iron ore with marginal leucoxene, some brown allanite which has suffered partial breakdown to secondary products and, finally, there has been noted one cluster of calcite. As it is intended at a later date to investigate the petrological characters of the several other porphyries of the Mount Monster area, further discussion will be reserved until then. In the meantime, all that it is now necessary to emphasise is that the chemical analysis and other petrological characters link these Mount Monster rocks with the fluorite-bearing potash-soda granites already shown to be so widely developed in the South-East of the State. SUMMARY The Jocation of occurrence and the petrological description of many igneous rocks, including potash-soda granite, potash-soda microgranite, quartz-kerato- phyre, whose outcrops are distributed through over 1,000 square miles of South- Eastern South Australia, have been given in some detail in the foregoing account. All are believed to be of pre-Ordovician age. The fluorite bearing granites are an eastern extension of those already known from Murray Bridge and the Coonalpyn region, The quartz porphyries are microgranites or effusive equivalents of the same granites. The quartz-keratophyres are taken to be palaeotypal, leucocratic, soda-rhyolites of middle to late Cambrian age. In one area, Didicoolum, these keratophyres have suffered shearing stresses and are presented as localised analogues of regional metamorphism. ‘These sheared and otherwise metamorphosed keratophytic rocks are believed to represent South Australian equivalents of the “porphyroid series” of Western ‘Tasmania, Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust., 1944 Vol. 68, Plate X Fig. 1. Whale-back outcrop of Adamellite in the Reedy Creek swamp water- course, located 4 miles east of the head of the Upper Coorong. Fig. 2. Soda-Rhyolite Outcrop, Section 173, Hundred of Minecrow “a Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust., 1944 Vol. 68, Plate XI Fig. 1 Outcrop of potash-soda microgranite located 5 miles east of Uncle Tom’s Cabin. Fig. 2 Outcrop of potash-soda quartz-porphyry at Mount Monster 209 REFERENCES Brown, fH. ¥. L. 1908 “Record of the Mines of South Australia.” Mines Dept. S. Aust., 4th ed. Brownr, W. R. 1920 “The Igneous Rocks of Encounter Bay, South Aus- tralia.’ Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust., 44, 1-57 Davip, T. W. E. 1932. “Explanatory Notes to Accompany a New Geological Map of Australia.” Sydney Jouannsen, A. 1932 “Petrography,” 2, Univ. Chicago Press Mawson, D., and Parkin, L. W. 1943 “Some Granitic Rocks of South- Eastern South Australia.” Trans. Roy. Soc. S .Aust., 67, (2), 233 Tweiverrees, W. T., and Perrero, W. F. 1900 “On the Felsites and Asso- ciated Rocks of Mount Read and Vicinity.” Proc. Roy. Soc. Tas., 11, 33-46 Wave, A. 1915 “The supposed QOil-bearing Areas of South Australia.” Geol. Survey Dept. S. Aust., Bull 4 Warp, I.. K. 1909 “The Tin Field of North Dundas.” Geol. Survey Tas- mania, Bull. 6 Wasurneron, H. S. 1917 “Chemical Analyses of Igneous Rocks.” U.S. Geol. Survey, Prof. Paper 99 A FURTHER ACCOUNT OF THE MURID, PSEUDOMYS (GYOMYS) APODEMOIDES FINLAYSON By H. H. FINLAYSON Summary This is small native mouse, allied to the Western Australian albocinereus, was discovered by Mr. Walter Harvey in the upper South-Eastern district of South Australia in April 1929. Three years later further species having been obtained, the present writer published a preliminary description of the new species under the above name. in Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust,. 1932, 56, 170. Since then additional field work, observation of the animal in captivity, and the building up of a much more adequate series of preserved specimens have provided data for the following more extended account. This, while still incomplete in some respects, permits of detailed comparison with other species similarly treated and may lead to a juster estimate of its relation to its allies when these, in turn, are sufficiently known. 210 A FURTHER ACCOUNT OF THE MURID, PSEUDOMYS (GYOMYS) APODEMOIDES FINLAYSON By H. FH. Fixtayson {Read 10 August 1944| PLATES AIL ro XV This small native mouse, allied to the Western Australian albocinereus, was discovered by Mr. Walter Harvey in the upper South-Eastern district of South Australia in April 1929. Three years later further specimens having been obtained, the present writer published a preliminary description of the new specics under the above name, in Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust.. 1932, 56, 170. Since then additional field work. observation of the anima! in captivity. and the building up of amuch more adequate seri¢s of preserved specimens have provided data for the following more extended account. This, while still incomplete in some respects. permits of detailed comparison with other species similarly treated and may Jead to a juster estimate of its relation to its allies when these. in turn. are sufficientls known, The writer records his appreciation of the co-operation of Mr. Harvey, in all matters attending the field work upon the animal. the results of which have heen much enhanced by bis ready and gencrous help. DISTRIBUTION AND TtAbrrs Practically the whole series obtained so far has come from a comparatively small area on Mr. Harvey’s holding in the Hundred of Coombe, and the on extension of range which is definitely based upon specimens taken is at Pringa- toola, 27 miles west-south-west of Coombe and within eight miles of the Coorong coast. Less definite but still reliable evidence. derived from the presence of its characteristic burrows and tracks and middens thereon, indicate its occurrence at several other pomts in the counties of Cardwell and Buckingham, both east and west of the railway. Combinations of topography, soils and vegetations quite similar to that of the type habitat at Coombe are to be found over a wide area in the Murray Mallee and South-Eastern Divisions of South Australia and adjacei tracts of other States, and it seems certain: that it will eventually prove to have a wide distribution herein; so far, however, neither observation nor enquiry sup- ported by the submission of specimens. have disclosed the animal beyond the above mentioned counties. : ae The type locality at Coombe lies just within the limits ef the South-Eastern Histrict, but in topography and general aspect is quite similar to much of the so- called Ninety Mile Desert, further north in Chandos and Buccleuch. ‘The genera! relief is lower; the considerable cast and west limestone ridges of the “Upper Desert are absent and the sandridges with their characteristic serrate profiles arc replaced by lower undulations or isolated hills. There is a fairly sharp partition of soils into reddish loams of moderately firm texture and pure white sand, with corresponding local differences in vegetation. The loamy flats are now frequenth cultivated, but primitively support a sparse savannah of the so-called Desert Gam (Eucalyptus fasciculosa), which here tends to be considerably larger than further north and commonly attains to 30-40 feet in height. and in some favoured oases to considerably more; the floor is here open, sparsely grassed, but frequently carrics abundant Triodia (7. basedowei and 7. ivritans). The white sand tract: Trans. Roy. Suc. SA, 68, (2). 30 November 1944 211 support a dry type heath with honeysuckles (Banksia marginata and dwar! B. ornata), bulloak (Casuarina pusilla), needle bush (Hakea ulicina), yacka (Xanthorrhea australis}, white mallee (Eucalyptus angulosa) and broom (Baeckea spp.) as the chief of the taller shrubs, while im the undergrowth the more promi- nent species are, Adenanthos terminalis, Brachyloma. ericoides, Astroloma cono- stephioides, Daviesia brevifolia, Leucopogon woodsti, Correa rubra, Thomasic petalocalyx, Hibbertia spp., Calythrix cf. tetragena, Leptospermunt myrsinoidcs, Kunscea pomifera and Lepidosperma laterale.? Dense, uniform mallee communitics of large extent are not a characteristic feature, as they are further north. The annual rainfall of 20 inches is consider- ably higher than in the Desert. and the heath undergrowth tends to be denser and richer in species. So far the new species has been taken only in the sandy heath country, where it lives in scattered isolated colonies, with much apparently suitable country un- occupied. Its mode of life is very unobtrusive ; it is almost strictly nocturnal, docs not invade houses nor camps nor cultivated ground, and even in the immediate vicinity of its living sites it is seldom sufficiently numerous to cause any appreciable disturbance in the vegetation in feeding, or to make obvious pads. “he sand heaps at its burrows at certain times of the year are practically the only external evidence of its presence which can be seen, and these, except when newly thrown up. are usually quite inconspicuous. Nevertheless, in spite of this obscurity, it secms some~ what remarkable that in a district that has been settled and jarmed for eighty vears it should not have been noticed before; none of Mr. Harvey’s neighbours had cognisance of it, and the results of enquiry elsewhere have always been negative. It is satisfactory to be able to record (as a rare good deed of a rather sinister domestic figure) that the original specimen was brought in by a house cat. Attempts at trapping were shortly afterwards undertaken, but the species proved very difficult to take in this way, both with ordinary baits which are generally successful with local murids, and special foodstuifs, and lures such as rhodium and anise oils were unayailing. The next few specimens to be got were found accidentally trapped in empty posi-holes. a fate which it sometimes shared with Dromicia concinne, which cceupies the same heaths. This fortunate accident suggested the deliberate use of pitfalls as a method of capture, ‘The venture was quite successful, and nearly all subseyuent catches were got by this device. The method followed was to sink ordinary post-holes about nine inches square and three fect deep. at random in the heath; when a catch was made, the holes were multiplied until as many as twenty in an acre were in use. In this way, ten have been taken in a night, and in most cases the catch was found alive and quite un- injured. The captives usually accepted their fate, temporarily at any rate, with resignation, and sought additional shclter by excavating a cavity into the wall of the hole at the bottom, whence as many as five close-packed adults have been removed in the morning; a few, however, escaped from time to time by the feat of climbing the vertical friable walls, and still others by driving nearly vertical shafts from the shelter pocket to the surface. There is a marked periodicity in the success of the pittall; the holes have been left uncovered at all times of the year, but practically all catches have been con- centrated into the period of auturmn and early winter, and within this period again there is unmistakable evidence of heightened activity immediately before or during ©) T am indebted to Miss Constance Eardley, of the Botany Department of the University of Adelaide, for naming the collection of plants made at Coombe; a few species were indeterminate through absence of flowers or fruit, but the above list includes all which are quantitatively important in the habitat of apodemoides. 212 rains and at times of unsettled weather—a trait of the species strikingly confirmed later in captivity. During the summer months it virtually disappears at Coombe, hut whether through some change of habits placing it beyond easy observation, or through a definite exodus to other areas, is still uncertain. The animal is an expert burrower and makes elaborate and relatively large warrens in which, during the cold weather, the whole of the daylight hours are spent, and in which the young are born and reared. The chief external evidence of a burrow site is a heap of white sand thrown up behind a circular aperture of about one inch in diameter, both commonly at the base of a heath banksia. This entrance, however, is but a temporary one, opened in autumn for renovation of the interior, and it is soon afterwards closed from within by a long sand plug. The real entrances are at a considerable distance from this one and unlike it, are very inconspicuous and take the form of circular popholes communicating with nearly vertical shafts. The general topography and architecture of the warren is shown in the scale diagram (fig. 1) of a comparatively elaborate one excavated at Coombe in June 1933. The following itemized description will serve as a legend for this diagram: Vig. | A, trial opening, abandoned. B--C, the opening drive; horizontal diameter one inch, vertical diameter 14 inches; descending evenly from ground level at B to 18 inches at C; this drive is now disused and functions as a dump, being loosely packed with sand from other parts of the galleries. C, a circular chamber, approximately three inches in diameter, such as commonly occurs elsewhere at major junctions. C—D, the first lateral drive descending to two feet at D, and sand plugged like B-C. C-E-G-~I is the main longitudinal drive, maintaining a nearly constant direction except opposite the nest, where there is an acutely angled bypass; it descends to a maximum depth of about two feet six inches at the nest. EK. G.I. K. M. are circular chambers of varying size, analogous to C. F, L, O are short drives used as dumps and loosely packed with sand. H is the nest chamber; it is a spherical cavity with a diameter of six inches and has two short indepen- dent tunnels connecting with the main drive. and can thus be completely by-passed by the ordinary traffic of the warren. The nest almost fills the sand cavity and is beautifully fashioned of finely shredded bark fibre, derived from a plant not yet identified, but apparently not occurring in the immediate vicinity of the burrow. In the centre of the mass is an inner cavity, smoothly lined with carefully adjusted 213 leaves of Banksia marginata, and when opened it was found to be occupied by four nestlings of about 10 days’ growth. I-J isa continuation of the main drive which has been used as a sand dump in the same way as B-C; it rises slightly towards J, where it suddenly terminates in a nearly vertical shaft, leading directly so the surface two feet above; both vertical shaft and pophole are open, but of course isolated from the rest of the system and non-functioning. E-M-P-Q is the main lateral system and, with its branches, is similar to the main gallery, but uyer its middle course is from three to six inches deeper, The drives, P-Q and M-N, rise slightly towards their extremities, where they are converted abruptly into nearly vertical shafts, reaching the surface two feet six inches above the points Q and N, in the form of circular apertures of one-and-a-half inches diameter ; these two popholes were the only functioning entrances and exits dis- covered, and presumably are used indifferently for both purposes. Apart from the nest chamber, no other cavities suggesting living quarters were found, and, apart from the breeding nest, there was a complete absence uf vegetable matter which might serve as fodder or bedding; the tunnels everywhere showed clean, smooth sandy floors free from excrement, and the nest was dry and non-odorous. Defaecation on the surface is sometimes con- centrated upon middens, as mentioned above. ‘The circular chambers at the junc- tions of passages are possibly made in the first place to facilitate the work of burrowing, and then left to facilitate trafhe, though if this is so it is curious that this feature is not always present, even at three-way junctions. The combined Jengths of all galleries in this warren, including the three vertical shafts, was approximately 60 feet, and the estimated weight of the moist sand displaced 40-50 pounds ; a work of considerable magnitude for so small and delicate a creature. The volume of the sand in the dumps external to the warren was, unfortunately. not ascertained, but that it does not represent the whole volume displaced is clear from the obvious use made of unwanted passages, for the accommodation of part of it. The plug of replaced sand was always found to have a looser texture than the virgin consolidated soil, and a slightly different colour also, so that there was little difficulty in following the course of these packed tunnels by visual inspection during the digging. Each excavation appears to be originally the work of one breeding pair, but the part-grown young of one or more litters may share the shelter with the parents. Seven individuals is the maximum number taken so far from one system. When young examples taken in a pitfall are released near a burrow, they will not enter unless they are satisfied that it is their own domicile. Uneertainty still prevails as to the duration of occupation of the burrow. Excavation of new holes and renovation of old ones is first noticed in early autumn, when the dumps of recently turned white sand at the entrance hole are, for a time, rather conspicuous. AS this time also marks the beginning of the chief reproductive period, there seems no doubt that the two activities are correlated, and that the excavation is made primarily as a shelter for the young. Investigation of the warrens in summer is not sufficiently complete to prove that a general vacation of the same takes place, but there is much evidence in support of this, and at Coombe, the only examples taken on the surface in daylight have been in midsumer. At the Coorong site of Pringatoola, where it was trapped in late November, there was no evidence of burrowing, though it was so plentiful as to form noticeable pads in some favoured spots, with well-used circular middens; features never seen at Coombe. Observations on the animal in captivity show that it is rather intolerant of heat and, as the local summer is a severe one, it is difficult to see why it should forsake the coolness of its underworld for the discomfort of the surface. It is possible, of course, that the move is involuntary and forced upon it by changes in 214 the texture of the drying sand; similar considerations have been shown to operate powerfully on the burrowing habits of some old world Muridae. The natural enenvies of the species at Coombe are probably chiefly predatory night birds. Burrows partly dug out by foxes have, however, been observed, and Mr. Harvey on one occasion found a small brown snake (Demensia textilis) within, and on another a spotted Pardalote (Pardalotus punctatus). Neither this snake, taken i situ, nor others taken at random in the district, contained apodc- motdes in the stomach, though they did contain house mice. In general aspect the mouse is exceedingly delicate and attractive and remark- able for the prevailing pallor, not only of its pelage but of all exposed epidermal areas as well, which are nearly destitute of pigment and appear bright pink in lite. In size and bulk, afodcmoides is somewhat larger than an average house mouse. but is very dissimilar in general appearance and mannerisms, The build is rather squat as to body but with light slender appendages; the squatness is especially characteristic of some subadult phases, but in all is exaggerated, as is also the apparently large size of the head, by the erect and profuse pelage. Observed in captivity, its slow movements and some of its postures are by no means graceful; when deliberately investigating its surroundings in a new cage, it has a curious pottering uncertain gait and the long slender tail is carried ina rather odd way, well clear of the ground and sometimes arched over the back. When startled, however, or otherwise excited, it is capable of movements of lightning-like rapidity and great precision—in both respects recalling Notontys. As noted above, examples on more than one occasion made their escape from vertical three-foot holes by climbing the sides, but in captivity it shows little inclination or aptitude for climbing. Much of its time, when stationery, is spent reared up on its haunches, when it assumes a comical, almost globular shape; its feeding is usually done so, and, if of suitable size, each particle such as a grain of seed or a berry, is taken delicately in the two hands and brought up to the mouth for the incisors to work upon, which they do with the utmost precision and speed and control, rejecting in the case of a wheat grain the whole of the husk, so that the cages soon become carpeted with dises of bran, ts feeding, indeed all its activities, are interrupted abruptly and frequently. for the toilet of the coat, which it keeps in immaculate condition; the toilet is done largely by the manus and incisors, the mysticial vibrissac receiving especially frequent attention. In temperament it is both brisk and adaptable, doctle and confident. — [ts nonchalance in the pitfall has already been mentioned; when removed by hand it showed little resentment and made no serious attempt to bite. When transferred to box cages and compelled to live in radically strange surroundings and upon a totally new and unaccustomed diet, it retained a cheerful activity with every evidence of comfort and content. The cages used for parties of from five to ten were airy boxes three feet by three feet by two feet, with two glass sides and two of wire gauze to facilitate observation and ventilation and cooling, respectively. Shelter and nesting boxes with light hinged lids, and packed with wood-wool and cotton for nesting material, were provided, and were at once approved and adopted by the mice, but their sense of security evidently demanded emergency exits. which they promptly sup- plied by driving popholes through the deal walls. The cages were kept under a roofed shelter in a comparatively subdued heht, and under these conditions they frequently left the nest during daylight for short tours of the cage, but all their main activity remained definitely crepuscular and nocturnal and involved an immense amount of coming and going, as the quantity of sand shifted plainly showed. The floor of the cages was covered with a layer of sand two inches deep. 215 and it was early discovered that a moist atmosphere was greatly appreciated. On several occasions when the sand dried out it was hosed lightly to remoisten it, and the effect on the colony was electrical; the mice left the shelter box en masse, though it was broad daylight, and engaged 4 ina most animated display of acrobatics. The chief evolution was a lightning- like | ooping of the loop. by springing from the floor to a wall, thence to the roof, thence to the opposite wall and down to the floor, each impact, though of scareely perceptible duration, being sufficient for attaining a new impetus; the looping was repeated a dozen times or more in a continuous series without pause. They quarrelled very little among themselves, and a dozen might safely be left to share the same quarters; such bickering as did go on was of a mild kind and usually resulted in nothing more serious than tail shoitening. One or two cases of fratriphagy were noticed amongst aged specimens, but as no animosity had been apparent beforehand, it was possibly due to a temporary protein defi- ciency in the diet. The staples of the diet adopted were mixed grain and hard fruits, with an occasional ration of nuts, honey and fat bacon; this proved accept- able and adequate for the maintainance of all normal activity. including reproduc- tion and the rearing of voung. Water was always provided in the cages, and in het weather was frequently drunk, though in the natural habitat it can seldom be available. The feeding habits of the animal in the wild have not vet been determined by observation; most of the specimens handled had been kept alive for some days pending transit, during which time they were necessarily fed upon an artificial diet, so that a study of stomach contents could disclose nothing, and in ihe few examples that were taken dead the material contained no recoguisable fragments. It may safely be inferred, however, that it is normally grammunivorous aid frugivorous rather than phytophagous. In trapping. it was noticed that under stress of deprivation it readily lapses tuto carnivority, partially eaten specimens having several times been found with the living in pitfalls which had not been promptly emptied, and this trait was later confirmed in captivity, as mentioned above. The small vegetation of its habitat is rich in species which fruit and seed freely, such as Casuarina pusilla, Brachyloma cricotdes, Lepidosperina laterale, Kunzea pomifera and Triedia spp., and there is no doult that these provide the mainstay of its dict. The amnmal is rapidly dehilitated by high temperatures, and most of the deaths susiained in the captive series oceurred during hear waves in mid-summer. In the wald, several ectoparasites occur, the chief of which is a Laclaps,; this is very difficult to eradicate im captivity, though it may be kept in check by frequent dusting with pyrethrum.; in moderate nuntbers it apparently works no detriment to the hosts. “Phe animal has no characteristic smell, REPRODUCTION AND DEVELOPMENT Of the entire series of 69 examined, 33 are males, 33 females and three un- determined; fully adults totalled 20, and in the remainder, subadults of medium growth predominate markedly over earlier stages and nestlings; the latter having been obtained by excavation of burrows and by breeding in captivity. The pitfall method of trapping chiefly adopted precludes an adequate representation of the more immature stages, since these are not independently active at night, and is unable, therefore, to indicate accurately the prevalence of reproduction at any onc time. Incidentally. it is noteworthy that of adults taken in pitfalls. females are three times as numerous as males. Sufficient evidence has been obtained, however, to show that the main natural breeding season falls in autumn and early winter. The earliest new-born litters 216 observed were in the third week of May, but advanced nestlings have been found in June also, and knowledge of the life cycle subsequently obtained indicates that these must have been produced as early as the beginning of May, with mating therefore in April. On the other hand, some young collected in November, must by the same argument have been littered as late as mid-August. The apparent absence of a natural breeding season in summer depends largely upon negative evidence, all activities of the species being much more obscure in the hot weather. However, the batches trapped in October and November contained no pregnant females, and of the many females kept in captivity only one became pregnant dur- ing the hat months. In captivity, males have been observed attempting inter- course as early as the tenth week, but all pregnant females observed, both in the wild and in captivity, have been fully adult. In the number of embryos produced there is considerable variation, from four to seven having been observed in wero; in the latter case five occupied the right and two the left horn; superior development of the right horn has been observed also in recently evacuated uteri m which the number of young was unknown. Litters of as few as three and as many as six thriving nestlings have heen taken, but the norma! complement seems to be four, as with most Pseudomyds, Whether a single female may produce more than one litter in a season has not been ascertained, Testis enlargement in the male is restricted to a very short period, probably only from March to April, Of 20 adult or advanced subadult males trapped between May and November only one showed any scrotal prominence, and this was a subadult. An interesting feature in the series of males reared in captivity is the markedly superior gonad development of subadult as compared with fully adult males. In the wild this has already been noted in some Central Australian species. Three litters of young have been successfully reared in captivity; two of these were born in captivity of females pregnant when taken, while the third was removed from a nest when about three weeks old. Two of the mothers with normal-sized litters were assiduous in their attentions to the nestlings and, although very gentle and permitting themselves to be touched and handled without resent- ment, became much agitated when the young were removed. The third, with six young, was overtaxed and apparently unable to nourish them all adequately, and within a few days ejected two young from the nest. They were found stiff and cold on the cage floor, but when restored to the nest quickly recovered, only to be thrown out again the next night; they struggled on for seven days under this nightly rejection before succumbing, and in general all nestlings observed have shown great vitality. They adhere very firmly to the nipples of the dam, and when startled into leaving the nest hurriedly she frequently dragged them with her over the cage, but not as a routine matter as recorded for Contlurus, ete. The females occasionally made a shrill chirruping bird-like call, and the young a more feeble squeak, but both young and parents were less vocal than some other local murids similarly kept and observed. For the first three months the nestlings were weighed and examined weekly, and the following condensed summary gives the main facts of their development so observed ; the weights quoted are averaged for the members of the three litters: At three days—Weight 3 grammes; eyes shut; dorsum haired nearly black; belly nearly nude. pink and with sharp demarkation from dorsum, At two weeks—5-3 grammes; cvat close, coarse and very dark; belly fur developing fast; white to base. 217 At three weeks—7°0 grammes; head and body 50 mm; tail 38; pes 14°5; manus 6°5, ear 6; eyes open; dorsal fur 9 mm. long, still dark and shaggy; belly completely furred with the middle areas now dark-based; ears closely adpressed to head; tail sparsely furred but already sparsely sprinkled with dark brown dorsally. At four weeks—9'0 grammes; dorsal fur more erect and the pale subterminal band just appearing. At five weeks—10°0 grammes ; dorsal coat erect and fluffy and showing much of the basal slate colour and the pale subterminal band. Al six weeks—-13 grammes ; time of weaning was not observed but the young were now much abroad both day and night, and eating grain and other hard foods. At seven weeks—14 grammes; moult begun. From eight to fourteen qeeks-—Weights were: 14°5, 16, 16, 16°5, 17, 17, 19 grammes, respectively. At fifteen weeks—Moult completed; most of the young were now heavier than the parents, but still retained many signs of immaturity, especially in the head and body length and in the ear, which was decidedly smaller, and in the thin fluffy ungrizzled coat. At twenty-three weeks Cone example )—Head and body 77 mm.; tail, 80; pes 19-5; ear 15. In the development of these nestlings an anomaly was met with in the marked precocity of one example, which at an early stage was left (by a series of acci- dents) the sole survivor of the original litter. At the fifteenth week this example weighed 22:5 grammes, and at the eighteenth week had head and body 76 mm., pes 20, ear 16, outstripping in linear dimensions the young of full litters by five weeks, The point is of some interest as affording a possible clue to the causation of at least part of the apparently capricious variation in dimensions so frequent in several Australian rats. The growth changes were not followed up into adult life, but it seems unlikely that the mean adult dimensions in nature could be attained in less than nine months, and twelve months is more likely. Evidence derived from the duration of captivity (which has exceeded two years in some cases) and the maturity of such examples when taken, suggests a specific life-span of about four years. EXTERNAL CHARACTERS The series examined consists of 69 specimens. of which a large proportion have been examined in the flesh before preservation. Twenty are fully adult, and the rest form a developmental series which bridges the gap to the naked nestling stage. Of the total, 25 have been kept under observation in captivity for periods up to 30 months. There is little evidence of change in structural characters hav- ing been effected in this way, but for reasons of orthodoxy the statements which follow on the external characters of the species are drawn entirely from the strictly feral material. Bodily size small to medium, the head and body length averaging 85 mm. and reaching 93 mm., and the live weight about 16 grammes. Build moderate ; appendages slender and long. The relative head size is much as in such forms as Ps. (Leggadina) hermannsburgensis; the ratio, head and body length: skull length, nbout 1: 30'as in that species, but the fur contour has an enlarging effect. The fur profile of the head is convex with a prominent erect tuft in the anterior nasal region, due to an opposition ridge just behind the rhinarium. The eye rather prominent with a diameter from canthus to canthus of 3°5 mm., approxi- 218 mately; well fringed with black lashes. Mysticial vibrissae very strongly developed; the longest bristles about 35 mm.; the anterior members white, the posterior black, and the intermediate (and longest) black with white tips. The supraorbitals, 22 mm. long, and entirely black; genals weak or lacking. The ear very large; length to 18 mm.; breadth across the trough of pinna to 9 mm. The RNS ETOER of the ear exceeds that of the eremian minute and approaches that of the less specialised species of Notontys; its length is about 20% of the head and body length. The substance of the ear is thin and membranous, and pale except at the extreme margin, where slight epidermal darkening takes place: in life it is a delicate pink, as are all exposed areas of epidermis, Manus, length to 8°5 mm., breadth transversely across palm from base of second digit to 3-5 mm, and third digit 3 mm.; rather slender in general propor- tions, but (as is frequently the case) appearing stowter in many subadults in which the palmar structures are plumper and broader than in calloused adults, The paim pale pink and unpigmented ; its central area markedly granular, the granu- larity extending to the basal portion of the underside of the digits, where the transverse ri idges are broken into rows of granules and are not continuous ag is oe. The grooving of the digits is deep and prominent, aver: aging eight upon the third digit. Claws rather stout. their free projection about sejetal to the apical pads; moderately fringed, but the hairs not quite reaching the claw tip. Ulnar carpal yibrissae large—reaching 7 mm. Palmar pads of moderate size and development ; conspicuous more fron the granularity of the surrounding areas than y their own relief, which is but moderate in adults ; the outlines of the pads are well defined anteriorly but are sometimes indefinite posteriorly, where the reliet is much lower. In a few subadults the pads are very strongly developed, with their anterior portions lifted free of the palm, and their margins somewhat angular, as in Leporillus. All pads smooth or very faintly striate. The detailed shape and relative development of the pads is subject to much variation. “The carpals are always much larger (though variably so) than the imterdigitals and are relatively narrow. The outer is longer than the inner, and most frequently has at least twice its area; the inner has a well-marked accessory fold adjoining the pollux. The first @ interdigital is usually round, but may be subtriangular or bell-shaped ; the second or median interdigital i is rather constantly pyriform, and the third which is shaped (and varies) like the first, has usuall y either a small satellite at its postero- eternal corner, or a low heel formed by the conjunction of two smaller satellites; quite frequently . however, both these accessories are absent. In point of relative size, there is a marked tendency for the median interdigital to be dominant and the laterals subequal ; when the laterals depart from subequality, 3 > 1 more often than 1 > 3. Subequality of all three interdigitals is rare, but is more frequent in subadults than adults, Variation of all the pads, both carpals and interdigitals, is to a large extent truly individual, and most of the variants may be found in nestlings of 17 days’ growth. While these differences are confusing when a few examples only are compared, systematic examination of the w hole series leaves no det that the arrangement most characteristic of the Specitts ist outer carpal > inner carpal > second interdigital > third interdigital = first interdigital. Pes-—Length to 22°5 mm.. breadth transversely across the sole from the base at first digit, to 3°5 mm., and the third digit to 5 mm. General form decidedly long and slender, the length averaging 25% of the head and body and the © Tn these papers the pad which is actually and inatienall the first Stteehetieteal on the pollical side of the palm, is so nunibered in descriptions and formulae, but it is probably homologous with the second interdigital of the primitive pentadactvle manus. 219 length -+ breadth ratio, ca. 7°0. The width of the sole maintained posteriorly, not tapering markedly to heel which does not project conspicuously beyond the malleoli. The posterior plantar surface is nearly simooth or with the usual trans- verse crease lines, but the interdigital portion. is characteristically verrucose, as in the manus, The undersurface of the digits well grooved, the third digit carrying ten grooves and the ridges basally broken into rows of granules as in the manus. In some nestlings the undersurface of the digits and the interdigital basin carry scattered hairs, Nails stout; their projection and fringing as in the manus. Pads of moderate size and prominence; more distinctly striate than in the manus and remarkably constant in general shape and proportion, and thereby in sharp contrast to the manus. ‘The inner metatarsal, narrow and much elongated but with its posterior termination low and vague; it is commonly three to four times the length of the outer metatarsal which is small and rounded or oval; in two examples only is there a departure from this condition, and in these the meta- iarsals are subequal. he first interdigital large and bell-shaped, the second broadly pyriform or oval and usually differing conspicuously trom the third which +s smaller and of narrower shape, and the fourth broadly oval or bell-shaped, rarely with a conjoined satellite, and usually subequal or slightly larger than interdigital one, Fourth jnterdigital = first interdigital > -al > inner metatarsal (in area} > outer meta- The pad formula therefore second interdigital > third interdig tarsal. The tail is almost always longer than the head and body, averaging 118% in adults and 114% in subadults; there are, however, one or two cases of sub- equality in the feral series, and in the captive series tails shorter than the head and body are not uncommon; there is a suspicion, however, that such cases are due to mutilations which have healed without obvious defect. The tail is slender and evenly tapering and capable of considerable flexure in life. The tip is well covered with the steadily lengthening tail hairs which exceed it by 3 mm.; there is no exposed calloused knob. Scale counts are rather variable, averaging mid- dorsally ca, 19 per. centimetre. Testes relatively small and never greatly swollen; scrotum lightly furred white, and its epidermis unpigmented. Mamimac—Posterior 9 mm. from clitoris; anterior 9 mm, front posterior, The eulva is usually completely occluded in virgin females, and a similar con- dition may develop in adult females after parturition, if they are denied access of the male. {n two cases observed in captivity, it was found that 21 weeks after the birth of litters which were reared in the absence of the male parent, the vulva was almost completely sealed externally by what appeared to be a considerable tissue connection between the labiae. PELAGE The original description, which was founded on 14 living or just dead examples holds good with little modification for the whole series, but the addi- tional material permits of some amplification of the first account, In the limited area from which specimens have been so far obtained the species proves to be one of very constant pelage. Sexual and seasonal variation is scarcely demonstrable, age variations are only marked at early growth stages, and such differences as do occur, therefore, may be regarded as of individual origin and varying incidence of the moult. About 5% of the series are slightly warmer and less glaucus in tone than the type series described 5 in the coldest blue- erey examples, the colour of the subterminal zone of the fur is near Ridgway’s “Tilleul Buff? and the tips of the guard hairs are cold black, resulting ina general 220 dorsal colour near ‘Mouse Grey”; in the warmer coloured coats the subtermina! zone is near “Vinaceous Buff’ and the guard hairs terminate in brownish-black. The ventral fur at base is normally plumbeous throughout, but in one or two examples white-based fur occurs on gulo-sternal and abdominal areas. The ear, when furred grey-brown as described originally, is moderately well contrasted with the dorsal coat ; sometimes, however, the ear back is haired with a grizzle of near black and silver, and is then less so. There is in a large proportion of examples a supra calcaneal darkening (formerly overlooked) caused by a grizzling of the white hairs of the lower leg with black or blackish-brown; the effect is usually slight, however, and never forms a prominent marking. The darkening of the dorsum of the tail is very variable; in a few examples it is sufficiently marked i attain a fairly sharp contrast with the whitish sides and lower surface, but usually takes the form of a sparse grizzling of blackish hairs along a narrow dorsal strip extending from, two-thirds to three-quarters of its length; the pencilling ceases very abruptly and the terminal one-third to one-quarter is pure white on all sur- faces. While the darkest tails are all of adult or aged examples, white tails are less characteristic of immaturity than was thought, and most examples of half- growth show a noticeable pencilling of the dorsum. The rearing of three litters in captivity enabled the following facts on the early development of the pelage to be ascertained. Within three days of birth the dorsum (which is already pigmented a deep slate) is sparsely haired with black or near black, while the non-pigmented ventrum is pink and hairless and with sharp demarcation. At two weeks the dorsal fur is dense enough to obscure the skin and is close and coarse, while the belly fur which is entirely white is much thinner, though developing fast. At three weeks the dorsal coat is 9 mm, long and shaggy, the first lifting from the prone adpressed condition having begun and the belly fur darkening at the base over the central parts of the area. Even at this early stage (head and body 50 mm.) the coat is already bipilous, though the long black contour hairs are much more numerous than the second pile. At four weeks the second pile is much better developed and has a distinct though dull ashy middle zone, a brownish tip and a short plumbeous basal zone. This condition leads on by increase in amount and length of the second pile and increase in the proportion of the basal blue zone, to the fluffy, erect, blue appearing pelage characteristic of immaturity up to about the head and body 70 mm. stage. This immature pelage is very similar in composition to that of adults, but is sparser, finer and more erect and therefore with a greater exposure of the basal leaden zone; its guard hairs are fewer and both piles are spun out to very attenuated tips, which in the main pile are more frequently brown than in adults, while on flanks and rump a sprink- ling of white tips occurs. The first moult begins at about the seventh or eighth week and may not be completed until the fifteenth; spreading downward from the nape its progress can be readily followed by the pale line of demarcation caused by the more prominent ashy subterminal zone of the new coat, as well as by its greater density and grizzling. In the wild, the adult pelage is evidently subject to heavy attrition, which has the effect of breaking off the points of the black guard haits and of thinning out the main pile, so that ultimately, in.adults, a partial return to the glaucus imma- ture condition is effected. This is made good by a second annual moult, which is well illustrated by one adult example in captivity (in November), in which the entire dorsal epidermis is obscured by a dense carpet of the emerging ashy renewal coat. Although this is the only example actually observed at the change, study of the entire feral series shows that worn and_ thin pelages are to be found 221 together with rich recently renewed ones on the same dates both in winter and summer, justifying the inference that the time of moult is governed by individual rather than seasonal factors. In captivity, quite marked changes are induced in the pelage even in one life cycle. At five weeks captive litters are conspicuously darker and longer furred than wild born ones at the same stage, and both distinctions are retained and accen- tuated as growth continues. Six advanced subadults at the head and body 78 mm. stage show much richer pelage than in any feral examples; the over-all length of the coat (15 mm.) is about the same, but the proportion of guard hairs reaching this length is greater and the main pile is 2 mm. longer and the general density higher. Further, the basal plumbeous and terminal zones are darker and the sub- terminal zone is more strongly contrasted and richer coloured. Immersion in 80% alcohol for ten years has produced marked changes in colouration in all but a few of the series so preserved, and a, large proportion of these would scarcely be suspected of specific identity with field skins; in particular, the characteristic glaucus tone of the natural pelage disappears very rapidly. Flesh Dimensions (feral specimens only) The following figures give, in millimetres, the range and mean values for the dimensions of (1) a group of adults selected as free from any obvious imma- turity in external characters, (2) a group of subadults of decidedly inferior bulk, (3) a long-furred independent nestling, (4) a short-furred nestling of approxi- mately 17 days’ growth. 1 2 3 4 Pr, oe 3 69 il¢ 99 é 9 Head and body - 86-80 (84) ; 93-80 (87) | 76-70 (71:5); 78-65 (68-5) 50 45 Tail - - =| 10897101) ; 113-90 (99-5) 96-72 (82) : 90-70 (78-5) 70 36 Pes: length - | 22-35-21 (21-5) =; 22+5-20 (21-0) 21-18-5 (19-5); = 20-18-5 (19-5) 18 13 Pes: breadth - —_— 3 353-0 (31) 3-5-3-0 (3-3); 3+5-3-0.(3+1) — | 2-8 Manus: length - — >; 8-0-8-0 (8-0) 8-5-8:0 (8-2); 8-0-7-5 (7-7) 765 6-0 Manus: breadth - — ; 3-5-3-0 (3-3) 3-0-2-8 (2-9); 3-0-2-8 (2-9) 2-2 2.2 Ear: length - | 18-5-16 (17) ‘ 18-16 (17) 17—15 (15-5); 17-13 -5 (15) 14 6 Rhinarium to eye 13-13 (13) ¢ 14-11 (12) 12-10 (11) 11-5-9 (10-0) = 1 Eye to ear - - 12-10 (11) ; 11~9 (10) 11-8-5 (9) 4 10-8 (9-0) me 6 16-12:5'(13+8); 18-5-18 (18) X28 (8-5) : 8-7 (7-5) == pee Weight (in grms.) The dimensions quoted for the species in the original description are well within the range of the adult group, but slightly below the mean values and. decidedly below the maxima as now ascertained. The general level of variation in these selected groups of adults and subadults is actually higher in most items than in the eremian hermannsburgensis; but the individual and capricious varia- tio, involving major anomalies in development as shown by the concurrence of maxima and minima in the same example, such as occurs in several series of Central Australian rats recently reviewed, is absent. Here the occurrence of maxima for pes, ear and tail is always associated with a high head and body value- and high body weight, and conversely immaturity can nearly always be detected by low values for ear and tail. The earsize is an especially useful first criterion of immaturity ; even advanced subadults may usually be readily recognised by the: smaller area of the pinna, @) I have demonstrated a similar state of things in the rock wallaby, Petrogale penicillata herberti. Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust., 55, (1931), 84 D 222 Sexual differentiation in dimensions is very; slight and, in adults, of doubtful significance ; examination of the subadult series, however, seems to suggest that at some intermediate stages the male develops more rapidly than the female; but the data is insufficient to establish this. The extraordinarily rapid development of appendages at the fourth or fifth week of life, while the head and body length remains almost constant, is well shown by a comparison of the two nestlings; in the more advanced (4), at the stage of early erect pelage, when the head and body length is still only 59% of the adult average, the pes is already 86%, the ear 82%, and the tail 70%, of their final values. The effect of captivity upon the linear dimensions of wild born examples is slight, the only demonstrable change being a failure to attain the normal mean ear length of feral examples; young reared entirely in captivity may, as already indi- cated, attain much greater body weight, but whether their ultimate linear measure- ments are similarly increased is uncertain, no captive born example having yet reached complete maturity. SKULL CHARACTERS A series of 22 skulls has been examined, all removed from animals of known external characters, dimensions and history; half of them are derived from animals kept in captivity for varying periods, but as. with external characters, the follow- ing account is based on the feral series alone. The salient features of the skull in a general view, are its lengthened nasal region, over-all narrowness, and very fragile zygomata. The ossification is light. The general dorsal aspect is fairly constant throughout the series, but there are one or two examples in which an arrested development of the anterior root of the zygoma accentuates the leptoprosopic character, and one such anomaly (the only fully adult example available at the time) was responsible in the original descrip- tion for the phrase “very peculiar” as applied to its shape; this is now seen to be somewhat over-stated for the series as a whole. Immature skulls, with shortened facial region, are quite similar in general dorsal appearance to the more bulbous forms of hermannsburgensts. Muzzle region as originally given; the point contact with the frontals is variably developed, but usually the termini take the form of characteristic prongs, distinctly separated and penetrating the labyrinth of the fronto-nasal suture. The width of the nasals increases fairly evenly towards a distal maximum, with a slight constriction at the beginning of the terminal third. The maxillary fossae are unusually well developed in old skulls, and the opening of the bursa is con- spicuous dorsally, The anteorbital fossa rather large in adults much smaller in immature skulls—the external wall bent strongly inwards. The zygomatic outline varies considerably; in the majority the anterior width is not markedly less than the posterior, and the outline tends to parallelism or even slight concavity, with smooth angles both before and behind; in others, however, the arches are more prominently thrown out from the skull and decidedly wider posteriorly. In the interorbital constriction variation in width is largely individual and not strongly influenced by age; the supraorbital edges, however, show the customary bevelling with advancing development. Lacrymals narrow; their free margin often irregu- lar. Braincase of the suddenly expanded type, and fairly constant in development and shape. interparietal of moderate size; not spanning the braincase, and its shape crudely rectangular rather than subtriangular and with its interior margin often irregular. In lateral view, the upper profile is low and little arched and the occiput smoothly rounded, without angularity at the lambda. The margin of the zygo- 223 matic plate slopes forwards as stated, but the angle of slope varies considerably, in general being steeper in adults than in young skulls; the condition under all three of these heads very similar to what may be seen in waite!, hermannsbur- yensis and patrius. The posterior palate is conspicuously wide and flat; the anterior palatine foramina also large, both long and widely open, tapering towards the incisors and in adults with the maximum width nearly always posterior to the midpoint ; posteriorly the foramina always reach beyond the anterior margin of M' and sometimes reach the lingual cusp of the first lamina. The mesopterygoid fossa large and wide open; in adults the walls are parallel or nearly so, but in young skulls the maximum width is at the palatal margin. The parapterygoid variable; in fully adults the fossa is distinctly developed with a stinken floor and raised ectopterygoid margin (as in the original description) ; in others (usually subadult) the floor is flat and much less enclosed; the fenestration of the floor of the parapterygoid fossa is remarkably variable also. Bulla decidedly small for the size of the skull and little inflated; its age change, as described under hermannsburgensts, Dentition weak; upper incisors variably ophisthodont; upper molar rows straight and nearly parallel; gradation in size from M!-M* moderate, as in Pseudonvys s. str. General structure of molar crowns much as in Nofomys, the buccal cusp of the first lamina of M! obsolete and much reduced on the others. Contrary to the original description, the posterior displacement of the lingual cusp of the first lamina of M1, is now seen with more suitable material, to be considerable and the obliquity of this lamina is equal to that of hermannsburgensis and patrius of the group Legyadina. There are no supplementary cusps on either upper or lower molars. Mandible weak. Sexual variation inappreciable. Skull Dimensions The following figures give, in millimetres, the skull dimensions of (1) four adult males all showing appreciable wear on the first lamina of M'*, and extracted from animals free from any immaturity in external characters, (2) three adult females in the same age group, (3) one subadult female of head and body length 70 mm. 1 2 3 SSS pica pees —povennel A caaaneaNGR i Greatest length - - - - | 26°8-25+5 (25-9) ; 26°8-25-0(26-0) ; 23+2 Basal length - - “| -| 22-1-20-6 (21-4) ; 22-4-20-0(20°8) 3 18-5 Greatest Zygomatic breadth +f 12-3-11-8 (12-1) ; 12-4-11-7 (12-1) ; 11-4 Braincase: breadth - ~ -} 1d-7-11-5 (11-6) 3) 12*1-11-4 (11-7) 5 11-2 Interorbital breadth - - - 4-0-3-7 (3+9) é 4-0-3-7 (3-9) : 3°9 Nasals: length - “ ~ -| 10-0-9-0 (9-5) > 105-88 (9-7) ; 8-2 Nasals: greatest breadth - - 2-5+2-3 (2-5) 5 2+5-2-4 (2-4) * 2-1 Palatal length - - ~ - | 13-7-13-0 (13-3) ; 13-9-12-6 (12+3) ; 11-7 Palatilar length - - - | 12-2-11-9 (12-1); 12-5-11-0(11+7) ; 10-3 Ant, Palatine Foramina length - 6+0-5-0 (5-5) 5 5-9-5-0 (5-4) . 5-0 Ant. Palatine Foramina breadth 1-7-1-5 (1-6) Y 1-8-1-7 (1-8) 4 1-4 Bullae: length - - z - 3+7-3-5 (3-6) ; 3-7-3:5 (3-6) 3 3+2 Upper molars - - - - 3:9-3+6 (3:7) : 3°9-3-6 (3-8) 7 39 In the feral series the agreement in dimensions between examples of the same basal length is close, and these, in turn, are roughly proportional to body size, the variation in this latter group being about 5% in the case of the head and body: skull length, ratio. In the captive series, although little or no structural change can be detected, anomalies in both the above groups of metrical relationships are 224 more marked. Molar wear in both moieties of the series is variable, and if un- supported by other evidence is unsatisfactory as a criterion of age. RELATIONSHIPS Material for direct and detailed comparison with glaucus and albocinereus (apparently the nearest allies of the present species) is still lacking, so that the recorded dimensions remain the chief criteria by which the identities of the three species may be judged. The slight modification to the original figures for apodc- moides, necessitated by examination of the new scries, does not appreciably alter the previous assessment of its position. The flesh dimensions of glaucus may now be completely merged in those of apodemotdes, but the figures for the skull of the former are all higher except that of the anterior palatine foramina, which is slightly below the mean for apodemotdes. With respect to albocinerens of Western Australia, the effect of the new data is to close the gap metrically between apodemioides and the typical albocinereus. so that the South Australian animal is intermediate between the two described varieties of the latter. A large anterior palatine foramen seems characteristic of apodemoides; both the maximum length (6°0) and the mean (5°4), exceeding that of the decidedly larger albocinerens typicus skull. EXPLANATION OF PLATES XII TO XV PLATE XII A typical habitat of Pscudomys (Gyonws) apodemoides: a general westerly view from a ridge near the eastern boundary of the Hundred of Coombe, South Australia. PLatE XII1 Three views of adult examples of Pscudomys (Gyomys) apodemoides, in captivity. (x 0-75 ca. ) (The tail shortening in the upper example is traumatic.) PLaTE XIV A, B, C. Dorsal aspeets of the skull of Pseudemys (Gronys) apodemoides shown by an immature g example of head and body Jength 67 mm., by an average adult g, and by a very aged ¢, respectively, and illustrating the progressive age changes in the cranial and facial regions. (x2-8, 2-6, 2-4.) D, Palatal aspect of the skull of the average adult @ figured at B. (x 2-6.) KE, Lateral aspect of the same. (x 2:6.) Plate XV A, B, free margin of the zygomatic plate in an immature g example of head and body length 67 mm., and in an aged 9, respectively, showing age changes in this feature. (x 9-0 ca.). C, Unworn upper molars of the right side in an aged @ (x9-0ca.). D, Worn upper molars of the right side in an aged 9 (x9-Oca.) FE, Worn upper molars of the right side in a similarly aged example of Pseudomys (Leggyadina) patrins Thomas and Doll- man. (x9-0Qca.) for comparison of the obliquity of the laminae with C and D. (The supple- mentary cingular cusp has been deleted.) F, Right pes of an adult @ (x3-3ca.) G, Right manus of an adult 9 (x4-0ca.), weak type. H, Ditto of another adult @ (x4-0ca.), stout type. Vol. 68, Plate XII Roy. Soc. S. Aust., 1944 Trans. sopromapodgn (sitmtot+) s\itopnosd JO yerrqey jeords} V uossepuly “HCH Ay 010g Vol. 68, Plate XIII Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust., 1944 Aytandeo ur sopromapodn (stuoty ) stiuopnasg JO SMILA uosdyuly “HA Aq OVO Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust., 1944 Vol. 68, Plate XIV D — e Skull characters of Pseudomys (Gyomys) apodemoides Photo by H. H. Finlayson Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust., 1944 Vol. 68, Plate XV Skull characters, pes, and manus of Pseudomys (Gyomys) apodemoides Photo by H. H. Finlayson AUSTRALIAN CUMACEA NO.8 THE FAMILY BODOTRHIDAE By HERBERT M. HALE, Director, South Australian Museum Summary Herein are recorded further new species, secured mainly by the Fisheries Division of the Commonwealth Council for Scientific and Industrial Research in the shallow waters off eastern Australia. Travs. Re 225 AUSTRALIAN CUMACEA No. 8 THE FAMILY BODOTRIIDAE By Herserr M. Hare, Director, South Australian Museum [Read 10 August 1944] Fig, 1-38 INTRODUCTION Herein are recorded further new species, secured mainly by the Fisheries Division of the Commonwealth Council for Scientific and Industrial Research in the shallow waters off eastern Australia. A satisfying natural classification of the Cumacea does not seem possible, at least at present. The genera and the grouping of the genera are based largely upon the loss or reduction of parts; this seems unavoidable in an Order embracing forms which, on the whole, are unadventurous in their departures from a basic uniformity. While the pleopods and the exopods of the peraeopods in their number serve in part as generic indicators, the ultimate result of placing undue emphasis upon these factors is exemplified in the classification proposed by Stebbing in 1913, who, using them freely as criteria, separates a relatively large number of families from the older ones, many containing only a few species. Acceptance of this system does not seem to be justified, particularly as it is reason- able to suspect that further loss convergences will be found to occur (see also Ifansen, 1920, 3). Family BODOTRITDAE In a recent discussion of the species of Cyclaspis (Hale, 1944), that genus was placed in the subfamily Bodotriinae, having the characters of the Bodotriidae as formerly limited. It has become increasingly evident that the family Vaunthomrpsoniidae, unless possibly one restricts it to the type genus, is by no means easily separable from the Bodotriidae and that probably the two families should be united (Hansen, 1895, 57: Calman, 1910, 616; Zimmer, 1913, 444, ete.). It is now submitted that there is support for the division of the Bodotriids into two subfamilies, the Bodo- triinae and Vaunthompsoniinae. limiting the former to those genera which com- pletely Jack exopods on all peraeopods excepting the first. This again associates [Teterocuma and Cumopsis with the Vaunthompsonia group of genera. Other characters for possible subdivision of the family present themselves, but the writer still feels that this would be premature. As Bodotria is the oldest genus of the whole assembly and it is often held that a family should take its name from the earliest described genus inchided in it, the long quoted Bodotriidae is here retained although Sars’ Vaunthompsoniidae has precedence of proposal. Subfamily BODOTRUNAE Genera: Bodotria Goodsir, 1828; [phinoe Bate, 1856; Cyclaspis Sars, 1865; Stephanomma Sars, 1871; Eocuma Marcusen, 1894; Cyclaspoides Bonnier, 1896; Zxvgosiphon Calman, 1907. No trace of exopods on any but the first pair of peraeopods. There is more often than not a reduction in number of the free thoracic somites and the endopod of the uropod is often undivided. uy. Sue. S.A. 63, (2), 30 November 1944 226 A two-jomted endopod is found in the uropod of /phinoe (where as far as known it is constant), in Bodotria (where it is inconstant and in the single species of Zygosiphon. The second antenna of the female is in general more rudimentary than in the Vaunthompsoniinae. The lamellae of the branchial apparatus are apparently never digitiform and on the whole do not show the reduction in number which occurs in Faunthompsonia and Bathycuma spp. (see Zimmer 1908, 165, ete.), and in Gephyrocuma, although in Zvgosiphon they are few, particularly in the female (fide Calman). Iphinoe resembles Vaunthompsonia more than do the other genera, all of which have characters never occurring in the Vaunthompsoniinae. Some slight additional support for its association with the Bodotriinae is afforded by [. pellucida sp. nov. which has abdominal articular pegs as in Cyclaspis. Three of the genera, Cyclaspoides, Stephanomma and Zygosiphon, are monotypic. The last-named is sharply differentiated by the wide separation of its branchial siphons, Cyclaspoides by having only two of the pedigerous somites free. Stephanomma appears, to be a Cyclaspis in which the fusion of the pseudorostral suture, sometimes found in the highly calcified members of the last- named genus, is very complete (Calman 1907, 14). The other four genera occur in both | lemispheres and, as might be expected, are represented in Australian seas. Genus Boporria Goodsir Bodotria maculosa sp. nov. Adult Male (South Australian form). Integument firm, moderately calcified but not brittle; finely reticulate. Carapace with dorsal edge scarcely arched, rugose; one-fourth of total length of animal, depressed, about one-fifth as wide again as.depth, which is a little more than half its length; median carina low; sides with a prominent longitudinal ridge. below which is a less marked carina which curves up posteriorly to meet the main ridge ; above the latter the carapace exhibits a coarse squamose-reticulate pattern- ing formed by large, shallow pits; the lower lateral carina is emphasised by a line of shallow pits immediately above it. Antennal notch deep and narrow, tooth subacute. Pseudorostral lobes wide and truncate anteriorly and reaching apex of ocular lobe, which is as wide as long with nine prominent yellowish lenses. First pedigerous somite concealed; second about as long as fourth or fifth but longer than third; on each somite there is a strong median carina, elevated posteriorly on the third to fifth somites, and a prominent lateral carina formed by the upper edge of a pronounced subquadrangular area on the lower half, Pleon stout, the first five somites each with dorsal carina, and with faint lateral ridge, which becomes successively less distinct. Margins of thoracic appendages and uropods more or less serrate. First antenna with first joint of peduncle stout, longer than rest of appendage ; second joint longer and stouter than third; main flagellum stout, two-jointed, shorter than third peduncular joint. Rasis of third maxilliped half as long again as rest of limb and with apical lobe rather wide; ischium unusually Jong, distinctly longer than merus or carpus which are dilated apically; dactylus downbent in subchelate fashion. First peraeopod stout, the carpus barely reaching to level of antennal tooth: basis about half as long again as rest of limb, not produced apically; carpus a little longer than merus, twice as Jong as the unusually short propodus and more 227 than three times as long as the dactylus, which is two-thirds as long as propodus ; dactylus with a stout terminal spine as long as itself and two or three short setae. Basis of second peraeopod barely longer than remaining joints together ; merus longer than carpus, equal in length to dactylus and twice as long as pro- podus; dactylus with no lateral spines. longer than the longest of its three terminal spines, which is twice as long as the others. Basis as long as remaining joints together in third legs, shorter in fourth and fifth pairs; propodal seta not quite reaching apex of dactylus; a single carpal seta (at base of which is an insignificant bristle) not reaching beyond middle of length of dactylus, Fig. 1 Bodotria maculosa. A, Side view of cephalothorax of type male of South Australian form. B, Side view of type of New South Wales form. (Both x 40). Peduncle of uropod one and three-fourths times as long as telsonic somite and with a fringe of plumose hairs on whole length of inner margin; endopod single-jointed, equal in length to telsonic somite, slightly longer than exopod, and with eleven spines on inner margin and a long and a short spine on truncate apex ; exopod with plumose hairs on inner margin and with a long and a short terminal spine on truncate apex. Colour yellow in alcohol, marked with numerous black spots (ground colour orange during life). Length, 4°2 mm. Loc.~South Australia: Spencer Gulf, Memory Grove, 3 fath., 8 to 8.30 p.m. (KK. Sheard, Feb, 1941), and Dangerous Reef, 4 fath., “Whiting bottom’? (type loc., K. Sheard, Mar. 1941, 8 to 8.30 p.m.); and Stickney Island, 3 fath. (IK. Sheard, Feb. 1944) ; St. Vincent Gulf, Corny Point, 2 fath., over sand (K. Sheard, Feb. 1941, 8 to 8.30 p.m.). and Rapid Bay (E. Hanka, H. Cooper and A. Rau, jan. 1944); Kangaroo Island, Antechamber Bay, 4 fath., 8 to 8.30 p.m. (K. Sheard, April 1941). Type in South Australian Museum, Reg. No. C.2365. 228 The specimens, all males, were taken by submarine lights. The colour spots vary in number and disposition, but the bright ground colour is of assistance in sorting material. The spines on the endopod of the uropod vary from nine to twelve. Adult Male (New South Wales form). Differs from the above in the fol- lowing characters. The size is smaller and the colour in alcohol is white with dark spotting; the squamose pitting of the carapace is more pronounced. ‘he thoracic appendages are slightly more slender with longer spines and setae. In the first peraeopods the dactylus is not much shorter than the propodus and the main terminal seta is longer than the dactylus. The longest dactylar spine of the Reo SS — Fig. 2 Bodotria maculesa, paratype male of South Australian form; ceph., cephalothorax from above (x 20); ant. 1, first antenna (x 175): mxp. 3, third maxilliped (x 82): prp. and urop., peracopods, and uropod with telsonic somite (x 82); terminal joints of peraeopods (x 175). A, Terminal joints of peraeopods of New South Wales form (x 175). 229 second peraeopods is longer than the propodus and dactylus together, and the main carpal and the propodal seta of the last three pair of legs reach quite to the tip of the dactylus (ci. 2 and 2A, all to same magnification ). Length, 3°5 mm. Smaller examples, 1-5 mm, to 1-9 mm., have the upper lateral carina of the carapace strong but the lower less apparent, it being defined by the edges of a row of pits which are less marked than in the adult. The rami of the uropods are three-fourths as long as the peduncle. Loc.—New South Wales: off Port Hacking, 50 metres on sand (type loc.), and off Wata Mooli, 35 metres on sand (K. Sheard, June 1942, and “Cronulla” Trawl Station 2, July 1943). Type in South Australian Museum, Reg. No. C2448. B. maculosa resembles arenosa Goodsir, but is separated at a glance by the posteriorly elevated dorsal carinae of the last three pedigerous somites, the wider form, the relatively shorter peduncle of the uropods, etc. B. pumilio Zimmer (1921, 119, fig. 4-7) is also similar in appearance but the adult is smaller (2 to 2°25 mm.) and, according to Zimmer’s figure of the male, the carinae of the last three pedigerous somites are not elevated posteriorly. Genus Eocuma Marcusen EocuMA AGRION Zimmer Kocuma agrion Zimmer 1914, 176, fig. 1-2. Zimmer’s specimens were taken at Fremantle (Perth), South-western Aus- iralia. The species also occurs at Cronulla (Sydney) on the eastern coast (Hale and Sheard, submarine light, 8 feet, September 1942 and January 1944), In life the colour is yellowish, the pleon being semi-transparent, and the deep pitting of the carapace is conspictious, The uropods are held wide apart; the rami of each are also spread to form a wide V, the exopod directed upwards and the endopod downwards. The pleon is very flexible. These specimens agree with the original description excepting that the size is larger and the tiny second peracopods have not the five joints (apart from coxa) shown in Zimmer’s small fig. 2d. In both sexes they consist of basis plus two other joints, each of which is about the same length as the basis; there are two unequal terminal setae, one being longer than any of the aforementioned three joints. Zimmer describes the female of this curious species in detail and briefly men- tions a damaged male. Adult Male. Integument thin, calcitied and brittle. Pitting varying on pleon but always distinct on carapace. Carapace plus the fused pedigerous somite fully one-fourth of total length; depressed, and with its depth less than half length; cornua larger than in female; antennal notch widely open and augle rounded. Ocular lobe much wider than long, slightly constricted at base ; corneal lenses not darkly pigmented; there is a large tumid central lens and two on each side. Pseudorostrum shorter than in female; there is a tubercle alongside a pit at the termination of each pseudo- rostral suture. Free pedigerous somites depressed, wider than in female (see figures). The pleon is much stouter than in the female; the telsonic somite has two median dorsal conical projections (the hinder one the larger) and is subtruncate posteriorly. 230 The first antenna has the third peduncular joint longer than second and half as long as first, which is expanded in distal half; the short flagellum is four- jointed, the accessory lash single-jointed. There are about 17 closely packed. long lamellae in the branchial apparatus. Third maxilliped much as in female. First peraeopod with basis nearly one-third as long again as rest of limb. Fig. 3 Eocuma agrion, male, from the side and (ceph.) cephalothorax from above (x 18); c. pace, anterior portion of carapace from above (x 30). Fig. 4 Eocuma agrion; ant. 1, first antenna (x 160; flagella x 320); uixp. 3, third maxilliped (x 70); 1, 2 and 3, first to third pedigerous somites (x54); prp. 2, second peraeopod (x 320); prp. 4, terminal joints of fourth peraeopod (x 160). 231 Third to fifth peraeopod with one stout carpal seta which, with that of pro- podus, reaches to the level of the tip of the slender dactylus. Peduncle of uropod as deep as telsonic somite and less than one-third as long as rami. Length, 6 mm. to 8 mm. Genus Iputnor Bate Iphinoe pellucida sp. nov. Ovigerous female, Integument rather thin, although lightly calcified, with faint pitting. Carapace with dorsal edge scarcely arched, with a slight angle between ocular lobe and the distinct pseudorostrum; one-fourth of total length of animal, and with depth about two-thirds its length and about equal to greatest breadth; sub- triangular as seen from above, the sides evenly rounded; a very fine though = Fig. 5 Iphinoe pellucida, allotype adult male, and paratypes ovigerous female and young male, from the side (x 27); ceph., cephalothorax of ovigerous female from above (x 27): urop., uropod of adult male (x 67). distinct dorsal carina; an indistinct depression on each side of anterior portion of median carina. Antennal notch wide and shallow ; antennal tooth obtuse. Pseudo- rostral lobes meeting in front of ocular lobe for a distance equal to length of latter (about one-tenth of carapace). Ocular lobe as wide as long, with seven colour- less lenses, the median one not. sharply defined. Five pedigerous somites exposed, the first short, but visible for whole of depth; second somite longer than third, fourth or fifth; all somites with a fine median carina. 232 Pleon with fine median carina on each somite including telson; first to fifth with distinct lateral articular pegs. First antennae with basal joint almost as long as remaining joints together; second and third subequal in length, each as long as the two-jointed flagellum. Basis of third maxilliped nearly twice as long as rest of limb, with outer lobe long and triangular; merus, carpus and propodus dilated. lirst peraeopod with carpus attaining level of antennal tooth; basis a little longer than remaining joints together; carpus and propodus subequal in length, vach nearly twice as long as dactylus, which is longer than the longest of its half- dozen terminal setae. Basis of second peraeopods longer than rest of limb; merus as long as carpus and propodus together and barely longer than dactylus; the last-named has a stout terminal spme almost as long as itself, two short. flanking spines, and a short spine on each side at middle of length. Tossorial legs sparsely armed, with propedal and carpal setae not reaching to apex of dactylus; one stout seta plus a very short one on carpus. Peduncle of uropod slender, with closed serrations on inver edge; more than talf as long again, as the exopod; endopod a little longer than exopod, distinctly wo-jointed, the first segment almost three times as long as the second, serrate and armed with four stout spines on inner edge; second segment serrate on inner edge and with a long and a short terminal spine; exopod with three spines at apex, the widdile much the longest, and half the length of the second segment. Colour: milky, translucent with a sooty band across anterior portion of carapace, Length, 4-66 mm. Adut Male, Differs trom the female in the narrower carapace and pediger- ous sonutes and the deeper pleon. The first pedigerous somite is less exposed; mner margin of peduncle of uropods with serrations rather more pronounced and with two series of spines in:posterior half, the upper short, at right angles to margin, the others oblique and serrate; first joint of endopod with about ten spines on inner edge and second with minute inner spines and two unequal terminal spines; exopod with three distal spines as in female (the inner is really subdistal) and a few plumose setate on inner margin. Length, 4°6 min, Young Male. The juvenile mate illustrated has tiny serrations on the dorsal erest Of the carapace behind the ocular lobe and the first pedigerous somite is almost completely concealed. Differs otherwise in usual immature characters— uropods relatively a little wider, ete. Loc—Tasmania: off Babel Island, 0-50 metres (“Warreew’ Station 29. 1939). New South Wales: stomach of Morwong or Jackass Fish (Daciylo- pearus macropterus) (A. C. Simpson, July 1939); off Wata Mooli, 70 metres (“Cronulla” Traw! Station 4, July 1943); off iden, 30 metres, trawled on coarse sand CK. Sheard, October 1943); four miles east of Port Hacking, 80 metres on mud (K. Sheard, trawled, May 1944); Ulladulla, 75 metres (type loc., KK. Sheard, trawled, June 1944). Types in South Australian Museum, Reg. No. C€.2539 and 2540. A large number of specimens is available. The pigmentation of the anterior part of the carapace, although more extensive in some examples than in others, is a very characteristic feature; there is usually also pigmentation at the lower cdge of the first five pleon somites. The colouration, shape, and extended pleon 233 of preserved maicrial render it easy of recognition amongst a mass of small Crustacea. Some ovigerous females are over 5 mm. in length, others smaller than the iype. The paratype female in fig. 5 is 4 mm. in length, and young from the marsupium are 0-8 mm. in length. Lateral articular pegs are present on the pleon as in most if not all of the species of Cyclaspis—indeed, but for two characters, the suppression of the ischium of the second legs and the two-jointed endopod of the uropod, /. pellucida would be referable to that genus. ant. 1 Fig. 6 Iphinoe pellucida, paratype ovigerous female; ant. 1, first antenna; mxp. 3, prp. and urop., third maxilliped, peraeopods and uropod (x 82: terminal joints, x 350). Although the general facies is very different, the only concise characters separating Iphinoe from Bodotria seem to be the complete absence of lateral carinae on the compressed carapace and the rather prominent pseudorostrum, Like crassipes Hansen, pellucida has the first joint of the endopod of the uropod much longer than the second; it is readily separated by the different pro- portions of the first pair of peraepods and other features. Subfamily VAUNTHOMPSONUNAE Exopods on at least the first three pairs of peraeopods, Always five pedigerous somites are exposed and the endopod of the uropod is two-jointed. The second artenna of the female is often 3-jointed, and in most genera the terminal, more or less conical, joint is distinctly separated off. Key to GENERA OF SUBFAMILY VAUNTHOMPSONIINAE 1 Basis of third maxilliped greatly expanded interiorly. First peraeopods with joints curiously expanded __.... es 0 ae ati i a: ae _ Basis of third maxilliped not expanded interiorly, First peraeopods not so modified. ae de hes Sa x : “ 4 234 to Pleon unusually short, never more than two-thirds as long as cephalothorax. First antenna strongly geniculate, with joints of peduncle subglobose, Gephyracuma Hale 2 Pleon not unusually short, at least as long as cephalothorax. Virst antenna not strongly geniculate, and joints not at all globose Be fe ide 3 ‘Pelsonic somite subtruncate, scarcely produced posteriorly. Basis of third maxilliped with large inner distal lobe and basis of first peraeopod with no distal lobe _ . . bob .Zenocumia gen, nov. Telsonic somite well pedulad Apstariatiy, Basis of third maxilliped with no inner distal lobe and basis of first peraeopod with distal lobe. Pomacuma gen. nov. 4 Second peracopod with a distal brush of setae on propodus and dactylus, but no spines. Fourth peraeopod of female with small exopod ... |... Leptocuma Sars. Second peraeopod without brushes of setae on terminal joints, but with spines on at least dactylus. Fourth peraeopod of female without exopod 3 5 Dorsal plate of telsonic somite subtruncate posteriorly and not at all produced between hases of uropods F we: sé} Rs Ch su es, Dorsal plate of telsonic somite rounded or somewhat angular posteriorly and produced between bases of uropods Ae wt vas < a Ut Dorsal plate of telsonic somite truncate uoubevidrty: Endopod of pleopods with narrow external process. [External distal portion of basis of third maxilliped not produced and bearing about five stout plumose setae or ... Cumopsis Sars. Dorsal plate of telsonic somite excavated posteriorly . Endopod of pleopods with- out external process. External distal portion of basis of third maxilliped pro- duced as a prominent lobe capped with two stout plumose setae. ffeterocuma Miers 7 Third maxilliped with external distal portion of basis not at all, or not strongly, produced and with ischium short (much wider than long); merus much longer than ischium but shorter than carpus Age st aw. Faunthompsonia Bate Third maxilliped with external distal dothibu, of basis prominently produced and with ischium at least as long as wide, subequal in length to merus and carpus... 8 & Eye present. Pseudorostral lobes not reaching beyond ocular lobe ite 9 Eye absent. Pseudorostral lobes reaching forward and beyond level of front of ocular lobe we re i om 4454 sty we TG 9 Fourth peraeopod of rate with piatisied cds she a. Glyphocuma gen. nov. Fourth peraeopod of male without exopod .... sess ... Synpedonma Stebbing 10 Pseudorostral lobes meeting in front of ocular lobe. ‘Telsonic portion of last pleon somite much shorter than rest of somite .... 2439 .. Bathycuna Hansen Pseudorostral lobes not meeting in front of ocular lobe. Telsonic portion of last pleon somite as long as rest of somite .... the ee .. Gaussticuma Zinmer The Australian species which have come to hand are of considerable interest. Although investigation of our waters is by no means comprehensive as yet, it is evident that this subfamily is well represented but does not equal the Bodotrtinae in number of species and individuals because of the ever present Cyclaspis, which is the dominant genus of the family, at least on sandy bottoms. It seems also that Vaunthompsonia itself is rare and that the important elements group themselves around three main types, represented by Syinpodomma Stebbing, Leptocuma Sars and Gephyrocuma llale. The last of these comprise what might be termed the “operculate” genera and are here dealt with first. Tur OPERCULATE GENERA In these the first pair of peraeopods can be folded to form the major part “of an operculum which bridges the space between the infero-lateral folds of the carapace, and closes the cavity of the latter from the exterior; these limbs and the third maxillipeds also are curiously expanded and otherwise modified. Zimmer (1921, 4) described a single young male, which he did not dissect, af the first of such species from North-Western Australia, referring it temporarily 235 to Vaunthompsonia; what appears to be his species—australiae—is now available from eastern Australia. The present writer (Hale 1936, 412) subsequently proposed a genus, Gephyrocuma, for the reception of a second operculate species, which possesses first legs very much as in Zimmet’s form (excepting that the basis lacks a distal lobe) but which has the third maxilliped very different, the basis of that appendage being not only more widened interiorly, but at the anterior end sweeping forward and inward to form a broad, truncate lobe. Another species of this genus is described herein. There is also before me a large species related to the small Gephyrocuma and with similar third maxilliped but with other differences warranting generic separa- tion; for this a new genus, Zenocnia, is erected. A further species is accommo- dated, with Zimmer’s australiar, ina third genus, Pomaciuima nov. The basis of the third maxilliped and first peraeopod is widened and more or less twisted, or flanged, in all three genera. In the first peraeopod the ischium is in the form of a rounded lobe with an exterior excavation, The articulations between ischium, merus, carpus and propodus allow for a complete folding of the appendage (Zimmer refers to it as subchelate). The inner portions of the carpus and, to a lesser extent, the propodus, are dilated, and in the carpus lamellate. The proximal portion of the dactylus is swollen on the upper or outer face. There is a dense distal brush of long plumose setae on the inner side of the propodus and on that of the dactylus, while there is a row of plumose setae on the carpus. The development of plumes of setae on the terminal joints of the first legs is by no means unique in the Cumacea, although the operculate genera are unusually well endowed. The “grasping motions” of Gephyrocuma pala (Hale 1943, 341) suggest that the algal debris found in the stomach and massed around the mouth may be collected in the same way as is the food of Porrellamid crabs and non- parasitic Cirripedia. It should be mentioned that amongst smaller material found beneath the maxillipeds of Pomacuma is a grain of sand 0-25 mm. in diameter. The operculum is differently formed in each of the genera. A female example of Zenocuma, with the operculum in position (see fig. 7, A-D) has the joints of the first peraeopods and third maxillipeds in the following relative positions. The basis joints of the third maxillipeds meet completely in the midline, and form a vault or bridge in the form of a half-cylinder, tapering to the rear and open at the anterior end. The inner portions of the basis and ischium of the first peracopods overlap the outer edges of the maxillipedal vault; the lamellate inner portions of the carpal joints overlie the inner edges of the propodi; the outer edges of basis, merus and carpus lie against the infero-lateral folds of the cara- pace; the rounded inner proximal end of each carpus fits into the scooped outer face of the lobe of the ischium, The outer portion of each basis of the first peraeopods is flanged, so that when it lies against the infero-lateral fold of the carapace a narrow ventral gutter results, tapering towards the front; the exopod of this limb, together with that of the third maxilliped, lies in and fills this gutter, the plumose setae being folded together like the hairs of a wet camel-hair brush. (In the figures the exopods are not shown in this position.) The propodi of the first peracopods are placed together but are actually in contact only towards each end, a slight curvature of the joints leaving a narrow gap through which the first antennae may protrude (fig. 7, B and C). In Gephyrocuma the relationship of third maxillipeds to first peraeopods is much as in Zenocuma but the proximal thirds of the propodi of the first legs 236 curve against the peduncles of the first antennae which here are stout, swollen and geniculate, filling the gaps below the pseudorostral lobes (fig. 7, IF), the flagella being thrust beneath the overhanging portions of the latter. With the operculum in operation in both Zenocuma and Gephyrocuma, the dactylus with its setae, and the propodal setae (folded together like a fan) are all housed inside the maxillipedal vault, the anterior opening of which is plugged by the swollen distal ends of the propodi; the plumose geniculate palp of the third maxilliped is also covered by the inner lobe of the basis of that appendage. ant zx, carpus prp. 1. propodus prp, I, merus prp. I. seve, ischium prp. i. ant. propodus prp, I, carpus prp. I, ot merus prp. f. basis ischium prp. I. mxp, 3 antz basis prp. I. carpus prp, 1. Za “4 propodus prp, I, merus prp, r. basis mxp, 3, ischium prop, r, basis prp. x. c E Fig. 7 Letociwma rugosa, paratype iemale; A, B and ©. carapace and appendages from side, front and below: in C, the body is tilted slightly upwards (x 26); D, oblique fromtal view, below ocular lobe (x45). E. Carapace and appendages of Cephyrocuma pala fram the front (x 45). As stated above, the basis of the first peraeopod of Pomacuima differs from the other two genera in possessing a distal lobe, but that of the third maxilliped, though a good deal widened interiorly, lacks such lobe. In this: genus the basis joints of the first legs meet intimately in the mid-line of the body for their whole length when the limbs are folded; they are closely applied to, and completely conceal, the shorter third maxilliped basis joints and project beyond them. Here the distal lobe of the basis of the first peraeopod plays the same part as the maxilli- pedal lobe of the other genera, the anterior end of the propodus of the same 237 peraeopod fitting against it. As in Zenocuma and Gephyrocuma the exopods of the third maxillipeds and first peraeopod fit into a gutter between the basis joints of the last-named and the infero-lateral folds of the carapace ; the palp of the third maxilliped is far less geniculate than in the others and is extended well forward, covered by the carpo-propodal part of the first legs. Further modifications resulting from these arrangements will be noted im the descriptions and fig. 8 to 16, The three genera could be placed in a separate subfamily because of the character of the third and fourth thoracic appendages but, as described above, these are not really identical in all of them. Genus Zenocuma nov, Feniale, Form superficially as in Vaunthompsonia but integument rather highly calcified. Carapace with pseudorostral lobes extending in advance of moderately large ocular lobe but diverging so that their anterior ends are well separated; antennal notch a closed, but not fused. st, Vive pedigerous somites exposed, the first short. Pleon as long as cephalothorax; telsonic somite subtruncate posteriorly the distal margin bisinuate and scarcely at all produced medianly. First antenna normal, with accessory flagellum single-jeinted. Second antenna relatively large, three-jointed, the two terminal joints subequal in length. Mandible robust, with lacinia and molar process long and stovt. Second maxilliped slender, not at all expanded. Third maxilliped with well-developed exopod; basis with an external distal lobe which almost reaches anterior end of merus and is furnished with a serics of long, stout, plumose setae; interiorly the joint is greatly broadened, particularly distally where it sweeps forward to form a truncate arched lobe which is ene- fourth as wide as total leneth of joint; there is a series of a dozen or so broad, tapering but short plumose setae on proximal half only of the inner margin. Remaining joints forming a geniculate “palp”; ischium short; carpus expanded in proximal half and propodus widened distally, the widened portions with series of long plumose setae; dactylus with plumose setae. (It is not possible to show all the setae in the drawings. ) First three pairs of peraeopods with well-developed exopods (peduncle and jointed flagellum); fourth with rudimentary single-jointed exopod capped with a few setae. Basis of first peraeopod slightly expanded towards the anterior end which is subtruncate and a little excavate, rounded externally; there is a stout spine near distal end of inner margin and posterior to it, after an interval, is a row of other spines interspersed with plumose setae; ischium with inner lobe; merus articulat- ing at outside of ischium; carpus expanded proximally with series of plumose setae. Carpus of second peraeopod little shorter than merus. Endopod of uropods two-jointed, the distal segment very short; inner margin of exopod with slender “serrate” spines. Genotype Zenocuine rugosa sp. Nov. The male is as yet unknown. The female has the exopodal furniture just as in the related Pomacuma gen nov., and Leptocuma, as recognised by the writer for six Australian species. In both of these and in Gephyrocuma Hale (which has essentially the same modification of third and fourth thoracic appendages as Zenocuma) the exopods do not differ in the sexes and there are five pairs of E 238 pleopods in the male; one would be inclined to believe that this is the case in Zcnocuma also, but the assumption cannot be accepted with any degree of con- fidence when Calman’s Leptocuma minor is borne in mind (see notes under Leplocuma herein.) ne species only is available. Zenocuma rugosa sp. nov. Female. Carapace as seen from the side little arched but rugose for whole length, particularly in posterior half, owing to development of a median carina which is wide and fused-tuberculate and flattens out posteriorly; a rather deep dorsal excavation on each side of carina on anterior half, the lateral edges of which are tuberculate and the interior of which has one or two low tubercles; the Fig. 8 Zenocuma rugosa, paratype female; third niaxilliped and first peraecopod (x 19); distal end of basis, etc. (x 50): ant. and prp., antennae and distal joints of second and fourth peraeopods (x 50); urop., uropod, with fifth pleon and telsonic somites (x19; distal ends of rami, x 62). 239 whole carapace is plump but compressed, less than half as long again as decp and a little longer than pedigerous somites together. Pseudorostrum shorter than ocular lobe; pseudorostral lobes subtriangular and narrowly rounded anteriorly when viewed cither from above or from the side, just meeting at front of ocular lobe, then flaring outwards so that they are widely divergent, the inner parts in front of eye-lobe are bent downwards, producing a short longitudinal crease. Ocular lobe bilobed in front, about as wide as long, blackish, with lenses obscure but three can be discerned on each side and a central one still less defined. Pedigerous somites two to five elevated on posterior halt when viewed from side; first smooth; dorsum of second with a faint transverse elevation and a pair of longitudinal carinae; back of third to fifth with a transverse ridge (that of third with a pair of median tumidities) which joins a faint longitudinal dorso- lateral ridge; on the fifth, and still less distinctly marked on fourth, is a lateral ridge just below the dorso-lateral ; the second somite, as usual in the group, over- laps the carapace in front and is in turn over-ridden by the anterior pleural portions of the third; posterior pleural parts of third and fourth produced back- wards in the form of a large rounded lobe. Each of pleon somites one to five with on each side a dorso-lateral carina, two lateral carinae and an infero-lateral ridge; these are least pronounced cn first and second, then become conspicuous; there is in addition a median dorsal carina which is not well defined until the third somite, thence to the fifth it is distinct ; telsonic somite with median carina on proximal third only, also a dorso—lateral and a lateral ridge on each side; it is not much longer than wide, not much more than half as long as fifth pleon somite, with posterior margin bisinuate on each side, scarcely produced and widely triangular in the middle. First joint of peduncle of wide superior antenna as long as second and third joints together with flagellum; second joint nearly twice as long as third ; flagellin two-jointed, the first segment more than twice as long as second. Second antenna relatively large, its terminal joint subconical, longer than second and with well-developed apical sensory appendages. Mandible with ten or eleven spines in the row, successively stouter from in front backwards; molar process as long as distal portion of trunk anterior to it. Basis of third maxilliped twice as long as palp if stretched out, its greatest width nearly one-third of its length; carpus distinctly more than twice as long as merus and one-third as long again as propodus; dactylus little longer than merus. First peraeopod with basis much shorter than rest of limb; propodus more than one-third as long again as carpus and nearly twice as long as dactylus ; distal plumose brush of propodus equal in length to propodus and dactylus combined. Second peraeopod with basis stout, not as long as remaining joints together ; carpus equal in length to dactylus, not much shorter than merus, and more than twice as long as propodus; dactylus with four stout spines on inner margin (the first and last a little larger than the middle two) and two very unequal distal spines, the longer almost half as long as the joint; the igure shows the other stout and slender spines, and plumose setae. Third to filth peraeopods stout; basis of third subequal in length to remainder of limb, that of fourth and fifth only half as long or less; carpus with four strong distal fossorial setae (as well as a comb of short setae) which with propodal seta reach well beyond the blunt dactylar claw, which has a short outer seta at its base, Uropod with peduncle and endopod strongly ridged longitudinally, the former a little longer than telson and two-thirds as long as endopod, which is more 240 than one-eighth longer than exopod; its inner margin bears spines which are mostly of the same size; first joint of endopod more than five times as long as second, with an inner row of unequal spines and a single spine at outer distal corner ; second joint of endopod with only one inner spine and with two or three unequal spines at rounded apex; exopod with a row of slender compound (“serrate”) spines on inner margin followed by a single short strong spine and four or five which may be regarded as apical, one being much longer than the others; on outer margin near apex is a single small spine. Colour cream or dark orange-yellow with brown chromatophores on cara~ pace, and a darker brown marking at each postero-lateral corner of excavation on back of carapace; eve black; very fine chromatophores on pleon. The portion: [ fa | \ \ L Fig. 9 Zenocwina rugosa, type female; lateral view and cephalothorax from above (x 10); anterior part of carapace from the side and from above (x 20). of the first peraeopods and third maxillipeds exposed when the operculum is in position are boldly mottled with dark brown. Length, 14°5 mm. Loe——New South Wales: off Jibbon, 35 fath., in coarse sand (K. Sheard, Feb. 1940); off Eden, 30 metres, trawled in coarse sand (K. Sheard, Oct. 1943); Ulladulla, 75 metres, trawled in sand (type loc., K. Sheard, June 1944), Type female in South Australian Museum, Reg. No. C.2535. At each of the above localities this form was taken in company with Pomacuima australiaec, as well as a dozen or more other species of Cumacea: it stands out from Pomacuma, not only by its larger size, but because of the gaping pseudorostral lobes, subtruncate telsonic somite, unequal rami of the uropods, etc. ; 241 the jutting basis of the third maxilliped is also very apparent when the anterior appendages are partly opened, as they often are in preserved material (fig. 9). Genus Pomacuma nov. Female. Form superficially as in Vaunthompsonia,; integument little calcified, Carapace with pseudorostral lobes extending in front of moderately large ocular lobe and meeting in the mid-line; antennal notch, as in Zenocuma, a closed slit. Five pedigerous somites exposed, the first short. Pleon longer than cephalo- thorax; telsoni¢ somite well produced posteriorly, the distal margin rounded. First antenna normal, with accessory flagellum single-jointed. Second antenna three-jointed, like that of Zenocuma. Mandible with long lacinia and long, stout molar process. Epipod of first maxilliped with a dozen or more wide lamellate gill-lobes with thickened edges. Second maxilliped slender. Third maxilliped with well-developed exopod; basis with a short external distal lobe bearing a fan of plumose setae; the joint is widened interiorly and is truncate distally but is not forwardly produced; there is a series of plumose setae on the whole length of inner margin, the distal ones about as long as those of external lobe; remaining joints much as in Zenoeuma, but the palp is rather Jess markedly geniculate (full series of plumose sctae not shown in figures). First three pairs of peraeopods with well-developed exopods ; fourth pair with rudimentary single-jointed exopod. capped with a few setac. Basis of first peracopod widened distally where a large forwardly directed lobe is produced interiorly C‘Oberseite” of Zimmer ) reaching to the level of anterior end of oblique articulation of ischium and merus; remaining joints as in Zenocuma and Gephyrociina, Carpus of second peraeopod much shorter than merus, Iendopod of uropod two-jointed, the distal segment very short; iuner margin of exopod with plumose setae, Male. Vleon relatively slightly longer than in feniale. Second antenna reaching to end cf pleon. the longest joints of flagellum only half as long again as wide. Thoracic exopods as in female. Five pairs of pleopods. Genotype Pomacuma cognata sp. nov. This genus is related to Zenocunts but the important differences in the struc- ture of the basis of the third maxilliped and first peraeopod, and in the pseudo- rostrum and telsonic somile are very apparent without dissection. It may be noted also that Pomuacima has plumose setae on the whole of the inner margin of the basis of the third maxillipeds, and they are of different type from those occurring on proximal half only in Zenocrina; further, this basis, although less expanded than in the last-named genus, still 1s about one-fourth as wide as long owing to its relative shortness due to absence of a distal lobe; it does not project beyond the anterior end of basis of the first peraeopod. Two well defined species are available from off eastern Australia. One of these, excepting for a few trivial ditferences, closely resembles Zimmer’s Western Faunthompsonia (?) australiae and so is referred to that species; im any case austrahae is undoubtedly congeneric with cognata. 242 IKKEY Toa SPECIES OF PowaAce MA Carpus of third maxilliped more than half as long again as propodus. Dactylus of second peraeopod more than three times as long as propodus and with ten spines on inner margin. Uropod with peduncle equal in length to first joint of endopod and with a row of spines on distal third of outer margin of exopod. Pleon ridged —.... : a ner han on te .. €oynata sp. Nov. Carpus of third manilliped tess than half as long again as propodus. Dactyius of second peraeopod fess than three times as long as propodus and with only about seven spines on inner margin. Uropod with peduncle distinctly shorter than first joimt of endopod and with no long row of spines on outer margin of exopod. Pleon smooth See ser . : 4 .. australiac (Zimmer) Pomacuma cognata sp. noy. Ovigerous Female, Integument glossy. with very fine reticulate pattern and superficial pitting. Carapace as seen from side slightly arched dorsally; it is half as long again as deep and not quite as long as pedigerous somites together; the outline is rugose Fig. 10 Pomacinnea counatt, teope ovigerous femate: ant. 1, fisst antenna (X86); mxp. 3, palp and distal end of basis of third maxilliped (x86): prp. 1, merus, ischium and distal end of hasis of first peracopod (x 86): prp. 2. secand peracapod, basis not shown (x86): nrop.. nropod, with fifth pleon and telsonic somites (x 26: distal half of rami, x 80). 245 in posterior half owing 10 the tuberculation of a well-developed median carina, which is flanked on each side in anterior half by a depression; the latter has tuber- culate edges and inside it are two rows of ill-defined large tubercles; sides with sparse, small low rounded tubercles. Pseudorostral lobes each slightly produced in front, so that pseudorostrum has a somewhat pointed appearance. Ocular lobe as wide as long, black with the corneal lenses not easily made out. Pedigerous and pleon somites with sculpturing essentially as described for Zenocuma rugosa but not so strongly marked. Telsonic somite nearly half as long again as wide and less than two-thirds as long as fifth pleon somite; its produced posterior part comprises one-fourth of its length. Fig. i Pomacuma cognata, type ovigerous female; lateral view (x 17) and anterior part of carapace from above (x 46). first joint of upper antenna nearly twice as Jong as second which is more than half as long again as third and longer than ‘the stout two-jointed flagellum. Third joint of second antenna capped with short but well developed sensory appendages. Mandible with about 17 spines in the long row. Carpus of third maxilliped nearly two and two-thirds times as long as merus, fully two-thirds as long again as propodus and more than twice as long as dactylus. First peracopod much as in aistraliac, but with joints ot slightly different proportions. Dactvius of second peraeopod distinctly more than three times as long as propodus, two and two-thirds times as long as carpus, and almost half as long again as imerus; its inner margin bears a row of ten spines (sce note under 244 australiae), and distally it has a Jong spine and a shorter one; other furniture is shown in the figure of this limb, Posterior peraeopods robust, with four stout distal carpal setae reaching well heyond tip of dactylus. Uropod with peduncle as long as first joint of endopoed and with a row of spaced spines on inner edge; endopod equal in length to exopod, with first joint almost four times as long as second and with many unequal, closely-set spines on inner margin; longer terminal spine of second segment distinetly longer than the latter: rounded distal end of exopod with four slender blunt-ended spines and outer margin with nine spines on distal third, successively increasing in length from first backwards. Colour, biscuit brown with darker indefinite shadings. Length, 8 mim.; ova, 0-28 mm. in diameter. Loc—New South Wales: off Coffs Harbour, 30°18’S., 153° 16’ E., 50 metres (CK. Sheard, June 1941). ‘Type in South Australian Museum, Ree. No. C2482. This species turned up only once in the hauls made off eastern Australia which may indicate that it is not so abundant there as is the second species referred to the genus, POMACUMA AUSTRALIAE (Zinmet ) Feunthompsonia (2) australiae Zimmer, 1921, 4, fig. 1-7. Leptocwmna australiae Hale, 1936, 409, Female. integument glossy with very fine reticulate pattern. Carapace seen from the side almost evenly arched dorsally, very slightly sinuate on posterior half; median carina distinct. clear eut in front half, where on each side 1s a smooth, shallow but quite apparent excavation: sides smooth: itis plump, as wide as deep, less than half as long again as depth and barely as Fig, 12 Pomeacwna australiae, female: lateral view and cephalothorax from above (x 15); telsonic somite and anterior part of carapace from the side (x 36). 24 ant long as pedigerotis soniites together, Pseudorostral lobes roundly and obliquely subtruncate in front, not at all pointed and meeting in advance of eye-lobe for a distance equal to barely half the length of the latter. Ocular lobe as long as wide, rounded in front, very slightly constricted at base, black, with eye lenses apparently as described by Zimmer but their definition confused by pigment. Pedigerous and pleon somites smooth, rounded. ‘Telsonic somite rather less than half as long again as wide and less than two- thirds as long as fifth pleon somite which is only slightly narrowed towards the rear; produced distal portion fully one-fourth of total length of somite. Antennae as in cognata, Basis of third mawilliped more than half as long again as palp when fully extended ; carpus barely more than twice as long as merus, not quite half as long again as propodus, and about twice as long as dactylus. Basis of first peraeopod as long as rest of limb, with plumose hairs on outer edge including distal end (two or three) and with spines and plumose setae on inner edge, leaving distal part and lobe unarmed; ischium, including lobe, about as long as merus; propodus more than half as long again as carpus and twice as long as dactylus. Dactylus of second peracopod about two and one-third times as long as propodus, less than twice as long as carpus and scarcely longer than merus; its miner margin bears a row of five to seven spines, and there is a long distal spine and a short one; other furniture sec figure. Posterior peracopods robust, with four distal carpal setae which with pro- wndal seta reach well beyond tip of dactylus. Uropod with peduncle six-sevenths as long as first joint of endopod and with a few spines on inner margin; endepod equal in length to exopod, its first joint wearly five times as long as second, with short spines on inner margin, interspersed with longer spines; second joint, as in cogiata, with a row of inner spines which snecessively increase very slightly in length, but with the longer terminal spine of he rounded distal end shorter than the joint; apex of exopod with three or four blunt, stout, very unequal spines and with only one small, stout, subdistal spine on otiter margin. Colour translucent, with brown chromatophores which are often massed to form an irregular pattern, the most consistent markings being situated at the wosterior ends of dorsal excavation of carapace. Sometimes the second and third pedigerous sontites have the back brown and a brown patch on cach pleural part, while the posterior half of the first pleon somite is darkened. The eye is always dhaish-black. Length, subadult, 8-7 mun, tdult Male. ‘Vhe same slight irregularity of the dorsal contour of the carapace is present, but is barely discernible. First antenna of slightly different propertions (second peduncular joint twice as long as third, as shown by Zimmer), with flagella more robust and generously furnished with sensory setae; the main flagellum appears to be three-jointed, but the last “joint” may, as sur- nused by Zimmer, represent the bases of the terminal sensory appendages. The last joint of the peduncle of the second antenna is fully two-thirds as long again as the penultimate; the proximal joints of the flagellum are as wide as long, or wider, but soon become relatively more elongate but never very much so as in Paunthompsonia, The uropods differ from those of the female in having a greater number of marginal spines (second series well developed on peduncle), those of the second 246 endopodal joint being interspersed with smaller spines, etc.; the plumose hairs on the exopod are longer and the distal spines of that ramus a little more robust. Length, 9 mm. Loc.—Queensland: off Fraser Island, 24° 20’S., 153° 02’ W. (*Warreen” Station 31, Sept. 1938). New South Wales: off Broughton Island, at sur- face (D. L. Serventy, midnight, Dec, 1938); off Jibbon, 35 fath., in coarse sand (K. Sheard, Feb. 1940); off Wata Mocli, 70 metres (“Cronulla” Trawl Station 4, July 1943); off Eden, 30 metres, trawled in coarse sand (K. Sheard, Oct. 1943); Ulladulla, 75 metres, trawled in sand (K. Sheard, June 1944). Hab.—North-Western and eastern Australia. Fig. 13 " Pomoacnina australiae, female: ant. 2, second antenna; mxp. 3, palp and distal end of basis of third maxitliped; prp. 1, merus, ischium and distal end of basis of first peraeopod; prp. 2, second peraeopod, basis not shown: prp. 4, distal joints of fourth peracopod (all x 86): urop., uroped with filth pleon and telsonic somites (x 26; distal half of rami, x 100). 247 Zimmer regarded his species as representative of a new gertus beeause of the structure of the third mavilliped and first peracopod. He did not dissect his single young male. but illustrates the basis of this maxilliped as truncate at the level of the insertion of the palp. Although he shows the dorsal margin of the carapace as perfectly smooth, there is little doubt that the castern specimens are correctly Is, as far iS referred: the proportions of the joints of third maxillipeds and peracopas as shown, seen much the same, and there are six inner spines on the carpus 01 the second legs. There are, however, some differences ; Zimmer states that the big. 14 t mate; ant. 1, first antenna (x 42; flagella, x 170): moxp. 3. third manilliped (x 42): prp.. peracopeds (x32; lobe of basis of first, "1 « } . : % % is ~ x82): urep., uropod: apices of rami (x 170). Pomeacunia australiac, adul telsonic somite is not much produced posteriorly and shows it as so i his fig. 7; also. he figures three small subapical spines on the outer margin of the uropedal exopod. He remarks incidentally the characteristic blunt terminal spines of this ramus, which differ slightly from those of ceguata, The several types of cone posite setae and other projections occarring in Cumacea, and loosely referred io as “spines” for taxonomic purposes. are worthy of special studies such as have been applied elsewhere. Genus Gepiyrocuma Hale Gephyrocuina Hale, 1936, 412; and 1943, 340. Oeular lobe wide and not distinctly separated off from frontal lobe; lenses very large. Antennal noich so widely open that no distinet incision or antennal angle is evident. Pleon reduced, at most only about two-thirds as long as cephalothorax in the male, shorter in the female. 248 first antenna strongly geniculate, with joints of peduncle globose. Second antenna of female indistinetly three-jointed, the third segment clongate and with a ninute terminal jointlet (fig. 17, ant. 2). Basis of third maxillipeds without external apical lobe but with very large inner lobe. Basis of first peraeopod distinetly twisted, with no distal inner Lobe. IExopods of peraeopods identical in both sexes; well developed on first and second pairs, and rudimentary on third and fourth. On the third pair the exopod is cither single-jointed, or with peduncle and first joint only of flagellum developed. Uropeds with short peduncle and with endopod two-jointed, the first see- ment much longer than the second. Key to Species or GepHyrocuMAa Exopod of third peraecopod with two joints. Endopod of uropod without spines on miner margin . . ' . pala Hale fexopod of third peracopod single-jointed. Endopod of uropod with a row of spines on inner margin . i repanda sp. nov. Gephyrocuma repanda sp. noy. Adult Male, Integument thin and fragile, somewhat polished. Warapace as seen from the side with dorsal margin evenly and slightly convex ; file more than one-third of total length of animal; twice as long as depth, which is equal to the width; dorsal carma scarcely apparent. Pscudorostral lobes micet- in front of the ocular lobe for a distance equal to about one-third of the length ne latter; wide and truncate anteriorly. Ocular lobe much broader than long, are Pig. 15 Gepiyrocunur repanda, type adult mate ox 32). Pedigerous somites all exposed, together two-thirds as long as carapace 3 first somite short, concealed on sides; postero-lateral portions of each of second, fourth and ftth somites produced backwards as a rounded lobe: second to fourth not differmg markedly in length. Pleon more than two-thirds as long as cephalothorax: third to fifth somites somewhat deeper than the others. hirst antenna very stout; joints of peduncle almost globose, the diameter in the second and third being equal to the length; first segment of peduncle as long as rest of appendage: flagellum three-jointed and accessory flagellum small, stout and knob-hike. 249 Pay Second antenna long, the flagellum reaching beyond end of telson. Epipod of first maxilliped with four stout digitiform gill-lobes, two of which are smaller than the others, Basis of third maxillipeds with width of inner lobe equal to one-third of length of joint; two short plumose setae on inner edge; the carpus of the extended geniculate palp does not quite reach level of distal end of basis. First peracopod with its massive basis distinctly longer than rest of limb; carpus a little shorter than propodus, its greatest width two-thirds its length ; dactylus short and stout, less than half as Jong as propodus. Basis of second peraeopod three times as long as wide, more than half as long again as remainder of limb; ischium distinct; merus as Jong as dactylus and longer than carpus or propodus, the last-named, nevertheless. not much shorter than the dactylus; the dactylus has three rather stout distal spines. Fig. 16 Gephyrocuma repanda, paratype adult male; c. pace, anterior portion of carapace (x 30); ant. 1, first antenna (x 155); mxp. 3, prp. and urop., third maxilliped, peracopods and uropod (x75; spines and seta, x 330). Merus of third peraeopods barely shorter than basis, that of fourth and fifth pairs much longer than basis; propodi and dactyli short and stout; three distal carpal setae, the longest reaching well beyond tip of dactylus; exopods of third and fourth legs rudimentary, without trace of flagellum (fig. 17, B). Peduncle of uropods stout, only about half as long as exopod and with a row of long plumose setae on inner margin; endopod a little longer than exopod; its first joint is more than twice as long as the second and its inner margin bears spinules and, on the distal half, a row of short stout spines; second joint with an 250 inner row of half-a-dozen stout spines and with a terminal spine; exopod with three unequal apical spines and a row of long plumose sctae on inner margin (he. 17, B). Colour translucent with orange chromatophores (artificial lighting), which appear black after preservation, arranged as shown in fig. 15, Length, 3-25 mm. Juvenile Male. he pleon is shorter than in the adult male. but is much onger than the pedigcrous somites together. Length, 2 mm. Non-ovigerous Female, Vhe pleon, though relatively smaller than in the adult nale, is much longer than the pedigcrous somites together. eength, 2°5 mim. Loe.—New South Wales: Cronulla, 8 feet, on coarse sand (ivpe loc.; H. M. tale and JX. Sheard, submarine light, Sept. 1942 and Jan. 1944); Port Hacking, 50 metres, on coarse sand (K. Sheard, June 1943); off Wata Mooli, 35 metres, on sand (“Cronulla” Trawl Station 2, July 1943); Jibbon, 45-50 metres, on coarse sand (“Cronulla” Trawl Station 10, Aug. 1943); Ulladulla, 75 metres (K. Sheard, trawled, July 1944). Type male in South Australian Museum, Reg. No. C.2474, Most of the examples are adult males secured at Cronulla; the single female was taken off Jibbon. In fig. 15 the concavity shown in the outline of the carapace below the pseudo- rostrum is that into which the carpo-propodal articular areas of the first peraeopod fit when the operculum is in operation, The projecting distal end of the basis of the third maxilliped may be seen below the ischio-carpal part of the first leg; this is even wider than in the genotype, as is also the carpus of the first peraeopod. ‘he carpus and propodus of the first leg accordingly form a wider angle when folded, the triangular lamellate part of the carpus overlapping slightly the outer distal portion of the maxillipedal lobe; the peraeopod fits so intimately against the manxilliped that it is not easv to detect the margins. The fragile integument collapses on partial drying, CEPHYROCUMA PALA Tlale Gepharocuma pala Hale, 1936, 412, fig. 5-6; and 1934, 340, fig. 8-9. This, the genotype, apart from the smaller size, shows many constant differ- ences from the New South Wales species. Male. The pleon is shorter, at most barely longer than the pedigerous somites together. The subconical accessory flagellum of the first antenna is larger. The distal spines of the second peracopods are longer, and are four in number. while the exopods of the third and fourth legs are much larger, that of the third pair consisting of two joints, peduncle and first segment of the flagellum. The distal spines of the rami of the uropods are not so stout; the second joint of the endopod is more than half as Jong as the first. and neither segment has spines on the inner margin (cf. A and B in fig. 17). Both species have up to five short and stout plumose setae on the inner margin of the basis of the third maxilliped. Oviyerous Female. Much as previously described for the subadult of this sex, and differing from repanda as above. The pleon is barely as long as the pedigerous somites together. ‘The flagelium of the first antenna is two-jointed. exop. Prp. 3 Fig. 17 ant. 2, Second antenna of female of Gephyrocuma pala (x 280). prp. 2, excep. prp. 3-4 and urop. Distal joints of second peraeopods and distal half of rami of uropod of (A) Gephyrocnma pala, (B) G. repanda (x 140). The ova are relatively very large, 0-2 mm. in diameter or about one-third the greatest depth of the body. Length, 2°3 mm. Loc.—This species occurs on sandy beaches in St. Vincent Gulf, South Aus- tralia, sometimes in great numbers, but for long periods may be absent or rare. Genus LEProcuMA Sars Leptocuma Sars 1873, 24; Stebbing 1913, 53 (syn.). The genotype (L. kinbergii) was described from the female; it and two females subsequently identified with the species (Calman 1907, 30; and 1912, 616) were taken in the South Atlantic. Calman also referred to the genus a species (minor Calman 1912, 616, fig. 14-20) from the North Atlantic, and the female of this would seem to be congeneric with Sars’ species; the male of minor has only three pairs of pleopods, and exopods are well developed on the first four pairs of peraeopods. Later, the present writer tentatively placed in the genus two Australian species (pulleini and sheardi); the females of these also cannot be satisfactorily separated generically from kinbergti as described by Sars, but the males have five pairs of pleopods and the exopod of the fourth peraeopod rudi- mentary as in the feniale. Vaunthompsonia (?) australiae Zimmer was also temporarily referred to Leptocuma (Hale 1936, 408), but has been shown above to belong elsewhere. Four further species, congeneric with pulleini and sheardi, perhaps congeneric with kinbergii, but certainly not with minor, are now described. All six Australian species differ from minor in the following characters also. The pseudorostral lobes, as in Vaunthompsoma, extend a little in front of the ocular lobe but do not meet. The mandibles are robust and, have a dozen or more spines (“only about six” in minor). The branchial lobes are thin and leat-like and are much more numerous (eleven to nineteen plus one reflexed instead of about seven plus one). The basis of the third maxilliped is not at all produced distally, but on the contrary the external angle is rounded and slopes backwards ; 252 the fan of distal plumose setae is arranged in two series, only one of which 1s shown in fig. 18. In the pleopods there is no narrow process on the outer margin of the endopod. Only a fuller description of the genotype will clarify the situation. The Australian species apparently agree with both kmbergti and minor in the structure of the second peraeopods, which are unusual in that there is a brush of distal setae on the propodus and dactylus, but no spines. The first antennae have the accessory flagellum single-jointed. The second antenna of the female is three-jointed (the first and largest joint itself indistinctly divided). The telsonic somite is well produced posteriorly and its apex is rather angular. In the third maxillipeds the ischium is short and the merus is not as long as the carpus. The second antennae of a large but subadult female of wiearia sp. tov.. as shown in fig. 18, B. juv.. are not distinctly divided into jomts, whereas in ovigerous females (fig. 18, A and B) there is a long basal joint (indefinitely divided into two) and the last of the other two jomts is conical and longer than the second. alte C r Vv 4 A Sy (y ae Vs 6 Ue i 6 a cf a1 See, Z arate ' A Fig. 18 Leptocuma, branchial apparatus, distal part of third mandible, and female second antennae; maxilliped: A, pulleint, ovigerous female; B, vicarta; C, sheardi, adult male. The ocular lobe is wide, moderate or large in size. The joints of the flagellum of the second antenna of the male are elongate. The integument, as in Vaunthompsonia, is scarcely calcified. The third somite of the female is produced forward on each side to form a lobe overlapping the second, and the antero-lateral parts of the fourth somite of the male are similarly expanded to override the third. The Australian species fall into two well-defined sections, the differences heing detailed in the following key. 253 Key ro AUSTRALIAN Species or L&PTOCUMA (ADULTS) 1 First peracopod with a prominent simple spine at distal end of inner margin of basis, preceded by several shorter spines, and with a well-developed brush of setae at distal end of propodus. Setae of third to fifth peraeopods very numerous. Uropod with first joint of endopod shorter, or barely longer, than second. Over 13 mm. in length. Ae bs we ad af .. ss First peraeopod with a scrrafe spine at distal end of inner margin of basis, pre- ceded by one longer spine, also serrate; with sparse setae at distal end of pro- podus, Sctue of third to fifth peraeopods not very numerous, Uropod with first joint of endopod much longer than second. Less than 8 mm. in length .. 3 2 Second peraeopod reaching to or beyond distal end of basis of first leg. and with carpus two-thirds as long again as merus — .... cus _ 2 pulleint Hale Second peraeopod reaching only to about middle of length of basis of first leg, and with carpus subequal in length to merus ... sobs .. tlearia sp. nov. 3 Dorsal margins of pedigerous somites, as scen from the side, undulating. One of the terntinal spines of endepod of uropod geniculate (emale) or hooked (male). Pleon with obvious lateral and dorsal carinae . wate a. Obshpa sp. nov. Dorsal margins of pedigerous somites smooth. ‘Terminal spines of endopod of uropod straight (barely curved). Pleon smooth, or with scarcely distinguishable traces of carinac “as a . 4. mt 4 7, hs 4 4 Size under 5 mm. Seeond joint of endopod of uropod much more than halt length of first ... Ne. spas F see w , .. serrifera sp.nov. Size about 7 mm. Second joint ef endopod of uropod about half as long as first, or less “at on First peraeopod with propodus much longer than dactylus. Second peraeopod with propodus and dactylus subequal in length tr: oa: .. sheardt Hale First peracopod with propodus scarcely longer than dactylus. Second peraeopod with dactylus fully one-third as Jong again as propodus intermedia sp.nov. LeprocuMA PULLEINI Llale Leptocume pudleini Waie 1928, 38, fig. 7-8; and 1936, 409. Adult Maile. Carapace about one-fifth of total length of animal, its depth equal to its width and one-half of its length; seen from above it has the form (as in the ovigerous female previously described) of a cylinder truncated at each end; Fig. 19 \ Leptocuma pulleimi, adult male (x if). dorsal carina as in female, low and fading posteriorly. Ocular lobe larger than in female, slightly wider than long and with a tiny incision at apex; there are three > x . 3 . . . prominent Ienses arranged in a triangle, the centre one pigmented and having ¥F 234 the appearance of including a pair of oval lenses; on each side there are three much smaller lenses. Pseudorostral lobes rather widely truncate in front; as usual in the genus, extending in advance of ocular lobe but with inner (medial) margins bent down and not meeting in front of eye-lobe. Antennal notch se widely open as to be obliterated; angle rounded. Pedigerous somites two to five with a faint median dorsal carina; again as usual in the genus, the anterior margins of the second, third and fouth somites are fringed with short bristles, and there is a similar row on the posterior edges of the fourth and fifth. Pleon somites with faint dorsal carina and with indications of lateral carinae on second to fourth; first four somites with a fringe of rather long setae posteriorly, Flagellum of first antenna four-jointed and with two tiny terminal jointlets, apparently bases of the sensory appendages. Mandible with about 18 spines. First peraeopod with carpus reaching well beyond antennal angle; basis with long plumose seta at external distal angle and with inner distal spine longer than ischium; on the distal half of inner margin, posterior to the apical spine is a row of shorter spines of two different lengths; propodus more than one and three- fourths times as long as dactylus and a little longer than the carpus. Second peraeopod reaching forward beyond end of basis of first; basis only about three-fifths as long as terminal joints together; carpus two-thirds as long Fig. 20 Leptocuma pulleii, adult male; c. pace, carapace from above (x11): oc. lobe, anterior portion of carapace (x 29); ant. 1, distal peduncular joints and flagella of first antenna (x72); prp. and urop., peracopods and ventral view of uropod (x 36; spines, x72). to orn at again as mertus and more than two and one-half times as long as propodus, which is Jonger than the dactylus. Third to filth peraeopods with a large number of fiexthle setae on ischium, merus and carpus (ten or more) and the usual one on propodus; basis with plumose setae. The rudimentary exopod of the fourth has the vestigial second joint as in the female. Uropod with peduncle shorter than either telsonic somite or rami, with a few stout spines and two series of stout setae on inner margin; endopod distinctly longer than exopod; as in the female the second segmem is one-fourth as long again as first, but the armature is not the same, there being on the distal half of the second joint a comb of spines which are shorter and of different type from those on the proximal part. Colour, white, with sparse stellate spots (night). Length, 13:5 mm. Loew ew South Wales: Cronulla, 8 feet, on coarse sand (H. M. Hale and K. Sheard, submarine light, Sept. 1942 and Jan. 1944). Ovigerous Female, Deseribed in detail previously. There are several spines on the inner margin of the basis of the first peracopod. Examination when not immersed in a icohol and partly dry reveals the presence of very low, smooth but distinct dorso-lateral, Teel and infero-lateral carinae on the pleon, the last-named ridges most apparent on the first four somites. Hab.—South Australia and New South Wales. The first recorded specimens of this species were collected in June 1886 by the late Dr. Robt, Pulleine. and, despite searching, it has not been taken since in South Australia. Two adult males were secured in New South Wales; one is a little smaller than that described atid figured, but otherwise agrees in detail. The discrepancy in size between examples from the two localities is considerable, the immature male recorded from South Australia being 19 mm. in length and the ovigerous female still larger (24 mm.), but [ can find no other character to separate them. Leptocuma vicaria sp. nov. Ovigerous Female, Carapace about four and one-half times in total length and not quite as long as first four pedigerous somites together; its depth is equal to width and more than half its length; viewed from either above or from the side the carapace tapers markedly to the i front; there is a median dorsal carina very distinct on anterior three-fourths of length and (unlike that of pulleint) slightly serrate in appearance. Ocular lobe siall; lenses present but not well defined, although nine or ten separate small areas are indistinctly discernible; there is a small incision in the apex of the lobe. Pseudorostral lobes narrow anteriorly with inner margins, in front of eye-lobe, bent strongly dowrwards. Antennal notch distinct (not so widely open as in female of pul/eint) and angle subacute. Second to fifth pedigerous somites with dorsal median carina and with the one or two shallow longitudinal furrows (usually present in all species) on sides. First five pleon somites with median dorsal carina, slightly tuberculate dorso- lateral, lateral and infero-lateral carinae; telsonic somite with dorso-lateral and lateral carinae. Tirst antenna with fagellunt three-jointed ; first joint of peduncle much longer than second, which is nearly twice as long as third; accessory flagellum short. Second antenna, see fig. 18, B. Third maxilliped as in pulleini. 256 ceph. 9 Fig. 21 Leptocuma vicaria, Type ovigerous female; ceph., cephalothorax from side and above (x 74); prp., peraeopods (x25). Allotype male; from the side and (ceph.) ceephalothorax from above (x8); c, pace, anterior portion of carapace (x 40); prp. 2 and urop., second peraeopod and uropod (x40); exop. 4, exopod of fourth peraeopod (x 50). 237 First peraeopods with basis not nearly reaching to level of anteinal angle, nearly half as long again as rest of limb, and with three shorter spines preceding the distal inner spine, which is longer than the ischium; plumose setae on both margins; propodus less than one-half as long again as dactylus and much longer than carpus. Second peraeopod reaching only to middle of length of basis of first; basis barely longer than rest of limb; carpus subequal in length to merus and distinctly less than twice as long as propodus, which is longer than the dactylus. Third to fifth peraeopods much as in pulleint. Peduncle of uropod shorter than telsonic somite or rami, its inner margin with six strong spines and, near proximal end, three slender spines; endopod shorter than exopod, the second segment barely longer than the first, which has ten spines on inner margin, the third and particularly the distal being larger than the others; second joint with a score of inner spines successively increasing in length and longest terminal spine fully half the length of the joint; inner margin of endopod with a row of setae not differing markedly in length; second segment of exopod more than two and one-half times as long as first (thus relatively longer than in pileii) and with a gradated series of composite setae on outer margin, the longest terminal ones one-fourth or more the length of joint. Colour pale brown, densely spotted with dark stellate markings. Length, 17°5 mm. Subadult Male. General form even more slender than in female. Carapace with sharply defined carina, and tapering as described but more than twice as long as width or depth. Ocular lobe larger, a little wider than long, with apex more markedly bilobed than in female, but with lenses not distinct. Antennal notch and angle as in female, but doubtless the notch opens in the adult; the antennal angle is visible when the animal is viewed from above. Similar ridges are present on the pedigerous and pleon somites. The first antennae have the flagellum only two-joimted at this stage. The peraeopods have fewer setae (due to immaturity). The basis of the second peraeopod is slightly shorter than the rest of the limb. The rudimentary exopod of the fourth pair has the second vestigial joint found in the female and in both sexes of pulletnt. The uropods resemble those of the female; but it is probable that the spines hecome more specialised in the adult male; the first joint of the endopod is very slightly longer than the second. Length, 15°5 mm. Loc.-—New South Wales: 24 miles east of Pt. Hacking, surface (allotype nale, K. Sheard, Oct, 1940); off Wata Mooli, 35 metres on sand (type female, “Cronulla” Trawl Station 2, March 1943); off Jibbon, 40 metres i“Cronulla” Trawl Station 6. July 1943) and 45-50 metres, on coarse sand i“Cronulla” Trawl Station 10, Aug. 1943). Types in South Australian Museum, Reg. No. C.2451 and C2501. At the point where the allotype male and other specimens were talken at the surface the water is 600 metres in depth. Although obviously allied to pullemi, vicaria can be readily separated at all stages by the entirely different proportions of the second peraeopod and the more prominent dorsal carina of the carapace. In young individuals (10 mmm. or less) the carapace is shaped as in the adult of pulleint, aig., it is not markedly narrowed -owards the front as in adult examples or those more nearly approaching maturity. 258 In very small specimens the setae of the peraeopods are much less numerous and the characteristic brushes on the propodus and dactylus of the first legs are repre- sented by only three or four setac. Amongst other smaller points of difference, the eye-lenses are not so distinct as in pulleini, the endopod of the uropod is shorter than the exopod instead of longer than it, and its segments are subequal in length; the second joint of the exopod of the uropod is relatively longer and the terminal joints of the first peracopods are of different proportions. Leptocuma obstipa sp. nov. Ovgerous Female, Carapace robust, less than one-fourth of total length of animal; depth equal to width and not quite three-fourths of its length; dorsal carina distinct; there is a long shallow depression on each side of the carina for about three-fourths of its length and this accentuates the ridge: posterior to these hollows the carina bifurcates ; on posterior half of carapace is a pair of short ridges Bags 22 Leplecuma obstitas type iemale aud allotype mate: lateral views and (ceph.) cephalothorax (x 19); ¢. pace., anterior portion of carapace (x 30). 259 which, as seen from the side, are undulating. Ocular lobe pigmented, as wide as long and with nine colourless lenses, the median one larger than the others. Antennal notch moderately wide, a little obtuse, and angle rounded. The five pedigerous somites together are longer than the carapace and half as long as the pleon; lateral parts of third somite overlapping second in front and fourth behind; each has a median dorsal ridge and a low undulating dorso-lateral carina; on the fourth and fifth somites there is also a low lateral tumidity. : urep. d Fig. 23 Leptocuma obstipa, paratype ovigerous female and allotype male; ant. 1, first antenna (x83): ant. 2, second antenna (x 175); mxp. 3, prp. and urop., third maxilliped, peraeopods and urepods (x 42). First five somites of pleon with median dorsal carina and a sparsely tubercu- late dorso-lateral carina on each side; there are also two tuberculate lateral ridges ; the lower not well marked. First joint of peduncle of first antenna as long as second and third segments together; second Jonger than third which is as long as the two-jointed flageilum. 260 Third maxilliped with basis generously furnished with stout plumose setae, there being eight or so at the subtruncate distal end. First peraeopod with carpus reaching level of antennal angle; basis five- sevenths as long as terminal joints together; inner margin with plumose setae; dactylus slender, almost as long as propodus, which is one-third as long again as carpus. Second peraeopod not reaching distal end of merus of first; basis as long as rest of limb without dactylus, its inner margin with long plumose setae; propodus three-fourths as long as dactylus and distinctly less than half as long as carpus. Third to fifth peraeopods with four distal carpal setae, two longer than the others and reaching, with propadal seta, well beyond tip of dactylus. Peduncle of uropod much longer than telsonic somite and equal in length to each ramys; inner edge with a row of sixteen unequal spines; exopod with plumose setae on mner margin, a few adpressed spines on outer edge and four unequal terminal spines, the longest half as long as second joint of ramus; first joint of endopod with spines much as in serrifera, but nearly two and a half times longer than second joint; second joint with five curved spines successively increas- ing in length on inner margin and three, unequal, on the rounded distal end; the middle and longest of these terminal spines is as long as the segment, is of plicate appearance, rounded apically and is geniculate. Colour white with sparse brown chromatophores, which forni a conspicuous marking on the second and third pedigerous somites. Length, 7-5 mim.; ova, 0°3 to 0-4 min. -idult Male, Body proportions much as in female but build considerably more slender. The carinae of pedigerous sonrites and pleon are much more feeble but are still faintly tuberculate; seen from the side the thoracic somites have the undulating appearance characteristic of the species, Carapace narrow, with the sides as seen from above evenly rounded; its depth is equal to the width and not a great deal more than half its length. Ocular lobe larger than in female and wider than long; the three median lenses are large and conspicuous. Antennal notch very widely open and “angle” obtusely rounded. Pedigerous somites differing from female as usual in the group. Peduncle of uropod as long as exopod but a little longer than endopod; the second joint of the last-named has five serrate spines on inner margin and two distal spines; the longer of these is curved and is longer than the joint, the other is hooked and serrate; other armature of uropods much as in female but longer. Length, 6-8 mm, Loc.—New South Wales: off Jibbon, 35 fath., in coarse sand (K. Sheard, Feb. 1940). off Wata Moo, 70 metres (“Cronulla” Trawl Station 4, July 1943) ; off Jibbon, 45-50 metres, coarse sand (type loc., “Cronulla” Trawl Station 10, Aug. 1943). Types in the South Australian Museum, Reg. No. C.2488, C2489. Only one male is available. A series of ovigerous females [rom the three localities all have the bent terminal spine on the endopod of the uropod, as figured. This and the slight irregularity of the dorsal outline enable one to separate the species with ease, Some smaller ovigerous females (length, 7 mm.; ova, 0-4 mm.) have the above characters but the propodus and dactylus of the first peraeopods are rela- tively shorter ; the propodus is as usual scarcely longer than dactylus, but it is also barely longer than the carpus. 261 Leptocuma serrifera sp. nov. Ovigerous Female. Integument thin, very finely reticulate, smooth and polished. Carapace short and robust with dorsal edge scarcely arched, appearing slightly uneven owing to insignificant sinuations; less than one-fourth of total length of animal; its depth is equal to its greatest width and is more than three- fourths its length; seen from above the curved sides diverge from the moderately wide front; the median dorsal carina is obsolete. Ocular lobe wider than long, pigmented and with distinct lenses. Antennal notch shallow and angle obtusely rounded; a shallow oblique furrow to rear of notch. Fig. 24 Leptocuma serrifera, type ovigerous female and allotype male; lateral views, (ceph.) cephalothorax and (c. pace) carapace (x30); ant. 2, second antenna of female (x 160). The five pedigerous somites are without carinac, together they are fully half as long as the pleon and much longer than the carapace; third and fourth somites with rounded postero-lateral lobe, and hinder margin of fifth a little backwardly produced on sides. 262 Pleon slightly tapering, the somites subcylindrical and, excepting fifth, sub- equal in length; without dorsal or other ridges. First antenna slender; first joint of peduncle shorter than second and third together ; second barely longer than third and as long as the two-jointed flagellum ; accessory lash single-jointed. Mandible with about 12 spines in the row. Basis of third maxilliped more than half as long again as remaining joints together; margin immediately exterior to palp sloping backwards and with long plumose setae ; inner margin with long setae on proximal half and shorter pluniose setae on distal half. ITE mie Ps Onennn Fig. 25 Leptocuma serrifera, paratype ovigerous female: ant. 1, first antenna (x 155): mxp, 3, prp. and urop., third maxilliped, peraeopods and uropod (x 74; spines of basis of first leg and tip of dactylus of second, x 155). Kirst peraeopod with carpus reaching to level of antennal angle; basis only about four-sevenths as long as the long terminal joints together, and with a plumose seta at external angle; inner (inferior) margin with a row of plumose setae; dactylus long, but only three-fourths as long as the propodus, which is more than half as long again as carpus; merus not much shorter than carpus. Second peracopod reaching to distal end of merus of first: basis almost as long as rest of limb, its inner margin with long flexible setae similar to the fossorial sctae of the posterior peraeopods; carpus much longer than ischiun and merus together; propodus fully two-thirds as long as dactylus and almost half as long as carpus. 263 Third to fifth peraeopods with two distal carpal setae of equal length and a third much shorter; together with the propodal seta the longest reach very much beyond the tip of the dactylus. Peduncle of uropod slender, considerably longer than telsonic somite, but shorter than the equal rami; inner margin with a row of 15 unequal spines, half- a-dozen of which are prominently longer than the others; exopod with short plumose setae on inner margin and with several terminal setae, one conspicuously the longest and more than half as long as the ramus; first joint of endopod little more than half as long again as second and with eighteen inner unequal spines ; second joint with about eight finely serrate spines, successively and regularly inereasing in length, on inner edge, and with three unequal finely serrate distal spines, the longest barely more than half the length of the longest apical seta of exopod. Colour pale yellow, with conspicuous sprawling chromatophores. Length, 4-4 mm. (ova, 0-15 mm. in diameter). Adult Male. Carapace with dorsal outline not exhibiting the slight irregu- larity apparent in the female; one-fourth of total length of animal, its depth equal to width but rather Jess than two-thirds its length; seen from above the curve of the sides is more pronounced. the greatest width being at the middle of the length. Antennal notch more widely open (represented merely by a shallow con- cavity) and antennal angle very obtusely rounded, almost imperceptibly angular. Ocular iobe and lenses about one-third as large again as in female. The five pedigerous somites together are not quite half as long as the pleon and are equal in length to the carapace; the third locks into a rebate in fourth and is not considerably expanded posteriorly. Last pedigerous and first four pleon somites produced postero-laterally on vach side to form a rounded lobe. First peraeopod a little longer than in female, and with joints of same proportions. Uropod slightly longer; peduncle and rami of same proportions but spines and setae longer. Length, 4-2 mm. Loc-~New South Wales: Cronulla, 8 feet. on coarse sand (K. Sheard, submarine light, Sept. 1942). Types in South Australian Museum, Reg. No. C.2484-C2485, Differs from sheard? in (1) the smaller size; (2) the relatively longer propodus of the first peraecopod; (3) the relatively longer dactylus of the second peraeopod; (4) the different proportion of the endopod of the uropod ; (5) the fewer carpal setae on the fossorial legs. LeprocuMA sueArpr Hale Leptocuma sheardi Hale, 1936, 409, fig. 3-4; and 1937, 65. Only the longer of the two distal serrate spines of the basis of the first leg was noticed in the original description; the shorter one may be concealed behind the ischium. The female was described previously in some detail, Adult Male. Carapace with depth less than two-thirds of its length; the median dorsal carina appears as three fine parallel lines extending from the large median eyc-lens to level of posterior ends of pseudorostral sutures; beyond this it bifureates and quickly fades out. Ocular lobe pigmented, large, wider than 264 long and with nine lenses; three are larger than the others and arranged in a triangle, the others three on each side of the lobe. Antennal notch very widely oper (more so than in female) and angle rounded and obtuse. Pedigerous somites without ridges; third somite not backwardly produced postero-laterally to form a rounded lobe as in female. IN try ALPE LOL shy thy wee le Leptocwana sheardi adult male; lateral view and (ceph.) cephalothorax from above (x19); c. pace, anterior half of carapace (x 30); ant. 1, distal peduncular joints and flagella of first antenna (x78); prp. and urop., peracopods and urepod (x 39; terminal joints, ete., x 78). 265 First to fourth pleon somites with postero-lateral portions rounded; median and dorso-lateral carinae can be discerned on the fourth and fifth somites but are very faint. First antenna with the main flagellum three-jointed (two in female) and with a brush of sensory filaments at its base. Mandible with about 12 spines. First peraeopods slightly longer than in female; basis not much shorter than rest of limb; dactylus three-fourths as long as propodus, which is not much longer than carpus: ischium and merus together as long as carpus; the dactylar setac number 10 or so. Second peraeopods not reaching to distal end of merus of first; basis as Jong as rest of limb without dactylus, with a row of inner plumose setae; dactyius barely longer than propodus and distinctly less than hali as long as carpus, Third to fifth peracopods with a fan of long subdistal carpal setae, four on the third pair and five on the fourth and fifth. Fourth with rudimentary exopod single-jointed. Peduncle of uropod a little longer than the equal rani, with about 15 or 16 spines, half of which are conspicuously stouter than the others; first joint of endopod a little more than twice as long as second (not quite twice as: long as second in female); armature of rami as in female but plumose spines of exopod more numerous. In specimens taken at night the colour markings (see previous notes) may be contracted to single stellate spots, as shown in the figure. Leneth, 7 mm. Hab—vThe species has been taken only in South Australia, occurring in the southern parts of St. Vincent and Spencer Gulfs and also in Antechamber Bay. Kangaroo Island; it has heen netted at the surface at night and to a depth of 7 fathoms. Leptocuma intermedia sp. nov. Adult Male. Very like the male of L. sheardi but with the following differences. First peraeopod with dactylus almost as long as propodus. Second peracopod with dactylus fully one-third as long again as propodus and distinctly / N \ /\ VAN ‘ ‘a VAN pe ip ff \\° &e ij a ‘| \ fe Fig. 27 Lepiocuma intermedia, type male; prp. and urop., terminal joints of peraeopods and endopod of uropod (x 66). 266 more than half length of carpus. Virst joint of endopod of uropod more than two-and-one-half times longer than second. Length, 6°6 mm. Loe.—New South Wales: Cronulla, 8 feet, on coarse sand (K. Sheard, sub- marine light, Sept. 1942). Type in South Australian Museum, Reg. No, C2496, ‘This form was taken with serrifera at Cronulla, a locality rich in species of Cumacea; apart from the larger size it differs in the very different proportions of the carpus, propodus and dactylus of the first peraeopods, and in the much shorter distal segment of the endopod of the uropod as well as other small details. Genus VAUNTHOMPSONIA Bate A single imperfect specimen is described below because it represents the only record of the genus in the Australian region. It is closer to the genotype than is meridionalis Sars, the only species which has the external distal part of the third maxilliped at all produced. Also, in the last-named species there are only nine spines on the short distal portion of the mandible, the branchial lobes are digiti- form and reduced to four, and the telsonic somite is only slightly produced posteriorly; as is apparently usual in the genus, the third maxilliped has the ischium short, and the carpus as long as it and merus together, while the accessory flagcHum of the first antenna is single-jointed. Zimmer (1908, 165; and 1921, 131) is of the opinion (not shared by the present writer) that Bathycwima should be regarded as a subgenus of Vaun- fhompsonta, The adult of both sexes is kuown only in the genotype. cristata Bate; in this species the dorsal median carina of the female is finely dentate, that of the male unarmed. Vaunthompsonia nana sp. nov. WM Wadd 4 ion ae ions = Y Fig. 30 Glyphocuma, branchial lamellae, mandibles and female second antennae: A, bakeri; B, inacqualis; C, dentata. D, Second antenna of female of ? Sympodomma africana. The branchial lamellae are delicate, leaf-like and overlapping; they are arranged on the narrow epipod in a long row of more than a dozen, and with one separate and reflexed. The large distal lobe of the third maxilliped has two conspicuous plumose setae; the ischium is long and does not differ much in length from the merus. carpus, propodus or dactylus. This genus is close to Syutrpodomana but differs in having an exopod on the fourth peraeopod of the male, and apparently in having the merus of the third maxilliped less expanded externally. It somewhat resembles Heterocuma but in that genus the crest of the carapace is not incised in the female, the third maxilli- ped has the carpus widened as in Cyclaspis, the terminal joint of the second G 270 antenna of the female is tiny, the telsonic somite is very different, and the joints of the flagellum of the male second antenna, as in Cumopsis, are extremely short. In Glyphocuma (and apparently also in Sympodomma) the joints of this flagellum are nowhere much longer than wide, indeed, the proximal segments are twice as wide as long. Sexual dimorphism—In the four species referred here, the ovigerous female and immature male have the crest of the carapace finely or coarsely serrate, or incised with the resultant projection or projections angular. Adult males are available for all; and these have the armature of the dorsum obliterated. The antennal notch is distinct in females but is obliterated (or “widely open”) in the adult male. The tendency of the antero-lateral portion of the fourth pedigerous somite of the male to override the third somite is in this genus emphasised in the adult, the pleural plates being produced forwards on each side into a lobe, defined above by a notch. In the female the overlapping of the second somite by the anterior pleural part of the third is also rather pronounced. Kery To FEMALES OF SPECIES OF GLYPHOCUMA 1 Anterior half of crest of carapace cut into nine or more small teeth ist a 2 Anterior half of crest of carapace with one or two incisions, but no row of teeth. 3 Carapace twice as long as deep, with dorsal teeth inconspicuous; antennal notch narrow; ocular lobe projecting well beyond pseudorostral lobes and with corneal lenses not confined to anterior portion .... sist ehh byt ... bakeri (Hale) Carapace less than twice as long as deep, with dorsal teeth large; antennal notch wide; ocular lobe not projecting beyond pseudorostral lobes and with the small corneal lenses restricted to anterior portion... as ... dentata sp. nov. 3 Carapace slender, with two dorsal incisions, the second with two or three denticles; ocular lobe narrow, more than twice as long as wide, apically rounded when seen from above .... fa vies _ By a _ macqualis sp. nov. Carapace robust, with one dorsal incision and two or three denticles; ocular lobe as wide as long, apically angular when seen from above... serventyt sp. nov. bo Key to MALeEs or SPECIES oF GLYPHOCUMA 1 Body slender, the carapace more than twice as long as deep ont pit my a Body rather robust, the carapace less than twice as wide as deep .... ee, ie Oo 2 Main corneal lenses large and conspicuous; dorsal edge of carapace barely sinuate. Exopod of fourth peraeopod less than half as long as basis and with flagellum tWo-jointed Pes bind =~ on ae bakeri (Hale) Main corneal lenses indistinct, not large; dorsal edge of carapace markedly sinuate. Exopod of fourth peraeopod almost as long as basis and with flagellum five-jointed . ah ai ant tes tops inaequalis sp.nov. 3 Ocular lobe narrow, more than twice as long as wide, with corneal Jenses con- fined to anterior end which is rounded, or only minutely produced. dentata sp nov. Ocular lobe as wide as long, with corneal lenses reaching to base; anterior end as seen from above angular and projecting beyond pseudorostral lobes. servenlyt sp. nov. GLYPHOCUMA BAKER! (Hale) Sympodonuna bakeri Hale, 1936, 396, fig. 3 and 4. Adult Male (10 mm., Spencer Gulf, South Australia). Integument well calcified and brittle; when dried it does not contort or shrivel. Carapace one- fourth of total length of animal, slender and compressed; its depth is less than half the length; surface generally smooth except for the distinct median dorsal carina, which becomes less prominent posteriorly ; the mid-line shows no trace of the small teeth present in the female, and the dorsal margin, as seen from the side, 271 is barely arched and almost imperceptibly sinuate. Antennal notch widely open (or rather, the notch is completely obliterated) and angle very obtuse. Ocular lobe one-and-one-half times as long as wide; in front it is produced and narrowly subtriangular, carinate anteriorly—the little ridge extending to its apex, which thus appears acute as seen from above; three large pale corneal lenses arranged in a triangle, a smaller pair near apex, and two more on each side of lobe; the median lens is of somewhat quadrate form; the lobe is blackly pigmented, as shown in the figure. Pseudorostral lobes crenate in front, not reaching apex of eye-lobe. Pedigerous somites. together as long as carapace and a little less than half as long as pleon; the somites are angular (roof-shaped) dorsally with the median carina fine but distinct; there is a rather large pit near the rounded antero-lateral Fig. 31 Glyphocuma bakeri, adult 10 mm. male; lateral view and (ceph.) cephalothorax from above (x13); c. pace, anterior half of carapace from above and from the side (x 33). angle of the third, which overlaps the second on the sides; overriding anterior pleural part of fourth subtriangular and narrowly rounded. The pleon is almost smooth except for a dorsal carina, which is moderately distinct on the first to fourth somites but becomes abruptly stronger on the fifth and telsonic somites. First antenna with third joint of peduncle a little longer than second, which is half as long as the first joint; flagellum two-jointed (incompletely three- jointed) ; accessory flagellum two-jointed as in female. Mandibles with about 16 spines in the long row. Basis of third maxilliped three times as long as palp, with the dentate distal lobe reaching to beyond middle of length of carpus and furnished with two long 272 and stout plumose setae (as well as smaller plumose setae); ischium, merus, carpus and propodus differing little in length. First peraeopod with carpus barely reaching beyond antennal angle; the slender basis equal in length to the remaining joints together and with short plumose setae on both margins; ischium with a distal tooth and plumose seta on inner side; carpus equal in length to propodus and half as long again as dactylus. Basis of second peraeopod barely as long as the rest of limb, margined with plumose setae, and with a short external distal spine; merts and carpus subequal in length, each shorter than dactylus, which is three times as long as propodus; the merus has two distal outer spines and one at middle of inner margin; the carpus has two spines on inner margin, one being distal, and four of different SS: exop. ae prp. 4 ant. 1 . oi ee Prp. Fig. 32 Giyphocuma bakeri, adult 10 mm. male; ant. 1, first antenna (x 53; flagella, x 125); mxp. 3, palp and distal part of basis of third maxilliped (x53); prp. and urop..; peraeopods and uropod (x30); exop. prp. 4, exopod of fourth leg (x 125). c. pace, Carapace of 12 mm. male (x 9.). lengths at the external apical portion; dactylus with one or two spines on each margin and a cluster of six distally, the longest about as long as the joint. Outer distal slope of carpus of third to fifth legs with three long setae and one shorter one, the longest reaching well beyond apex of dactylus; inner and outer margins of carpus with one or two setae. The exopod of the fourth peraeopod is barely half as long as the basis of its limb and has only two joints in the flagellum; the setae are restricted to three long plumose bristles, on the flagellum and one on inner margin of peduncle. Peduncle of uropod slender, one-fourth as long again as telsonic somite, and more than half as long again as rami; exopod a little longer than endopod, with the longest of its three slender terminal spines more than half as long as the 273 ramus; second segment of endopod a little longer than first and equal in length to its longest distal spine. Colour pale yellow with brown chromatophores (see figure). Adult Male (12 mm., St. Vincent Gulf, South Australia). The dorsal margin of the carapace, as seen from the side, is slightly angular at about the middle of the length, otherwise as with the smaller males. Females (10 mm., from Spencer Gulf, South Australia, and with fully developed marsupium) agree in all essentials with the subadult female previously recorded, and are likewise boldly spotted with dark pigment. The dorsal carina is almost crest-like at the anterior part of the carapace, where the number of teeth into which it is cut are constant in number within a small range, approximately a dozen being present in all. Ovigerous Female (10 mm., Portland, Victoria). Integument well calcified. Colour grey with black chromatophores on thorax and mottlings on pleon. Loc—South Australia: St. Vincent Gulf (type loc., W. H. Baker, 1910), Brighton (Misses P. Mawson and L. M. Angel, and K. Sheard, submarine light, Oct. 1941); Spencer Gulf, Port Lincoln, 2 fath. (K. Sheard, submarine light, Oct. 1941 and Feb. 1944); Kangaroo Island, Antechamber Bay, 4 fath. (K. Sheard, submarine light, Apri! 1941). Victoria: Portland, 8 feet, sandy bottom (HH. M. Hale, submarine light. Aug. 1944). This species was originally described from a single female, but the sub- marine light method of collecting proves that it is not unconunon in South Aus- tralia, A haul taken at Port Lincoln on 17 February 1944 is of particular interest ; about one-tenth of the catch (which of course consisted of many different organisms) was preserved. Included in this sample G. bakeri is represented by over six hundred males and a score of females, all approximately 10 mm. in length. The males are all highly calcified, and are much paler in colour than the females. The latter are, in striking contrast, greyish with conspicuous colour spotting (Hale 1936, fig. 3); they have all recently moulted, the integument being soft and quickly collapsing on drying. The large marsupium is empty, and the fully developed yellow ovaries (eggs, 0°3 mm.) are visible through the thin exo- skeleton (compare Cyclaspis usitata Hale 1944, 124). At Brighton the larger males, 12 mm. in length, were abundant in October 1941, but no females were then taken. The plumose hairs on the basis of the third to fifth peraeopods tend to collect Hocculent debris in preserved material and so to conceal the exopods; these setae are arranged in two series which may “sandwich” the exopod, particularly that of the fourth peraeopod, which is smaller than in the male of the other three species and has only a rudimentary two-jointed flagellum in both 10 mm. and 12 mm. examples. It is very like the exopod occurring on the second and third peraeopods in Heterocuma intermedia (Fage 1924, 364, fig. 1), differing only in having a second tiny joint in the flagellum, Glyphocuma dentata sp. nov. Ovigerous Female. Integument thin and delicate, scarcely at all calcified. Carapace somewhat Jess than one-fourth of total length of animal; depth distinctly more than half the length; subtriangular as seen from above, widest near posterior end, where it is as broad as deep; upper contour slightly arched; dorsum with a median longitudinal carina, on anterior half cur into about ten teeth the last minute and on posterior half rather rugose; anterior part of inferior margin, immediately behind antennal tooth serrate; on each side of the front half m4 of the mid-line there is a shallow depression delimited by a low lateral tumidity ; antennal notch moderately deep and open and antennal tooth subacute. Ocular lobe about three times as long as wide, rounded anteriorly and with nine small lenses in frontal part, eight grouped around a central one; the first two of the dorsal teeth are situated on the lobe. Pseudorostral lobes very oblique in front, extending almost to apex of ocular lobe. Pedigerous somites together equal in length to carapace, each with a median dorsal carina; first overlapped by second but visible for whole depth; second somite widest the others successively decreasing in breadth, so that, viewed from above, the cephalothorax is sub-oval in shape. ceph, juv.d Glyphocuma dentata; lateral views and (ceph.) upper view of cephalothorax of type ovigerous female and allotype adult male (x19); oc. lobe, ocular lobe of adult male (x 33); ceph. juv., cephalothorax of subadult male from above (x19). Pleon somites each with a fine dorsal carina; postero-lateral margins of first to fourth angularly produced backwards, those of fifth less markedly angular; all but fifth approximately equal in length; telsonic somite produced between bases of uropods. First antenna with second and third joints of peduncle subequal in length, together almost as long as first joint and each shorter than the two-jointed flagellum; accessory lash two-jointed. Mandible with usual long spine row of 18 to 20. Basis of third maxilliped twice as long as rest of limb, and with well- developed external apical lobe, reaching distal end of the slightly dilated merus. Virst peraeopod long and slender, the carpus extending to beyond the antennal tooth; basis not much more than two-thirds as long as rest of leg, distally sub- truncate and with some plumose setae and (at middle third) three spines on inner 275 margin; propodus nearly one-fourth as long again as carpus, which is as long as the dactylus. Second peraeopod with basis shorter than remaining joints together; ischium very short; merus as long as carpus, with two distal spines; carpus with distal spines and one on inner margin; dactylus elongate, four times as long as propodus and as long as carpus and propodus together; with short lateral spines and four distal, the longest of which is only one-fourth the length of the dactylus. Third to fifth peraeopods with three setae at distal end of carpus, the longest reaching beyond tip of dactylus. ae anti. i ¢ \_ Se cos Sp RT PF, BOP ape rer ‘i AEN \ \ . ik ON £ re Vig. 34 Glyphocuma dentata, paratype ovigerous female and subadult male; ant. 1, and mand., first antenna and mandible (x 85); mxp. 3, prp. and urop., third maxilliped, peraeopods and uropods (x32); mxp. lobe, external distal lobe and ischium of third maxilliped, plumose setae omitted (x 170). Peduncle of uropod a little longer than telsonic somite, and than exopod. with half-a-dozen spines, alternating with shorter spines, on inner margin and a more prominent spine at inner apical angle; first joint of endopod half as long again as second, with ten unequal spines on inner edge, several on outer, and a more prominent spine at inner distal angle; second joint of endopod with a row 276 ot short spines successively increasing in length on inner margin and a few on outer, and with a terminal spine as long as the joint; exopod a little longer than endopod, its second segment with spines on both margins and with the longest terminal spine as in endopod. Colour: pale translucent yellow spattered with brown all over body, leaving margins of carapace and somites pale; darker on front of carapace and with a large brown marking above each pseudorostral suture and a smaller one below it. eve darkly pigmented. Legs translucent. Ova dark yellow. Length, 7 mm, Adult Male. Carapace more slender than in female and lacking all trace of dorsal teeth, the upper edge being very faintly sinuate; there is a small shallow subcireular depression above the end of each pseudorostral suture, and below this a small tumidity immediately behind end of suture; median carina distinct, sharply defined anteriorly. Antennal notch very obtuse (widely open) and angle rounded; margin of carapace posterior to angle with obsolete serrations. Ocular lobe slightly widened at base, twice as long as breadth and with lenses small and situated near the apex. Pleural portions of first pedigerous somite not at all exposed. Iirst peraeopod not quite so long as in female, Second peraeopod with basis almost as long as rest of limb and terminal spine of dactylus nearly as long as its joint. Last pair of pleopods abruptly smaller than the first four. Endopod of uropod almost as long as exopod., Colour as in female. Length, 7*1 moi. Submature Male. Males about as long as the adult but with the pleopods not fully developed exhibit the above sexual differences excepting that the dorsal teeth of the carapace are still present (fig. 33, ceph. juv.). Loc.—New South Wales: off Cape Three Points, 25-32 fath., sticky mud and shell (“Thetis” Station 13, Feb. 1898): off Jibbon, 46-55 fath., sand to mud (“Thetis” Station 38, Mar. 1898) ; 5 miles east of Port Hacking, 100 metres, on mud (type female, “Cronulla” Trawl Station, July 1943); 4 miles off Eden, 70 metres (K. Sheard, Oct. 1943); 4 miles east of Port Hacking, 80 metres, on mud (i. Sheard, trawled. May 1944); Ulladulla, 75 metres (allotype male, K. Sheard, trawled, June 1944). Types in South Australian Musetm, Reg. No. €.2464 and C.2542. The largest examples, taken off Eden, are just over 8 mm. in length. This, like taequalis, is a common species in the localities cited. It ts noted for both that the “Cronulla” examples retained represent only portions of a haul. The dorsal teeth of the carapace of female and subadult male vary in num- ber between nine and twelye. As in the other species of the genus, the full development of the swimming apparatus of the male coincides with the loss of the armature Of the carapace. Glyphocuma inaequalis sp. nov. Ovigerous female, Integument smooth and rather polished, with very fine reticulate pattern. Carapace less than one-fourth of total length of animal; slender, twice as long as depth which is equal to the greatest width; seen from above the sides are slightly curved and diverge evenly to the rear; dorsum with a prominent carina oc. lobe @ c.pace 9 G.pace Fig. 35 Glyphocuma inaequalis, type female and allotype male; lateral views and (ceph.) cephalothorax from above (x 10); ¢. pace, anterior half of carapace from the side; and oc. lobe, ocular lobe, etc. (x 25). 278 from apex of ocular lobe to hinder margin; seen from the side the dorsal margin is elevated to form a short and abrupt declivity immediately posterior to the ocular lobe and again at the first third of its length (see fig. 35, c. pace); the edge of the second incision is cut into two denticles; for the posterior two-thirds the dorsal margin is almost straight, slightly uneven, Antennal notch widely open and angular; antennal tooth rounded. Ocular lobe narrow, about three times as long as greatest width (basal) narrowly rounded in front and with nine pig- mented but not sharply defined lenses. Pscudorostral lobes rounded anteriorly and not reaching apex of ocular Jobe. Pedigerous somites together longer than carapace, and half as long as pleon; each with low dorsal carina; second somite longer than any of the others, its rounded antero-lateral portion overlapping the first somite and the extreme postero-lateral angle of carapace; postero-lateral portions of third to fifth somites a little produced backwards, and rounded. Pleon somites each with a median dorsal carina, all but fifth of about equal length ; telsonic somite scarcely produced between bases of uropods, First antenna with third joint of peduncle shorter than second, which is half as long as first; flagellum two-jointed, not as long as third peduncular segment ; accessory flagellum two-jointed. Mandible with the usual long row of 18 or 19 spines. Third maxilliped with basis nearly three times as long as rest of limb and with the external apical angle strongly produced, the lobe reaching to level of the shghtly expanded distal portion of merus. First peraeopod long, the carpus extending beyond level of antennal angle; with the slender basis a little longer than remaining joints together and having short plumose setae on both margins, and one at external distal angle; carpus and propodus subequal in length, each shorter than dactylus, which is about as long as merus. Second peraeopods with basis shorter than rest of limb, with plumose setae on both margins, and a short apical spine; ischium short with one spine; merus as long as carpus with a subapical spine on each margiil; carpus with two spines (one apical) on inner margin and two, unequal, at outer distal angle; dactylus more than twice as long as propodus, with three apical spines (the longest as long as propodus and dactylus together), two on outer margin and one on inner. Basis of third legs as long as rest of limb, of fourth shorter, of fifth much shorter; outer apical portion of carpus with three setae and inner margin with two or three; the longest fossorial setae reach beyond apex of dactylus. Peduncle of uropod slightly longer than telsonic somite, the inner margin with short spines of different lengths; endopod as long as exopod, the first joint a little shorter than second and with a row of spines on inner edge, and one specialised, at outer distal angle; of the inner spines, one at middle of length is prominent and one at inner distal angle is particularly strong; second joint of endopod with a spine two-thirds length of segment and two shorter spines at rounded apex and a row of spines on inner margin ; exopod two-thirds as long as peduncle with half-a-dozen short plumose setae on inner margin, a few short spines on outer margin and five apical spines the largest half as long as exopod. Colour: spattered with dark brown, leaving carapace and somites margined with the pale creamy-white ground colour; also there are pale circular areas scat- tered all over the body and particularly well defined on the carapace, Length, 13-5 mm. (ova, 0°34 mm.). Fig. 36 Glyphocuma imacqualis, type ovigerous female and paratype mate: ant. 1, first antenna (x40); mxp. 3, prp. and urop., third maxilliped, peraeopods and uropods (x 25); mxp. lobe, external distal lobe of third maxilliped, with setae omitted (x 210). 280 Adult Male, Form not differing much from that of female but carapace more compressed (less than half as wide as long) ; incisions of dorsal edge more oblique, thus appearing less pronounced, and without denticles in second, Ocular lobe a little wider and the lenses larger, with distinct granules. Antennal notch more widely open. Second pedigerous somite not longer than any of the others. First peraeopod longer, with carpus shorter than propodus and about as long as dactylus; propodus with a few long subapical setae, and dactylus with more abundant setae; ischium with a tooth at inner distal angle. Second peraeopod with basis as long as rest of limb, but otherwise much as in female. Uropod with peduncle proportionately longer and with endopod slightly longer than exopod ; outer distal spine of first joint of endopod larger and exopod with a greater number of plumose setae. Colour decidedly paler than that of female with small separated brown spots; the pale circular areas without dark pigment are nevertheless well defined. Submature Male, Immature males, about as long as the adult but with pleopods not quite fully developed, have dorsum of carapace as in the female; it is hkewise remarkably uniform, the only variation being in the number of denticles (two or three) in the second dorsal incision, Length, 12°5 mm. Loc—New South Wales: off Jibbon, 3 to 22 fath., sand to mud ("Thetis” Station 38, Mar. 1898); Broughton Island, Shallow Station (K. Sheard, 11 p.m. to 12 midnight, Dec. 1938); off Jibbon, 35 fath., in coarse sand (KK. Sheard, Feb. 1940) ; off Coffs Harbour, 50 metres (IX. Sheard, trawled, June 1941) ; 5 miles east of Port Hacking, 100 metres on mud (“Cronulla” Trawl Station, July 1943); off Wata Mooli, 70 metres (“Cronulla” Trawl Station 4, 9 am., July 1943); Jibbon Station, 70 metres (type loc., “Cronulla” Traw! Station 3, July 1943); 4 miles east of Port Hacking, 80 metres, on mud (K. Sheard, trawled, May 1944); Ulladuila, 75 metres CX. Sheard, trawled, June 1944). Tasmania: off Babel Island, 0-50 metres (“Warreen” Station 29, 1939). Types in South Australian Museum, Reg. No. €.2453 and €.2454, This form, evidently not uncommon, is readily recognised by the slender form and the distinctive shape of the dorsal margin of the carapace in both sexes. Glyphocuma serventyi sp. nov. Ovigerous Female, Integument thin but firm, finely reticulate. Carapace one-fourth of total length of animal; its depth is equal to three- fourths its length, and is scarcely more than the greatest width; seen from above it is widest posteriorly and tapers to the front; dorsal margin in lateral view scarcely arched but abruptly incised at first third of length, the incision with two small denticles, one of which is minute; there is a distinct median dorsal carina. single anteriorly but bifurcating and diverging posterior to the incision; the thin anterior portion of the carina bends abruptly downwards at front of ocular lobe. trom above presenting the appearance of a triangular poiut projecting beyond the pseudorostral lobes; at the posterior end of each pseudorostral suture there is a low tubercle. Antennal notch rather deep and narrow ; antennal angle acute; there is a shallow groove behind the notch and the inferior margin of the cara- pace behind the tooth is serrate for a short distance. Pseudorostral lobes not quite reaching to end of eye lobe, narrowly subtruncate in front. Ocular lobe 281 slightly longer than wide, with pigmented lenses, three arranged in a triangle larger and more conspicuous than the others. Pedigerous somites with an almost indiscernible median dorsal carina; together they are almost as long as carapace and seen from above the second is much the widest; the postero-lateral portions of the third to fifth are not greatly backwardly produced. Fig. 37 Glyphocuma serventyi, type female and allotype male; lateral views and (ceph.) cephalothorax from above (x 163); c. pace, anterior portion of carapace (x33); ant. n, antennal notch and angle, slightly flattened (x 33). 282 Pleon with an obsolete dorsal carina, the somites excepting fifth subequal. First antenna with massive first peduncular joint as long as rest of appendage, and with second shorter than third; both flagella two-jointed, the accessory lash as usual very short. Mandible with long row of 18 or 19 spines. Basis of third maxilliped (including lobe in the measurement) twice as long as palp, serrate and with plumose hairs on distal half of inner margin; the external lobe reaches to the level of the distal margin of carpus, is strongly dentate on inner edge and is capped with a pair of plumose setae stouter than the other fringing setae. First peraeopod with carpus reaching just beyond level of antennal tooth; basis not produced apically and with a plumose seta at external distal angle; inner margin with the usual plumose setae and three spines, the last subapical; the remaining joints together are half as long again as the basis; propodus one-third as jong again as dactylus which is subequal in length to carpus. Second peraeopod with basis much shorter than rest of leg; ischium dis- tinct; merus and carpus of equal length, together about as long as dactylus ; merus with one or two distal spines on each side; carpus with two spines on inner margin and a cluster of four at external distal angle; propodus very short; dactylus with marginal spines and a distal cluster of five unequal spines the longest little more than half length of the joint. Third to fifth peraeopods with three carpal setae, decreasing in length, the longest, like propodal seta, not reaching beyond tip of dactylus; basis of third pair longer than rest of limb, of fourth and fifth shorter, Peduncle of uropod little longer than either telsonic somite or exopod, and with a row of about 14 stout spines, alternately short and longer, on inner edge; exopod slightly longer than endopod, twice the length of the longest of its four terminal spines and with few setae on inner margin; first joint of endopod threc- fourths as long again as second with a row of unequal inner spines and a spine at each distal angle, that on the inner side the stouter; second joint with half-a-dozen short spines, successively increasing in length and with two short and one long apical spine, the latter fully as long as the joint. Colour: white, mottled with dark grey. Length, 8°3 mm. Adult Male. There is no trace of an incision in the scarcely arched, slightly sinuate dorsal profile of the carapace; the latter is as wide as deep, narrower than in female and with the sides evenly curved; not at all subtriangular as seen from above; the median carina is double for the greater part of its length (a furrow with raised edges, and emphasised as a shallow pit near posterior margin). Pseudorostral lobes sinuate and rather widely truncate in front and with a few low tumidities posteriorly. Ocular lobe depressed along sides, wider than long and with lenses larger and more conspicuous than in female, but projecting similarly in front of pseudorostral lobes as a triangular point. Antennal notch shallow and widely open; antennal angle obtuse. Third maxilliped as in female. First peraeopod with basis not much shorter than remaining joints together ; the whole limb scarcely longer relatively than in female, although the carpus and propodus are a little longer in proportion to the other joints; ischium with a sub- apical inner tooth. Second peraeopods with basis stout and almost as long as rest of limb; spines more robust but otherwise as in female, 283 ~t> TRG: my Fig. 38 1, first antenna and urop., third maxilliped, d of young male. ant. ° ay ° oe v v 8 se eo & oa o a a = Bas 0 aw = Bon? > oe ——e-o a ha ov « Taye axe as. Vy KES Bo» ao ~ u i) n cary base] (x 84; accessory flagellum, peraeopods and uropoc Glyphocuma serventyt 284 The flagellum of the exopod of the fourth peraeopeds is short and five- jointed, with setae not very long. Peduncle of uropod distinctly longer than either telsonic somite or uropod, with longer and slightly more numerous spines; endopod with twice as many marginal spines as in female and with first joint less than half as long again as second, which has the longest terminal spine shorter than the joint. Length, 8-5 mm. Subadult Male. A large but immature male has the dorsal margin of the carapace incised and with two small teeth as in the female; in addition, there is a small denticle midway between the incision and apex of ocular lobe. The exopod of the fourth peraeopod has a three-jointed flagellum and the pleopods are not fully developed and lack setae. The first peraeopod is a little shorter than in the adult, the basis of the second peraeopod (as in the female) is much shorter than rest of limb, and there are other slight differences due to immaturity. Length, 8:5 mm. Loc—Tasmania: Long Island, off Cape Barren Island (allotype male, D. L. Serventy, submarine light, Nov. 1939) and off Babel Island, 39° 55’S., 148° 31’ E. (“Warreen” Station 29, 1939). New South Wales: off Jibbon, 35 fathoms on coarse sand (type female, K. Sheard, Feb. 1940), Types in South Australian Museum, Reg. No. C.2476 and C.2479, This species is named after Dr. D, L. Serventy, Biologist on the “Warreen.” It is distinguished by the deep carapace, projecting point at apex of ocular lobe and other obvious features, Genus SyMpopomMA Stebbing Sympodomma Stebbing, 1912, 138; and 1913, 15. As noted above, in the known species of Glyphocuma, females and immature males always have the crest of the carapace serrate or incised, but this armature is obliterated or smoothed out in the fully developed male. The few recorded specimens of Sympodomma suggest that this obtains here also. Five species have been placed in Stebbing’s genus. One of these, anomala (Sars), must, in view of Glyphocuma, be regarded as doubtfully referred, as it is known only from the female; this has dorsal teeth on the carapace. The imma- ture males and females described for diomedeae (Calman) and africana Stebbling have a dentate crest. S. weberi (Calman) is known from an adult male, which has the dorsum of the carapace unarmed but slightly, though distinctly, sinuate. The fifth species, eustraliensis Foxon is the only other in which the mature male is recorded, and here also the dorsum is without serrations according to Foxon’s fig. 5, but the female is stated to have “a marked dorsal ridge, which terminates anteriorly in a sharp tooth over the typical elongated ocular lobe, and the ridge is armed by a few hairs and three or four small denticles.” (Foxon, 1932, 388.) Stebbing depicts 10 or 11 leaflets in the branchial apparatus of his africana. In the figures of this species, and of Calman’s qweberi and diomedeac, the merus of the third maxilliped is shown as rather more expanded than it is in the species herein placed in Glyphocuma. ERRATA § P, 270, ii key to males, second line: for “wide” read “long.” P, 284, after last line, add: “represent a new species, but description awaits more material.” 285 SUMMARY It is suggested that two subfamilies, the Bodctriinae and Vaunthompsoniinae, be recognised. The genus Cyclaspis of the first-named was reviewed previously (Hale 1944), and herein Bodotria maculosa and [phinoe pellucida are described as new. In the Vaunthompsoniinae two new genera, Zenocuma and Pomacuma, allied to Gephyrocuma Hale, are proposed; the first peraeopods in these three genera can be folded to form the major part of an operculum which seals the cavity of the carapace from the exterior. Also, Glyphocuma, gen. nov., allied to Sympo- domma Stebbing, receives four species, the sexual dimorphism of which is recorded, while the genus Leptocuma Sars is discussed and a key is given to all the genera included. Species described as new are Zenocwna rugosa, Pomacuina cognata, Gephyvrocuma repanda, Leptocuma vicaria, L. obstipa, L. serrifera, L. intermedia, Vaunthompsonia nana, Glyphocuma inaequalis, G. dentata, and Gr. servontyt, REFERENCES Carman, W. T. 1907 “On New and Rare Crustacea of the Order Cumacea from the Collection of the Copenhagen Museum.” pt. i Trans. Zool. Soc., 18, 1-58, pl. i-ix C'AaLMAN, W. T. 1910 “On Heterocima sarsi Miers.” Ann. Mag. Nat. Tist. (8), 6, 612-616, pl. x Face, M. Lours 1924 “A propos d’une espece nouvelle du genre /eterocunia.” Bull. Mus. Nat. d’Hist., Paris, 30, 364-367, fig. 1 Foxon, G. E. H. 1932 Great Barrier Reef Exped., 1928-29. Sci. Rep. 4, No. 11, 387-395, fig. 5-10 {fAce, Hernerr M. 1928 “Australian Cumacea.” Trans. Roy. Soe. S. Aust.. 52, 31-48, fig. 1-17 HALE, Hernerr M. 1936 “Cumacea from a South Australian Reef.” Rec. S. Aust. Mus., 5, 404-438, fig. 1-23 HALE, Hrrnert.M. 1943 “Notes on Two Sand-dwelling Cumacea, Gephyro- cuma and Picrocuma.” Ree. S. Aust. Mus., 7, 337-342, fig. 1-9 HALE, Hernert M. 1944 “The Genus Cyelaspis.’ Rec. S, Aust. Mus., 8, 63-142, fig. 1-60 HANnseN, H. J. 1895 “TIsopoden, Cumaceen u. Stomatopoden der Plankton- Expedition.” Ergebn. d. Plankton-Exped., Bd. ii, 1-105, pL. i-viit Hansen, H. J. 1920 “Crustacea Malacostraca,” pt. iv, The Order Cumacea. Danish Ingolf-Exped., 3, (6), 1-85, pl. i-iv. Sars, G. O. 1873 “Beskrivelse af syv nye Cumaceer fra Vestindien og det Syd- Atlantiske Ocean.” KK. Svenska Vet.-Akad. Hand., Bd. 11 1-30, pl. i-vi Srepping, T. R. R. 1912 “The Sympoda” (Pt. iv, of South African Crus- tacea for the Marine Investigations in South Africa). Ann, S. Afr. Mus., 10, 129-176, pl. i-xvi Stesnine, T. R. R. 1913 “Cumacea (Sympoda)”. Das Tierreich, Lief.. 39, 1-210, fig. 1-137 ZIMMER, Cart 1908 “Die Cumaceen der Deutschen Tiefsee-Expedition.” Wiss. Ergeb. d. Tiefsee-Exp. “Valdivia,” 8, 157-196, pl. xxxvi-xlvi ZiIMMun, C. 1213) “Die Cumaceen der Deutschen Siidpolar-Expedition, 1901-1903.” -D. Stidpolar-Exp., 1901-1903, 14 (Zool. vi), 439-491, pl. xl-xlvi, text fig. 1-2 ZIMMER, Cart 1914 Cumacea, Fauna Stidwest Aust., 5, 175-185, fig. 1-18 ZIMMER, CArt 1921 Results of Dr. Mjoberg’s Swedish Scientific Expeditions to Australia, 1910-1913, 26, Cumaceen, K. Svenska Vet.-Akad. Hand., 61, (No. 7), 1-13, fig. 1-16 RECENT AUSTRALIAN SPECIES OF THE FAMILY RISSOIDAE (MOLLUSCA) By BERNARD C. COTTON, Conchologist, South Australian Museum Summary In the following paper an attempt is made to father together all species of Australian Recent Rissoidae and to allot them to their proper genera. Australian authors have not previously separated the families Rissoidae, Rissoinidae and Litiopidae in the same way in which they are now recognised. We find under Rissoidae such genera as Diala which belongs to Litiopidae, Cithna belonging to Cyclostremidae, Rissolina, Stiva and Rissoina belonging to Rissoinidae where the New Zealand Nozeba also belongs, and Heterorissoa placed by Thiele in Rissoellidae. New species from the dredgings made by the late Sir Joseph Verco and species collected by the author and others are described. It is pretty certain that many more species remain to be discovered in shell sand and alive on the various weeds and sea-grasses around our coast, even in the shallow waters accessible to the amateur collector. As it is almost impossible for students to classify the Rissoids or even find access to much of the literature concerning them, it is hoped that this preliminary survey with its keys, brief diagnoses and original references will encourage further study both in the Recent and fossil fields. With regard to the latter, much work will have to be done, and no doubt the species will form good indicators of strata. Small mollusca of this type can be obtained in quantity, undamaged by the drill, which so often destroys the larger forms. 286 RECENT AUSTRALIAN SPECIES OF THE FAMILY RISSOIDAE (MOLLUSCA) By Brernarp C. Corron, Conchologist, South Australian Museum {Read 14 September 1944] PLATE XVI INTRODUCTION In the following paper an attempt is made to gather together all species of Australian Recent Rissoidae and to allot them to their proper genera. Australian authors have not previously separated the families Rissoidae, Rissoinidae and {Litiopidae in the same way in which they are now recognised. We find under Rissoidae such genera as Diala which belongs to Litiopidae, Cithna belonging to Cyclostremidae, Rissolina, Stiva and Rissoina belonging to Rissoinidae where the New Zealand Nozeba also belongs, and //eterorissoa placed by Thiele in Rissoelli- dae. New species from the dradzines made by the late Sir Joseph Verco and species collected by the author and others are described. It is pretty certain that many more species remain to be discovered in shell sand and alive on the various weeds and sea-grasses around our coasts, even in the shallow waters accessible to the amateur collector. As it is almost impossible for students to classify the Rissoids or even find aceess to much of the literature concerning them, it is hoped that this preliminary survey with its keys, brief diagnoses and original references will encourage further study both in the Recent and fossil fields. With regard to the latter, much work will have to be done, and no doubt the species will form good indicators of strata. Small mollusca of this type can be obtained in quantity, undamaged by the drill, which so often destroys the larger forms. Key To GENERA or AUSTRALIAN RIsSSOTDAE a. Shell moderately elongate. b. Shell not scalariform. c. Aperture not separated from the body whorl or duplicate. d. Aperture edge thin, often reflexed, much thickened internally, no exterior varix. e. Smooth or weakly developed axials th fas vw £stea ce. Axials of elongate nodules os . Subestea ce. Aperture edge thickened by means of 2 an external 1 varix, f. Sculptured. g. Sculpture not clathrate. h. Axial ribs dominant . . . .. dlaurakia hh. Spiral sculpture dominant. i. Spiral cords .... : ant ‘ et ... Lironoba ii. Spiral incised lines. j. Aperture circular, thickened within .... a. Botelloides jj. Aperture ovate, not thickened within ... Subonoba ge. Sculpture clathrate. k. Protoconch spirally lirate, dull... .. Aferclina kk. Protoconch smooth, glossy mas a. Linemera fi. Smooth or nearly so. 1, Aperture entire, shell not truncate, solid. m. Smooth, whorls convex, aperture shnple, rotund ron Mice ... Notosetia mm. Smooth, whorls flattened, aperture slightly channelled below, aperture ovato-pyriform m3 Feet .. Dardanula I, Aperture discontinuous, effuse, shell truncate at the apex, transparent a. Enusetia Vrans. Koy. Soc. S.A., 68, (2), 306 November 1944 287 cc. Aperture separated from the body whorl or duplicate. n. Cylindrical, protoconch large, globose, smooth or ~ . Epigrus nn. Normal shape, protoconch not smooth, o. Protoconch stippled with very fine lines... ren xa uw. Serobs oo. Protoconch engraved with a honeycomb pattern 1958 a. Notoscrobs bb. Shell scalariform =... ah abe m) yee =a .. Anabathron aa, Shell very elongate, about four times as long as wide. p. Axially sculptured i a Caenaculunt pp. Spirally sculptured 7 w. Altenuata Estra Iredale 1915 Estea Iredale 1915, Trans. New Zealand Inst., 47, 451 Genotype: Rissoa sosterophila Webster 1905—Devenport, near Auckland, New Zealand. Shell minute, oval, elongate, subrimate, dull, smooth, no sculpture; spire conical, higher than the aperture; outlines slightly convex; whorls rather rapidly increasing, flattened, periphery subangled, base rounded, suture not much impressed ; aperture slightly oblique, oval, angled above, peristome continuous, but much thickened internally, sharp, very little expanded; columella short, arcuate, callous; operculum colourless and presenting a malleated appearance on the inner surface; protoconch conical, small, of two flat smooth whorls. Distribution—New Zealand, Australia, Tasmania. Fossil, Tertiary. Remarks—Distinguished by the smooth shell, the protoconch and shape of aperture, which is perpendicular, circular, with peristome reflected all round. This heterogenous group may represent a number of genera. In any case, there are so many and varied species allotted here that it seems almost impossible and futile to attempt to key them before they have been further studied. There appear to be at least seven groups represented in Australia. (a) Species which are quite smooth and polished like epproxima., (b) Species which are sculptured with microscopic axial accremental striae like fasmanica, (c) Species which have weak axial folds like frawenfeldt. (d) Species with strongly thickened and reflexed aperture lip like incidata. (e) Species with comparatively little thickened and reflected aperture lip like janjucensis. (£) Species with a very blunt apex like frara. (g) Species with comparatively sharp apex like rubicunda. Gatlif€ and Gabriel, in figuring the species Rissoa bicolor Petterd, point out that the protoconch, under microscopic examination, “shows that the two-whorled protoconch is minutely granulated, these granules being symmetrically arranged in about twelve spiral rows, which are more clearly defined on the second whorl.” A similar sculpture or texture is referred to in this paper under the genus Merelina. EsTEA APPROXIMA (Petterd 1884) Rissoa cyclostoma rosea Tenison Woods 1884, Proc, Roy. Soc. Tasm.. 153, not Deshayes 1863 or Hutton 1873 Rissoa approxima Petterd 1884, Journ. Conch., 138, 4. Rissoa woodst Pritchard and Gatliff 1902, Proc. Roy. Soc. Vict.. 104. Locs.—Tasm.: Blackman’s Bay (type loc. rasea), Tamar Heads (type loc. aphroxtma)» Vict.: Western Port (type loc. woods?) ; S. Aust.: shell sand from 288 Guichen Bay, Robe, Largs Bay, St. Francis Island, Venus Bay, also Gulf. St. Vineent, 14 fathoms. Remarks——-Smooth polished and thin lipped. Tasmanian North Coast speci- mens may be quite white, rose-red, brown or partly white and partly red and brown, EstTea BicoLor (Petterd 1884) Kissoa bicolor Petterd 1884, Journ. Conch., 4, 137. Loes—Tasm.: North Coast (type loc.), Derwent Estuary, Cape Raoul, 50 fathoms; Vict.: Portsea; S. Aust.: Beachport 110 fathoms, Cape Borda 62 fathoms, Gulf. St. Vincent and Spencer Gulf; N.S.W.: Cape Three Points 41 to 30 fathoms. Remarks—Distinguished by the white band beneath the suture. South Aus- tralian specimens show variations from the type as follows: (1) More blunt at the apex, suture more impressed, whorls more convex, mouth with more expanded lip and rounder. ‘2: Whorls more rapidly increasing, minute rimate perforation, aperture projecting beyond the level of the spire whorls. é3) Whorls less rapidly increasing. mouth not so expanded, not so bevelled on the inner margin, ISspia conus NARITA (Hedley and May 1908) Rissou columnaria tledley and May 1908, Rec. Aust., Mus., 7, 117, pl xxii, fig. 9. Lees —Tasm.: seven miles cast of Cape Pillar 100 fathoms (type loc.) ; Viet. Hemarks—Distinguished by the very elongate shape, variable colour, axials ‘ine, close set aecremental striae. Estea FRENCHIENSIS (Gatliff and Gabriel 1908) Rissoa frenchiensis Gatliff and Gabriel 1908, Proc. Roy. Soc. Vict., 379. Rissoa cylostoma Tenison Woods 1877, Proc. Roy. Soc. Tasm., 152, not Recluz 1843. Locs—Vict.: Western Port 6 fathoms, Port Phillip, Puebla Coast; Tasm.: Long Bay (type loc.), Blackman’s Bay; 5. Aust.: shell sand from Robe, Norman- ville, MacDonnell Bay, St. Francis Island, Cape Borda 62 fathoms; N.S.W.: Port Jackson. Remarks—Subturreted, tumid in the middle, suture margined with a white line. This species has a comparatively greater diameter than approxima. ESTEA INCIDATA (Frauenfeld 1867) Sabanaea incidata Frauenfeld 1867, Novara Exped., Moll, 12, pl. ii, fig. 19. Locs.—N.S.W.: Botany Bay (type loc.) ; Tasm.: South and East; Qld.; Vict. Renarks—Remarkable for its thickened and expanded aperture peristome. Hstea erma n. sp. (PL. xvi, fig. 1) ilolatype: Reg. No, 1.14184, South Australian Museum. Shell conical, thick, polished ruby brown, smooth, whorls five, flat and angled at the suture without a peripheral channel; no spiral punctuations; peristome of aperture thickened. Height 1-2 mm., diameter 0-7 mm. 289 Locs.—S. Aust.: Cape Borda 62 fathoms (type loc.), Dackstairs Passage 22 fathoms; Tasm.: North Coast; Vict. Remarks—Differs from mcidata in being smaller, having the apex less blunt and no spiral punctuations. One variety has an incision at the very angulate periphery, and another near the base. This may be the species recorded as inendat in Victoria and Tasmania. EsTea TRAVADOIDES (Gatliff and Gabriel 1913) Rissoa iravadoides Gatliff and Gabriel 1913, Proc. Roy. Soc. Vict., 26, 67. Locs—Vict.: dredged off Wilson’s Promontory (type loc.), Western Port 8 to 10 fathoms; Tasm.: Thouin Bay 40 fathoms. Distinguished by the numerous regular spiral lirae. Remarks Lsrea JANJUCENSIS (Gatliff and Gabricl 1913) Kissoa janjucencis Gatlff and Gabriel 1913, Proc, Roy. Soc. Vict., 26, 67, pl. Vill. fig. 2. Locs—Vict.: Jan Juc, Puebla Coast (type loc.), Western Port 8 to 10 fathoms; Tasm.: Penguin, North Coast in shell sand; S. Aust.: Outer Harbour shell sand, Beachport 40 fathoms. Remarks—Distinguished by the rather large, roundly pyriform aperture. laterally extended to the right and with a complete peristome. The sculpture in relata is even weaker. Esrea praAkEpa (Hedley 1908) Rissoa praeda Hedley 1908, Proc. Linn. Soc. N.S.W., 33, 468, pl. x. fig. 35. Locs.—-N.S.W.: Middle Harbour (type loc.). Reimarks—The sheil is distinguished by the massive perpendicwar mbs numbering 11 on the body whorl, and stopping at the periphery, leaving the base smooth; apex smooth, Estea puivitta (Ledley 1906) Rissoa pulvilla Hedley 1906, Proc. Linn. Soc, N.S.W., 30, 526, pl xxxii, hy. 25. Loes.—N.S.W.: Manly (type loc.). Remarks—Distinguished by the polished surface with microscopic growth lines and two spiral brown colour bands, separating this species from tasrtantica. which it otherwise somewhat resembles. Estea amblycorymba n. sp. (PI. xvi, fig. 2) tlolotype: Reg. No. D1i4185, South Australian Museum. Shell minute. subcylindrical, thin, shining, white and polished under 10x magnification; very finely spirally and axially striate under 50x, striae a little more pronounced around the base; whorls four, flatly convex, widely marginate round and below the sutures with an opaque white band; protoconch flattened. of one and a half depressed whorls. giving the shell a flat-topped appearance : aperture in the plane of the axis, pyriform, peristome reflected and entire. Height 2-1 mm., diameter 1-0 mm. Locs-——S. Aust.: Gulf St. Vincent 14 fathoms (type loc.), Backstairs Pas- sage 22 fathoms, Streaky Bay, Beachport 40 and 110 fathoms. é 290 Remarks—The species is unique in having the dull white band below the suture and the axial and spiral microscopic sculpture. The body whorl is com- paratively larger in proportion to the spire than any other Estea described. Esrea TasmANICA (Tenison Woods 1876) Lidina tasmanica Tenison Woods 1876, Proc. Roy Soc. Tasm., 29. Locs—Tasm.: Long Bay 6 fathoms (type loc.), Pirate Bay, Derwent Estuary i0 fathoms, east coast 10 to 100 fathoms; S. Aust.: Cape Rorda 62 fathoms, Newland Head 26 fathoms; Vict. Remarks—Bears some relation to pulvilla Hedley trom New South Wales. Esrea tiara (May 1915) Amphithalamus tiara May 1915, Proc. Roy. Soc. Tasm., 96, pl. vii, fig. 35. Locs.—Tasm.: Thouin Bay 40 fathoms (type loc.). Remarks—tThis species is evidently one belonging to the pertuinida type with blunt and flattened apex, which in this case is so flattened that the small tip on the top of the second whorl makes the whole protoconch look like a turban crown- ing the shell, Estea tumMipa (Tentson Woods 1876) Piala tiumida Tenison Woods 1876, Proc. Roy. Soc. Tasm., 147 Locs—-Tasm.: Swansea (type loc.), King Island; 5. Aust.: Beachport 40 and 150 fathoms, Cape Jaffa 130 fathoms; Vict.: Western Port. Remarks—Distinguished by the almost obsolete oblique axial plaits, and the colour banding of yellow above and below the sutures. EsreA FRAUENFELD! (Frauenfeld 1867} Rissoa frauenfeid: Frauenfeld 1867, Novara Exped., Moll., 10, pl. ii, fig. 13. Loces —N.S.W.: Sydney, Port Jackson (type loc.) ; Qld. Remarks—Distinguished from olivacea by the axial sculpture which is obsolete on the upper whorls and pronounced on the body whorl in this species. In olivacea the sculpture becomes obsolete on the body whorl. Estea relata n. sp. (Pl. xvi. fig. 3) Holotype: Reg. No. D14186, South Australian Museum, Shell subacute, conical, solid, fawn-coloured; whorls six, slightly convex, suture deeply incised; penultimate and hody whorl weakly axially plicate ; aper- ture oval; lip thickened. Height 3 mm., diameter 1-4 mm. Loes-—S. Aust.: Gulf St, Vincent {4 fathoms (type foc.), Remarks-—This species is related to fraucnfeldi approximating to the draw- ing by Frauenteld of the less strongly sculptured variety which he gives together with the typical form in his original description. This species relata is more solid with strongly developed aperture and peristome. lestea PERPoLITA May 1919 listea perpolita May 1919, Proc. Roy. Soc. Tasm., 61, pl. xv, fig. 13. Loes.—Tasm.: Thouin Bay 50 fathoms (type loc.), Cape Pillar 100 fathoms. Remarks—Distinguished by its rounded whorls, flattened summit and high polish, differing from rubicunda in being shorter and blunter. 291 Esrea PertUMIDA (May 1915) Amphithalamus pertionida May 1919, Proc. Roy. Soc. Tasm., 96, pl. vi, fig. 33. Locs.—Tasm.: Thouin Bay 40 fathoms (type loc.), Cape Pillar 100 fathoms. Remarks—Distinguished by the swollen whorls, particularly the whorl fol- lowing the protoconch. The whorls are also constricted abruptly at the base towards the suture, somewhat like those of obeliscus. IsteA puER May 1921 Estea puer May 1921, Check List Moll., Tasm., 51. Rissoa pupoides May 1915, Proc. Roy. Soc. Tasm., 93, pl. v, fig. 26 (not pupordes Stimpson 1851). Locs—Tasm.: Port Arthur 50 to 70 fathoms (type loc.). Remarks—Known only from the type locality. This species is remarkable for its pupaeform shape. Its deeply impressed suture somewhat recalls pertunida and obeliscus. Este rusbicuNDA (Tate and May 1900) Rissoa rubicunda May 1900, Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust., 24, 100. Locs-—Tasm.: Derwent Estuary (type loc.) ; Viet.: Western Port. Remarks—Related to perpolita but is less blunt at the apex as well as show- ing the other differences mentioned under perpolita. Esrra Kersiizaw1 (Tenison Woods 1877) Rissoina kershawi Tenison Woods 1877, Proc. Roy. Soc. Vict., 57. Locs.—Vict.: Western Port; Tasm.: North Coast Channel 10 fathoms (type loc.). Remarks—Distinguished by the axial riblets covering the whole of the whorl. Estea LABRoTOMA May 1919 Fstea labrotoma May 1909, Proc. Roy. Soc. Tasm., 61, pl. xv, fig. 14. Locs—Tasm.: Frederick Henry Bay, taken from roots of the giant kelp (type loc.). Remarks—LDistinguished by the thick and well reflected peristome, which has a deep indentation where it joins the body whorl. Esrea Microcosta May 1919 Listea inicrocosta May 1919, Proc. Roy. Soc, Tasm., 61, pl. 15, fig. 12. Locs-—Tasm.: seven miles east of Cape Pillar 100 fathoms (type loc.) ; S. Aust.: Beachport 40 and 200 fathoms; Vict. Remarks—Distinguished from kershawi by the much more numerous and finer ribs, rounder mouth, and more cylindrical form. Esra oneriscus (May 1915) Rissoa obeliscus May 1915, Proc. Roy. Soc. Tasm., 92, pl. v, tig. 4+. Locs.—Tasm.: Port Arthur 30 to 70 fathoms (type loc.), Schouten Island 40 fathoms; Vict. Remarks — Distinguished by the elongate shell and the comparatively numerous whorls which show a rather sudden constriction at the bottom, running abruptly in towards the suture beneath. There is also an umbilical chink. 292 Esrea oLivAcea (Frauenfeld 1867) Alvania olivacca Frauenfeld 1867, Novara Exped., Moll., 11, pl. ii. fig. 14. Rissoa diemenensis Petterd 1884, 4, 138. Locs—N.S.W.: Sydney (type loc.), Botany Bay, Manly Beach; Tasm.: Tamar Heads, Table Cape (type loc. diemenensis), Derwent Estuary, King Island, Bass Straits; S. Aust.: Port MacDonnell, Outer Harbour in shell sand. Gulf St. Vincent 14 fathoms, Beachport 200 fathoms, St. Francis Island 15 and 20 fathoms; W. Aust.: 80 miles west of Eucla 80 fathoms; Old.; Vict. Remarks—Distinguished by the axially ribbed shell, emarginate by an im- pressed spirat just below the suture forming nodules on the top of the ribs. This widely distributed shell is now added to the Western Australian fauna. Subestea n. gen. Genotype: leauia seminodosa May 1915—Tasm., Vhouin Bay 40 fathoms. Sheil small, shining. pale yellowish, elongate; whorls five. rounded, stture well impressed; spire whorls bear about nine nodulous-like ribs which become weaker and narrower as they descend, and almost disappear about the middle oi the body whorl; a few faint spirals on the hase; aperture rather broadly pyriform, ebhque, surrounded by a well-defined margin; protoconch of one-and-a-hali whorls, at first smooth and later developing about five faint spirals. Distribution—Australia, Remarks—-The genus is distinguished by the sculpture of nodulous-like ribs S a 2 and the protoconch. KKry to SPEciES oF SunEsTrEa a. Shell wide and roundly subangulate at the periphery of the body whorl ss or ma seas a Salebresa aa. Sheil normal in shape and not subangulate at the periphery at the body whorl. b. Axial ribs stopping before the base is reached ; seninodosa bb. Axial ribs extending unto the base : ae Hlindersi SUBESTEA SALEBROSA (Frauenfeld 1867) Kissoa salebrosa Vrauenteld 1867, Novara Exped., Moll., 11, pl. n. fig. 15, Locs.—N.S.W.: Sydney (type loc.) Qld.: Viet. Kemarks-—Distinguished from semitiodosa by the comparatively wide shel. subangulation of the body whorl and rather subdilate aperture. SUBESTEA SEMINODOSA (May 1915) leania seminedosa May 1915, Proc. Roy. Soc. Tasm., 94, pl. vi, fig. 30. Locs—Vasm.: Thouin Bay 40 fathoms (type loc. ). Remuarks—This genotype species is much smaller than flindersi and has i: simpler sculpture. there being no interstitial pustules between the major nodules at the suture. SUBESTEA FLINDERST t Tenison Woods 1876) (Pl. xvi, fig. 12) Rissoma flindersi Penison Woods 1876, Proce. Roy Soc. Tasm., 154. Loes—Vasm.: North West Coast (type loc.): S. Aust.: MacDonnell Bay. Gulf St. Vincent, Largs Bay. Sceales Bay, St. Francis Island 35 fathoms: W. Aust.: Hopetown; Vict. Remarks—-A South Australian specimen of this species is figured, taken frou shell sand at Glenelg. They are very closely allied to the Tasmanian specimen> inthe May Collection. 203 HaAurAniA Iredale 1915 Haurakia Iredale 1915, Trans. New Zealand Inst., 47, 449. Genotype: Rissoa hamiltoni Suter 1898—Lyall Bay, near Wellington, New Zealand. Shell thin, axial sculpture dominating, sometimes crossed by spiral threads, which may continue to the base or stop at the periphery of the bedy whorl ; aperture round and subvertical, peristome continuous ; proteconch smooth and elobose with convex, whorls. Pistribution—Austratia, New Zealand, Tasmania. lossil, Tertiary. Remurks—The genus closely resembles Turboella Gray 1847 but is dis- tinguished by the reunder aperture and less concave columella, Although regarded sometimes as a synonym of Lurboella Gray = Pusillina Monterosato. the genus has been accepte das distinet by all Aust ralian and New Zealand conchologists. Key To Species or LIAURAKIA a. Base spirally ribbed ... ws r ts _ ne . siranyei aa. Base sincoth or with merely erital threadlets or axials, bh. Base with spiral threadlets. ce. Strong axiaJ ribs and weaker spirals. d. No spiral band running round the top of the whorls. ... supracostata dd. A spiral band running round the top of the w horls 0... profrundior ec. Weak axial ribs and strong spirals. ce. Bady whorl sculptured all over. f. Ribs not arched ; 2, a8 ; ca HOVarensts ff. Ribs arched , th : demcssa ee. Body whorl smooth - in the middie mediolaevts bh. Base smooth or with axials only, we. Base with axtais . . : Uddelliana pg. Base smooth ; wits . desere pans LPAURABLA STRANGED (Brazicr 1894) Rissoad (Apicularia) strange? Virazier 1894, Proc. Linn. Soe, N.SAV.. 19, 173. pl. xiv, fig. 11. Rissoa lineata Petterd 1884. Journ. Conch., 147 (non Risso 1826) Loes.—N.S.W.: Watsons Bay (type loc.) ; Tasm.: North Coast (type Joc. lineata), Frederick the entry Bay, Kelso; Viet.: S. Aust.: Gulf St. Vincent 14 fathoms, Beachpori it fathoms, shell sand fron: MacDonnell Bay, Guichen Bay. Robe, Streaky Bay, St. Francis Island, Reevesby Island, Venus Bay, Port Elliston. Carawa: W. Aust. 30 miles west of Eucla 80 fathoms, Hopetown, Ning George sound. Remarks—The following varietal forms may be observed amongst Southern Australian specimens : (1) There may be no spirals in the body whorls. (2) One spiral just below the suture causing tuberculation of the anxials ; another just above the suture marking the end of the anials with a small tuberele. There may he several spirals which cross and. slightly tuberculate the axials, as many as 18 in the penultimate spire whorl. os) FIAURAKIA SUPRACOSTATA Ate av 1919 Haurakia supracostata May 1919, Proc. Roy. Soc. Tasm., 62, pl. xv. fig. 16. Loes,—Vasm.: Frederick Henry Bay (type loc.), North Coaek Thouin Bay 40 fathoms. King Island; Vict. 204 Kemarks—Distinguished by the deeply impressed suture and the compara- tively few axial ribs fading at the periphery. ITAURAKIA PROFUNDIOR (Hedley 1907) Kissa profundior Hedley 1907, Ree. Aust. Mus., 6, 358, pl. Ixvii, fig. 15. Locs--N.S.W.: 35 miles east of Sydney 800 fathoms (type loc.). Kemarks-~-Distinguished by the spiral band running round the top of the six whorls, HAURAKIA NOVARENSIS (Frauenfeld 1867) Hlvante novarensis Frauenteld 1867, Novara Exped., Moll., 11, pl. ji, fig. 16. Rissoa (Alvania) trajectus Watson 1886, 15, 596, pl. xliv, fig. 6. Locs—N.S.W.:. Sydney (type loc.); Qld.: Torres Straits 3-11 fathoms (type foc. trajectus), Caloundra; Tasm.: Thouin Bay 40 fathoms. Remarks—Distinguished by the comparatively greater development of the spirals. HAURAKIA DEMESSA (Tate and May 1900) Wissow (Apieulariay demessa Yate and May 1900, Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust., 24, 98. Lacs. Tasm.: Thouin Bay 40 fathoms (type loc.), Frederick Henry Bay. Remarks erc is a variety from Thouin Bay 40 fathoms in which the shell is shehtly wider and the spirals less marked. Haurakia mediolaevis n. sp. (Pl. xvi, fig. 4) Halatype—Reg. No. 1.14187, South Australian Museum. shell ovate, thick, white, not colour banded; whorls five slightly convex, gradate, finely spirally lirate; lirae crossed by weak axial lirae; aperture ovate, columella slightly arcuate ; outer lip thickened by a varix; middle of each whorl smooth, or nearly so, through the axials and spirals becoming more or less obsolete. Tleight 2:5 mm., diameter 1-5 mm. Locs~-S. Aust.: Cape Jaffa 300 fathoms (type loe.); Tasm.: Thouin Bay 40 fathoms; W. Aust.: Cottesloe (Ifenn.) ? Remarks—Differs from H, novarensis in the weaker sculpture becoming obsolete on the middle of the whorls, and in being unicoloured white or horn with- out any colour banding of any sort. The species is rare and dredged only at the two localities named. This, and not novarensis, may be the species recorded from Cottesiog, Western Australia, by Henn, HAURAKIA LIDDELLIANA (fledley 1907) Kissow tiddelliana Hedley 1907, Proc. Linn, Soc. N.S.W., 32, (3), 494, pl. xvii, Locs.—QOld.: Mast Head Reef, Capricorn Group 17-20 fathoms (type loc.) : Viet. Remarks-—In this species the axials extend on to the base. HAURARKIA DESCREPANS (Tate and May 1900) Rissoa (Pusillina) descrepans Tate and May 1900, Trans. Roy Soc. S. Aust.. 24, 93. Rissoa incompleta Hedley 1908, Proc. linn. Soc. N.S.W., 33, 468, pl. x, fig. 36. Lees.—Tasm.: Cape Pillar 100 fathoms (type loc.), Pilot Station 10 fathoms; NoS.W.: Middle Harbour, Sydney (type of iacompleta): Vict.: S. Aust.: 295 Beachport 40 fathoms, Cape Borda 60 fathoms, Streaky Bay; W. Aust.: ilopetown. Remarks—Some South Australian specimens have a tendency to develop a weakly defined rib at the bottom of the axials somewhat resembling a spiral basal rib at the periphery, and in some specimens the apical whorls are of a vinous brown and the next whorls of increasing lighter colour. Lironosa Iredale 1915 Lironoba Iredale 1915, Trans. New Zealand Inst., 47, 450. Genotype—Rtssoa suteri Hedley 1904, Foveaux Straits, New Zealand. Shell small, ovate, imperforate, gradate and solid; typical sculpture of broad flat spiral ribs; sometimes the ribs are weaker but the spiral sculpture is always dominant; aperture oval, oblique, peristome much thickened; protoconch smooth in one series (typical) and spirally lirate in another. Distribution—New Zealand, Australia, Tasmania. Fossil, Tertiary. Key Tro Species or LiroNoBA a. Outer lip rounded, not produced at the base of the columella. b. Strong spiral keels. c. Keels wider than the interstices. d. Keels numbering SIX... f. nl oth . _. freycineti dd. W&Weels numbering eight eat od 9 5 . a. archensis cc. Keels narrower than the interstices. e. A simooth area at the top of the whorl .... . agnewt ec. Smooth area narrow or obsolete. f. Keels five on the ‘body whorl at Hy . . australis ff. Keels seven on the body whorl tiny a. twilsonensis bb. Weak spiral keels. g. Whorls rounded. h. Keels irregular dee wot byte Ds . sulcata hh. Keels regular, i, Keels ten wah “Ate wid ted nhs .. wutltilirata. ii. Keels eight ... ds oa 4 sys . lockyert ii. Keels seven sat — ide hie uw. layardi ge. Whorls angulate. j. Weak spiral riblets group to form an angulation rae mil sid ae a. anilirata jj. Strong spiral riblets group to form an angulation. k. Base with spiral riblets 50 . .. praetornattlis kk. Base smooth a. Umbrex aa. Outer lip rounded, but produced at the base of the columella .... schoutanica LreoNOBA FREYCINETI (May 1915) Rissoa freyeineti May 1915, Proc. Roy. Soc. Tasm., 94, pl. v, fig, 28. Locs—Tasm.: Thouin Bay 40 fathoms (type loc.). Remarks—Distinguished by the six and sometimes seven strong rotnded keels on the body whorl, separated by grooves almost as wide. LigoNonpa ARCHENSIS (May 1913) Rissoa archensis May 1913, Proc. Roy. Soc. Tasm., 47, pl. ti, fig. 5. Locs.—Tasm.: Arch Island. D’Entrecasteaux Channel (type loc.), Thouin Bay 40 fathoms. Remarks—Distinguished from freycineti by the more numerous keels of the body whorl. 296 LIRONOBA AGNEW! (Tenison Woods 1877) Rissoa agnewt Yenison Woods 1877, Proc. Roy Soc. Tasm., 152. Locs.—Tasm.: Blackman’s Bay (type loc.), Frederick Henry Bay, Schouten Island 40 fathoms; N.S.W.; Vict. Remark by the smooth are at the top of the whorls and the four keels of the body whorl. Shells picked out of shell sand by me from Robe, South Australia, bear some resemblance to this species but are not sufficiently well preserved to determine whether they belong here or to lockyeri. They probably belong to the latter species. JTARONOBA AUSTRALIS (Tenison Woods 1877) Cingulina australis Tenison Woods 1877, Proc, Roy. Soc. Tasm., 147. Nissoa tentsoni Tate 1899, Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust., 23, 233, nom. mut., not Cingulina australis Sowerby. Locs.—Tasm.: Badger Island Bass Straits (type loc.), King Island, Frederick Henry Bay, North Coast; Vict.; S. Aust.: Beachport 200 fathoms, Cape Borda 55, 60 and 62 fathoms, Cape Jaffa 49 fathoms. shell sand from Lacepede Bay, MacDonnell Bay, Holdfast Bay, Guichen Bay, Robe. Remarks—Distinguished by the five elevated spiral keels of the body whorl. The species is neither Rissoe nor Cirgulina, so the name australis stands. LIRONOBA WILSONENSIS (Gatlitf and Gabriel 1913) Rissoa wilsonensts Gatliff and Gabriel 1913, Proc. Roy. Soc. Vict., 26, 68, pl. viii, fig. 4. Loes.--Viet.: Wilson’s Promontory (type loc.); Tasm.: Thouin Bay 40 iathoms, Cape Pillar 100 fathoms; S. Aust.: Neptune Island 104 fathoms, Cape Borda 62 fathoms. Remarks—Distinguished froni australis by the more numerous keels on the body whorl and the less acuminate shell. South Australian shells agree with the cotype. Lironoba sulcata n. sp. (PI xvi, fig. 5) Ree. No. D.14188, South Australian Museum, Shell small, rather narrow and elongate, solid, white; whorls convex, slowly micreasing in size, four in number; sculpture of numerous irregular fine spiral keels starting after a fairly wide smooth area below the suture, and present right on to the base: the upper two well separated, then the rest more crowded the interstices giving a sulcate appearance to the shell; aperture well defined. round, entire, lip thickened tending to become a little effuse and very slightly produced below the columella; entire surface microscopically spirally regularly scratched; protoconch paucispiral, depressed smooth whorls giving a truncate appearance to the top of the shell. Height 3 mm., diameter 1-5 nim. Loes—s. Aust.: Cape Borda 62 fathoms (type loc.). Gulf St. Vincent 14 fathoms. Holotype Remarks culiar spetigs occurred in number in dredge sifting from the type locality. The irregularly placed spirals, distant at first and then more crowded and running right over the base, together with the microscopic spiral scratches distinguish this species. 297 LIRONOBA MULTILIRATA (May 1915) Rissoa multilirata May 1915, Proc. Roy. Soc. Tasm., 93, pl. v, fig. 27. Locs—Yasm.: North Coast, Frederick Henry Bay (type loc.); S. Aust.: Kingston shell sand, Cape Jaffa 130 fathoms. Remarks—Distinguished by the flatly rounded keels of the body whorl, numbering ten, separated by narrow grooves, and smooth base. Lironopa Lockyerr (Hedley 1911) Rissou lockyeri Hedley 1911, Zool. Res. Endeavour, 1, 103, pl. xviii, fig. 22. Locs-—S. Aust.: 40 miles south of Cape Wiles 100 fathoms (type loc.), St. Francis Island 15, 20, 35 fathoms, Cape Jaffa 130 fathoms, Spencer Gulf 40 fathoms, Cape Borda 62 fathoms. Remarks—Distinguished from /ayardi by its greater size, tendency to a wider smooth area below the suture and at the base, and in having eight instead of seven keels. |/t was known previously only from the type locality. LigoNOBA LAVARDE (Petterd 1884) Rissou layardi Petterd 1884, Journ, Conch., 138. Locs—Yasm.: North Coast (type loc.), Schouten Island 40 fathoms, Frederick Henry Bay, D’Entreeasteaux Channel, Storm Bay 24 fathoms, North West Coast; Vict. ? Remarks—I\mstinguished by the fine, regular spiral keels numbering seven on the body whorl. An examination of South Australian specimens previously identified by various local conchologists as agnewi and layardi, and specimens taken by me at Robe in shell sand, proves them to be variants of lockyeri. LiroNOBA UNILIRATA (Tenison Woods 1878) Keissoing unilirate Tenison Woods 1878, Proc. Roy. Soc. Tasm., 123. Locs.—Tasm,: Frederick Henry Bay (type loc.) shallow water to 100 fathoms; S. Aust.: Cape Borda 55 fathoms, Neptune Island 104 fathoms, Beach- port 150 fathoms; Vict.? Reimarks—-Distinguished by the spiral riblet sculpture forming a single or double keel on the upper whorls, producing an angulation, the body whorl generally but not always destitute of riblets or may have only one. LIRONOBA PRAETORNATILIS (Iledley 1912) Alvania praetornatilis Hedley 1912, Rec. Aust. Mus., 8, 139, pl. xh, fig. 16. Locs —N.S.W.: Broughton Island, Port Stephens 35 fathoms (type loc.). Remarks—Distinguished from tbrex by the less exsert spire whorls and the spirally ridged base. LIRONOBA IMBREX (Hedley 1908) Rissoa iimbrey Vedley 1908, Linn. Soc, N.S.W., 33, 469, pl. x, fig. 33, Loc-—N.S.W.: Middle Harbour (type loc.). Remarks—Distinguished from praetornatilis by the lack of spiral riblets on the base and the more elongate shape of the shell. . Lironopa scnouTAnica {May 1913) Rissoa schoutanica May 1913, Proc, Roy. Soc. Tasm., 47, pl. 1, fig. 6. Locs—Tasm.: Schouten Island 40 fathoms (type loc.); 5S. Aust.: Cape Borda 55 fathoms; Vict.: Ninety Mile Beach 140 fathoms. 298 Remarks—Distinguished from all other species of Lironoba by the massive aperture, the lip of which is produced below the columella, and the broad, heavy shell with few strongly developed keels. This is a new record for South Australia. BOTELLOIDES Strand 1928 Botelloides Strand 1928, Arch. Naturgesch., 92, 1926, A. 8, 66. Botellus Iredale 1924, Proc. Linn. Soc. N.S.W., 49, (3), 244: not Botellirs Spix and Martius 1823 or Moniez 1887. Genotype: Onoba bassiana Hedley 1911—Devenport, North Tasmania. Shell subcylindrical, rounded at each end, whorls wound obliquely on the last two-thirds of the length; earlier whorls smooth, later bearing fine incised spiral grooves; aperture circular, columella excavate, outer lip grooved within and bevelled to a sharp edge. Distribution—Australia and Tasmania. : Remarks—The thickening of the aperture within and its small and circular shape, the pupoid shape of the shell and its heavy structure, distinguish this genus from Subonoba, Key to Species or BoTELLOIDES a. Shell gradually widening towards the body whorl os a hassianius aa. Shell not widening but cylindrical. b. Sides of whorls rather flattened .... . = _ a. berda bb. Sides of whorls somewhat convex m0 att bats .. Glomerosa BOTELLOIES BASSIANUS (Hedley 1911) Onoba bassiana Hediey 1911, Zool. Res. Endeavour, 1, 108, pl. xix, fig. 25. Locs.—Tasm.: Devenport (type loc.), Thouin Bay 40 fathoms; S. Aust. : Beachport 40, 49, 100, 110, 150 and 200 fathoms, Cape Borda 55 and 62 fathoms. Cape Jaffa 130 fathoms, St. Francis Island 35 fathoms, Newland Head 20 fathoms, Gulf St. Vincent 14 fathoms, Backstairs Passage 22 fathoms; W. Aust.: King George Sound, Bunbury, Rottnest beach, dead; Vict.: Port Fairy; N.S.W.: Twofold Bay and Green Cape 25 to 70 fathoms. RKemarks—This species is larger and more solid than the other two members of the genus, and the shell widens towards the body whorl. This is an addition to the Western Australian Mollusca. Botelloides borda n. sp. (PL. xvi, fie. 6) Holotype—Reg. No, D14189, South Australian Musemn. Shell solid, oblong, subeylindrical, rounded at each extremity ; surface smooth and polished with numerous delicate spiral incisions; whorls very flatly convex : suture slightly sunken and slightly constricting the previous whorl; body whorl shghtly longer than the rest of the shell; aperture very small and round. thickened within. Height 3-75 mm., diameter 1-5 mm. Locs—S. Aust.: Cape Borda 55 fathoms (type loc.), Gulf St. Vincent 14 fathoms, Beachport 40 fathoms; Vict.: Wilson’s Promontory. Remarks—This species is distinguished from glomerosa by its greater size and comparatively greater length to width. It differs from bassiana in its more cylindrical shape, BoOTELLOmES GLOMEROSA (Hedley 1907) Onoba glomerosa Hedley 1907, Proc. Linn. Soc. N.S.AW.. 32, (3), 459, pl. xvii, fig. 23. Loes.—-Old.: Mast Head Reef, Capricorn Group (type loc.). Noosa; Vict. 299 Sunonona Iredale 1915 Subonoba Iredale 1915, Trans. New Zealand Inst., 47, 450. Genotype: Rissoa fumata Suter 1898—Te Onepoto, near Littleton, New Zealand. Shell minute, subcylindrical, thin, imperforate, translucent; sculpture of numerous close spiral incisions; whorls rapidly increasing in size, moderately convex, sutures impressed; aperture slightly oblique, ovate, angled above. peristome continuous, sharp, slightly thickened, basal hp slightly effuse; proto- conch papillate, of one-and-a-half smooth and convex whorls. Disiribution—New Zealand, Australia. Renarks—The aperture, by its oval shape and lack of internal thickening, distinguishes this genus from Bofelloidcs. SUBONOBA MERCURIALIS (Watson 1886) Rissoa (Onoba) mercurialis Watson 1886, Challenger, Zool., 15, 600, pl. xiv, fig. 12. Locs.—Qld.: off Wednesday Island, Cape York 8 fathoms (type loc.). Meretrna Iredale 1915 Merclina Iredale 1915, Trans. New Zealand Inst., 47, 449. Genotype: Rissoa (Alvania) cheilostoma Tenison Woods 1877—\.ong Bay 20 fathoms, Tasmania. Shell minute, turreted, yellow, or white, conspicuously Jatticed throughout ; aperture produced, bilabiate and entire; peristome continuous, variced, with sub- sutural sinus; protoconch paucispiral, depressed, inrolled at the tip, with a weak terminal varix where it adjoins the shell; under 50 x magnification the protoconch shows a minutely porous surface and the very fine dense punctures give the effect of running together into spiral lines or grooves. Distribution—Australia, Tasmania, New Zealand, Lifu, Kermadec Island. Remarks Linemera. The spirally grooved protoconch distinguishes this genus from Key to Speciés or MERELINA a. Elongate, greatest width less than half the height. b. Latticed sculpture with threc spirals on the body whorl . cheilastome bb. Latticed sculpture with four spirals on the body whorl ... gracilis aa. Ovate, greatest width less than half the height. c. Sculpture a close reticulation .... ie x, .. australiac ec. Sculpture a wide reticulation. d. Body whorl with two spirals .... ms oe nfs a Aulliana dd. Body whorl with more than two spirals. e Body whorl with four spirals ie an a cyrla ee. Body whorl with five spirals rte wu bin a. eucraspeda MERELINA CHEILOSTOMA (Tenison Woods 1877) Rissoa cheilostoma Tenison Woods 1877, Proc. Roy. Soc. Tasm., 152. Alvania elegans Angas 1877 (August), Proc. Zool. Soc., 174, pl. xxvi, fig. 15. Loes—Tasm.: Long Bay 20 fathoms (type loc.), Thouin Bay 40 fathoms. Frederick Henry Bay, North Coast; N.S.W.: Port Jackson (type loc., elegans), Balmoral; Old.; Vict.; S. Aust.: Beachport 40 and 150 fathoms, Gulf St. Vincent 14 fathoms, Cape Borda 55 fathoms, shell sand from MacDonnell Bay, Kingston, Guichen Bay. Remarks—Most South Australian and North Tasmanian specimens are worn. and are a little narrower than the tvpical Peronian specimens. SOU MERELINA GkACILIS (Angas 1877) Alvanta gracilis Angas 1877, Proc. Zool. Soc., 174, pl. xxvi, fig. 16. Rissoa devecta Tate 1899, Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust., 23, 235. Locs—N.SW.: Port Jackson (type loc., also of devectu); Viet.; Qld.; Tasm.: Derwent Hstuary, South Hast 10 to 100 fathoms; S. Aust.: Neptunes 104 fathoms; W. Aust.: Rottnest Island, King George Sound. Kemarks—Wlindersian records are from single beach rolled specimens of doubtiul determination. MERELINA AUSTRALIAE (Frauenfeld 1867) Cingula australiae Prauenteld 1867, Noyara Exped., Moll. 14, pl. ii, fig. 23. Ressoa ochroleuca Brazier 1804, Proc, Linn. Soe. N.S.W., 1, 174. pl. xiv. fig. 12. Merelina (Apicwaria) apicilirata Vate and May 1900, Trans, Roy. Soc. S. Aust. 24, 99. Lors.-N.S.W.2 Sydney (type loc.), dredged off Green Point, Watson's Bay ctype loc, of vehroleuca): Vasm.: North Coast, D’Entreeasteaux Channel (type loc, apteilirata) ; Qld.; Viet.: Kileunda. Kemarks——Tasmanian specimens in the May collection are typical, but 1 have been unable to discover any South Australian specimens. A very poor and worn specimen from Rottnest, Western Australia, somewhat resembles this species, but more material would be required before it is added to the Western Australian list. MERELINA HULLIANA (Tate 1893) Rissoa (Alvania) hulliana Tate 1893, Hand List S. Aust. Moll., 7, nom. mut. for Dunkeria fasciata Tenison Woods 1876, Proc. Roy. Soc. Tasm., 146, non Requienr 1848. focs—Vict.: Bass Straits (type loe.); Tasm.: South and North Coast: S. Aust.: Gulf St. Vineent, MacDonnell Bay, Robe, Kingston, Guichen Bay in shell sand. Reimtuarks—Distinguished by the wide latticed sculpture and broad shell, In life the shell is translucent and has two yellowish spiral bands, one below the suture, the other at the periphery. Merelina cyrta n. xp. (PL xvi, fig. 7) Holotype: Reg. No. D14190, South Australian Musetum. Shell minute, turreted, latticed all over: translucent, shining golden vellow, with a white band in the middle of the spire whorls, including the central space and the rib on either side; whorls seven, four spiral lirae crossed by twelve axial, oblique and curved costae on the penultimate; number of axials variable; mouth effuse at the front of the outer lip and labrum slighily sinuous in profile; base has six or seven spiral ribs. Height 2°5 mm., diameter 1-3 mm. Locs.-W. Aust.: King George Sound (type loc.), Great Australian Bight west Of Eucla 100 fathoms, Yallingup, Hopetown, Rottnest, Albany, Ellenbrook; 5. Aust.: Beachport 40 fathoms, Cape Borda 55 fathoms. 62 fathoms; Neptune Island 104 fathoms, Investigator Straits 20 fathoms, St. Francis Island, 6, 15 and 35 fathoms, Gulf St. Vincent 14 fathoms, shell sand from Port River, [franklin Island, Sceales Bay, Guichen Bay, Largs Bay, St. Francis Island, West Coast, Glenelg. Remarks-——Compared with M7. hulliana the present species is less solid, more attenuated, seven whorls instead of six; penultimate whorl with four spirals SOL instead of two; eleven axial costae instead of six or seven and these are more oblique and more curved, but may vary from twelve to twenty; the more effuse mouth at the front of the outer lip, and the more sinuous labrum in profile; the base has six or seven spiral ribs instead of three or four. The follow- ing variations may be noted: i The two smooth apical whorls are ruddy chestnut, whereas most have a white apex. 2 Most are white, but many have a white band in the middle of the whorls. the rest of the shell being a golden yellow; some have an infrasutural darker band. 3 The respective validity of the axial costae and spiral lirae varies in different examples. 4 The number of axial costae vary in number; in some cases about twelve to fourteen, in others twenty to twenty-four. 5 In some the central spiral lira is prominent and its tubercles are opaque white like a row of pearls. MeRELINA EUCRASPEDA (Hedley 1911) Rissoa hulliana eucraspeda Hedley 1911, Zool. Res. Endeavour, 1, 103, pl. xviii, fig. 21. Locs.—S. Aust.: 40 miles south of Cape Wiles 100 fathoms (type loc.). Beachport 110 fathoms, Cape Borda 62 fathoms, Neptune Island 104 fathoms. Remarks—Not bicarinate as in M. hulliana, where two spirals encircle the whorls forming the bicarination. In the present species five or six spirals encircle the body whorl and base. It was previously known only from the type locality. LINEMERA [inlay 1924 Linemera Finlay 1924, Trans. New Zealand Inst., 55, 483. Genotype: Linemera interrupta Finlay 1924 = Rissoa gradata Mutton preoce— New Zealand. Sculpture clathrate, protoconch adpressed, smooth, glossy, and dome-shaped, with inconspicuous sutures, instead of being projecting, spirally grooved, dull, and paucispiral, with deep sutures; aperture with thin edge, sometimes thickened behind with a simple varix, without a second projecting rim inside, a sub- sutural sinus, rather effuse at base; chink-like umbilicus generally present. Distribution—New Zealand, Australia and Tasmania. Fossil, Tertiary. Remarks—Distinguished from Merelina by the protoconch, and from Haurakia by the tendency to a slight indentation and a stronger spiral rib near y y g : ger sp the suture, otherwise the sculpture recalls Haurakia. Key To Species or LINEMERA a. Elongate, greatest width less than half the height = we Suprasculpta aa. Ovate, greatest width more than half the height. b. Sutures not very deeply excavated. c. No spiral beaded rib on the shoulder of the whorl. cd. Spiral sculpture more prominent than the axial .... w. filocincla dd. Spiral sculpture less prominent than the axial .... we Herconiana cc. A spiral beaded rib on the shoulder of the whorl. e. Sculpture well developed _.... ba tty = wa. seul ptilis ec. Sculpture weak : er qos eat sail we Occidua bh. Sutures very deeply excavated .... oe ate _ ... thoninensis LINEMERA SUPRASCULPTA (May 1915) cllvania suprasculpta May 1915, Proc. Roy. Soc. Tasm., 95, pl. vi, fig. 31. Locs.—Tasm.: Thouin Bay 40 to 50 fathoms (type loc.) ; S. Aust.: Guichen Bay, Beachport 40 and 200 fathoms, Port MacDonnell, Cape Jatta 49, 90 and 130 fathoms. Remarks—Distinguished by the regular reticulate sculpture with spiral ltrae in the square meshes, and by the high and narrow shape of the shell. LINEMERA FrLocINCTA (Hedley and Petterd 1906) Rissoa fiocincta Hedley and Petterd 1906, Rec. Aust. Mus., 6, 217, pl. xxxvil, Locs —N.S.W.: Narrabeen 80 fathoms, off Sydney 300 fathoms (type loc.) ; Tasm.: General 40 to 80 fathoms; S. Aust.: Port MacDonnell; Vict.: Ninety Mile Beach 40 fathoms. Remarks—Iin the early part of the shell the axials predominate, but later and on the body whorl the spirals become more prominent than the axials. In verconiana the axials are more dominant throughout the shell. LINEMERA VERCONIANA (Hedley 1911) Rissoa verconiana Hedley 1911, Zool. Res. Endeavour, 1, 104, pl. xix, fig. 23. Locs—-S. Aust.: 40 miles south of Cape Wiles 100 fathoms (type loc.), Seachport 40 fathoms, Cape Borda 55 fathoms, Cape Jaffa 130 fathoms; W. Aust.: 120 miles west of Eucla 300 fathoms. Remarks— The species is distinguished from filocincta by the stronger sculpture, particularly the axials which extend right down to the base and are stronger than the spirals. It was known previously only from the type locality. LINEMERA SCULPTILIS (May 1919) Merelina sculptilis May 1919, Proc. Roy. Soc. Tasm., 62, pl. xv, fig. 15. Loc—Tasm.: Thouin Bay 50 fathoms (type loc.). Remarks — Distinguished from filocincta by its flatter whorls, more numerous axials, strong beaded spirals on the shoulder, channelled sutures, sharp outer lip, discontinuous peristome. Linemera occidua n. sp. (PL xvi, fig. 8) Holotype: Reg. No. D.14191, South Australian Museum. Shell solid, ovate, yellow coloured, imperforate; whorls five including two smooth, rounded, depressed whorls forming the protoconch; suture well defined by a shallow channel; adult whorls crossed by regular strong spirals which get stronger towards the base of the body whorl, these in turn crossed by about 20 axials which fade out on the base of the body whorl; both above and below the suture a spiral of small nodules is defined by an incised spiral line a little deeper than those lines cutting the rest of the whorls, except the strong ones of the base; about a dozen spirals cross the body whorl; aperture ovate, outer lip thickened by a weak varix; colour pattern consisting of a spiral golden band at and below the suture, cut into wide axial flames by the ground colour; round the umbilical region is a narrow golden band, and a tendency to spirals of minute golden dots on the spirals of the base and lower body whorl. Height 2:1 mm., diameter 1-0 mm. Locs.—W. Aust.: Hopetown (type loc.) ; S. Aust.: Carawa, West Coast. Remarks — This species bears some resemblance to sculptilis but is easily separated by the smaller size, golden flames and lines, much weaker sculpture and ihe somewhat thickened outer lip. LINEMERA THOUINENSIS (May 1915) Alvania thouinensis May 1915, Proc. Roy. Soc, Tasm., 94, pl. v, fig. 28. Locs-——Tasm.: Thouin Bay 40 fathoms (type loc.), D’Entrecasteaux Channel. Remarks-—Distinguished by the deeply excavate sutures. Some specimens from D’Entrecasteaux Channel are variants with more numerous ribs. Norosetia Iredale 1915 Notosctia Iredale 1915, Trans. New Zealand Inst., 47, 452. Genotype: Barleeia neoselanica Suter 1898—Stewart Island, New Zealand. Shell minute, ovate-conical, imperforate, subpellucid, white, thin, smooth and shining; sculpture of fine oblique growth lines and a few (in the genotype) spiral striae around the umbilical area; protoconch small, globose, of one-and-a-half smooth, convex whorls, suture impressed, slightly channelled, margined by a thin thread; aperture vertical, oval, angled above, peristome discontinuous, sharp, not thickened, basal lip effuse; columella vertical, slightly concave and callous; a thin callosity on the parietal wall. Distribution—-New Zealand, Australia, Tasmania. Fossil, Tertiary. Remarks—The distinguishing features are the almost smooth surface, though it may be faintly spirally lirate, convex whorls and simple, round, thin-edged aperture. A species bearing some resemblance to those of this genus was described as Rissoa pertranslucida May 1912, but it has since been correctly placed as a Lissotesta under family Liotitdae. Key To Species or NOTOSETIA a. Colour banded. b. Axial bands _.... oe ey ats ba, _ " ... simillima bb. Spiral bands. c. Bifasciate with brown weil be _ _ mi a mitens cc. Alternately bifasciate with cream and brown nd .. procincta aa. Not colour banded. d. Translucent white. e. Pink spot on base... . he whe ia vu muuratensis ee. No pink spot .... 4 . _ ce hs pellucida dd. Purple or rose coloured ji. Aperture subovate . . ne wt : purpureostoma ff. Aperture round eh ace ; : dtropurpurea Norosetia simittima (May 1915) Rissoa simillima May 1915, Proc. Roy. Soc. ‘Lasm., 93, pl. v, fig. 26. Locs—Tasm: Schouten Island 40 fathoms (type loc.), Port Arthur 56 fathoms, 70 fathoms. Remarks—-May does not mention the type locality or any other definite locality in his original description, merely stating that “it seems to be well dis- tributed on our continental shelf.” (i.c., Tasmania). Cotypes in the South Aus- tralian Museum are labelled “Schouten Island 40 fathoms.” The species is dis- tinguished from nitens by the axial banding. 304 NoroseTiA NITENS (Frauenfeld 1867) Setia nitens Frauenfeld 1867, Novara Exped., Moll., 13, pl. ii, hg. 22. Rissoa (Cingula) atkinsoni Tenison Woods 1877, Proc. Roy. Soc. Tasm., 153. Locs.—-N.S.W.: Botany Bay (type loc.); Tasm.: Long Bay (type loc. atkinsont), South and East shallow water down to 10 fathoms; Vict. Remarks—-The bifasciation, found both in New South Wales shells and Tasmanian shells, described by Tenison Woods as atkinsoni, distinguishes this species. NoroseTIA ProciNcta (Tledley 1908) Rissoa procincia Hedley 1908, Proc. Linn. Soc. N.S.W., 33, 469, pl. 10, fig. 34. Loc-—-N.S.W.: Middle Harbour (type loc.). Remarks—Distinguished by the two spiral, alternating bands of cream and pale brown on each whorl, and the simple pyriform aperture. Notosetia muratensis n. sp. (PL xvi, fig. 9) Holotype: Reg. No. D.14192, South Australian Museum. Shell minute, turbinately conical, polished translucent white. unicoloured except for a faint pink blotch in the middle of the base in living specimens ; protoconch microscopic, turbinate, paucispiral, rounded, smooth whorls; whorls five, excluding protoconch, rounded, slightly angulate, suture impressed; aperture ovate, a little produced anteriorly, outer lip thin, acute, inner lip reflected into a false umbilicus. Height 1°5 mm., diameter 0-5 mm. Larger specimens reach 2 mm. in height. Locs.—S. Aust.: Murat Bay (type loc.), Streaky Bay, Fowler Bay, Mac- Donnell Bay, Largs Bay, Grange, Cape Borda 55 fathoms, Robe, Beachport 200 fathoms, Franklin Island, Venus Bay; Tasm.: North Coast; Vict.: Western Port: W. Aust.: King George Sound, Abrolhos Island. Remarks—This species differs from mifens in being larger and white, having a longer spire and a pink spot on the base in fresh specimens. NOTOSETIA PELLUCIDA (Tate and May 1900) Rissoa (Nodulus) pellucida Tate and May 1900, Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust., 24, 100. Locs-~Tasm.: Frederick Henry Bay (type loc.) ; Vict. Remarks—Somewhat resembling maratensis but there is no basal blotch, and the peristome is thickened, NOoTosETIA PURPUREOSTOMA May 1919 Notosetia purpureostoma May 1919, Proc. Roy. Soc. Tasm., 63, pl. xvi, fig. 18. Loc—Tasm.: Penguin in shell sand (type loc.). Remarks——Distinguished by the purple or rose-coloured shell and the sub- ovate aperture. NOTOSETIA ATROPURPUREA (Frauenfeld 1867) Setia atropurpurea Frauenfeld 1867, Novara Exped., Moll., 13, pl. ii, fig. 21. Loes—-N.5.W.: Botany Bay (type loc.), Bondi; Old.; Vict. Remarks—l\vistinguished by the purple to rose-coloured shell and round aperture. 305 DarvanuLa Iredale 1915 Pardanula Iredale 1915, Trans. New Zealand Inst., 47, 452. Dardania Elutton 1882, Trans. New Zealand Inst., 14, 147, not Dardania Stal., 1822. Genotype: Dardania olivacca Hutton 1882—On seaweed in rock pools, Littleton Harbour, New Zealand. Shell smooth, whorls flattened or convex, aperture ovate-pyriform, peristome discontinuous and thin, slightly channelled below. Animal with large foot, rounded in front, emarginate behind; pence lobe small, simple; rostrum emarginate at the extremity ; tentacles long and setaceous; eyes ‘large, on swellings at the outer bases of the tentacles; operculum ovate, suibspiral, with a long shelly process from below the nucleus. Distribution—New Zealand, Australia, Tasmania. Fossil, Tertiary. Remarks-——The smooth shell with a tendency to flattened expansa - fasciata - filocincta = - flamia - - flammea - flindersi - frauenfeldi - frenchiensis freycinett - fricta - + fumata - - glomerosa - gracilis - - egradata - hamiltoni = - Haurakia- Hetororissoa hulliana - imbrex - - incidata - incompleta - integella - iravadoides - ischna jacksoni - janjucensis - kershawi - labrotoma - Page - 300 - 286 - 296 - 294 - 308 - 305 - 305 - 299 - 312 - 307 - 288 - 305 ~ 287 - 301 - 306 - 306 - 300 - 302 - 306 - 306 ~ 292 - 290 ~ 288 - 295 - 306 - 299 - 298 - 300 ~ 301 - 293 - 293 - 286 ~ 300 - 297 - 288 - 294 - 313 ~ 289 - 308 - 3ll ~ 289 - 291 - 291 SPECIES AND GENERA layardi - - tene - - liddelliana - lineata - - Linemera = - Lironoba = + lockyeri ~ luteofuscus - maccoyi - mediolaevis melanochroma melanura ss - mercurialis - Merelina - microcosta - minutulum - multilirata - muratensis - nitens - - Nodulus - Notoscrobs - Notosetia - novarensis - Nozeba “ obeliscus - occidua - ochroleuca - olivacea = Parascala - pellucida - pellyae -— - perpolita - pertranslucida pertumida - petterdi - praeda - - praetornatilis procincta = - profundior - protractus - puer - pulvilla - pulchella = - Page 297 312 294 293 301 295 297 311 307 294 305 305 299 299 291 313 297 304 304 304 311 303 294 286 291 302 300 292 312 304 310 290 303 291 310 289 297 304 294 308 291 298 310 pupoides - Pusillina - purpureostoma pyramidata relata - - Rissopsis - Rissolina — - rosea -— - rubicunda = - salebrosa - schoutanica scrobiculater Scrobs ~~ - sculptilis - semicinctus seminodosa simillima = - simsoni - sophiae * Stiva - + strangel - Subestea - Subonoba - suleata - - supracostata suprasculpta suteri - - tasmanica- tenisoni - tiara - . thouinensis - trajectus - triangulus tumida - - typica - - unilirata - verconiana - verconis - wilsonensis - woodsi - - xanthias - zosterophila ukhwn- fox Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust., 1944 Estea erma n.sp., holotype, x 42 7 Estea amblycorymba n. sp., holotype, x 24 8 Estea relata n.sp., holotype, x 17 9 Haurakia mediolaevis un. sp., holotype,x 190. Lironoba sulcata n.sp., holotype. x 15 11 Botelloides borda un. sp., holotype, x 13 12 Vol. 68, Plate XVI Merelina cyrta n.sp., holotype, x 20 Linemera occidua n.sp., holotype, x 27 Notosetia muratensis n.sp., holotype, x 32 Epigrus borda n.sp., holotype, x 10 Scrobs pellyae Nevill, x 24 Subestea flindersi Tenison Woods, x 12 THE DISTRIBUTION OF PLAGUES OF AUSTROICETES CRUCIATA SAUSS. (ACRIDIDAE) IN AUSTRALIA IN RELATION TO CLIMATE, VEGETATION AND SOIL By H. G. ANDREWARTHA Waite Agricultural Research Institute. University of Adelaide Summary The small plague grasshopper, Austroicetes cruiata Sauss, has only one generation in a year. This is ensured by the occurrence of an obligate diapause in the egg-stage (Andrewartha 1943, 1944). In eastern Australia egg-laying begins early in November and continues for about five weeks. Within a few days of being laid the eggs enter a stale of diapause which continues during the summer and is finally eliminated during June (Birch 1942). Once diapause has been eliminated the eggs are no longer resistant to drought (Birch and Andrewartha 1942). Consequently, they either hatch during the early spring or, if soil moisture is inadequate for development, they die. The date of emergence of the nymphs may vary between mid-August and late September, depending upon the temperature of the soil in which they are developing (Andrewartha 1944). The nymphs require about six weeks to complete their development; sexually mature adults usually appear towards the end of October. 315 THE DISTRIBUTION OF PLAGUES OF AUSTROICETES CRUCIATA SAUSS. (ACRIDIDAE) IN AUSTRALIA IN RELATION TO CLIMATE, VEGETATION AND SOIL By H. G. ANDREWARTHA Waite Agricultural Research Institute, University of Adelaide [Read 14 September 1944] Piates XVII axnp XVIII A INTRODUCTION The small plague grasshopper, Austroicetes cruciata Sauss, has only one generation in a year. This is ensured by the occurrence of an obligate diapause in the egg-stage (Andrewartha 1943, 1944). In eastern Australia egg-laying begins early in November and continues for about five weeks. Within a few days of being laid the eggs enter a state of diapause which continues during the summer and is finally eliminated during June (Birch 1942), Once diapause has been eliminated the eggs are no longer resistant to drought (Birch and Andrewartha 1942). Consequently, they either hatch during the early spring or, if soil mois- ture is inadequate for development, they die. The date of emergence of the nymphs may vary between mid-August and late September, depending upon the temperature of the soil in which they are developing (Andrewartha 1944). The nymphs require about six weeks to complete their development; sexually mature adults usually appear towards the end of October. The life cycle of the species in Western Australia is essentially similar, except that the season is some four to six weeks earlier than in eastern Australia. Thus nymphs may hatch in July and egg-laying may begin late in September. Diapause may be eliminated from the eggs earlier than it is in eastern Australia (Jenkins 1937). The occurrence of diapause in the egg-stage is a valuable adaptation, since it ensures that the active stages af the grasshopper will not be present during the summer when there would be no food for them, or during the winter when tem- perature would be too low for satisfactory development. Diapause also limits the distribution of the species, preventing it from colonising areas in which the temperature during the winter is too high to eliminate diapause, or areas in which the rainfall in the spring is unreliable. Plagues of A. cruciata have been recorded from Western Australia (Jenkins 1937), South Australia (Andrewartha 1939), and New South Wales (Key 1938) ; plagues occur in well-defined areas which are situated on the borders of the wheat belts in those States (text fig. 2C and 4B). These areas are not continuous ; those in Western and South Australia are separated by a vast area in which the species is not known to occur, even as solitary individuals. The infestation area in South Australia is separated from the infestation area in New South Wales by a large region in which solitary individuals of A. cruciata occur, but from which swarms have either not been recorded, or else have occurred rarely in restricted local situations (text fig. 1). It will be shown in this paper that the region which separates the infestation areas in Western and South Australia experiences a climate which is unfavourable for the survival of A. cruciata. On the ‘Trans. Roy. Soc. S.A., 68, (2), 30 November 1944 316 other hand, the region separating the infestation areas in South Australia and New South Wales experiences essentially the same climate as these two infesta- tion areas, but in this case the nature of the soil and vegetation inhibits the wide- spread development of swarms, Bo INFLUENCE or CLIMATE The influence of rainfall is more important than that of temperature in limit- ing the distribution of plagues of A. eruciata in southern Australia, For example, in South Australia records of minimum temperature for the winter period indicate that temperatures adequate for the elimination of diapause occur widely, both to the north and the south of the area in which plagues of A. eruciata occur. Similarly, records of maximuni temperatures) for the spring period indicate that temperatures adequate for the development of the active stages are not Hinges y ate ayeden es — EY ia ao — eS BE — 1 : i : j j F + : r o fog vt ' TYPE v ee. LIMIT OF SUMMER DRAIN So DISTRIBUTION OF GRASSHOPPERS ae) SWARMS MAY BE WIDESPREAD o SSOLATED SWARMS .e) SOLITARY INDIVIDUALS. | VEGETATION TYPES ms SG ONE) TTT? zone 2 E: ZONES bo seeb apes ISOPLETHS FoR % RATIO Siena ere : { } t i age a aE: gee ap ee J lig. 1 Part of south-eastern Australia, showing: (a) The zone of favourable climate for A. cruciate as indicated by isopleths for P/E ratio. The northern boundary is the isopleth for P/E ratio for October = 0-25, and the southern boundary is the isopleth for P/IE ratio for September = 1-0. (b) The distribution of soil favourable to 4. eruciala as indicated by the distribution of vegetation types. (c) The areas commonly infested by swarms of «f. ernectata, restricted to the infestation area for fl. cruciata. Ty Western Australia the infesta- tion area experiences mininium temperatures during the winter which are higher than those recorded for the infestation areas in South Australia and New South Wales, but in Western Australia a geographical race of A. cructata, which requires higher temperatures for the elimination of diapause has developed (Andrewartha 1944). So in Western Australia and New South Wales, as in South Australia, temperatures favourable for the elimination of hapause and the development of the active stages occur over a much wider ar ‘a than that actually infested by swarms of -f. cruciata, which are restricted by their moisture requirements. ©) Maximum temperature is a better criterion than mean temperature for making comparisons involving the influence of temperature upon rate of development (Andre- wartha 1944 a). 317 ‘The active stages of A. cruciata are present during July to October in Western Australia, and August to November in castern Australia; and drought during this period may prove critical in limiting the distribution of the species towards the drier parts of Australia. It has been shown that oceasional droughts during this critical period are important in limiting the numbers of A. cruciata in the infestation areas (Froggatt 1909, Birch and Andrewartha 1941). The effectiveness of rainfall in promoting the development of plants and animals can be satisfactorily measured by the ratio of rainfall to evaporation ; in particular the conception has been developed of a “season” defined by the number of months in the year during which this ratio exceeds O05 (Davidson 1936). In southern Australia the scason of adequate moisture occurs during the winter. ‘The number of months during which the ratio P/E exceeds 0°5 decreases as the distance inland increases. Consequently, it is to be expected that an isopleth for P/E ratio may be found which may serve to define the linnts of the infestation area for A. cruciata on its drier side. The distribution of swarms of 4. cruciata is known best for South Australia. Consequently, the infestation area for this State was plotted on a map together with isopleths for various values of P/E ratio, calculated from the records for mean monthly rainfall, temperature and relative humidity by methods described elsewhere (Andrewartha 1940). It was found that the isopleth for P/E = 0°25 for October closely followed the boundary of the infestation area (text fig. 1). Other isopleths (¢.g., P/E = 0°13 for November) fitted nearly as well, But the former was chosen because it was the best of those tried. It is to be expected that isopleths for different values of P/IE ratio for adjacent months should be parallel since there was a high correlation between rainfall, or evapo ration, for adjacent months for the stations used in this analysis. The value P/E = 0:25 for October might reasonably have been expected to provide a useful criterion since: (a) Any zone for which the P/E ratio for October exceeded 0°25 would have a higher ratio (probably in excess of 0°5) for June, July, August and September, thus ensuring adequate growth of the annual and herbaccous perennial plants upon which 4. cruciata feeds; (b) Most of these plants are drought-resistant and require less rain to keep them alive and green than is necessary for active growth. Speargrass (Stipa spp.) is particularly adapted to make use of small falls of rain (Birch and Andrewartha 1941). The isopleth for P/E ratio for October = 0:25 was plotted on a map showing the infestation area in New South Wales.) For Western Australia the isopleth P/E for September = 0°25 was used since the scason for 4. cructatais about four weeks carlier there than in eastern Australia. he isopleths were copied from unpublished maps prepared by Professor J. Davidson, using the methods which he has described (Davidson 1935). The infestation areas in both New South Wales and Western Australia fall, for the most part, inside the climatic zone, of which the boundary on the drier side is defined by this isopleth for P/E ratio (text fig. 1 and 2). The infestation areas for im this case it provides a useful guide to the occurrence of suils favourable to A. criciata. he distribution of soil and vegetation types in Western Australia has been studied by Teakle (1938). Tle considers that the area with which we are con- cerned (see text fig. 2) is a dissected plateau. The original level of the plateau is represented by high-level lateritic sandplain, which is generally about 100 to 200 fect above the level of the valley floors. The process of erosion and dissection has produced broad mature valleys which are characterised by woodland vegeta- tien and “salt-lake” systems (pl. xvii, fig. 1). The principal soils associated with the woodland vegetation are “mallee” suils consisting of a brown or greyish surface soil resting on a calcareous subsoil. They are all sandy loams, often shallow, with the amount of clay increasing rapidly in the deeper layers. If these soils be cultivated for a period and then alloweé to remain idle for a few years. they set frm and are then suitable for ovi- position by 4. cruciata. The loose sandy soil and the heath “serub” vegetation which is characteristic of the high-level lateritic sandplain is shown in pl. xvii, fig. 2, The soil is infertile. It will support only poor herbage when cleared and cultivated; when arable land has been left idle for a few years the original heath vegetation tends to re-establish itself, The soils of the sandplain are unsuited to .4. cruciata, no matter how they he treated. The precise distribution of vegetation types i Western Australia has not been mapped. But Teakle has divided the State into a number of “‘soil and ecological regions.” The relevant regions are shown on text fig. 2. The infesta- tion area for A. cruciata is largely restricted to the Merredin region which is essentially an area of brown and red-brown woodland soils. The western part of the Fitzgerald region, which lies inside the climatic zone favourable to A. eructata but into which the infestation area does not extend, has a larger proportion of sand-heath formation than any other region of the zone of grey and brown calcareous. solonised soils of the low rainfall Eucalyptus woodland (Teakle 1938). In eastern Australia in the zone where climate is favourable for A. cruciata, the distribution of vegetation types has been mapped in greater detail, The distribu- tion shown in text fig. 1 has been adapted from maps prepared by Wood (1937) and Beadle! Zone 1 of text fig. 1 includes the Sclerophyl Forest and Savannah Woodland of Wood, and the Woodland, Savannah Woodland, and Savannah of Beadle. Zone 2 ineludes certain “Arid Communities’ of Wood (namely, uecalyptus odorata-E. oleasa- Callitris, Cassia - Dodonca - Eremophila, Mvyo- porum - Atriplex and Atriple. - Salicornia) and the Shrub Steppe of Beadle (ze. -ltriples vesicarium and Kochia). Zone 3 includes the Mallee (Lucalyptus - pleosa- Li. dwmosa) and Mulga (Acacia ancnra) of Wood and the Eucalyptus vleasa - E. dumosa and Casuarina ~ Heterodendron zones of Beadle. The boundary ai zone 3 in Victoria was taken from a map published by Hills showing the limits of the Mallee in Victoria (ills 1939), The vegetation types which have been grouped in zone 3 are usually asso- ciated with light soils which are loose and sandy on the surface and consequently & Mr. N. Beadle very kindly gave me a copy of a map which he had prepared () In the preceding section the distribution of the original vegetation types, before it Was modified by the activities of white settlers, was used as a guide to the distribution of soils favourable to A. cruciafa. This section is concerned with the vegetation which occurs in these areas at present. 323 the Statistical Register for Western Australia, Table No. 9. The land under crops or recently cultivated was estimated for each statistical district for each year between 1928-1940. The area given for 1940 was subtracted from the area for the year in which this figure reached a maximum. The balance was considered as “reverted” arable land for the purposes of text fig. 2B. This method (although unsatisfactory for giving an estimate of the absolute quantity of “reverted” land. since there is no guarantee that the same land is referred to each year) gives a useful guide to the distribution of ‘‘reverted” land. It is clear that plagues of A. cruciata tend to occur in areas where there is a lot of “reverted” land. In eastern Australia the land was developed both for wheat-growing and for sheep-raising, the former more particularly in the more humid areas (i.e., roughly zone 1 of text fig. 1), and the latter in the more arid areas. The land, which was originally developed for wheat-growing, has had much the same history as that in Western Australia. The rainfall proved inadequate for wheat-growing and wheat was gradually replaced by pasture. A large number of grasses and other low-growing herbage plants constitute the major part of the flora of these pastures (pl. xviii, fig. 2). For example, the plants which were collected from the representative situations in the grasshopper belt of South Australia are listed below. The species marked by an asterisk were prominent; the others less common or rare. All three situations provided highly favourable habitats for A. crvciata. Situation A was a common near Pekina: situation B a stock route near Wilmington; and situation C a paddock near Orroroo, Situation B *Stipa scabra Lindl. SITUATION A *Lomandra dura lewart Triodia trritans R. Br. Flordeunt murtiauae qa. Danthoma semiannularis R. Br. Bromus niadritensis L. Koelaria phleoides Pers. Trifolium tomentosum LL, Medicago minima Grutb. Lchium plantagincuns L. Cryptostemma calendulacenm BK. Br. Atriplex campanulatum Benth. Calotis hispidula F.v. M. Convolulus arvensis LL. Plentago varia R. Br. Jerodiuim botrys Bertol Frodiun cygnorum Nees Letragonia crcmaea Ostenf. Malva parviflora L. *Danthonia seniannularis R. Br. *Hordeum murimum L, *Schismus barbatus Juel Medicago denticulata Willd. Atriplex campanulatum Benth. Chenopodium cristatuin Fv, M, Chenopodium album 1. Bassia patenticuspis R. WH. Anders Euphorbia Driummondii Boiss Calotis hispidula F.v. M. Maloa parviflora L. *iEchium plantagineum L. Heltoiropium europacum LL, Sida sp. Siruation C *Stipa scabra Lindl. *Danthonia semiannularis R. Br. *Schismus barbatus Juel *Flordewn murinun, L. *Triodia irritans R.Br. *Erodium cygnorum Nees Atriplex campanulatui Benth, Papaver hybridum 1. Spergularia diandra Heldr et Sart *Zygophyllum crenatum F.v. M. In the more arid areas the tendency has been for the land to be developed for sheep-raising without first being used for wheat-growimg. In some instances. 324 particularly im South Australia, this has led to the destruction of the original vegetation and its replacement by plant communities which provide favourable habitats for the grasshopper. The general facies of the plant communities is much the same as in those communities which occur on “reverted” arable land, but the speargrasses (Siipa spp.) are more prominent (pl. xviii, fig. 1). Thus in South Australia the relationship between the distribution of “reverted” arable land and the distribution of swarms of 4. eruciata holds only for the more humid part of the infestation area, This relationship is illustrated in text fig. 4A. Vhe data were taken from the Statistical Register for South Australia and analysed in the same way as the data for Western Australia. Comparable data ior New South \Wales were not available; but Froggatt recognised as early as 1900 that it was the agricultural development taking place in the woodland areas that favoured the increase of 4. cruciata (Froggatt 1900). Certain of the vegetation associa- ‘tions which occur in zone 3 of text : fig. 1 provide good pasture for sheep (pl. xvin, fig. 3). And there are ex- tensive areas in this zone, particularly in New South Wales, where the land has been developed for shecp-raising without destroying, or greatly modify- ing, the original vegetation, Con- sequently there are large areas where plagues of A. cruciata do not occur even though the climate and the soil are favourable. [f. during the future wo development of these areas the original vegetation should be de- stroyed either by clearing or by mis- management or overstocking of the pastures, it is likely that the same succession will occur in the vegetation Text Fig. 4 art of South Australia A, showing the distribution of “reverted” arable land in relation to the area normally infested by swarms of 8 2 Fig. sheardi, ventral view. 4, Sp. a, anus; t, transverse duct from receptaculum Fig. and 5 to same scale. semiinis: 3, ventral and lateral views. 2 1, Pig, dorsal soptera: Sp, johistoni, ventral view, Fig, 1-3, Sp. scha small eyes he just behind the brain, and in long-preserved specimens the pigment is all but faded. Sensory patches on the body are numerous and are arranged in longitudmal and transverse rows; from most of them project relatively long hairs which arise m each patch from its midline parallel to the width of the anima! (fig. 15). In sections of these patches it is seen that cach is largely below the vg, ventral ganglion, 329 epidermis, and consists of numerous ceils each with a deeply staining nucleus ; many of the cells appear to be connected with the projecting hairs (fig. 14). The brain was observed only in sections. It is joined to more posteriorly situated lateral ganglia, from which branches are to be seen leading to some of the larger sensory patches on the head, presumably there are finer branches to the smaller sensory patches. The ventral ganglion, large and very obvious in a lateral view of the animal, is hard to see in ventral view, and is apparently over- Ob mm. Fig. 6-11, Sp. schisoptera: series of transverse sections, numbered in order, 6 being the most anterior. All to same scale. Lettering as in previous figure; in addition: ap, adhesive process; h, homogeneous material; m, muscle; o, ovum; rs, receptaculum seminis; s, sensory patch; v, vesicula seminalis. lain by numerous sensory patches as shown in fig. 2. In transverse section it is secn to consist, as described by various observers, of median nerve fibres and twa lateral masses of ganglion cells. The anterior fin is very small, about -O&8 mm. wide and -35 mm. long. Its greatest width is at or just behind the centre. Although Yosit and Tokioka in 330 their account (1939) state that anterior fins were not present in their material, iheir figure indicates a slight expansion in front of the posterior fin. This expansion has a different relationship to the tail septum and to the female opening from that exhibited in-our specimens. The anterior fins, as figured by Conant, are distinctly wider than in our animals, though possessing approximately a similar relation to the female opening and the tail septum. The posterior fin follows almost immediately behind the anterior, commenc- ing at about the beginning of the tail segment, The fin is 0-9 mm. long, and only a little wider than the anterior, and each is closely followed by a ventrally-lying flange produced into five or six finger-like processes. The most lateral of these processes is continued from the outer edge of the fin and is covered for the greater part of its length with small tubercular outgrowths. The number of pro- cesses, whether five or six, appears to depend on the degree of separation of the outermost two, these sometimes forming one stout process. As is shown in section (fig. 10, 11), these processes do not contain any fin rays, and are supplied with muscle fibres which pass obliquely from the ventral body wall; they arise from the ventrolateral, instead of the dorsolateral, part of the body, They are therefore not to be regarded as part of the fin. They are apparently mobile and used for adhesion and support (probably in the manner described below for Sp. sheardi), whereas the fins are balancing structures not movable separately from the body. Yosii and Tokioka (1939) figure rays passing into the processes as well as into the fins ; in the Australian specimens such lines are to be seen, but prove on closer examination to be underlying muscle fibres. The ovary in older specimens reaches almost to the neck region. Its struc- ture had not been studied in detail, The general arrangement is as shown in fig. 6-8. Apparently on each side the ovaries lie dorsally and the ducts ventrally. On each side between the ovary and intestine, as well as occasionally between the eggs and dorsal to the ovary, is a homogeneous material showing no structure and without an enclosing wall, but connected with an accumulation of a similar sub- stance, more definite in outline, which lics beside the ventral mesentery. This substance has the appearance of a coagulated body-fluid, and is seen in all sections from the posterior loop of the corona (anterior to the ovary) to the region behind the female opening. In fig. 6-8 it is shown for convenience in black, though it does not stain particularly deeply. Leading from each receptaculum seminis is a tube which passes ventrally below the intestine just anterior to the anus and apparently ends blindly at the mid-ventral mesentery, At about its mid-length this tube gives off a short anterior caecum (fig. 13). This corresponds to the structure described by Conant as occurring in Sp. schizoptera; but a median tube leading forward, formed by the junction of the two transverse tubes, was not observed in the present specimens, either in whole mounts or in section. The presence of transverse ducts from the receptacultm seminis is not a characteristic of the genus Spadella; they do not occur in the type species, S'p. cephaloptera, a detailed description of which has been published by C. C. John (1933). Spadella schizoptera has hitherto been recorded only twice, once by Conant from three specimens captured off the Bahama Islands, and once by Yosii and Tokioka from a single specimen found with Sp. cephaloptera collected near Misaki, Japan. Irom the figures given by these authors, and those of the present specimens, it is apparent that a variation exists in the extent of the postcrior processes. Those seen by Conant and those described above are present in about the third quarter of the tail segment; those of the Japanese specimen reach from about the middle of the tail segment to a point beyond its posterior end, In view of this, and of the damaged condition of the corona and lateral fins in the Japanese material, it is impossible to say whether the latter is an aberrant individual of 331 Sp. schizoptera, A table in which the significant points of these records are compared will be found at the conclusion of this paper. Spadella sheardi n. sp. (Fig. 4, 17) Five specimens of a closely related chaetognath were taken in company with Sp. schisoptera described above. They differ, however, in several significant features. The lengths of two immature specimens are 3-9 mm, and 4-4 mm. (latter in glycerine), and those of adults ranged between 4°7-6°3 mm. They are dis- tinguished at a glance as being larger and more thick-set than Sp. schizoptera. The tail segment is 44-45% of the body length when measured in methyl salicylate, and 48% when in glycerine. In life the body is opaque and faintly mauve; the dorsal surface is marked with brown pigment, which is present mainly in three longitudinal bands and two transverse bands, one at the level of the receptacula seminis and one at the level of the vesiculae seminales. In addition yellow pig- ment is scattered lightly over the whole body surface. The eyes are small and widely spaced, and are overlain by brown pigment. The fins are relatively wide. Posterior adhesive processes are present, arranged in two groups on each side. When the living animal is at rest in a petri dish it takes up an almost vertical position with the head uppermost, supported by the tail fin flattened out on the bottom of the dish and by the outspread adhesive processes which serve as “props” to support the body. The stance is reminiscent of a,kangaroo supported by its tail and hind limbs, and of the nematodes of Epsilonema spp., which have been described as resting on the posterior curve of the body, the head projecting in search of food, That the processes have adhesive qualities is shown by gently shaking the petri dish, when the animal sways, but maintains its position on the glass. In four specimens the jaws are folded; in the remaining worm those on one side are outspread and number 11. They are simple in form, without flange or serration. The anterior teeth, of which there are three on each side, are unusually long, reaching from about a third to a half the length of the jaws. The vestibular pads are sparsely provided with small denticles. The corona is less extensive than in Sp. schisoptera and is quite distinctive in shape, as shown. in fig. 17. Numerous sensory patches with protecting setae are arranged symmetrically over the body surface. The anterior fin is, in a specimen 6°5 mm. long, 35 mm. wide and “5 mm. in length, and is almost rectangular. It is supported entirely on the trunk. It is followed almost immediately by the posterior fin which is entirely on the tail seg- ment, is 1°5 mm. long, and is of an even width, ‘45 mm., throughout its length. In the immature specimens these fins are relatively closer together, but in the adult they are separated by the female opening. The tail fin is spatulate. Adhesive processes arise from the ventral tail surface between the posterior fin and the seminal vesicles; they are arranged in two groups on each side, an anterior and a posterior. When not compressed by a coverslip the anterior project almost at right angles to the tail, while posterior processes lie along the tail sur- face. There are about ten or eleven in each group; all are thickly beset with tubercles and contain muscle fibres, as has been described above for Sp. schisoptera, There are no diverticula from the alimentary canal. Ventral transverse muscles are present almost to the anus. The ovary in the older specimens extends to the neck region. A ventral transverse duct leads from each receptactulium seminis, and in sections the two appear to join at the midline just anterior to the anus. No accessory branch, like 332 that in Sip. schisoptera, is given off from this duct. The ducts lie laterally to the ovary. The features by which this species is most readily distinguished from Sp. schizoptera are the stouter build of the body, the shape of the lateral fins and of the corona, and the doubling of the adhesive processes. Spadella johnstoni n. sp. (Fig. 5, 18) One chactognath amongst those collected near Port Hacking differed from the two species described above in the form of the corona, the position of the adhesive processes, and in the number of anterior teeth. It was first observed alive, swimming with three Sp. sheardi, and was easily distinguished from them Vig. 12-16, Sp. schisoptera@; 12, head, ventral view; 13, region of seminal vesicles in ventral view; 14, T.S. of a median dorsal sensory patch; 15, surface view of a sensory patch; 16, optical seciion in region of reeeptaculum seminis. Fig. 17, Sp. sheaedt: head, dorsal view. Fig. 18, Sp. fedimetoul; head in dorsal view. Fig. 12 and 18 to same scale; fig. 13 and 17; fig. 14 and 15. Lettering as in previous figures; in additien: th, brain: i, intestine. 4 by the colouring, in which yellow predominated, by the more slender form, and by the position of rest, which was always with the body inclined at an angle of 45° instead of the vertical position consistently adopted by Sp. sheardi. Sp. schizop- fera has not been observed by me while alive. This difference of position may be duc to the presence of only two groups of adhesive processes. The body length is 4°6 mm., of which the tail segment occupies 2-4 mm., ar 529. The jaws are folded, but there are at least 10 pairs. The anterior tecth, of which there are two pairs, are about half the length of the jaws. The corona hes mostly on the neck; its inner margin is Imed by closely-packed brown pigment spots. $33 The fins are so damaged by the clearing agent that no satisfactory attempt can be made to measure or to draw them., When observed in the living animals they appeared similar to those of Sp. schizoptera. Posterior adhesive processes are present and are arranged in one group on each side. They are at about the same level as the vesiculae seminales, but both structures are much more posteriorly situated on the tail than in Sp. schizoptera. The processes are very numerous and the tips of some reach beyond the tail scement. Ventral transverse muscles have not been observed. There are no diverticula to the alimentary canal. Transverse ducts from the receptacula seminis are present and apparently join in the mid-line. The vesiculae seminales are oval and of a very vivid yellow in the living animal. In view of the different build of the body and shape of the corona and of the difference in extent of the adhesive processes of this specimen from any hitherto described species of the genus Spad'ella, it has been assigned to a new species, Sp. johustoni; the specific name is given in recognition of the early work on Australian chaetognaths by Professor T. Harvey Johnston. The main differences between the species described above are summarised in the following table. Abbreviations used are: T % L, length of tail segment expressed as percentage of body length; divertic., intestinal diverticula; no. ad. p., number of adhesive processes; pos. ad. p., position of adhesive processes on tail segment. Spadella schigoptera Sp. sheardt Sp. fohustonit Conant Yos.& Tok. mihi Length ;, pel Pr 4 2-97 4-1-4°9 4°7-6°5 4-6 T&L . a : $1 53-7 47-51 44-45 52 Ant. teeth. bed _ 2-3 2-3 3 3 2 Jaws Se ses ae 3 7-10 il ll ll Divertic. . r ae absent present absent absent absent Novad. p. ie ; 2 2 2 4 2 Pos. ado pow. _ f ard post. 3rd post. post. quart. half quart. halt quart. SUM MARY Two new species of Spadella, Sp. sheardi and Sp. jolustont, are described from 100 metres depth off the coast of New South Wales, and a description of the closely allied Sp. schizopfera Conant from the same locality is added. LITERATURE Conant, FS. 1895 Ann. Mag. Nat. Mist., (6), 16, 288-292 Joux, ©. C. 1933) Quart. Journ, Mier. Sei, 75, 625-696 ; Jonnsros, T. Hand Tavtor. B. B. 1919) Proce, Roy. Soe. Qld. 31, 63), 28-41 Yosn, N..and Toxioxa, T. 1939) Annot. Zool, Jap.. 18, (4), 267-273 THE NATURE AND OCCURRENCE OF URANIFEROUS MINERAL DEPOSITS IN SOUTH AUSTRALIA By DOUGLAS MAWSON Summary Now that there is a revival of interest in uranium it seems appropriate for me having been associated with the first publication (15) on the radioactive minerals of Australia and later with the discovery and investigation of two of the most important uraniferous deposits in South Australia, to publish what information I have accumulated relating to the uranium-bearing mineral occurrences within the boundaries of this State. It has been my intention of more fully investigating the Radium Hill and Mount Painter formations, but circumstances have arisen which deem it expedient for me to publish immediately such information as I have now at hand. 334 THE NATURE AND OCCURRENCE OF URANIFEROUS MINERAL DEPOSITS IN SOUTH AUSTRALIA By Doucitas Mawson {Read 12 October 1944] PLares XIX, XX, XX1 CONTENTS Page Uranium IN THE Moonta Mines Sn bh rn 7 a4 334 Tur Raptum Hit Locarity ha rn th os *. fe 336 Geological Features Fe ¥.. = oF aft #e 336 Characteristics of the Uraniferous Lodes .. Ri i 338 Assessment of Uraniferous Minerals Recoverable .. ash ke 340 Minerals of the Lodes .. an Fh “ns os si 344 URANIUM IN THE PEGMATITES OF THE Boo_coomata BatHoryTH .. tt 347 OCCURRENCES IN THE NEIGHBOURHOOD OF COWELL .. ae 3! Ma 347 Tue Mount Painter Fiero ie <4 #4 rs a; a 348 Geological Features oe a iy +4 an i 348 Location and Character of the Uraniferous Outcrops . he 350 Minerals of the Lodes .. me ee or wa “3 354 Report oF URANIUM aT Mount Ociivie, Norr Frinners RANGES .. yu 356 OccuURRENCE IN THE Muscrave RANGES .. my 4 ~ a 356 Lisr or REFERENCES Ls _ a . ms ee ne, 350 EXPLANATION OF PLATES .. * 2% Ae _ a4 5 357 Now that there is a revival of interest in uranium it scems appropriate for me having been associated with the first publication (15) on the radio-active minerals of Australia and later with the discovery and investigation of two of the most important uraniferous deposits in South Australia, to publish what informa- tion I have accumulated relating to the uranium-bearing mineral occurrences within the boundaries of this State. It has been my intention of more fully investigating the Radium Hill and Mount Painter formations, but circumstances have arisen which deem it expedient for me to publish immediately such informa- tion as I have now at hand. URANIUM IN THE MOONTA MINES Early in the year 1906 Mr. S. Radcliffe, a member of the Mine Staff, dis- covered electroscopically-active ore coming from the underground workings. At the time of my visit later in the year the active ore had been localised as occurring in two quite distinct places. The first was in the workings of Treuer’s Shaft at Moonta. The veinstuff in which the first traces were found was broken in driv- ing at the 50 level south of Treuer’s Shaft. Later it was discovered in ore broken by tributors at the 35 level. These workings are apparently on a different lode course. My examination was at a depth of several hundred fect below the surface, where the lode was scen to cut a cross-course ; only in the latter or in the vicinity of it was there electroscopically-active mineral,” This cross- course, which traverses the wall rock composed of Pre-Cambrian felsitic quartz- porphyry and schists, was observed to range from 2 to 6 inches in width and to be occupied by black, loosely coherent matter principally composed of friable covellite and crystals of smoky quartz. Amongst the constituents recorded in G. J. Rodgers’ analysis (16) are uranic oxide to the extent of several per cent. and a little carbon. Radcliffe recorded finding at this locality a uraniferous encrustation of a yellow carnotite-like mineral. The second place of occurrence in the Moonta Mines is in a cross-course met with in workings connected with Taylor’s Shaft. Here also the radio-actiye ore Trane. Roy. Soc. S.A.. 68, (2), 36 November 1944 335 is carbonaceous to a notable degree. It is, in fact, a hydrocarbonaceous substance of specific gravity 1°5, which yields on proximate analysis 13% of volatile hydro- carbon and 10% of fixed carbon. It is brownish-black and exhibits a lustrous conchoidal fracture. One of the specimens of uraniferous hydrocarbonaceous substance collected at the time of my visit in 1906 has now exfoliated as a result of exposure to the air, and tiny yellow spots of a crystalline secondary uranium mineral have developed, indicating that the uranium is irregularly distributed through the original substance. A radio-active mass resembling coal, found in a vugh at the 720-ft. level. was proved by Radcliffe to contain 35% of fixed carbon and 5% of volatile hydro- carbon. Kane Serra ; ey Sneae ‘ MUSGRAVE Ra ak ! AS. = Ps t ry p ; i een t ny : Y Neanoowa | of es re Avy a 4 | | if Lod Bs | s yA £. i wo MILL ’ tek oe tox Pod vA . XN y ae ths Vi us by / a f fe, 4 ee Sf a4 A/a wir 4 ns POU Ki MB yyy Vp [ef f ; | £S ca é ' ff ~ a « t Yo vA at i FP lok PPK LIL, wea fi 4 Gf bh. x Lo of TA la \ | iZ ESB “se os “Lo kf dF ra VG ere Cais fom ‘@WADNAMINGA SKY a OAVENSOROUGH , at ; Rox ) ' ZZ LLM LLL LRP ROP. it Tier, 2 Map of the Radium Hill and Boolcoomata Area. nature of progress reports dealing with mining operations, Observations. made by myself during investigations prosecuted in the years 1923-24 have not yet been adequately published. but items of scientific interest then accumulated are incor- porated herein. ‘ GEoLouicaL Prarurrs Nearby to the west of Radium Hill, with its eastern margin sweeping down irom the neighbourhood of MacDonald [Till to the Maldorky Range, via Dene’s lil, is a great basin of late Pre-Cambrian sediments with several horizons of ite (Sturtian) extending upwards from near ihe base of the formation. To the east of that basin is an older Pre-Cambrian terrain lying uncen- formably below the former; included in it is the neighbuurhood of Radiuna THill. This older Pre-Cambrian area is co-extensive with that lying further to the north in the region of the Boolcoomata Hills and Mingary, and with that of the southern Barrier Ranges. The rocks of this formation in the neighbourhood of Radium Hill have all suffered a considerable degree of metamorphism and, in the main, are presented as crystalline schists and gneisses. The oldest elements are meta- 337 sediments; they include mica schist, hornblende schist, granulite, kyanite schist. staurolite schist, scapolite-bearing schist, ete. The foliation and gneissic banding is broadly aligned in the direction N. 30° E. Transgressing these recrystallised sediments in the neighbourhood of the radium-bearing lodes, and exposed in some of the workings, is a soda-granite developed as a small scale intrusion of irregular shape. Where it is more massive it is practically free from foliation, though it bears evidence of cataclasis to a considerable degree. It is probably of late Pre-Cambrian age, comparable with the Umberumberka and Boolcoomata granites. As this granite [2883] 1s closely associated with the uranium-bearing lodes, it has been subjected to a detailed examination. Soda-Granite [2883] is a medium to fine, even-grained granite with the usual hypidiomorphic granular texture. Feldspar, which is abundant, conforms in optical characters to albite (Ab,,An,). If present, orthoclase is inconspicuous. Quartz, which is the next most abundant constituent, shows the effects of stress by the presence of a faintly discernible system of cracks. Included in the quartz are abundant tiny needles of rutile. Biotite, both chloritized and bleached (some may be muscovite), is plentiful. There are occasional grains of black iron ore and some which show leucoxenic changes, evidently ilmenite. Tiny yellow geniculate twinned crystals of rutile have been observed in the slides. Apatite 1s also present as an accessory. The chemical composition of this granite is stated in the table on page 338. Its very high soda content is outstanding, The norm has the following com- position : Quartz wee =623°76 Magnetite . . 0-46 Orthoclase 2... 0... 462 ilmenite cee OF Afbite 0... 0, ~=63°72 Pyrite .... : ; 0-08 Anorthite vee) LEZ Apatite 0°07 Corundum .... ... = 388 Hypersthene .. O71 99°71 0-62 Total .., 100-33 C.P.LW, classification: IJ, 4, 1, 5. Plagioclase-Aimphibolite {2882|—The line of foliation of the meta-sedi- mentary system: has been intersected by several basaltic dyke-like intrusions, some of which are several yards in width. One such dyke cuts across the line of the uraniferous lodes, passing to the south of the main workings. But it was pro- bably in existence before the late stages of ore formation were completed. This rock has been completely recrystallised. A chemical analysis of it is included in the table on page 338. It is to he observed that, like the lodes themselves, this rock is exceptionally rich in titanium and carries a notable quantity of vanadium. The minerals constituting it are mainly labradorite and amphibole, which is pleochroic from light yellow to blue- green with ZAc = 22°. There is also an abundance of grains of black iron ore, most exhibiting the form usually assumed by ilmenite; apatite is another accessory. Some minute colourless grains are, apparently, zoizite. The composition of the norm: Quartz 0 oo. 2. ©6312 Magnetite : . §73 Orthoclase ... ... U-Hl Ilmenite ney i> 6s) Albite wae = 16480 Pyrite 0. 00... . 0-08 Anorthite ae ee ~42+50 Apatite cee O84 Wo eaten) ape LD En wet ett nce aD Total . 99-77 Hy can he lw, ~GA0F a C.LP.W. = LW CID, 5, 4, 5 (Auvergnose-Hessose). 338 Another example [2816] of intrusive basic magina makes a more conspicuous outcrop at a point about three miles to the east of Radium Hill, where it has been opened up by prospectors searching for copper, indicated by some staining of the rocks nearby. This is a dark-coloured rock with notable parallelism of the amp hi- bole, and thus best described as a plagioclase-hornblende-schist. The dominant mineral, hornblende, is strongly pleochroic: X= yellow, Y = dark green, Z = blue-green. Plagioclase is abundant, some as basic as labradorite, There is a little granular quartz and some grains of magnetite. Another dark-coloured rock [2815] from the same locality as [2816] proved on microscopic examination to be a quartz-biotite-hornblende-scapolite-hornfels, in which the scapolite is poeciloblastically disposed. Grains of magnetic, calcite and epidote are present. [Evidently this is a thermally metamorphosed, arenaceous, calcareous shale. I ll Ili SiO, mh ete a . 71-56 45-90 39-16 AlOs a er a ae 17-74 18-99 17-55 Fe:Os; ey pte hers wpe 0-30 4-60 9-97 FeO ee ; of 0+86 8-51 5°66 MgO ae Midas nul 5-78 15-16 CaO ee ee ‘ 0-38 9-46 nil Naz:O cae Myo) Bi. Ox: 7-54 1-97 2°79 K.0 aT _ un 0-78 0-21 5-66 H:O+ _.. ‘ 28 : 0-47 0-62 t 2.50 H:0 — = eee 0-13 0-18 jes TiOe ay, rat fhe : 0-38 3°77 Q- 64 P20s . - . . 0-03 0-15 +f V20; sg siuttoe ua 7 ant 0-08 trace MnO wt ae 0-01 O-17 trace CreO: af ies, bes 4.3 —_— toh 0-62 BaO . ee ee nil nil = CO: . . -_ a nil nil nil od ee ns a = 0-78 Chiehin x a : - nil nil SO: ! by Lids BRS nil nil FeS, : ee im: ren 0-08 0-08 100-49 Oxygen equivalent . 6-32 Total , 100-28 100-47 100-17 I Soda-granite from Radium Hill, S. Aust. Analyst, W. S$. Chapman. {lL Plagioclase-ampbibolite of Radium Hill, S. Aust. Analyst, W. S. Chapman. TI} Biotite mica of the Radium Hill Lode. Analyst, R. E, Stanley. This analysis is of the biutite after eliminating 1.6% of rutile needles mechanicaliy contained in it. Note that in Stanley's mean analysis as originally printed there is a type-setter’s error, the chemically combined Tih, shad be 0.63 not 0.03. CHARACTERISTICS OF THE URANIFEROUS Lopes At the time of first discovery there were outcropping on the sloping hill- side, four lode formations all roughly parallel and clearly distinguishable, trending with the foliation of the country (sce pl. xix, fig. 1). Mining experience has shown that all are very variable in width, ranging from a few inches to several feet, and change their mineral composition notably both vertically and longitudinally within 100 to 200 feet. If followed sufficiently far they can be seen to dwindle and to fade out of existence. In other cases where there has been no apparent lode on the ©) Subsequent mining operations have now removed or buried under debris the original outcrops in the central area. 339 surface, useful bodies have been met underground. Mining operations have dis- closed dislocation of the ore bodies by movements subsequent to ore deposition. Outcrops of these lode formations (text fig. 3) appear for quite half-a-mile in the direction of strike, but no single body could be traced at the surface for more than about 250 vards. Mining operations have shown that in the central part of the field they all dip steeply, with an underlay to the east ranging from 20° to 27° from the vertical. They are epigenetic formations introduced along fracture planes and, at least at one stage in their development, appear to represent deposition from watery magmatic solutions. In this respect they are related to pegmatites though peculiar in character, and furthermore they have undergone a certain degree of subsequent inetamorphie change. AMPHIBOLITIZED 7 BASIC INTRUSION The magma represented by the sheared granite of the locality may have con- tributed to the formation of the uraniferous lodes, for \ oF AAS ae: a we have found urantum SMEARED 5 \ . + APLITIC SODA GRANITE associated with the normal ‘ SCHISTS AND ‘41 Ba. cee - . . hae Sap tw} be anersses | pegmatites of granite of i ee es Tae \ apparently the same age located about 30 miles to the north-west. The ti- tanium content of the granite is also suggestive of this relationship. The other igneous rock, the amphibolitized gabbro, appears to have greater claims to consanguimity on account of its high content of titanium, vanadium, magnesium and iron. Perhaps the basic intrusive is a lamprophyric derivative of the granite magma. A common feature of the lodes is their high content of “iron ores” and abundance of black mica. The primary mineral assemblage as exposed in the out- crops is found to vary in the case of each of the lodes, also it varies from place to place in the same lode. Thus a more westerly line of reef was observed to be com- posed essentially of micaceous hematite and quartz. The mainj reef, located about 60 yards to the east of the former, outcropped as iron ores (mainly a mixture of martitized ilmeno-magnetite, and a variety of ilmenite containing small quantities of rare earths, uranium, ete.) and black mica with an irregular distribution of reef quartz. Ten yards further to the east a lode was noted consisting of a mixture of heavy black titaniferous iron ores and black mica. While a fourth vein still further to the east was observed to be mainly titaniferous iron ores and reef quartz. The information gained in an examination of the outcrops and of the mine workings has shown that in their full development these lodes are primarily com- posed of vanadiferous, uraniferous, titaniferous iron ores, together with black mica and (less commonly developed) a late-stage contribution of quartz. Associated with the latter is a very little davidite (10). Secondary minerals such as carnotite, arising from the weathering of the primary constituents, are in evidence in the outcrops and extending down in places to depths of about 100 feet, Fig. 3 Diagrammatic Cross-Section of Radium Hill Lodes. THE MORE PEGMATITIC PITASE OF THE Main Lone The central portion of the main lode has characters linking it with the pegmatites, The marginal zones are particularly rich in black mica, which has been derived partly by reaction with the wall rock material. A central portion, which is well defined in some places and which has been derived from residual liquors, is largely composed of reef quartz with embedded ilmenitic mineral. As a verv late 340 development, and more marked in some sections of the formation than others. the ilmenitic mineral has broken down by subsequent reaction to a high-iron biotite with release of TiO, as rutile or ilmeno-rutile. It appeared worth while ascertaining the average chemical composition of a large block of this more typically pegmatitic phase of the formation. With this object in view, a length of 180 feet of the lode on the 40-ft level was carefully and systematically sampled. About a ton of material which resulted from repeated cross-section sampling was crushed and reduced by quartering until only 10 Ibs. remained. This was submitted for analysis, with the result stated in the table on page 344. The mineral constituents are principally black mica, the ilmenitic minerals and quartz. On account of the high mica content the norm is quite dissimilar to the mode. Allocating the rare-earth oxides to the lime quota, coupling vanadic oxide with ferric oxide, and accepting the uranic oxide as pitchblende, the composition of the norm is as follows: Quartz ’ .. 41-88 Geikiclite . 23-29 Orthoclase 0... ... 16-12 Hematite ; 9-44 Albite oo... Bais 1-05 Chromite . . 0-22 Anorthite ae, 2-50 Pyrite , X. 0-18 Corundum oo... 2°65 Pitchblende (UQ:).. 0-18 Enstatite =: wae oe TDN ee 98-11 Water... : 1-30 Total .. 99-4] If this were to be expressed in the C.LP.W. classification it would iall into I, 2, 1,1 ASSESSMENT OF URANIFEROUS MINERALS RECOVERABLE When mining operations were in progress in 1924 we made a fairly exhaustive examination of the exposures in the workings, with a view to obtaining an estimate of the quantity and quality of the ore reserves. The following is a summary of our findings. Marin Lope South Shaft Workings—At a depth of 56 feet vertically below the surface. this shaft, sunk on the underlay, encountered a flat fault with a drag to the west. but the lode was picked up displaced only about 15 feet. Water in the workings prevented an examination of this displaced extension of the ore body, which was unfortunate, as samples that had been obtained therefrom were found to be more highly uraniferous than usual. From this shaft, at a vertical depth of 40 feet below ground-level, a drive extended to the north along the lode for a distance of about 18 fect. Three average samples of the cross-section of the ore body gave the following values: 24” wide lode 30” wide lode 30” wide lode from N. end of drive 18° below surface 37’ below surface 40’ below surface Composition (partial) : % % % SiOz an ead Fs vA 30-3 34°83 46-0 ESS th Cees wha wh Mi 15-7 15-2 13-0 TiO: wide eee me ii 23-1 16-0 16-0 U.0.* ca = Pht fe. ete 0-25 0-10 0-25 Heavy concentrate obtainable: Percentage of lode material 30 24 16 U:Os content of concentrate 1-13 0-70 1-10 * The U,O, was estimated electroscopically by comparing the rate of discharge with a sample of Radium Hill ore of known uranium content. The partial analysis of ore samples was done by W. 8. Chapman’s Department at the School of Mines; the heavy concentrate determinations were made in our University Geological Department. 341, The Main Sliaft—This is located on the main lode, 228 feet north of the South Shaft. At the time of inspection it had bottomed at about 127 feet (vertical depth) below the ground surface; throughout this depth it is well defined but changes in character towards the bottom, At depths of 40 feet and 85 feet, drives extend both to the north and to the south of this shaft. In this shaft, at 7 feet below the surface, the width of the lode is 6 feet and most of the ilmenitic mineral is on the hanging wall side concentrated in a width of 2 feet. The remainder of the lode is principally quartz and mica. -Ata depth of 18 feet the lode is 5 feet 6 inches wide and the bulk of the ilmenite is concentrated in the centre region. Below the main Jevel a large horse of mullock is enclosed in the lode dividing the ore body in that vicinity into an east and a west limb. At the contact between the lode matter and the wall rock, and between the lode filling and the horse there is developed a selvage of finer grain than the lode matter and usually 3 inches in thickness, principally composed of an unusually black variety of mica, This is in contrast with the more characteristic mica of the ore body, which is in very coarse flakes and has a distinct bronzy appearance. In this part of the lode where the ilmenitic iron minerals are deficient in the ore, there is usually developed a coarse- grained, quartz-mica rock in which much of the nica is located in distinct patches or pockets. The lode. with good values of the ilmenitic content, continues down to about the 68-fect level as exposed in the shaft; beyond this point there is a falling off in the obvious ilmenitic element. At the 95-fect level the lode is notably siliceous and the colour of the ilmenitic constituent is of a somewhat reddish-brown, due to high titania content, existing partly as free rutile, Carnotite, which decreases in abund- ance with increasing depth from the surface, is found in vestiges only in the 95-feet level. Beyond this point the ore body becomes more micaceous, until at the bottom of the shaft it is constituted very largely of coarse bronzy mica with a limited amount of a grey-black variety of the ilmenitic mineral occurring as nodules wp to an inch in diameter (average size, Z inch). This latter is richer than usual in uranium and vanadium. The Windlass Shaft—This is an underlay shaft sunk on the main lode 91 feet north of the Main Shaft. On the south side, just below the plat at 39 feet below the surface, a fault face is revealed which dips steeply to the north at an angie of about 30° and reaches the surface about 45 feet north of the collar of the shait. Below this fault the shaft continues down at a flatter angle to a total depth of 50 feet vertically below the surface. The lower portion of the shaft is not in true lode matter but follows a micaceous apophysis of the lode which is very irregular in width and bifurcates near the limit of the workings. The filling of these apophyses is principally in the nature of coarse black mica and quartz in the marginal zone, and in the central belt it is almost exclusively coarse black mica; there is a very stall quantity, barely 1%, of radio-active iulmenitic mineral. A partial analysis of an average sample taken where the apophysis was observed to be almost entirely composed of mica gave SiO, = 40°3%, Fe = 14:8%. TiO, = 3-9%, uranic oxide only a trace. Drives AND Stopes or THE Marn Suart AND WINDLASS SHAFT SYSTEM The 40-feet Level—A drive at this level links both shafts and extends well on towards the South Shaft. Throughout this length the lode continues as a well- defined body with distinct walls, and the class of lode matter traversed is of the same general character, except that at the south end it grades towards that met with in the South Shaft. Though the class of ore in this block remains sensibly similar in character, there were observed considerable variations in the proportion of the iron ore constituent, the rich ore occurring in chutes. Over the main area, 342 the width ranges from 3 feet to 6 feet, and even wider where a horse of mullock divides the ore body, Towards the south it dwindles somewhat in conformity with the narrower section in the South Shait workings. Average cross-sections of the ore body on this level gave the following values: 1 2 3 + 5 6 7 8 9 ( mutposition (partial): SiOz 43-0 63:9 5657 366) 585) 6358 57-8 5663) 45-7 Te 13°5 6°7 5-8 14-1 7°3 4-8 8-0 10-4 10-8 TiO. 2465 9.2 9-8 24-7 9-0 7-2 95 1552 18-8 U:08 0-3 0-2 0-1 O-4 0-05 0-05 Q+1 0-2 0-45 ileavy concentrate obtainable: Percentage of lode material she 4U 8 a) 32 7 0 ll 25 20 U;:08 content of concentrate .... 1-00 1-20 0:96 1:15 0:60 0-70 0-98 1-10 4-78 Floor of level at 25 ft. south of Windlass Shaft. Width, 5 ft. 5 in. Floor of level at 50 ft. south of Windlass Shaft. Width, 4 ft. 10 in. Floor of level at 75 ft. south of Windlass Shaft. Width, 7 ft. Floor of level at 15 ft. south of Main Shaft. Width, 3 ft 3 in, Floor of level at 49 ft. south of Main Shaft. Width, 4 ft. 6 in. End of the level at 83 ft. south of Main Shaft. Width, 4 ft, Roof of stope 21 ft. south of Main Shaft. Width, 3 ft. 9 in, Roof of stope 50 ft. south of Main Shaft. Here the width of stopa was 7 ft., but sample taken only on the best 2 ft. 7 in. Roof of stope 72 ft. south of Main Shaft. Width, 4 ft. 6 in., with iron ore values only on foot wall side. The Lower Drive (85 feet vertically below the surface) extends along the lode both to the north and to the south from the Main Shaft: on the north side, at 65 feet, the lode is cut off by a fault face dipping to the S.S.E. a continuation of that met in the Windlass Shaft. The drive’ continues on in a siliceous gneiss for a short distance beyond the fault. Southward of the Main Shaft the drive con- tinues all the way in ore to a total length of 84 feet. The average width of lode may be taken as about 4 feet, but at this level it carries a distinctly lower propor- tion of the titaniferous iron ore mineral than in the upper workings. The tenor of the lode material as exposed in the Main Shaft at this level is given in the table on page 343. Beyond the 85-feet level the Main Shaft continues on the underlay to a total vertical depth from the surface of about 125 feet. At the bottom the ore passes into a mica rock similar to that in the apophyses below the Windless Shaft, though here there are in it definite black ilmenitic nodules. This change may be due to the further extension of the fault met with higher up in the Windlass Shaft. An analysis of an average sample taken over a 2-feet face of the more mineralised section of the micaceous vein filling occupying the bottom of the shaft is stated in the table on page 343. Toe Wie Suarr This is located approximately 810 feet to the north-east from the Windlass Shaft. It is in the neighbourhood of 50 yards to the east of the main lode line as defined by the trend indicated by the excavations already detailed. It can be traced to extend for some distance on either side of the shaft and ranges from 1 foot to 2 feet 6 inches in width. The dip fron: the vertical is 45° in the upper section of the workings, and deeper down it flattens to 30°. The total vertical depth below the surface at the time of inspection was 58 feet, Though the lode filling in this case is of the same general type as that of the main workings, the lode channel is distinctly different, being along a fracture plane lying at a considerable angle to the planes of foliation of the gneissic band- ing of the country rocks. The jointing in the siliceous gneisses, which constitute the wall rock, strikes in a similar direction to that in the neighbourhood of the Main Shaft, namely, OME Ub ete vos 343 about north-east, and the dip is steep to the east; that is about the same direction and dip as the lode at the Main Shaft. See sketch, fig. 4. The hanging wall side of the lode is very clearly defined and exhibits a stepped outline which appears to be a counterpart of a roughly stepped arrangement appearing in the footwall. The steps in the roof are smooth and much rounded. More frequently than not the steps in the footwall side are occupied by cracked or shattered rock, partly altered by the introduction of mica and titaniferous iron ore, This metasomatic introduction of mica and ilmenitic minerals extends down in many places along the joint plane on the floor of the lode. Thus is deposited titaniferous iron ore surrounded by black mica in scattered and isolated centres in the gneiss. The latter is in some places notably contorted. A Ay By 5 ale ‘ xanthias, semicinctus, (2), 309 Eremaula minor, (1), 8; ptilopleura, (1), 9 364 Erenmsuophanes apicinota, (1), 12 teressa strepsimeris, xanthostacta, stenothyris, megalospila, (1), 5 Estea, (2), 286, 287; approxima, (2), 287; bicolor, columnaria, frenchiensis, incidata, | evaut, (2), 288; iravadoides, janjucensis, | I | | | } Hf pracda, pulvilla, wablyeoryinba, (2), 2895. tumida, frauenfetdi, (2), 290; puer, pertu- kershawi, labrotoma, (2), 291; olivacea, tasmanica, tiara, relata, perpolita, mida, rubicunda, microcosta, obeliscus, (2), 292 lesthlodera acosmopa, (1), 17 leublemma fhupalochroaa, (1), 10 Euprora Hehenophora, (1), 8: tl}, 10 tiuseHa, (2), 286, 306; buliminoides, columnaria, maccovi, brevis, (2), 307 Eustrongylides gadopsis, (1), 60, 64 Fustrotia macrosema, cyclospila, tropha, (1). 10 cevpsichiora, ere Vinlaysen, MH. H., A further Account of the An Finlayson, (2), 210 va diplosticha, (1). 3 cuma, (2), 234 vrocuma, (2), 234, 247: 248: pala, (2), 250 eptd, (2), 234, 208; (23, 2733 tiaequitlts, yw, (2), 280 Sus carduyts, (1), 07, 75 from Australian Soils; A Speetro- repanda, (2) 24, 2705 ores: bakert, ( (2), al Examination of some [ronstone, AL C.. and Prescott. J. A. (2). truniherana parana, (1). 100 we nePhobola, (1), 5 kia, (2), 286, 293; strangei, supra- aa, (2), 293; prefundior, nevarensis, femessa, Hedialacsis, liddelliana. desere- (2), 294 a perichares, (1). 5 Henuchoea longtpes, (1). 28 Hemihoplopus yaschenkot, (1). 19 fete s gallinac, (1), 60, 61 Heterecuma, (2), 254 Heteropoada pessieri, regina. (1). 44 {ick dition, 1939: Scientific Reports, Bieloey—Scorpions and Spiders, lale. H. M., Australian Cumacea, The Pamily Bodotriidae, (2), 225 Tybaticus yibbosus, (1), 140 Ivdrusa nesothetis, (1), 4 No. 1, (1), 18 No. &. Ivpenodes costistrigalis, porphyritica, mr- cropa, demonias, asthenopa, (1), 15; (1), 16 LOCUS, eonsobrina, (2), 306; rid, Pseudomys (Gyomys) apodemoides | yn, V. V., Phe Simpson Desert [expe- | inframaculatus, | ischnophara non. for Stenophara, (1), 3 Isopeda pessleri, horni, (1), 18, 44 Iphinoe pellucida, (2), 231: crassipes, 233 Ixettticus sentfis, CL), (2), 18, 24 Johnston, T. H., and Simpson, E. R., Life History of the Trematode Echinochasmus pelicant, mesp., (1), 1E3 Jehnsten, T. Ef, and Mawson, P. M., Re- marks on some Parasitic Trematodes from Australia and New Zealand, (1), 60 Johnston, T. Hl, and Simpson, E, R., Larval Trematodes from Australian Fresh- water Mofluses, pt. ix, (1), 125 Kleeman, A. W., On the Analysis of Beryl from Boolcoomatta, South Australia, (1), 122 Latrodectus hasseltit, (1), 18, 40 Leptocuma, (2), 234, 251; pulleini, (2), 253; stearia, (2), 255: obstipa, (2), 258; serrifera, (2), 261: sheardi, (2), 263; tnfermedia, (2), 265 Lepidoptera: Studies in Australian, Turner, Jo A. (1), 3 Leucania melanepasta, (1), 6 Leeuwenhoekia — australiensts, (1), 104: adelaidav, (1), 105: hirsti, (1). 107; southcott,, (1), 109: nova-qiinea, (1), 110 Leenwenhockiiuiw, (1), 102 Leeuwenhoektinae (Acarina) of Australia and New Guinea; Notes on and Additions to the Trombiculinae and, Womersley, H., (1), $2 Linemera, (2), 286, 301; suprasculpta, filo- cineta, verconiana, sculpttlis, occidia, (2), 362: thouinensis, (2), 303 Juirenoba, (2), 280, 295; frevcineti, archensis. (2), 295: agnewi, australis, wilsonensis, sidcata, (2), 206: muitilirata, lockyeri favardi, unilirata, praectornatilis, imbrex, schoutaniea, (2), 207 floscelis, tanvphylla, (1), 8 Lvcosa arenosa, arevaris, (1). 18: abmingont, (1), 18. 28: boerti, (1), 18, 28, 29; flaket, (1). wyoxdert, 28, 34: (1), IS. 28, 33; Aales, 18, madigant, (1), 18, 28, 36 (1), 2 Macracoia, nen. for Tenaga, (1). 3 Macroprora chienobola, oostigma, symprepes, (1), 8 Mawson, D.. and Dallwitz, W. B., Palaeozoic leneous Rocks of Lower South-eastern Sonth Australia, (2), 101 Mawson, P. M., and Johnston, T. H., Re- marks on some Parasitic Nematodes from Australia and New Zealand, (1), 60 Mawson, P. M., Some Species of the Chaeto- enath Genus Spadella from New South Wales, (2), 327 18. 28, 31: flefeheri, (1), 18, 28, 32; 365 Mawson, D., The Nature and Occurrence of Unaniferous Mineral Deposits in South Australia, (2), 334 Meliana scotti, lewinii, similis, xylogramma, (1). 6 Merelina, (2), 286, 299; cheilostoma, (2), 299; gracilis, australiae, hulliana, cyrta, (2), 300; eucraspeda, (2), 231, 301 Microcotyle gerres, (1), 67; sillaginae, para- siMaginac, (1), 68; pentapodi, (1), 67, 69; citrematis, temnodontis, australiensis, sebastis, elegans, victoriae, hiatulae, (1), 71: scorpis, (1), 67, 71; seriolae, reticu- lata, (1), 72; helotes, (1), 67, 78, acam- thogobii, (1), 74 Microcotylidae of Western Australia, A Con- tribution te the Knowledge of _ the, Sanders, D. F., (1), 67 Micropatetis glycychroa, (1), 10 Miturga lineata, (1), 18, 46 Murray Pine (Calutris, spp.), Notes on the Regeneration of, Zimmer, W. J., (2) 183 Nanorchestes arboriger, collinus, (1). 143 Nanorchestidae, (1), 141 Namangana eugraphica, (1), albirena, (1), 10 Narangodes glycychroa, (1), 10 Neocleta empyra, (1), 11 Nematodes, Remarks on some Parasitic, from Australia and New Zealand, Johnston, T. H.. and Mawson, P. M., (1), 60 NeoschOngastia mecullochi, (1), 100 Neosparassus inframaculatus, (1), 44 Nephila imperatrix, (1), 18, 40 Notoserobs, (2), 287, 311; triangulus, (2), 311 Notesctia, (2), 286, 303; simillima, (2), 303: | nitens, procincta, wnirafensis, pellucida, , purpurcostoma, atropurpurea, (2) 304 horologa, 7: Ocrisiona sp. (1), 18, 47 Odo australiensis, (1), 18. 40 Oertel, A. C., and Prescott, J. A.; A Spectro~ chemical Examination of some Ironstone Gravels from Australian Soils, (2), 173 Oeglassa prionosticha, (1), 14 Olies inframaculatus, (1), 18, 44 Orthosia horologa, (1), 7 Oxyopes elegans, (1), 18, 38 Palaeozaic Teneous Rocks of Lower South- eastern South Australia, Mawson, D., and Dallwitz, W. B., (2), 191 Paralyeus, C1), 135 Pardosa evrei, (1), 18, 24; pera, (1), 18, 2h Pediana horni, regina, (1). 18, 44 Phacotypa n.n. for Lophozancla, (1), Philenora nialthauca, (1), 6 Phlegetonia bathroleuca, (1), 11 Phobelica n.n. ior Idiozancla, (1), 3 Phrataria replicataria, transcissata, bijugata, L’-album, C1), 4 Q a Pomacuma, (2), 234, 241; cognata, (2), 242; australiae, (2), 244 Prescott, J. A. and Oertel, A. C.; A Spectro- chemical Examination of some Ironstone Gravels from Australian Soils, (2), 173 Procamallanus murrayensis, (1), 60, 64 Prometopus horologa, (1), 7 Pseudomys (Gyomys) apodemoides Finlay- son; A further Account of the Murid, Finlayson, H. H., (2), 210 Rhapsa occidentalis, (1), 14 Rissoidac (Mollusca); Recent Australian Species of the Family, Cotton, B. C., (2) 286 Saitis lacustris, (1), 18, 46 Sandars, D. F., A Contribution to the Know- ledge of the Mierocotylidae of Western Australia, (1), 67 Sands, Simpson Desert, (1), 49 Schéngastia pusilla, (1), 96; blestowei, (1), 97; salmi, (1), 98 Scorpions of the Simpson Desert, (1), 18 Scrobs, (2), 287, 309; scrobiculator, (2), 309; pyramidata, petterdi, pellyae, jacksoni, (2), 310; luteofuscus, capricorneus, costatus, (2), 311 Seuratia marina, (1), 60, 62 Simpson, I. R., and Johnston, T. H., Larval Trematodes from Australian Freshwater Molluscs, pt. ix, (1), 125 Simpson, E. R., and Johnston, T. H., Life History of the Trematede Echinochasmus pelecani, n.sp. (1), 113 Simpson Desert Expedition, The, 1939, Scien- tific Reports, No. 2, Geology—Desert Sands, Carroll, D., (1), 49 Simpson Desert Expedition, 1939, The, Scientific Reports, No. 1, Biology— Scorpions and Spiders, Hickman, V. V., (1), 18 Soil and Vegetation Relationships in the Lower South-east of South Australia, A Study in Ecology, Crocker, R. L., (1), 144 Spadella from New South Wales; Some Species of the Chaetognath Genus, Maw- son, P. M., (2), 327 Spadelia schizoptera, (2), 327; sheardt, (2), 330; johustont, (2), 331 Spiders of the Simpson Desert, (1), 18 Spironeura stpsent, nn. for hylae, (1), 60, 64 Stach, L. W.. Ecology of the Sand Flats at Moreton Bay, Reevesby Island, South Australia, (2), 177 Stenoprora triplax, (1), 13 Stephanomma. (2), 225 Storena gracffei, (1), 18; todd7, (1), 18, 38 Subestia, (2), 286, 292: salebrosa, semino- dosa, flindersi, (2), 292 Subonoba, (2), 286, 299; mercurialis, 299 (2), 366 Sympodomma, (2), 234, 284; africana, (2),! Uraniferous Mineral Deposits in South Aus- 284 Syntomis aperta, melitospila, (1), 4 Taxcotis homoeopa, (1), 3 Thalamarchella, nn. for Thalamarchis, (1), 3 Tharpyna simpsont, (1), 18, 45 Thoracolopha, (1), 9 Thynnascaris legendrei, (1), 61 Tipasa demonias, asthenopa, (1), 15 Trematodes from Australian Freshwater Moiluses, pt. ix, Larval, Johnston, T. H. and Simpson, If. R., (1), 125 Trematode, Echinochasmus pclecani, Life History of the, Johnston, T. Simpson, E. R., (1), 113 Trombicula translucens, (1), 83: scincoides, 1 Sp. H., and (1), 84; obscura, (1), 86; kohlsi, (1), 87; wa'chi, fletcheri, (1), 89; dehensis, 90; miner (1), 92; wichmanni, (1), 93; sarcina, (1), 95 Trombiculinac and Lecuwenhoekiinae (Aca- rina) of Australia and New Guinea: Notes on and Additions to the, Womersley, H., (1), 82 Turner, J. A. Studies in Australian Lepi- doptera, (1), 3 QQ), hatori, XNanthoptera macrosema, (1). tralia; The Nature and Occurrence of, Mawson, D., (2), 334 Urodacus yaschenkoi, (1), 18, 19 Vaunthompsenia, (2), 234, 2060; nana, (2), 206 Vaunthompsoniinac, (2), 233 Walchia disparunguis, (1), (1), 102 Womersley, H., Australian Acarina, Families Alycidae and Nanorchestidae, (1), 133 Womersley, H., Notes and Additions to the Trombiculinae and Leeuwenhoekiinae (Acarina) of Australia and New Cuiines, (1}, 82 101; glabrum. 10 Zcnocuma, (2), 234, 237: rugosa, (2), 237. 238 Zethes hemicyclophera, (1), 15 Zimmer, W. J., Notes on the Regeneration of Murray Pine (Callitris) spp.), (2), 183 Zygosiphon, (2), 225 Wholly set up and printed in Australia by Gillingham & Co. Jimtted, 106 Currie Street, Adelaide CONTENTS PART I Turner, A. J.: Studies in Australian Lepidoptera Hickman, V. V.: The Simpson Desert Expedition, 1939, Scientific Reports. No. 1, Biology—Scorpions and Spiders ae ne ae = ey, aS ‘ Carrott, D.: The Simpson Desert eu, 1939, Scientific Reports. No. 2, tute Desert Sands De Ae Sie : oe = is Jounston, T. H., and Mawson, P. M.: Remarks on some Parasitic Nematodes from Australia ap New Zealand Sanpars, D. F.: A Contribution to the Knowledge of the Microcotylidae of Western Australia i et = Ke Womerstey, H.: Notes on and Additions to the Trombiculinae and Leeuwenhoekiinae (Acarina) of Australia and New Guinea Jounston, T. H., and Srmpson, E. R.: Life History of the Trematode—Echinochasmus pelecam n. sp. Crespin, I.: The Occurrence of Cycloclypeus in the Tertiary Deposits of South Australia Kireman, A. W.: On the Analysis of Beryl from Boolcoomatta, South Australia Jonnston, T. H., and Srmpson, E. R.: Larval Trematodes from Australian Fresh- water Molluscs, Pt. IX... Womerstey, H.: Australian Acarina, Families Alycidae and Nanorchestidae Crocker, R. L.: Soil and Vegetation Pee in the Lewer South-East of South Australia — A Study in Ecology F = a ye ; PART II Orrtet, A. C., and Prescorr, J. A.: A Spectrochemical Examination of some Ironstone Gravels from Australian Soils Sraco, L, W.: ae of the Sand Flats at Moreton ws oe Island, South Australia 5 me ac ay Y os , 5 a a we Zimmer, W. J.: Notes on the Regeneration of Murray Pine (Callitris spp.) Mawson, D., and Dattwitz, W. B.: Palaeozoic Igneous Rocks of Lower South-eastern South Australia Fintayson, H. H.: A Further Account of the Murid,. Pseudomys (Gyomys) apodemoides Finlayson i re Sy ree a Ss Be a8 fe Hate, H: M.: Australian Cumacea, No. 8, The Family Bodotriidae Corron, B. C.: Recent Australian Species of the Family Rissoidae (Mollusca) . Anprewartua, H. G.:- The Distribution of Plagues of Austroicetes cruciata Sauss. (Acrididae) in Australia in Relation to Climate, Vegetation and Soil Mawson, P. ‘M.: Some Species of the Chasiogharh Genus Spada from New South Wales Mawson, D.: The Nature and Occurrence of Uraniferous ‘Mineral Deposits in South Australia... ra re a5 ~ Osituaries: Mr. Feed. Chapeen and Rey. N. H. Louwyck .. Verco MEDAL BALANCE-SHEET | List or FELuows ay epee es INDEX Page 113 120 122 125 133 144 173 177 183 191 210 225 315